REPUBLIC OF KENYA MINISTRY OF HEALTH (NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORY SERVICES)

Transcription

1 REPUBLIC OF KENYA MINISTRY OF HEALTH (NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORY SERVICES) TENDER DOCUMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF BIOSAFETY LEVEL II LABORATORY (BSL II) (PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORY) AT MOI TEACHING REFERRAL HOSPITAL (MTRH) ELDORET REF: MOH/RFP/WB/EAPHLNP/002/01/ ARCHITECT: SK ARCHPLANS LTD P.O. Box: Nairobi. STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: ARMITECH CONSULTANTS P.O Box Nairobi PROJECT MANAGER AND QUANTITY SURVEYOR AEGIS DEVELOPMENT SOLUTIONS LIMITED Blue Violet Plaza, Suite 603 P.O. Box Nairobi ELECTRICAL/ MECHANICAL ENGINEER FERADON ASSOCIATES P.O.BOX Nairobi.

2 MINISTRY OF HEALTH PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF BIOSAFETY LEVEL II LABORATORY (BSL II) (PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORY) AT MOI TEACHING REFERRAL HOSPITAL (MTRH) ELDORET Supplied as part of the Contract No MOH/RFP/WB/EAPHLNP/002/01/ Issued by: - PRINCIPAL SECRETARY MINISTRY OF HEALTH P. O. Box NAIROBI The contract for the above mentioned works entered into this.. day of by the undersigned refers to these Tender Documents and the Ministry of Roads, Public Works and Housing General Specification dated March, 1976 (together with any amendments issued thereto) shall be read and construed as part of the said contract. THE CONTRACTOR Date: PRINCIPAL SECRETARY, MINISTRY OF HEALTH Date: SPECIAL NOTES The Contractor is required to check the numbers of the pages of these Tender Documents and should he find any missing or in duplicate or figures indistinct he must inform the PROJECT MANAGER/AEGIS DEVELOPMENT SOLUTIONS LTD, NAIROBI at once and have the same rectified. Should the Contractor be in doubt about the precise meaning of any item or figure for any reason whatsoever, he must inform the PROJECT MANAGER/AEGIS DEVELOPMENT SOLUTIONS LTD, NAIROBI in order that the correct meaning may be decided before the date for submission of tenders. No liability will be admitted nor claim allowed in respect of errors in the Contractor s Tender due to mistakes in the Specification, which should have been

3 rectified in the manner, described above. SIGNATURE PAGE AND NOTES

4 MINISTRY OF HEALTH (National Public Health Laboratory Services) STANDARD TENDER DOCUMENT FOR PROCUREMENT OF WORKS (BUILDING AND ASSOCIATED CIVIL ENGINEERINGWORKS) FOR PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF BIOSAFETY LEVEL II LABORATORY (BSL II) (PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORY) AT MOI TEACHING REFERRAL HOSPITAL (MTRH) ELDORET

5 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE INTRODUCTION... 1 SECTION I: INVITATION TO TENDER... 2 SECTION II: INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS SECTION III: CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT SECTION IV: APPENDIX TO CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT SECTION V: SPECIFICATIONS SECTION VI: DRAWINGS SECTION VII: BILLS OF QUANTITIES SECTION VIII: STANDARD FORMS

6 INTRODUCTION This standard tender document for procurement of works has been prepared for use by procuring entities in Kenya in the procurement of works (i.e. Buildings and associated Civil Engineering Works). The following guidelines should be observed when using the document:- (a) Specific details should be furnished in the Invitation to tender and in the special conditions of contract (where applicable). The tender document issued to tenderers should not have blank spaces or options. (b) The instructions to tenderers and the General Conditions of Contract should remain unchanged. Any necessary amendments to these parts should be made through Appendix to instructions to tenderers and special conditions of contract respectively. (b) Information contained in the invitation to tender shall conform to the data and information in the tender documents to enable prospective tenderers to decide whether or not to participate in the tender and shall indicate any important tender requirements (c) The invitation to tender shall be as an advertisement in accordance with the regulations or a letter of invitation addressed to tenderers who have been prequalified following a request for prequalification. The cover of the document shall be modified to include:- I. Tender number. II. Tender name. III. Name of procuring entity. IV. Delete name and address of PPOA. 3

7 SECTION I INVITATION FOR TENDERS Tender reference No: REF: MOH/RFP/WB/EAPHLNP/002/01/ Tender Name: PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF BIOSAFETY LEVEL II LABORATORY (BSL II) (PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORY) AT MOI TEACHING REFERRAL HOSPITAL (MTRH) ELDORET 1.2 The Principal Secretary, Ministry Of Health invites sealed tenders for the construction of Proposed Construction of Biosafety Level II Laboratory (BSL II) (Public Health Laboratory) At Moi Teaching Referral Hospital (MTRH) ELDORET Interested eligible candidates may obtain further information and inspect tender documents at National Public Health Laboratories, Kenyatta National Hospital Grounds during normal working hours. A complete set of tender documents may be downloaded by interested candidates for free from the Ministry of Health website: or Prices quoted should be net inclusive of all taxes, must be in Kenya shillings and shall remain valid for (150) days from the closing date of tender. Completed tender documents are to be enclosed in plain sealed envelopes marked with Tender name and reference number and deposited in the Tender Box at National Public Health Laboratories, Kenyatta National Hospital Grounds. so as to be received on or before (8 TH NOVEMBER, 2017 AT 10:00 A.M. EAST AFRICAN TIME). Tenders will be opened immediately thereafter in the presence of the candidates or their representatives who choose to attend at(nphls CONFERENCE ROOM 1 ST FLOOR, NPHLS BUILDING HOSPITAL ROAD KENYATTA). For (Accounting Officer/Procuring Entity 4

8 SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE CLAUSE PAGE 1. General Tender Documents Preparation of Tenders Submission of Tenders Tender Opening and Evaluation Award of Contract

9 INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS. 1. General/Eligibility/Qualifications/Joint venture/cost of tendering The Employer as defined in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract invites tenders for Works Contract as described in the tender documents. The successful tenderer will be expected to complete the Works by the Intended Completion Date specified in the tender documents. All tenderers shall provide the Qualification Information, a statement that the tenderer (including all members of a joint venture and subcontractors) is not associated, or has not been associated in the past, directly or indirectly, with the Consultant or any other entity that has prepared the design, specifications, and other documents for the project or being proposed as Project Manager for the Contract. A firm that has been engaged by the Employer to provide consulting services for the preparation or supervision of the Works, and any of its affiliates, shall not be eligible to tender. All tenderers shall provide in the Form of Tender and Qualification Information, a preliminary description of the proposed work method and schedule, including drawings and charts, as necessary. In the event that pre-qualification of potential tenderers has been undertaken, only tenders from pre-qualified tenderers will be considered for award of Contract. These qualified tenderers should submit with their tenders any information updating their original prequalification applications or, alternatively, confirm in their tenders that the originally submitted pre-qualification information remains essentially correct as of the date of tender submission. Where no pre-qualification of potential tenderers has been done, all tenderers shall include the following information and documents with their tenders, unless otherwise stated: (a) (b) (c) copies of original documents defining the constitution or legal status, place of registration, and principal place of business; written power of attorney of the signatory of the tender to commit the tenderer: total monetary value of construction work performed for each of the last five years: experience in works of a similar nature and size for each of the last five years, and details of work under way or contractually committed; and names and addresses of clients who may be contacted for further information on these contracts; 6

10 (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) major items of construction equipment proposed to carry out the Contract and an undertaking that they will be available for the Contract. qualifications and experience of key site management and technical personnel proposed for the Contract and an undertaking that they shall be available for the Contract. reports on the financial standing of the tenderer, such as profit and loss statements and auditor s reports for the past five years; evidence of adequacy of working capital for this Contract (access to line(s) of credit and availability of other financial resources); authority to seek references from the tenderer s bankers; information regarding any litigation, current or during the last five years, in which the tenderer is involved, the parties concerned and disputed amount; and (j) proposals for subcontracting components of the Works amounting to more than 10 percent of the Contract Price. Tenders submitted by a joint venture of two or more firms as partners shall comply with the following requirements, unless otherwise stated: (a) the tender shall include all the information listed in clause 1.5 above for each joint venture partner; (b) (c) (d) (e) the tender shall be signed so as to be legally binding on all partners; all partners shall be jointly and severally liable for the execution of the Contract in accordance with the Contract terms; one of the partners will be nominated as being in charge, authorised to incur liabilities, and receive instructions for and on behalf of all partners of the joint venture; and the execution of the entire Contract, including payment, shall be done exclusively with the partner in charge. To qualify for award of the Contract, tenderers shall meet the following minimum qualifying criteria; 7

11 (a) annual volume of construction work of at least 2.5 times the estimated annual cashflow for the Contract; (b) experience as main contractor in the construction of at least (c) two works of a nature and complexity equivalent to the Works over the last 10 years (to comply with this requirement, works cited should be at least 70 percent complete); (d) proposals for the timely acquisition (own, lease, hire, etc.) of the essential equipment listed as required for the Works; (e) a Contract manager with at least five years experience in works of an equivalent nature and volume, including no less than three years as Manager; and (f) liquid assets and/or credit facilities, net of other contractual commitments and exclusive of any advance payments which may be made under the Contract, of no less than 4 months of the estimated payment flow under this Contract. The figures for each of the partners of a joint venture shall be added together to determine the tenderer s compliance with the minimum qualifying criteria of clause 1.7 (a) and (e); however, for a joint venture to qualify, each of its partners must meet at least 25 percent of minimum criteria 1.7 (a), (b) and (e) for an individual tenderer, and the partner in charge at least 40 percent of those minimum criteria. Failure to comply with this requirement will result in rejection of the joint venture s tender. Subcontractors experience and resources will not be taken into account in determining the tenderer s compliance with the qualifying criteria, unless otherwise stated. Each tenderer shall submit only one tender, either individually or as a partner in a joint venture. A tenderer who submits or participates in more than one tender (other than as a subcontractor or in cases of alternatives that have been permitted or requested) will cause all the proposals with the tenderer s participation to be disqualified. The tenderer shall bear all costs associated with the preparation and submission of his tender, and the Employer will in no case be responsible or liable for those costs. The tenderer, at the tenderer s own responsibility and risk, is encouraged to visit and examine the Site of the Works and its surroundings, and obtain all information that may be necessary for preparing the tender and entering into a contract for construction of the Works. The costs of visiting the Site shall be at the tenderer s own expense. 8

12 The procuring entity s employees, committee members, board members and their relative (spouse and children) are not eligible to participate in the tender. The price to be changed for the tender document shall be FREE. The procuring entity shall allow the tenderer to review the tender document free of charge before purchase. 2. Tender Documents The complete set of tender documents comprises the documents listed below and any addenda issued in accordance with Clause 2.4. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) These Instructions to Tenderers Form of Tender and Qualification Information Conditions of Contract Appendix to Conditions of Contract Specifications Drawings Bills of Quantities Forms of Securities The tenderer shall examine all Instructions, Forms to be filled and Specifications in the tender documents. Failure to furnish all information required by the tender documents, or submission of a tender not substantially responsive to the tendering documents in every respect will be at the tenderer s risk and may result in rejection of his tender. A prospective tenderer making an inquiry relating to the tender documents may notify the Employer in writing or by cable, telex or facsimile at the address indicated in the letter of invitation to tender. The Employer will only respond to requests for clarification received earlier than seven days prior to the deadline for submission of tenders. Copies of the Employer s response will be forwarded to all persons issued with tendering documents, including a description of the inquiry, but without identifying its source. Before the deadline for submission of tenders, the Employer may modify the tendering documents by issuing addenda. Any addendum thus issued shall be part of the tendering documents and shall be communicated in writing or by cable, telex or facsimile to all tenderers. Prospective tenderers shall acknowledge receipt of each addendum in writing to the Employer. 7 9

13 To give prospective tenderers reasonable time in which to take an addendum into account in preparing their tenders, the Employer shall extend, as necessary, the deadline for submission of tenders, in accordance with Clause 4.2 here below. 3. Preparation of Tenders All documents relating to the tender and any correspondence shall be in English language. The tender submitted by the tenderer shall comprise the following: (a) (b) These Instructions to Tenderers, Form of Tender, Conditions of Contract, Appendix to Conditions of Contract and Specifications; Tender Security; (c) Priced Bill of Quantities ; (d) (e) (f) Qualification Information Form and Documents; Alternative offers where invited; and Any other materials required to be completed and submitted by the tenderers. The tenderer shall fill in rates and prices for all items of the Works described in the Bill of Quantities. Items for which no rate or price is entered by the tenderer will not be paid for when executed and shall be deemed covered by the other rates and prices in the Bill of Quantities. All duties, taxes, and other levies payable by the Contractor under the Contract, or for any other cause relevant to the Contract, as of 30 days prior to the deadline for submission of tenders, shall be included in the tender price submitted by the tenderer. The rates and prices quoted by the tenderer shall only be subject to adjustment during the performance of the Contract if provided for in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract and provisions made in the Conditions of Contract. The unit rates and prices shall be in Kenya Shillings. Tenders shall remain valid for a period of sixty (60) days from the date of submission. However in exceptional circumstances, the Employer may request that the tenderers extend the period of validity for a 10

14 specified additional period. The request and the tenderers responses shall be made in writing. A tenderer may refuse the request without forfeiting the Tender Security. A tenderer agreeing to the request will not be required or permitted to otherwise modify the tender, but will be required to extend the validity of Tender Security for the period of the extension, and in compliance with Clause in all respects. The tenderer shall furnish, as part of the tender, a Tender Security in the amount and form specified in the appendix to invitation to tenderers. This shall be in the amount not exceeding 2 percent of the tender price The format of the Tender Security should be in accordance with the form of Tender Security included in Section G - Standard forms or any other form acceptable to the Employer. Tender Security shall be valid for 30 days beyond the validity of the tender. Any tender not accompanied by an acceptable Tender Security shall be rejected. The Tender Security of a joint venture must define as Tenderer all joint venture partners and list them in the following manner: a joint venture consisting of,,and. The Tender Securities of unsuccessful tenderers will be returned within 28 days of the end of the tender validity period specified in Clause 3.6. The Tender Security of the successful tenderer will be discharged when the tenderer has signed the Contract Agreement and furnished the required Performance Security. The Tender Security may be forfeited (a) (b) (c) if the tenderer withdraws the tender after tender opening during the period of tender validity; if the tenderer does not accept the correction of the tender price, pursuant to Clause 5.7; in the case of a successful tenderer, if the tenderer fails within the specified time limit to (i) (ii) sign the Agreement, or furnish the required Performance Security. Tenderers shall submit offers that comply with the requirements of the tendering documents, including the basic technical design as 11

15 indicated in the Drawings and Specifications. Alternatives will not be considered, unless specifically allowed in the invitation to tender. If so allowed, tenderers wishing to offer technical alternatives to the requirements of the tendering documents must also submit a tender that complies with the requirements of the tendering documents, including the basic technical design as indicated in the Drawings and Specifications. In addition to submitting the basic tender, the tenderer shall provide all information necessary for a complete evaluation of the alternative, including design calculations, technical specifications, breakdown of prices, proposed construction methods and other relevant details. Only the technical alternatives, if any, of the lowest evaluated tender conforming to the basic technical requirements shall be considered. The tenderer shall prepare one original of the documents comprising the tender documents as described in Clause 3.2 of these Instructions to Tenderers, bound with the volume containing the Form of Tender, and clearly marked ORIGINAL. In addition, the tenderer shall submit copies of the tender, in the number specified in the invitation to tender, and clearly marked as COPIES. In the event of discrepancy between them, the original shall prevail. The original and all copies of the tender shall be typed or written in indelible ink and shall be signed by a person or persons duly authorised to sign on behalf of the tenderer, pursuant to Clause 1.5 (a) or 1.6 (b), as the case may be. All pages of the tender where alterations or additions have been made shall be initialled by the person or persons signing the tender. Clarification of tenders shall be requested by the tenderer to be received by the procuring entity not later than 7 days prior to the deadline for submission of tenders. The procuring entity shall reply to any clarifications sought by the tenderer within 3 days of receiving the request to enable the tenderer to make timely submission of its tender. The tender security shall be in the amount of per cent of the tender price. 4. Submission of Tenders The tenderer shall seal the original and all copies of the tender in two inner envelopes and one outer envelope, duly marking the inner envelopes as ORIGINAL and COPIES as appropriate. The inner and outer envelopes shall: 10 (a) be addressed to the Employer at the address provided in the invitation to tender; 12

16 (b) (c) bear the name and identification number of the Contract as defined in the invitation to tender; and provide a warning not to open before the specified time and date for tender opening. Tenders shall be delivered to the Employer at the address specified above not later than the time and date specified in the invitation to tender. However, the Employer may extend the deadline for submission of tenders by issuing an amendment in accordance with Sub-Clause 2.5 in which case all rights and obligations of the Employer and the tenderers previously subject to the original deadline will then be subject to the new deadline. Any tender received after the deadline prescribed in clause 4.2 will be returned to the tenderer un-opened. Tenderers may modify or withdraw their tenders by giving notice in writing before the deadline prescribed in clause 4.2. Each tenderer s modification or withdrawal notice shall be prepared, sealed, marked, and delivered in accordance with clause 3.13 and 4.1, with the outer and inner envelopes additionally marked MODIFICATION and WITHDRAWAL, as appropriate. No tender may be modified after the deadline for submission of tenders. Withdrawal of a tender between the deadline for submission of tenders and the expiration of the period of tender validity specified in the invitation to tender or as extended pursuant to Clause 3.6 may result in the forfeiture of the Tender Security pursuant to Clause Tenderers may only offer discounts to, or otherwise modify the prices of their tenders by submitting tender modifications in accordance with Clause 4.4 or be included in the original tender submission. 5. Tender Opening and Evaluation The tenders will be opened by the Employer, including modifications made pursuant to Clause 4.4, in the presence of the tenderers representatives who choose to attend at the time and in the place specified in the invitation to tender. Envelopes marked WITHDRAWAL shall be opened and read out first. Tenderers and Employer s representatives who are present during the opening shall sign a register evidencing their attendance. The tenderers names, the tender prices, the total amount of each tender and of any alternative tender (if alternatives have been requested or permitted), any discounts, tender modifications and 13

17 withdrawals, the presence or absence of Tender Security, and such other details as may be considered appropriate, will be announced by the Employer at the opening. Minutes of the tender opening, including the information disclosed to those present will be prepared by the Employer. Information relating to the examination, clarification, evaluation, and comparison of tenders and recommendations for the award of Contract shall not be disclosed to tenderers or any other persons not officially concerned with such process until the award to the successful tenderer has been announced. Any effort by a tenderer to influence the Employer s officials, processing of tenders or award decisions may result in the rejection of his tender. To assist in the examination, evaluation, and comparison of tenders, the Employer at his discretion, may ask any tenderer for clarification of the tender, including breakdowns of unit rates. The request for clarification and the response shall be in writing or by cable, telex or facsimile but no change in the price or substance of the tender shall be sought, offered, or permitted except as required to confirm the correction of arithmetic errors discovered in the evaluation of the tenders in accordance with Clause 5.7. Prior to the detailed evaluation of tenders, the Employer will determine whether each tender (a) meets the eligibility criteria defined in Clause 1.7;(b) has been properly signed; (c) is accompanied by the required securities; and (d) is substantially responsive to the requirements of the tendering documents. A substantially responsive tender is one which conforms to all the terms, conditions and specifications of the tendering documents, without material deviation or reservation. A material deviation or reservation is one (a) which affects in any substantial way the scope, quality, or performance of the works; (b) which limits in any substantial way, inconsistent with the tendering documents, the Employer s rights or the tenderer s obligations under the Contract; or (c) whose rectification would affect unfairly the competitive position of other tenderers presenting substantially responsive tenders. If a tender is not substantially responsive, it will be rejected, and may not subsequently be made responsive by correction or withdrawal of the nonconforming deviation or reservation. Tenders determined to be substantially responsive will be checked for any arithmetic errors. Errors will be corrected as follows: (a) where there is a discrepancy between the amount in figures and the amount in words, the amount in words will prevail; and 14

18 (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) where there is a discrepancy between the unit rate and the line item total resulting from multiplying the unit rate by the quantity, the unit rate as quoted will prevail, unless in the opinion of the Employer, there is an obvious typographical error, in which case the adjustment will be made to the entry containing that error. In the event of a discrepancy between the tender amount as stated in the Form of Tender and the corrected tender figure in the main summary of the Bill of Quantities, the amount as stated in the Form of Tender shall prevail. The Error Correction Factor shall be computed by expressing the difference between the tender amount and the corrected tender sum as a percentage of the corrected Builder s Work (i.e. Corrected tender sum less P.C. and Provisional Sums) The Error Correction Factor shall be applied to all Builder s Work (as a rebate or addition as the case may be) for the purposes of valuations for Interim Certificates and valuation of variations. the amount stated in the tender will be adjusted in accordance with the above procedure for the correction of errors and, with concurrence of the tenderer, shall be considered as binding upon the tenderer. If the tenderer does not accept the corrected amount, the tender may be rejected and the Tender Security may be forfeited in accordance with clause The Employer will evaluate and compare only the tenders determined to be substantially responsive in accordance with Clause 5.5. In evaluating the tenders, the Employer will determine for each tender the evaluated tender price by adjusting the tender price as follows: (a) making any correction for errors pursuant to clause 5.7; (b) (c) (d) excluding provisional sums and the provision, if any, for contingencies in the Bill of Quantities, but including Dayworks where priced competitively. making an appropriate adjustment for any other acceptable variations, deviations, or alternative offers submitted in accordance with clause 3.12; and making appropriate adjustments to reflect discounts or other price modifications offered in accordance with clause

19 The Employer reserves the right to accept or reject any variation, deviation, or alternative offer. Variations, deviations, and alternative offers and other factors which are in excess of the requirements of the tender documents or otherwise result in unsolicited benefits for the Employer will not be taken into account in tender evaluation. The tenderer shall not influence the Employer on any matter relating to his tender from the time of the tender opening to the time the Contract is awarded. Any effort by the Tenderer to influence the Employer or his employees in his decision on tender evaluation, tender comparison or Contract award may result in the rejection of the tender. Firms incorporated in Kenya where indigenous Kenyans own 51% or more of the share capital shall be allowed a 10% preferential bias provided that they do not sub-contract work valued at more than 50% of the Contract Price excluding Provisional Sums to an non-indigenous sub-contractor. 6. Award of Contract Subject to Clause 6.2, the award of the Contract will be made to the tenderer whose tender has been determined to be substantially responsive to the tendering documents and who has offered the lowest evaluated tender price, provided that such tenderer has been determined to be (a) eligible in accordance with the provision of Clauses 1.2, and (b) qualified in accordance with the provisions of clause 1.7 and 1.8. Notwithstanding clause 6.1 above, the Employer reserves the right to accept or reject any tender, and to cancel the tendering process and reject all tenders, at any time prior to the award of Contract, without thereby incurring any liability to the affected tenderer or tenderers or any obligation to inform the affected tenderer or tenderers of the grounds for the action. The tenderer whose tender has been accepted will be notified of the award prior to expiration of the tender validity period in writing or by cable, telex or facsimile. This notification (hereinafter and in all Contract documents called the Letter of Acceptance ) will state the sum (hereinafter and in all Contract documents called the Contract Price )that the Employer will pay the Contractor in consideration of the execution, completion, and maintenance of the Works by the Contractor as prescribed by the Contract. At the same time the other tenderers shall be informed that their tenders have not been successful. The contract shall be formed on the parties signing the contract. 16

20 The Agreement will incorporate all agreements between the Employer and the successful tenderer. Within 14 days of receipt the successful tenderer will sign the Agreement and return it to the Employer. Within 21 days after receipt of the Letter of Acceptance, the successful tenderer shall deliver to the Employer a Performance Security in the amount stipulated in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract and in the form stipulated in the Tender documents. The Performance Security shall be in the amount and specified form Failure of the successful tenderer to comply with the requirements of clause 6.5 shall constitute sufficient grounds for cancellation of the award and forfeiture of the Tender Security. Upon the furnishing by the successful tenderer of the Performance Security, the Employer will promptly notify the other tenderers that their tenders have been unsuccessful. Preference where allowed in the evaluation of tenders shall not be allowed for contracts not exceeding one year (12 months) The tender evaluation committee shall evaluate the tender within 30 days of the validity period from the date of opening the tender. The parties to the contract shall have it signed within 30 days from the date of notification of contract award unless there is an administrative review request. Contract price variations shall not be allowed for contracts not exceeding one year (12 months) Where contract price variation is allowed, the valuation shall not exceed 15% of the original contract price. Price variation request shall be processed by the procuring entity within 30 days of receiving the request. The procuring entity may at any time terminate procurement proceedings before contract award and shall not be liable to any person for the termination. The procuring entity shall give prompt notice of the termination to the tenderers and on request give its reasons for termination within 14 days of receiving the request from any tenderer. A tenderer who gives false information in the tender document about its qualification or who refuses to enter into a contract after notification of contract award shall be considered for debarment from participating in future public procurement. 17

21 7. Corrupt and Fraudulent practices The procuring entity requires that tenderers observe the highest standards of ethics during procurement process and execution of contracts. A tenderer shall sign a declaration that he has not and will not be involved in corrupt and fraudulent practices. 18

22 SECTION III CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT Table of Contents 1 Definitions 15 2 Interpretation 17 3 Language and Law Project Manager s Decisions Delegation 18 6 Communications 18 7 Sub Contracting 18 8 Other Contractors 18 9 Personnel Works Safety and temporary works Discoveries Work Programme Possession of site Access to site Instructions Extension or Acceleration of completion date Management Meetings Early Warning Defects Bills of Quantities Variations Payment certificates, currency of payments and Advance Payments Compensation events Price Adjustment Retention Liquidated Damages Securities Day Works

23 30 Liability and Insurance Completion and taking over Final Account Termination Payment upon termination Release from performance Corrupt gifts and payments of commission Settlement of Disputes

24 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 1. Definitions In this Contract, except where context otherwise requires, the following terms shall be interpreted as indicated; Bill of Quantities means the priced and completed Bill of Quantities forming part of the tender. Compensation Events are those defined in Clause 24 hereunder. The Completion Date means the date of completion of the Works as certified by the Project Manager, in accordance with Clause 31. The Contract means the agreement entered into between the Employer and the Contractor as recorded in the Agreement Form and signed by the parties including all attachments and appendices thereto and all documents incorporated by reference therein to execute, complete, and maintain the Works, The Contractor refers to the person or corporate body whose tender to carry out the Works has been accepted by the Employer. The Contractor s Tender is the completed tendering document submitted by the Contractor to the Employer. The Contract Price is the price stated in the Letter of Acceptance and thereafter as adjusted in accordance with the provisions of the Contract. Days are calendar days; Months are calendar months. A Defect is any part of the Works not completed in accordance with the Contract. The Defects Liability Certificate is the certificate issued by Project Manager upon correction of defects by the Contractor. The Defects Liability Period is the period named in the Contract Data and calculated from the Completion Date. Drawings include calculations and other information provided or approved by the Project Manager for the execution of the Contract. Dayworks are Work inputs subject to payment on a time basis for labour and the associated materials and plant. 21

25 Employer, or the Procuring entity as defined in the Public Procurement Regulations (i.e. Central or Local Government administration, Universities, Public Institutions and Corporations, etc) is the party who employs the Contractor to carry out the Works. Equipment is the Contractor s machinery and vehicles brought temporarily to the Site for the execution of the Works. The Intended Completion Date is the date on which it is intended that the Contractor shall complete the Works. The Intended Completion Date may be revised only by the Project Manager by issuing an extension of time or an acceleration order. Materials are all supplies, including consumables, used by the Contractor for incorporation in the Works. Plant is any integral part of the Works that shall have mechanical, electrical, chemical, or biological function. a Project Manager is the person named in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract (or any other competent person appointed by the Employer and notified to the Contractor, to act in replacement of the Project Manager) who is responsible for supervising the execution of the Works and administering the Contract and shall be an Architect or a Quantity Surveyor registered under the Architects and Quantity Surveyors Act Cap 525 or an Engineer registered under Engineers Registration Act Cap 530. Site is the area defined as such in the Appendix to Condition of Contract. Site Investigation Reports are those reports that may be included in the tendering documents which are factual and interpretative about the surface and subsurface conditions at the Site. Specifications means the Specifications of the Works included in the Contract and any modification or addition made or approved by the Project Manager. Start Date is the latest date when the Contractor shall commence execution of the Works. It does not necessarily coincide with the Site possession date(s). A Subcontractor is a person or corporate body who has a Contract with the Contractor to carry out a part of the Work in the Contract, which includes Work on the Site. 22

26 Temporary works are works designed, constructed, installed, and removed by the Contractor which are needed for construction or installation of the Works. A Variation is an instruction given by the Project Manager which varies the Works. The Works are what the Contract requires the Contractor to construct, install, and turnover to the Employer, as defined in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract. 2. Interpretation In interpreting these Conditions of Contract, singular also means plural, male also means female or neuter, and the other way around. Headings have no significance. Words have their normal meaning in English Language unless specifically defined. The Project Manager will provide instructions clarifying queries about these Conditions of Contract. If sectional completion is specified in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract, reference in the Conditions of Contract to the Works, the Completion Date and the Intended Completion Date apply to any section of the Works (other than references to the Intended Completion Date for the whole of the Works). The following documents shall constitute the Contract documents and shall be interpreted in the following order of priority; (1) Agreement, (2) Letter of Acceptance, (3) Contractor s Tender, (4) Appendix to Conditions of Contract, (5) Conditions of Contract, (6) Specifications, (7) Drawings, (8) Bill of Quantities, (9) Any other documents listed in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract as forming part of the Contract. Immediately after the execution of the Contract, the Project Manager 23

27 shall furnish both the Employer and the Contractor with two copies each of all the Contract documents. Further, as and when necessary the Project Manager shall furnish the Contractor [always with a copy to the Employer] with three [3] copies of such further drawings or details or descriptive schedules as are reasonably necessary either to explain or amplify the Contract drawings or to enable the Contractor to carry out and complete the Works in accordance with these Conditions. 3. Language and Law Language of the Contract and the law governing the Contract shall be English language and the Laws of Kenya respectively unless otherwise stated. 4 Project Manager s Decisions 5 Delegation 6 Communications 7 Subcontracting 8 Other Contractors Except where otherwise specifically stated, the Project Manager will decide contractual matters between the Employer and the Contractor in the role representing the Employer. The Project Manager may delegate any of his duties and responsibilities to others after notifying the Contractor. Communication between parties shall be effective only when in writing. A notice shall be effective only when it is delivered. The Contractor may subcontract with the approval of the Project Manager, but may not assign the Contract without the approval of the Employer in writing. Subcontracting shall not alter the Contractor s obligations. The Contractor shall cooperate and share the Site with other contractors, public authorities, utilities etc. as listed in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract and also with the Employer, as per the directions of the Project Manager. The Contractor shall also provide facilities and services for them. The Employer may modify the said List of Other Contractors etc., and shall notify the Contractor of any such modification. 9 Personnel 24

28 The Contractor shall employ the key personnel named in the Qualification Information, to carry out the functions stated in the said Information or other personnel approved by the Project Manager. The Project Manager will approve any proposed replacement of key personnel only if their relevant qualifications and abilities are substantially equal to or better than those of the personnel listed in the Qualification Information. If the Project Manager asks the Contractor to remove a person who is a member of the Contractor s staff or work force, stating the reasons, the Contractor shall ensure that the person leaves the Site within seven days and has no further connection with the Work in the Contract. 10 Works The Contractor shall construct and install the Works in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings. The Works may commence on the Start Date and shall be carried out in accordance with the Program submitted by the Contractor, as updated with the approval of the Project Manager, and complete them by the Intended Completion Date. 11 Safety and Temporary Works 12. Discoveries 13. Work Program The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of temporary works. However before erecting the same, he shall submit his designs including specifications and drawings to the Project Manager and to any other relevant third parties for their approval. No erection of temporary works shall be done until such approvals are obtained. The Project Manager s approval shall not alter the Contractor s responsibility for design of the Temporary works and all drawings prepared by the Contractor for the execution of the temporary or permanent Works, shall be subject to prior approval by the Project Manager before they can be used. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of all activities on the Site. Anything of historical or other interest or of significant value unexpectedly discovered on Site shall be the property of the Employer. The Contractor shall notify the Project Manager of such discoveries and carry out the Project Manager s instructions for dealing with them. 25

29 Within the time stated in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager for approval a program showing the general methods, arrangements, order, and timing for all the activities in the Works. An update of the program shall be a program showing the actual progress achieved on each activity and the effect of the progress achieved on the timing of the remaining Work, including any changes to the sequence of the activities. The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager for approval an updated program at intervals no longer than the period stated in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract. If the Contractor does not submit an updated program within this period, the Project Manager may withhold the amount stated in the said Appendix from the next payment certificate and continue to withhold this amount until the next payment after the date on which the overdue program has been submitted. The Project Manager s approval of the program shall not alter the Contractor s obligations. The Contractor may revise the program and submit it to the Project Manager again at any time. A revised program shall show the effect of Variations and Compensation Events. 14. Possession of Site 15. Access to Site 16. Instructions The Employer shall give possession of all parts of the Site to the Contractor. If possession of a part is not given by the date stated in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract, the Employer will be deemed to have delayed the start of the relevant activities, and this will be a Compensation Event. The Contractor shall allow the Project Manager and any other person authorised by the Project Manager, access to the Site and to any place where work in connection with the Contract is being carried out or is intended to be carried out. The Contractor shall carry out all instructions of the Project Manager which are in accordance with the Contract. 17. Extension or Acceleration of Completion Date The Project Manager shall extend the Intended Completion Date if a Compensation Event occurs or a variation is issued which makes it impossible for completion to be achieved by the Intended Completion Date without the Contractor taking steps to accelerate the remaining Work, which would cause the Contractor to incur additional cost. The 26

30 Project Manager shall decide whether and by how much to extend the Intended Completion Date within 21 days of the Contractor asking the Project Manager in writing for a decision upon the effect of a Compensation Event or variation and submitting full supporting information. If the Contractor has failed to give early warning of a delay or has failed to cooperate in dealing with a delay, the delay caused by such failure shall not be considered in assessing the new (extended) Completion Date. No bonus for early completion of the Works shall be paid to the Contractor by the Employer. 18. Management Meetings 19. Early Warning 20. Defects A Contract management meeting shall be held monthly and attended by the Project Manager and the Contractor. Its business shall be to review the plans for the remaining Work and to deal with matters raised in accordance with the early warning procedure. The Project Manager shall record the minutes of management meetings and provide copies of the same to those attending the meeting and the Employer. The responsibility of the parties for actions to be taken shall be decided by the Project Manager either at the management meeting or after the management meeting and stated in writing to all who attended the meeting. The Contractor shall warn the Project Manager at the earliest opportunity of specific likely future events or circumstances that may adversely affect the quality of the Work, increase the Contract Price or delay the execution of the Works. The Project Manager may require the Contractor to provide an estimate of the expected effect of the future event or circumstance on the Contract Price and Completion Date. The estimate shall be provided by the Contractor as soon as reasonably possible. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Project Manager in making and considering proposals on how the effect of such an event or circumstance can be avoided or reduced by anyone involved in the Work and in carrying out any resulting instructions of the Project Manager. The Project Manager shall inspect the Contractor s work and notify the Contractor of any defects that are found. Such inspection shall not affect the Contractor s responsibilities. The Project Manager may instruct the Contractor to search for a defect and to uncover and test 27

31 any Work that the Project Manager considers may have a defect. Should the defect be found, the cost of uncovering and making good shall be borne by the Contractor, However, if there is no defect found, the cost of uncovering and making good shall be treated as a variation and added to the Contract Price. The Project Manager shall give notice to the Contractor of any defects before the end of the Defects Liability Period, which begins at Completion, and is defined in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract. The Defects Liability Period shall be extended for as long as defects remain to be corrected. Every time notice of a defect is given, the Contractor shall correct the notified defect within the length of time specified by the Project Manager s notice. If the Contractor has not corrected a defect within the time specified in the Project Manager s notice, the Project Manager will assess the cost of having the defect corrected by other parties and such cost shall be treated as a variation and be deducted from the Contract Price. 21. Bills Of Quantities 22. Variations The Bills of Quantities shall contain items for the construction, installation, testing and commissioning of the Work to be done by the Contractor. The Contractor will be paid for the quantity of the Work done at the rate in the Bills of Quantities for each item. If the final quantity of the Work done differs from the quantity in the Bills of Quantities for the particular item by more than 25 percent and provided the change exceeds 1 percent of the Initial Contract price, the Project Manager shall adjust the rate to allow for the change. If requested by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall provide the Project Manager with a detailed cost breakdown of any rate in the Bills of Quantities. All variations shall be included in updated programs produced by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide the Project Manager with a quotation for carrying out the variations when requested to do so. The Project Manager shall assess the quotation, which shall be given within seven days of the request or within any longer period as may be stated by the Project Manager and before the Variation is ordered. 28

32 If the work in the variation corresponds with an item description in the Bills of Quantities and if in the opinion of the Project Manager, the quantity of work is not above the limit stated in Clause 21.2 or the timing of its execution does not cause the cost per unit of quantity to change, the rate in the Bills of Quantities shall be used to calculate the value of the variation. If the cost per unit of quantity changes, or if the nature or timing of the work in the variation does not correspond with items in the Bills of Quantities, the quotation by the Contractor shall be in the form of new rates for the relevant items of Work. If the Contractor s quotation is unreasonable, the Project Manager may order the variation and make a change to the Contract price, which shall be based on the Project Manager s own forecast of the effects of the variation on the Contractor s costs. If the Project Manager decides that the urgency of varying the Work would prevent a quotation being given and considered without delaying the Work, no quotation shall be given and the variation shall be treated as a Compensation Event. The Contractor shall not be entitled to additional payment for costs that could have been avoided by giving early warning. When the Program is updated, the Contractor shall provide the Project Manager with an updated cash flow forecast. 23. Payment Certificates, Currency of Payments and Advance Payments The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager monthly applications for payment giving sufficient details of the Work done and materials on Site and the amounts which the Contractor considers himself to be entitled to. The Project Manager shall check the monthly application and certify the amount to be paid to the Contractor within 14 days. The value of Work executed and payable shall be determined by the Project Manager. The value of Work executed shall comprise the value of the quantities of the items in the Bills of Quantities completed, materials delivered on Site, variations and compensation events. Such materials shall become the property of the Employer once the Employer has paid the Contractor for their value. Thereafter, they shall not be removed from Site without the Project Manager s instructions except for use upon the Works. Payments shall be adjusted for deductions for retention. The Employer shall pay the Contractor the amounts certified by the Project Manager within 30 days of the date of issue of each 29

33 certificate. If the Employer makes a late payment, the Contractor shall be paid simple interest on the late payment in the next payment. Interest shall be calculated on the basis of number of days delayed at a rate three percentage points above the Central Bank of Kenya s average rate for base lending prevailing as of the first day the payment becomes overdue. If an amount certified is increased in a later certificate or as a result of an award by an Arbitrator, the Contractor shall be paid interest upon the delayed payment as set out in this clause. Interest shall be calculated from the date upon which the increased amount would have been certified in the absence of dispute. Items of the Works for which no rate or price has been entered in will not be paid for by the Employer and shall be deemed covered by other rates and prices in the Contract. The Contract Price shall be stated in Kenya Shillings. All payments to the Contractor shall be made in Kenya Shillings and foreign currency in the proportion indicated in the tender, or agreed prior to the execution of the Contract Agreement and indicated therein. The rate of exchange for the calculation of the amount of foreign currency payment shall be the rate of exchange indicated in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract. If the Contractor indicated foreign currencies for payment other than the currencies of the countries of origin of related goods and services the Employer reserves the right to pay the equivalent at the time of payment in the currencies of the countries of such goods and services. The Employer and the Project Manager shall be notified promptly by the Contractor of an changes in the expected foreign currency requirements of the Contractor during the execution of the Works as indicated in the Schedule of Foreign Currency Requirements and the foreign and local currency portions of the balance of the Contract Price shall then be amended by agreement between Employer and the Contractor in order to reflect appropriately such changes. In the event that an advance payment is granted, the following shall apply:- a) On signature of the Contract, the Contractor shall at his request, and without furnishing proof of expenditure, be entitled to an advance of 10% (ten percent) of the original amount of the Contract. The advance shall not be subject to retention money. b) No advance payment may be made before the Contractor has submitted proof of the establishment of deposit or a directly 30

34 liable guarantee satisfactory to the Employer in the amount of the advance payment. The guarantee shall be in the same currency as the advance. c) Reimbursement of the lump sum advance shall be made by deductions from the Interim payments and where applicable from the balance owing to the Contractor. Reimbursement shall begin when the amount of the sums due under the Contract reaches 20% of the original amount of the Contract. It shall have been completed by the time 80% of this amount is reached. The amount to be repaid by way of successive deductions shall be calculated by means of the formula: Where: R = A(x 1 x 11 ) R = the amount to be reimbursed A = the amount of the advance which has been granted X 1 = the amount of proposed cumulative payments as a percentage of the original amount of the Contract. This figure will exceed 20% but not exceed 80%. X 11 = the amount of the previous cumulative payments as a percentage of the original amount of the Contract. This figure will be below 80%but not less than 20%. d) with each reimbursement the counterpart of the directly liable guarantee may be reduced accordingly. 24. Compensation Events The following issues shall constitute Compensation Events: (a) (b) (c) The Employer does not give access to a part of the Site by the Site Possession Date stated in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract. The Employer modifies the List of Other Contractors, etc., in a way that affects the Work of the Contractor under the Contract. The Project Manager orders a delay or does not issue drawings, specifications or instructions required for execution of the Works on time. 31

35 (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) The Project Manager instructs the Contractor to uncover or to carry out additional tests upon the Work, which is then found to have no defects. The Project Manager unreasonably does not approve a subcontract to be let. Ground conditions are substantially more adverse than could reasonably have been assumed before issuance of the Letter of Acceptance from the information issued to tenderers (including the Site investigation reports), from information available publicly and from a visual inspection of the Site. The Project Manager gives an instruction for dealing with an unforeseen condition, caused by the Employer or additional work required for safety or other reasons. Other contractors, public authorities, utilities, or the Employer does not work within the dates and other constraints stated in the Contract, and they cause delay or extra cost to the Contractor. The effects on the Contractor of any of the Employer s risks. The Project Manager unreasonably delays issuing a Certificate of Completion. Other compensation events described in the Contract or determined by the Project Manager shall apply. If a compensation event would cause additional cost or would prevent the Work being completed before the Intended Completion Date, the Contract Price shall be increased and/or the Intended Completion Date shall be extended. The Project Manager shall decide whether and by how much the Contract Price shall be increased and whether and by how much the Intended Completion Date shall be extended. As soon as information demonstrating the effect of each compensation event upon the Contractor s forecast cost has been provided by the Contractor, it shall be assessed by the Project Manager, and the Contract Price shall be adjusted accordingly. If the Contractor s forecast is deemed unreasonable, the Project Manager shall adjust the Contract Price based on the Project Manager s own forecast. The Project Manager will assume that the Contractor will react competently and promptly to the event. The Contractor shall not be entitled to compensation to the extent that the Employer s interests are adversely affected by the Contractor 32

36 not having given early warning or not having co-operated with the Project Manager. Prices shall be adjusted for fluctuations in the cost of inputs only if provided for in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract. The Contractor shall give written notice to the Project Manager of his intention to make a claim within thirty days after the event giving rise to the claim has first arisen. The claim shall be submitted within thirty days thereafter. Provided always that should the event giving rise to the claim of continuing effect, the Contractor shall submit an interim claim within the said thirty days and a final claim within thirty days of the end of the event giving rise to the claim. 25. Price Adjustment The Project Manager shall adjust the Contract Price if taxes, duties and other levies are changed between the date 30 days before the submission of tenders for the Contract and the date of Completion. The adjustment shall be the change in the amount of tax payable by the Contractor. The Contract Price shall be deemed to be based on exchange rates current at the date of tender submission in calculating the cost to the Contractor of materials to be specifically imported (by express provisions in the Contract Bills of Quantities or Specifications) for permanent incorporation in the Works. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, if at any time during the period of the Contract exchange rates shall be varied and this shall affect the cost to the Contractor of such materials, then the Project Manager shall assess the net difference in the cost of such materials. Any amount from time to time so assessed shall be added to or deducted from the Contract Price, as the case may be. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, the Contract Price shall be deemed to have been calculated in the manner set out below and in sub-clauses 25.4 and 25.5 and shall be subject to adjustment in the events specified thereunder; (i) The prices contained in the Contract Bills of Quantities shall be deemed to be based upon the rates of wages and other emoluments and expenses as determined by the Joint Building Council of Kenya (J.B.C.) and set out in the schedule of basic rates issued 30 days before the date for submission of tenders.a copy of the schedule used by the Contractor in his pricing shall be attached in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract. 33

37 (ii) (iii) Upon J.B.C. determining that any of the said rates of wages or other emoluments and expenses are increased or decreased, then the Contract Price shall be increased or decreased by the amount assessed by the Project Manager based upon the difference, expressed as a percentage, between the rate set out in the schedule of basic rates issued 30 days before the date for submission of tenders and the rate published by the J.B.C. and applied to the quantum of labour incorporated within the amount of Work remaining to be executed at the date of publication of such increase or decrease. No adjustment shall be made in respect of changes in the rates of wages and other emoluments and expenses which occur after the date of Completion except during such other period as may be granted as an extension of time under clause 17.0 of these Conditions. 26. Retention The prices contained in the Contract Bills of Quantities shall be deemed to be based upon the basic prices of materials to be permanently incorporated in the Works as determined by the J.B.C. and set out in the schedule of basic rates issued 30 days before the date for submission of tenders. A copy of the schedule used by the Contractor in his pricing shall be attached in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract. Upon the J.B.C. determining that any of the said basic prices are increased or decreased then the Contract Price shall be increased or decreased by the amount to be assessed by the Project Manager based upon the difference between the price set out in the schedule of basic rates issued 30 days before the date for submission of tenders and the rate published by the J.B.C. and applied to the quantum of the relevant materials which have not been taken into account in arriving at the amount of any interim certificate under clause 23 of these Conditions issued before the date of publication of such increase or decrease. No adjustment shall be made in respect of changes in basic prices of materials which occur after the date for Completion except during such other period as may be granted as an extension of time under clause 17.0 of these Conditions. The provisions of sub-clause 25.1 to 25.2 herein shall not apply in respect of any materials included in the schedule of basic rates. The Employer shall retain from each payment due to the Contractor the proportion stated in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract until Completion of the whole of the Works. On Completion of the whole of 34

38 the Works, half the total amount retained shall be repaid to the Contractor and the remaining half when the Defects Liability Period has passed and the Project Manager has certified that all defects notified to the Contractor before the end of this period have been corrected. 27. Liquidated Damages 28. Securities 29. Dayworks The Contractor shall pay liquidated damages to the Employer at the rate stated in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract for each day that the actual Completion Date is later than the Intended Completion Date. The Employer may deduct liquidated damages from payments due to the Contractor. Payment of liquidated damages shall not alter the Contractor s liabilities. If the Intended Completion Date is extended after liquidated damages have been paid, the Project Manager shall correct any overpayment of liquidated damages by the Contractor by adjusting the next payment certificate. The Contractor shall be paid interest on the overpayment, calculated from the date of payment to the date of repayment, at the rate specified in Clause The Performance Security shall be provided to the Employer no later than the date specified in the Letter of Acceptance and shall be issued in an amount and form and by a reputable bank acceptable to the Employer, and denominated in Kenya Shillings. The Performance Security shall be valid until a date 30 days beyond the date of issue of the Certificate of Completion. If applicable, the Dayworks rates in the Contractor s tender shall be used for small additional amounts of Work only when the Project Manager has given written instructions in advance for additional work to be paid for in that way. All work to be paid for as Dayworks shall be recorded by the Contractor on Forms approved by the Project Manager. Each completed form shall be verified and signed by the Project Manager within two days of the Work being done. The Contractor shall be paid for Dayworks subject to obtaining signed Dayworks forms. 30. Liability and Insurance 35

39 From the Start Date until the Defects Correction Certificate has been issued, the following are the Employer s risks: (a) The risk of personal injury, death or loss of or damage to property (excluding the Works, Plant, Materials and Equipment), which are due to; (i) (i) use or occupation of the Site by the Works or for the purpose of the Works, which is the unavoidable result of the Works, or negligence, breach of statutory duty or interference with any legal right by the Employer or by any person employed by or contracted to him except the Contractor. (b) The risk of damage to the Works, Plant, Materials, and Equipment to the extent that it is due to a fault of the Employer or in Employer s design, or due to war or radioactive contamination directly affecting the place where the Works are being executed. From the Completion Date until the Defects Correction Certificate has been issued, the risk of loss of or damage to the Works, Plant, and Materials is the Employer s risk except loss or damage due to; (a) (b) (c) a defect which existed on or before the Completion Date. an event occurring before the Completion Date, which was not itself the Employer s risk the activities of the Contractor on the Site after the Completion Date. From the Start Date until the Defects Correction Certificate has been issued, the risks of personal injury, death and loss of or damage to property (including, without limitation, the Works, Plant, Materials, and Equipment) which are not Employer s risk are Contractor s risks. The Contractor shall provide, in the joint names of the Employer and the Contractor, insurance cover from the Start Date to the end of the Defects Liability Period, in the amounts stated in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract for the following events; (a) loss of or damage to the Works, Plant, and Materials; (b) loss of or damage to Equipment; (c) loss of or damage to property (except the Works, Plant, Materials, and Equipment) in connection with the Contract, and (d) personal injury or death. 36

40 Policies and certificates for insurance shall be delivered by the Contractor to the Project Manager for the Project Manager s approval before the Start Date. All such insurance shall provide for compensation required to rectify the loss or damage incurred. If the Contractor does not provide any of the policies and certificates required, the Employer may effect the insurance which the Contractor should have provided and recover the premiums from payments otherwise due to the Contractor or, if no payment is due, the payment of the premiums shall be a debt due. Alterations to the terms of an insurance shall not be made without the approval of the Project Manager. Both parties shall comply with any conditions of insurance policies. 31. Completion and taking over 32. Final Account 33. Termination Upon deciding that the Works are complete, the Contractor shall issue a written request to the Project Manager to issue a Certificate of Completion of the Works. The Employer shall take over the Site and the Works within seven [7] days of the Project Manager s issuing a Certificate of Completion. The Contractor shall issue the Project Manager with a detailed account of the total amount that the Contractor considers payable to him by the Employer under the Contract before the end of the Defects Liability Period. The Project Manager shall issue a Defects Liability Certificate and certify any final payment that is due to the Contractor within 30 days of receiving the Contractor s account if it is correct and complete. If it is not, the Project Manager shall issue within 30 days a schedule that states the scope of the corrections or additions that are necessary. If the final account is still unsatisfactory after it has been resubmitted, the Project Manager shall decide on the amount payable to the Contractor and issue a Payment Certificate. The Employer shall pay the Contractor the amount due in the Final Certificate within 60 days. The Employer or the Contractor may terminate the Contract if the other party causes a fundamental breach of the Contract. These fundamental breaches of Contract shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following; 37

41 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) the Contractor stops work for 30 days when no stoppage of work is shown on the current program and the stoppage has not been authorised by the Project Manager; the Project Manager instructs the Contractor to delay the progress of the Works, and the instruction is not withdrawn within 30 days; the Contractor is declared bankrupt or goes into liquidation other than for a reconstruction or amalgamation; a payment certified by the Project Manager is not paid by the Employer to the Contractor within 30 days (for Interim Certificate) or 60 days (for Final Certificate)of issue. the Project Manager gives notice that failure to correct a particular defect is a fundamental breach of Contract and the Contractor fails to correct it within a reasonable period of time determined by the Project Manager; the Contractor does not maintain a security, which is required. When either party to the Contract gives notice of a breach of Contract to the Project Manager for a cause other than those listed under Clause 33.1 above, the Project Manager shall decide whether the breach is fundamental or not. Notwithstanding the above, the Employer may terminate the Contract for convenience. If the Contract is terminated, the Contractor shall stop work immediately, make the Site safe and secure, and leave the Site as soon as reasonably possible. The Project Manager shall immediately thereafter arrange for a meeting for the purpose of taking record of the Works executed and materials, goods, equipment and temporary buildings on Site. 34. Payment Upon Termination If the Contract is terminated because of a fundamental breach of Contract by the Contractor, the Project Manager shall issue a certificate for the value of the Work done and materials ordered and delivered to Site up to the date of the issue of the certificate. Additional liquidated damages shall not apply. If the total amount due to the Employer exceeds any payment due to the Contractor, the difference shall be a debt payable by the Contractor. If the Contract is terminated for the Employer s convenience or because of a fundamental breach of Contract by the Employer, the 38

42 Project Manager shall issue a certificate for the value of the Work done, materials ordered, the reasonable cost of removal of equipment, repatriation of the Contractor s personnel employed solely on the Works, and the Contractor s costs of protecting and securing the Works. The Employer may employ and pay other persons to carry out and complete the Works and to rectify any defects and may enter upon the Works and use all materials on the Site, plant, equipment and temporary works. The Contractor shall, during the execution or after the completion of the Works under this clause remove from the Site as and when required, within such reasonable time as the Project Manager may in writing specify, any temporary buildings, plant, machinery, appliances, goods or materials belonging to or hired by him, and in default the Employer may (without being responsible for any loss or damage) remove and sell any such property of the Contractor, holding the proceeds less all costs incurred to the credit of the Contractor. Until after completion of the Works under this clause the Employer shall not be bound by any other provision of this Contract to make any payment to the Contractor, but upon such completion as aforesaid and the verification within a reasonable time of the accounts therefore the Project Manager shall certify the amount of expenses properly incurred by the Employer and, if such amount added to the money paid to the Contractor before such determination exceeds the total amount which would have been payable on due completion in accordance with this Contract the difference shall be a debt payable to the Employer by the Contractor; and if the said amount added to the said money be less than the said total amount, the difference shall be a debt payable by the Employer to the Contractor. 35. Release from Performance If the Contract is frustrated by the outbreak of war or by any other event entirely outside the control of either the Employer or the Contractor, the Project Manager shall certify that the Contract has been frustrated. The Contractor shall make the Site safe and stop Work as quickly as possible after receiving this certificate and shall be paid for all Work carried out before receiving it. 36. Corrupt gifts and payments of commission The Contractor shall not; (a) Offer or give or agree to give to any person in the service of the Employer any gift or consideration of any kind as an inducement or reward for doing or forbearing to do or for having done or forborne to 39

43 do any act in relation to the obtaining or execution of this or any other Contract for the Employer or for showing or forbearing to show favour or disfavour to any person in relation to this or any other contract for the Employer. (b) Enter into this or any other contract with the Employer in connection with which commission has been paid or agreed to be paid by him or on his behalf or to his knowledge, unless before the Contract is made particulars of any such commission and of the terms and conditions of any agreement for the payment thereof have been disclosed in writing to the Employer. Any breach of this Condition by the Contractor or by anyone employed by him or acting on his behalf (whether with or without the knowledge of the Contractor) shall be an offence under the provisions of the Public Procurement Regulations issued under The Exchequer and Audit Act Cap 412 of the Laws of Kenya. 37. Settlement Of Disputes In case any dispute or difference shall arise between the Employer or the Project Manager on his behalf and the Contractor, either during the progress or after the completion or termination of the Works, such dispute shall be notified in writing by either party to the other with a request to submit it to arbitration and to concur in the appointment of an Arbitrator within thirty days of the notice. The dispute shall be referred to the arbitration and final decision of a person to be agreed between the parties. Failing agreement to concur in the appointment of an Arbitrator, the Arbitrator shall be appointed by the Chairman or Vice Chairman of any of the following professional institutions; (i) Architectural Association of Kenya (i) (ii) (iv) (v) Institute of Quantity Surveyors of Kenya Association of Consulting Engineers of Kenya Chartered Institute of Arbitrators (Kenya Branch) Institution of Engineers of Kenya On the request of the applying party. The institution written to first by the aggrieved party shall take precedence over all other institutions. The arbitration may be on the construction of this Contract or on any matter or thing of whatsoever nature arising thereunder or in connection therewith, including any matter or thing left by this 40

44 Contract to the discretion of the Project Manager, or the withholding by the Project Manager of any certificate to which the Contractor may claim to be entitled to or the measurement and valuation referred to in clause 23.0 of these conditions, or the rights and liabilities of the parties subsequent to the termination of Contract. Provided that no arbitration proceedings shall be commenced on any dispute or difference where notice of a dispute or difference has not been given by the applying party within ninety days of the occurrence or discovery of the matter or issue giving rise to the dispute. Notwithstanding the issue of a notice as stated above, the arbitration of such a dispute or difference shall not commence unless an attempt has in the first instance been made by the parties to settle such dispute or difference amicably with or without the assistance of third parties. Proof of such attempt shall be required. Notwithstanding anything stated herein the following matters may be referred to arbitration before the practical completion of the Works or abandonment of the Works or termination of the Contract by either party: The appointment of a replacement Project Manager upon the said person ceasing to act. Whether or not the issue of an instruction by the Project Manager is empowered by these Conditions. Whether or not a certificate has been improperly withheld or is not in accordance with these Conditions. Any dispute or difference arising in respect of war risks or war damage. All other matters shall only be referred to arbitration after the completion or alleged completion of the Works or termination or alleged termination of the Contract, unless the Employer and the Contractor agree otherwise in writing. The Arbitrator shall, without prejudice to the generality of his powers, have powers to direct such measurements, computations, tests or valuations as may in his opinion be desirable in order to determine the rights of the parties and assess and award any sums which ought to have been the subject of or included in any certificate. The Arbitrator shall, without prejudice to the generality of his powers, 41

45 have powers to open up, review and revise any certificate, opinion, decision, requirement or notice and to determine all matters in dispute which shall be submitted to him in the same manner as if no such certificate, opinion, decision requirement or notice had been given. The award of such Arbitrator shall be final and binding upon the parties. 42

46 SECTION IV APPENDIX TO CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT THE EMPLOYER IS Name: MINISTRY OF HEALTH (National Public Health Laboratory Services) Address: P.O BOX NAIROBI Name of Authorized Representative: PRINCIPAL SECRETARY Telephone: Facsimile: The Project Manager is Name: AEGIS DEVELOPMENT SOLUTIONS LTD Address: P.O BOX NAIROBI Telephone: The name (and identification number) of the Contract is PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION OF BIOSAFETY LEVEL II LABORATORY (BSL II) (PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORY) AT MOI TEACHING REFERRAL HOSPITAL (MTRH) ELDORET. The Works consist of CONSTRUCTION OF BIOSAFETY LEVEL II LABORATORY (BSL II) (PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORY) AT MOI TEACHING REFERRAL HOSPITAL (MTRH) ELDORET. The Start Date shall be AGREED WITH THE PROJECT MANAGER The Intended Completion Date for the whole of the Works shall be. The following documents also form part of the Contract: Documents listed in clause 2.1 conditions of contract The Contractor shall submit a revised program for the Works within Seven (7No) days of delivery of the Letter of Acceptance. The Site Possession Date shall be

47 The Site is located at MOI TEACHING REFERRAL HOSPITAL (MTRH) ELDORET and is defined in drawings nos.. The Defects Liability period is 180 days. Other Contractors, utilities etc., to be engaged by the Employer on the Site Include those for the execution of; NONE The minimum insurance covers shall be; 1. The minimum cover for insurance of the Works and of Plant and Materials inrespect of the Contractor s faulty design is the entire contract 2. The minimum cover for loss or damage to Equipment is Kshs 3,000, The minimum for insurance of other property is Kshs 5,000, The minimum cover for personal injury or death insurance For the Contractor s employees is AS PER THE APPLICABLE LAWS IN KENYA And for other people is Kshs 5,000,000 The following events shall also be Compensation Events: Those listed in the conditions of contract. The period between Program updates is thirty (30No) days. The amount to be withheld for late submission of an updated Program is The proportion of payments retained is Ten (10%) percent. The Price Adjustment Clause (SHALL NOT) apply The liquidated damages for the whole of the Works is Kshs. 40, (Per Week) The Performance Security shall be for the following minimum amounts equivalent as a percentage of the Contract Price- Five (5%) percent. The Completion Period for the Works is The rate of exchange for calculation of foreign currency payments is NOT APPLICABLE.

48 Advance Payment shall not be granted. 45

49 SECTION V - SPECIFICATIONS Notes for preparing Specifications 1.0 Specifications must be drafted to present a clear and precise statement of the required standards of materials, and workmanship for tenderers to respond realistically and competitively to the requirements of the Employer and ensure responsiveness of tenders. The Specifications should require that all materials, plant, and other supplies to be permanently incorporated in the Works be new, unused, of the most recent or current models, and incorporating all recent improvements in design and materials unless provided otherwise in the Contract. Where the Contractor is responsible for the design of any part of the permanent Works, the extent of his obligations must be stated. 2.0 Specifications from previous similar projects are useful and may not be necessary to re-write specifications for every Works Contract. 3.0 There are considerable advantages in standardizing General Specifications for repetitive Works in recognized public sectors, such as highways, urban housing, irrigation and water supply. The General Specifications should cover all classes of workmanship, materials and equipment commonly involved in constructions, although not necessarily to be used in a particular works contract. Deletions or addenda should then adapt the General Specifications to the particular Works. 4.0 Care must be taken in drafting Specifications to ensure they are not restrictive. In the Specifications of standards for materials, plant and workmanship, existing Kenya Standards should be used as much as possible, otherwise recognized international standards may also be used. 5.0 The Employer should decide whether technical solutions to specified parts of the Works are to be permitted. Alternatives are appropriate in cases where obvious (and potentially less costly) alternatives are possible to the technical solutions indicated in tender documents for certain elements of the Works, taking into consideration the comparative specialized advantage of potential tenderers. 46

50 The Employer should provide a description of the selected parts of the Works with appropriate reference to Drawings, Specifications, Bills of Quantities, and Design or Performance criteria, stating that the alternative solutions shall be at least structurally and functionally equivalent to the basic design parameters and Specifications. Such alternative solutions shall be accompanied by all information necessary for a complete evaluation by the Employer, including drawings, design calculations, technical specifications, breakdown of prices, proposed construction methodology, and other relevant details. Technical alternatives permitted in this manner shall be considered by the Employer each on its own merits and independently of whether the tenderer has priced the item as described in the Employer s design included with the tender documents. 47

51 SECTION VI - DRAWINGS Note 1. A list of drawings should be inserted here 2. The actual drawings including Site plans should be annexed in a separate booklet. 48

52 SECTION VII - BILL OF QUANTITIES Notes for preparing Bills of Quantities The objectives of the Bills of Quantities are; (a) (b) to provide sufficient information on the quantities of Works to be performed to enable tenders to be prepared efficiently and accurately; and when a Contract has been entered into, to provide a priced Bill of Quantities for use in the periodic valuation of Works executed. In order to attain these objectives, Works should be itemized in the Bill of Quantities in sufficient detail to distinguish between the different classes of Works, or between Works of the same nature carried out in different locations or in other circumstances which may give rise to different considerations of cost. Consistent with these requirements, the layout and content of the Bill of Quantities should be as simple and brief as possible. The Bills of Quantities should be divided generally into the following sections: (a) Preliminaries. The preliminaries should indicate the inclusiveness of the unit prices, and should state the methods of measurement which have been adopted in the preparation of the Bill of Quantities and which are to be used for the measurement of any part of the Works. The number of preliminary items to be priced by the tenderer should be limited to tangible items such as site office and other temporary works, otherwise items such as security for the Works which are primarily part of the Contractor s obligations should be included in the Contractor s rates. (b) Work Items (i) The items in the Bills of Quantities should be grouped into sections to distinguish between those parts of the Works which by nature, location, access, timing, or any other special characteristics may give rise to different methods of construction, or phasing of the Works, or considerations of cost. General items common to all parts of the Works may be grouped as a separate section in the Bill of Quantities. 49

53 (i) (ii) Quantities should be computed net from the Drawings, unless directed otherwise in the Contract, and no allowance should be made for bulking, shrinkage or waste. Quantities should be rounded up or down where appropriate. The following units of measurement and abbreviations are recommended for use. Unit Abbreviation Unit Abbreviation cubic meter hectare m 3 or cu m ha millimeter month mm mon hour h number nr kilogram kg square meter m 2 or sq m lump sum sum square millimeter mm m or sq mm meter week wk t metric ton (1,000 kg) (c) Daywork Schedule (iv) The commencing surface should be identified in the description of each item for Work involving excavation, boring or drilling, for which the commencing surface is not also the original surface. The excavated surface should be identified in the description of each item for Work involving excavation for which the excavated surface is not also the final surface. The depths of Work should be measured from the commencing surface to the excavated surface, as defined. A Daywork Schedule should be included if the probability of unforeseen work, outside the items included in the Bill of Quantities, is relatively high. To facilitate checking by the Employer of the realism of rates quoted by the tenderers, the Daywork Schedule should normally comprise: (i) (ii) a list of the various classes of labour, and materials for which basic Day work rates or prices are to be inserted by the tenderer, together with a statement of the conditions under which the Contractor will be paid for Work executed on a Day work basis; and a percentage to be entered by the tenderer against each basic Day work Subtotal amount for labour, materials and plant representing the Contractor s profit, overheads, supervision and other charges. 50

54 (d) Provisional Quantities and Sums (i) Provision for quantity contingencies in any particular item or class of Work with a high expectation of quantity overrun should be made by entering specific Provisional Quantities or Provisional Items in the Bill of Quantities, and not by increasing the quantities for that item or class of Work beyond those of the Work normally expected to be required. To the extent not covered above, a general provision for physical contingencies (quantity overruns) should be made by including a Provisional Sum in the Summary of the Bill of Quantities. Similarly, a contingency allowance for possible price increases should be provided as a Provisional Sum in the Summary of the Bill of Quantities. The inclusion of such provisional sums often facilitates budgetary approval by avoiding the need to request periodic supplementary approvals as the future need arises. (ii) Provisional sums to cover specialized works normally carried out by Nominated Sub Contractors should be avoided and instead Bills of Quantities of the specialised Works should be included as a section of the main Bills of Quantities to be priced by the Main Contractor. The Main Contractor should be required to indicate the name (s) of the specialised firms he proposes to engage to carry out the specialized Works as his approved domestic sub-contractors. Only provisional sums to cover specialized Works by statutory authorities should be included in the Bills of Quantities. (e) Summary The Summary should contain a tabulation of the separate parts of the Bills of Quantities carried forward, with provisional sums for Daywork, for physical (quantity) contingencies, and for price contingencies (upward price adjustment) where applicable. 51

55 SECTION VIII STANDARD FORM (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) (viii) (ix) (xi) (x) (xi) (x) Form of Invitation for Tenders Form of Tender Letter of Acceptance Form of Agreement Form of Tender Security Performance Bank Guarantee Bank Guarantee for Advance Payment Qualification Information Tender Questionnaire Confidential Business Questionnaire Statement of Foreign Currency Requirement Details of Sub-Contractors Request for Review Form 52

56 FORM OF INVITATION FOR TENDERS [date] To: [name of Contractor] [address] Dear Sirs: Reference: [Contract Name] You have been prequalified to tender for the above project. We hereby invite you and other prequalified tenderers to submit a tender for the execution and completion of the above Contract. A complete set of tender documents may be purchased by you from [mailing address, cable/telex/facsimile numbers]. Upon payment of a non-refundable fee of Kshs All tenders must be accompanied by number of copies of the same and a security in the form and amount specified in the tendering documents, and must be delivered to [address and location] at or before (time and date). Tenders will be opened immediately thereafter, in the presence of tenderers representatives who choose to attend. Please confirm receipt of this letter immediately in writing by cable/facsimile or telex. Yours faithfully, Authorised Signature Name and Title 53

57 FORM OF TENDER TO: [Name of Employer) [Date] [Name of Contract] Dear Sir, 1. In accordance with the Conditions of Contract, Specifications, Drawings and Bills of Quantities for the execution of the above named Works, we, the undersigned offer to construct, install and complete such Works and remedy any defects therein for the sum of Kshs. [Amount in figures]kenya Shillings [Amount in words] 2. We undertake, if our tender is accepted, to commence the Works as soon as is reasonably possible after the receipt of the Project Manager s notice to commence, and to complete the whole of the Works comprised in the Contract within the time stated in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract. 3. We agree to abide by this tender until [Insert date], and it shall remain binding upon us and may be accepted at any time before that date. 4. Unless and until a formal Agreement is prepared and executed this tender together with your written acceptance thereof, shall constitute a binding Contract between us. 5. We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest or any tender you may receive. Dated this day of 20 Signature in the capacity of duly authorized to sign tenders for and on behalf of [Name of Employer] of [Address of Employer] Witness; Name Address Signature Date 54

58 LETTER OF ACCEPTANCE [letterhead paper of the Employer] [date] To: [name of the Contractor] Dear Sir, [address of the Contractor] This is to notify you that your Tender dated for the execution of [name of the Contract and identification number,as given in the Tender documents] for the Contract Price of Kshs. [amount in figures][kenya Shillings (amount in words) ] in accordance with the Instructions to Tenderers is hereby accepted. You are hereby instructed to proceed with the execution of the said Works in accordance with the Contract documents. Authorized Signature Name and Title of Signatory Attachment : Agreement 55

59 FORM OF AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT, made the day of 20 between of[or whose registered office is situated at] (hereinafter called the Employer ) of the one part AND of[or whose registered office is situated at] (hereinafter called the Contractor ) of the other part. WHEREAS THE Employer is desirous that the Contractor executes (name and identification number of Contract ) (hereinafter called the Works ) located at [Place/location of the Works]and the Employer has accepted the tender submitted by the Contractor for the execution and completion of such Works and the remedying of any defects therein for the Contract Price of Kshs [Amount in figures],kenya Shillings [Amount in words]. NOW THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSETH as follows: 1. In this Agreement, words and expressions shall have the same meanings as are respectively assigned to them in the Conditions of Contract hereinafter referred to. 2. The following documents shall be deemed to form and shall be read and construed as part of this Agreement i.e. (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) Letter of Acceptance Form of Tender Conditions of Contract Part I Conditions of Contract Part II and Appendix to Conditions of Contract Specifications Drawings Priced Bills of Quantities 3. In consideration of the payments to be made by the Employer to the Contractor as hereinafter mentioned, the Contractor hereby covenants with the Employer to execute and complete the Works and remedy any defects therein in conformity in all respects with the provisions of the Contract. 56

60 4. The Employer hereby covenants to pay the Contractor in consideration of the execution and completion of the Works and the remedying of defects therein, the Contract Price or such other sum as may become payable under the provisions of the Contract at the times and in the manner prescribed by the Contract. IN WITNESS whereof the parties thereto have caused this Agreement to be executed the day and year first before written. The common Seal of Was hereunto affixed in the presence of Signed Sealed, and Delivered by the said Binding Signature of Employer Binding Signature of Contractor In the presence of (i) Name Address Signature [ii] Name Address Signature 57

61 FORM OF TENDER SECURITY WHEREAS..(hereinafter called the Tenderer ) has submitted his tender dated for the construction of (name of Contract) KNOW ALL PEOPLE by these presents that WE having our registered office at (hereinafter called the Bank ), are bound unto (hereinafter called the Employer ) in the sum of Kshs. for which payment well and truly to be made to the said Employer, the Bank binds itself, its successors and assigns by these presents sealed with the Common Seal of the said Bank this. Day of 20 THE CONDITIONS of this obligation are: 1. If after tender opening the tenderer withdraws his tender during the period of tender validity specified in the instructions to tenderers Or 2. If the tenderer, having been notified of the acceptance of his tender by the Employer during the period of tender validity: (a) (b) fails or refuses to execute the form of Agreement in accordance with the Instructions to Tenderers, if required; or fails or refuses to furnish the Performance Security, in accordance with the Instructions to Tenderers; We undertake to pay to the Employer up to the above amount upon receipt of his first written demand, without the Employer having to substantiate his demand, provided that in his demand the Employer will note that the amount claimed by him is due to him, owing to the occurrence of one or both of the two conditions, specifying the occurred condition or conditions. This guarantee will remain in force up to and including thirty (30) days after the period of tender validity, and any demand in respect thereof should reach the Bank not later than the said date. [date[ [signature of the Bank] [witness] [seal] 58

62 PERFORMANCE BANK GUARANTEE To: (Name of Employer) (Date) (Address of Employer) Dear Sir, WHEREAS (hereinafter called the Contractor ) has undertaken, in pursuance of Contract No. dated to execute (hereinafter called the Works ); AND WHEREAS it has been stipulated by you in the said Contract that the Contractor shall furnish you with a Bank Guarantee by a recognised bank for the sum specified therein as security for compliance with his obligations in accordance with the Contract; AND WHEREAS we have agreed to give the Contractor such a Bank Guarantee: NOW THEREFORE we hereby affirm that we are the Guarantor and responsible to you, on behalf of the Contractor, up to a total of Kshs. (amount of Guarantee in figures) Kenya Shillings (amount of Guarantee in words), and we undertake to pay you, upon your first written demand and without cavil or argument, any sum or sums within the limits of Kenya Shillings (amount of Guarantee in words) as aforesaid without your needing to prove or to show grounds or reasons for your demand for the sum specified therein. We hereby waive the necessity of your demanding the said debt from the Contractor before presenting us with the demand. We further agree that no change, addition or other modification of the terms of the Contract or of the Works to be performed thereunder or of any of the Contract documents which may be made between you and the Contractor shall in any way release us from any liability under this Guarantee, and we hereby waive notice of any change, addition, or modification. This guarantee shall be valid until the date of issue of the Certificate of Completion. SIGNATURE AND SEAL OF THE GUARANTOR Name of Bank Address Date 59

63 BANK GUARANTEE FOR ADVANCE PAYMENT To: [name of Employer] (Date) [address of Employer] Gentlemen, Ref: [name of Contract] In accordance with the provisions of the Conditions of Contract of the abovementioned Contract, We, [name and Address of Contractor] (hereinafter called the Contractor ) shall deposit with [name of Employer] a bank guarantee to guarantee his proper and faithful performance under the said Contract in an amount of Kshs. [amount of Guarantee in figurers] Kenya Shillings [amount of Guarantee in words]. We, [bank or financial institution], as instructed by the Contractor, agree unconditionally and irrevocably to guarantee as primary obligator and not as Surety merely, the payment to [name of Employer] on his first demand without whatsoever right of objection on our part and without his first claim to the Contractor, in the amount not exceeding Kshs [amount of Guarantee in figures] Kenya Shillings [amount of Guarantee in words], such amount to be reduced periodically by the amounts recovered by you from the proceeds of the Contract. We further agree that no change or addition to or other modification of the terms of the Contract or of the Works to be performed thereunder or of any of the Contract documents which may be made between [name of Employer] and the Contractor, shall in any way release us from any liability under this guarantee, and we hereby waive notice of any such change, addition or modification. No drawing may be made by you under this guarantee until we have received notice in writing from you that an advance payment of the amount listed above has been paid to the Contractor pursuant to the Contract. This guarantee shall remain valid and in full effect from the date of the advance payment under the Contract until (name of Employer) receives full payment of the same amount from the Contract. Yours faithfully, 60

64 Signature and Seal Name of the Bank or financial institution Address Date Witness: Name: Address: Signature: Date: 61

65 QUALIFICATION INFORMATION 1. Individual Tenderers or Individual Members of Joint Ventures Constitution or legal status of tenderer (attach copy or Incorporation Certificate); Place of registration: Principal place of business Power of attorney of signatory of tender Year Total annual volume of construction work performed in the last five years Volume Currency Value Work performed as Main Contractor on works of a similar nature and volume over the last five years. Also list details of work under way or committed, including expected completion date. Project name Name of client and contact person Type of work performed and year of completion Value of Contract Major items of Contractor s Equipment proposed for carrying out the Works. List all information requested below. Item of Equipment Description, Make and age (years) Condition(new, good, poor) and number available Owned, leased (from whom?), or to be purchased (from whom?) (etc.) 62

66 Qualifications and experience of key personnel proposed for administration and execution of the Contract. Attach biographical data. Position Name Years of experience (general) Project Manager Years of experience in proposed position (etc.) Financial reports for the last five years: balance sheets, profit and loss statements, auditor s reports, etc. List below and attach copies. Evidence of access to financial resources to meet the qualification requirements: cash in hand, lines of credit, etc. List below and attach copies of supportive documents. Name, address and telephone, telex and facsimile numbers of banks that may provide reference if contacted by the Employer. Statement of compliance with the requirements of Clause 1.2 of the Instructions to Tenderers. Proposed program (work method and schedule) for the whole of the Works. 63

67 2 Joint Ventures The information listed in above shall be provided for each partner of the joint venture. The information required in 1.11 above shall be provided for the joint venture. Attach the power of attorney of the signatory(ies) of the tender authorizing signature of the tender on behalf of the joint venture Attach the Agreement among all partners of the joint venture ( and which is legally binding on all partners), which shows that: a) all partners shall be jointly and severally liable for the execution of the Contract in accordance with the Contract terms; b) one of the partners will be nominated as being in charge, authorized to incur liabilities and receive instructions for and on behalf of any and all partners of the joint venture; and c) the execution of the entire Contract, including payment, shall be done exclusively with the partner in charge. 64

68 Please fill in block letters. 1. Full names of tenderer TENDER QUESTIONNAIRE 2. Full address of tenderer to which tender correspondence is to be sent (unless an agent has been appointed below) 3. Telephone number (s) of tenderer 4. Telex address of tenderer 5. Name of tenderer s representative to be contacted on matters of the tender during the tender period 6. Details of tenderer s nominated agent (if any) to receive tender notices. This is essential if the tenderer does not have his registered address in Kenya (name, address, telephone, telex) Signature of Tenderer Make copy and deliver to: (Name of Employer) 65

69 CONFIDENTIAL BUSINESS QUESTIONNAIRE You are requested to give the particulars indicated in Part 1 and either Part 2 (a), 2 (b) or 2 (c) and 2 (d) whichever applies to your type of business. You are advised that it is a serious offence to give false information on this Form. Part 1 General Business Name Location of business premises; Country/Town. Plot No Street/Road Postal Address Tel No.. Nature of Business.. Current Trade Licence No Expiring date Maximum value of business which you can handle at any time: K. pound.. Name of your bankers Branch Part 2 (a) Sole Proprietor Your name in full Age Nationality Country of Origin *Citizenship details Part 2 (b) Partnership Give details of partners as follows: Name in full Nationality Citizenship Details Shares Part 2(c) Registered Company: 66

70 Private or public State the nominal and issued capital of the Company- Nominal Kshs Issued Kshs Give details of all directors as follows: Name in full. Nationality. Citizenship Details*. Shares Part 2(d) Interest in the Firm: Is there any person / persons in (Name of Employer) who has interest in this firm? Yes/No (Delete as necessary) I certify that the information given above is correct. (Title) (Signature) (Date) Attach proof of citizenship 67

71 STATEMENT OF FOREIGN CURRENCY REQUIREMENTS (See Clause 23] of the Conditions of Contract) In the event of our Tender for the execution of (name of Contract) being accepted, we would require in accordance with Clause 21 of the Conditions of Contract, which is attached hereto, the following percentage: (Figures) (Words) of the Contract Sum, (Less Fluctuations) to be paid in foreign currency. Currency in which foreign exchange element is required: Date: The Day of Enter 0% (zero percent) if no payment will be made in foreign currency. Maximum foreign currency requirement shall be the Contract Sum, less Fluctuations. (percent) of (Signature of Tenderer) 68

72 DETAILS OF SUB-CONTRACTORS If the Tenderer wishes to sublet any portions of the Works under any heading, he must give below details of the sub-contractors he intends to employ for each portion. Failure to comply with this requirement may invalidate the tender. (1) Portion of Works to be sublet: [i) (ii) Full name of Sub-contractor and address of head office: Sub-contractor s experience of similar works carried out in the last 3 years with Contract value: (2) Portion of Works to sublet: (i) (ii) Full name of sub-contractor and address of head office: Sub-contractor s experience of similar works carried out in the last 3 years with contract value: [Signature of Tenderer) Date 69

73 LETTER OF NOTIFICATION OF AWARD Address of Procuring Entity To: RE: Tender No. Tender Name This is to notify that the contract/s stated below under the above mentioned tender have been awarded to you. 1. Please acknowledge receipt of this letter of notification signifying your acceptance. 2. The contract/contracts shall be signed by the parties within 30 days of the date of this letter but not earlier than 14 days from the date of the letter. 3. You may contact the officer(s) whose particulars appear below on the subject matter of this letter of notification of award. (FULL PARTICULARS) SIGNED FOR ACCOUNTING OFFICER 70

74 FORM RB 1 REPUBLIC OF KENYA PUBLIC PROCUREMENT ADMINISTRATIVE REVIEW BOARD APPLICATION NO.OF BETWEEN.APPLICANT AND RESPONDENT (Procuring Entity) Request for review of the decision of the (Name of the Procuring Entity) of dated the day of.20.in the matter of Tender No.. of..20 REQUEST FOR REVIEW I/We,the above named Applicant(s), of address: Physical address.fax No Tel. No.. , hereby request the Public Procurement Administrative Review Board to review the whole/part of the above mentioned decision on the following grounds, namely: etc. By this memorandum, the Applicant requests the Board for an order/orders that: etc SIGNED.(Applicant) Dated on.day of / 20 FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Lodged with the Secretary Public Procurement Administrative Review Board on day of SIGNED Board Secretary 71

75 SPECIFICATIONS

76 SECTION V SPECIFICATIONS I. SPECIFICATIONS SECTION V SPECIFICATIONS - BUILDING & CIVIL WORKS PART NO TITLE PAGE 1. GENERAL 2 2. DEMOLITIONS & ALTERATIONS 3 3. EXCAVATIONS & EARTHWORKS 5 4. CONCRETE WORK 8 5. WALLING ROOFING & RAINWATER DISPOSAL CARPENTRY AND JOINERY STRUCTURAL STEELWORK & OTHER METAL FINISHINGS GLAZING PAINTING & DECORATING PLUMBING DRAINAGE 66

77 PART ONE: GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS A. MATERIAL GENERALLY All materials used on the works shall be new and of the qualities and kinds specified herein and equal to approve samples. Deliveries shall be made sufficiently in advance to enable samples to be taken and tested if required. No materials shall be used until approved and all materials which are note approved or which are damaged, contaminated or have deteriorated in any way or do not comply in any way with the requirements of this specification shall be immediately removed from the site at the Contractor s expense. B. MATERIALS FOR WHICH THERE IS A KENYA BUREAU OF STANDARDS SPECIFICATION All materials used in the works for which a Kenya Bureau of Standard Specification has been published shall conform to the latest edition thereof in every way. The Architect reserves the right to demand that the Contractor shall obtain at his own expense a certificate in respect of any material to state that it is in accordance with the Kenya Bureau of Standard Specifications. C. MATERIALS FOR WHICH THERE IS NO KENYA BUREAU OF STANDARDS SPECIFICATION All materials used in the works for which no Kenya Bureau of Standard Specification has been published shall conform to the British Standard Specifications for such material. If there are no published standard as specified for any materials, the quality of such materials shall be generally of a Standard equal to those for which there is a Kenya Bureau of Standard or British Standard Specification. D. ALTERNATIVES TO PROPRIETARY BRANDS Where materials are specified by their proprietary names or where fittings are specified by catalogue numbers, or descriptions, the contractor may offer material or fittings of alternative manufacture which are of equal quality. Such alternatives must be approved before being used in the works and the Contractor shall allow for this, but prior to tendering he may submit to the Architect for approval the names of any suppliers or manufacturers whose products he intends to use, together with catalogue numbers and descriptions and/or samples but the decision of the Architect will be final. E. SAMPLES The Contractor shall furnish for approval, with reasonable promptness all samples of material and workmanship required by the Architect. The Architect shall check and approve such for conformance with the design concept of the works and for compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. The work shall be in accordance with approved samples. (a) (b) (c) (d) All material samples shall be delivered to the Architect s Office with all charges in connection therewith paid by the Contractor. Duplicate final approved samples, in addition to any required for the Contractor s use, shall be furnished to the Architect, one for office use and one for the site. Samples shall be furbished so as not to delay fabrication, allowing the Architect reasonable time for consideration of the sample submitted. Each sample shall be properly labelled with the name and quality of the material, manufacturer s name, name of project, the Contractor s name and the date of submission and the specification number to which the sample refers. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS A MEASUREMENT AND TESTING EQUIPMENT The Contractor shall provide the following equipment for carrying out measuring and control tests on the site and maintain in full working order: (a) Straight edges 2 metres and 4 metres long for testing the accuracy of the finished concrete.

78 (b) A glass graduated cylinder for use in the silt test of organic impurities in the sand. (c) Slump test apparatus (d) 150 mm steel cube moulds with base plates and tamping rod to BS (e) Two 30 metre steel tapes (f) One dumpy or quickset level and staff. (g) Micrometer. PART TWO DEMOLITIONS & ALTERATIONS SPECIFICATIONS DEMOLITIONS AND ALTERATIONS A. DEMOLITIONS Demolitions, taking out and cutting away shall be carefully performed and every precaution shall be taken to ensure the safety of the work. If damage should occur in the carrying out the demolitions or alterations the contractor shall reinstate and make good the same at his own expense. B. PROTECTION Supply, erect and maintain during the cutting of openings etc., all necessary protection to the existing premises against damage by weather or other cases. C. LAYING THE DUST Allow for laying the dust as far as possible during the alteration by watering with a hose or other means D. MAKING GOOD All making good of block work, building up of opening etc., shall be solid block work unless otherwise described, in cement mortar (1:4) properly cut, toothed and bonded and pinned up to existing work and pointed where necessary. E. CREDIT FOR MATERIALS Unless otherwise specified materials arising from the demolitions and alterations will become the property of the contractor. If the Contractor wishes to allow a credit for any such materials the appropriate allowance should be included in the credit column of the Bills of Quantities. In the event that the Employer wishes to take possession of any such materials the contractor will only be entitled to receive compensation to the amount of credit indicated. F. DEFINITIONS OF TERMS The following definitions explain and simplify the terms indicated in the description of the works. Removal shall include: Dismantling/pulling down/taking out/taking up/stripping etc., at the site of the works, getting from the site of the works to the outside of building by whatever means is necessary and disposal. Disposal shall include: Handling on site to store or to pick up point for loading Loading into skips or Lorries Transporting away from site to yard, store or tip Payment of all tip charges. Making out shall include: Infilling to voids, openings, gaps and the like and matching

79 materials and construction to existing Making good shall include: Work as last described consequent on the carrying out of other work. Form opening in brickwork or block work shall include: Shoring up and needling as required Cutting the opening Designing, providing and inserting required beam or lintel and providing any calculations if Required and obtaining building regulation approval. Providing and inserting cavity gutters and the like forming new arches and the like in face work to match existing. Quoining up jambs Sealing cavity of hollow walls, at jambs and cill and providing and inserting damp proof course Making good face work and features to match existing Forming new external sub-cill or sub-thresholds to match existing Making good the plasterwork or other applied finishes including making out into reveals and providing metal angle beads to arises where required. Removing debris. Block in/ Blank off/ Fill in opening in brick work or block work shall include: Carefully cutting out any flooring in opening and levelling and preparing for raising new work Cutting toothing for bonding in new work Filling the opening with brickwork or block work to match existing Making out face work including cutting out arches, cills or ornamentation around the opening and continuing any general face work pattern Wedging and pining to existing soffit Providing and inserting matching damp proof course Making out plasterwork including continuing any existing patterns of labours and making good between new and old work so that after decoration or weathering the original opening cannot be discerned. Remove debris Remove partition shall include: Sorting up if required Sizing, providing and inserting required timber beam if the partition is load bearing Taking off skirting s, picture rails and the like Stripping off lath plaster or other finished and insulation quilts Taking out doors, borrowed lights, hatches and the like, frames, linings and architraves and the like within any area of partitioning to be removed Dismantling and taking studding or framed work Making good plasterwork or other wall and ceiling finishes including cornices and other enrichments Making good or making out floor boarding and any applied finishes Taking out timber skirtings, picture rails and the like and removing debris. Repair roof covering shall include: The term repair as applied to a tiled or slatted roof includes any or all of the following operations as are necessary: Renew broken or missing tiles/slates to match existing including nailing with composition nails securing with copper tingles Re-wedge and repoint flashings and making out with new as required Re-make tile/slate verges or eaves including any bedding and pointing Renew defective or missing ridge or hip tiles Remove debris. Renew roof covering shall include: The term renew roof covering as applied to a tiled or slatted roof includes: lift and afterwards refix flashings, soakers, ridge, hip and valley coverings etc. Strip existing roofing and battens, sort and set aside sound tiles/slates Renew battens and re-lay existing tiles/slates together with new tiles/slates as required all to Match existing including sarking felt underlay whether previously provided or not, and including any special tile/slates to eaves, verges, ridges and valleys Re-wedge and repoint flashings Remove debris The term renew roof covering as applied to a sheet metal, felt or asphalt roof includes:

80 Strip existing roofing Remove sub-base as required Lift and afterwards refix flashing Renew roof covering to match existing Re-wedge and repoint flashings Remove debris. Renew flashings and the like shall include: The terms renew flashings and the like as applied to pitched or flat roofs includes any or all of the following as may be applicable: Strip existing flashings, soakers, gutters, ridge and hop covering Renew all work previously removed in material or similar quality and substance Re-wedge and repoint all new flashings Remove debris. Ease and adjust shall include: The term and adjust as applied to doors, cupboards doors, casement sashes and the like includes: Re-changing on existing hinges Planing edges as necessary Oiling locks and hinges and leaving in working order Overhaul shall include: The term overhaul applied to doors, cupboard doors, casement sashes and the like includes any or all of the following operations as are necessary: Cramp up loose tenon joints and wedge or re-wedge including glueing wedges Piercing in any existing hinges or renewing hinges if required plane edges Plane off protruding tenons Refix ironmongery and locks or renew if required Oil locks and hinges Renew glass where cracked or broken Renew putties where loose, missing or defective Strip existing installation shall include: The term strip existing installation in relation to electrical installation includes: Disconnecting at mains and making safe Disconnecting and taking out all existing conduit, wiring and fittings (except where conduit is to be re-used) Strip existing installations in relation to plumbing and engineering installations shall include: Turning off incoming supplies Disconnecting and taking out all existing appliances, fittings and pipe work Removing defunct pipe clips, fixing and the like Making good walls, floors, ceiling as required Removing debris. PART THREE EXCAVATIONS & EARTHWORKS SPECIFICATIONS EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORKS A. CODES OF PRACTICE The contractor shall comply with the following codes of practice: Site Investigations C.P 2001 Earthworks C.P 2003 Foundations C.P 2004 Protection of building against water from the ground C.P 102 B. INSPECTION OF SITE

81 The contractor is deemed to have visited the site and to have ascertained the nature of the soil and sub-soils to be excavated. No claim will be allowed on account of these being of a different nature from that for which he had allowed in his prices. C. PROCEDURE The excavations and fillings shall be carried out in such a manner and order as the Architect may direct. D. EXISTING TREES SHRUBS AND GRUBBING UP ROOTS (a) Directions Cut down and remove shrubs and trees as directed. No shrubs, trees, plants etc., shall be removed except as directed by the Architect and the contractor shall be held responsible for any damage caused by the building operations to those shrubs, trees etc., not so directed to be removed. (b) Grubbing up roots Grubbing up roots etc. shall include the following and disposal shall be described under the foregoing clause: (1) Stumps and roots of large trees shall be completely removed. (2) Stumps and roots of small trees, bushes or other vegetation shall be completely removed to a depth of at least 600mm below formation. (3) Smaller stumps and roots of vegetation up to 25mm thick shall be completely removed to a depth of 230mm below formation. (4) Fine roots shall be removed to as great depth as is practicable by hand. Except where the area of grubbing is to be excavated, all resulting holes shall be filled up solid with approved material compacted to the same relative density as the surrounding. E. SITE CLEARANCE All grass, vegetable matter etc., must be removed from or burned on site at the commencement of the contract over areas as directed by the Architect. EXCAVATIONS & EARTHWORKS SPECIFICATIONS Excavations (cont d A. WHITE ANT-INSECTICIDE TREATMENT The Contractor must destroy any white ant s nests found within the perimeter of the buildings and within a distance of 20 metres from the buildings externally and take out and destroy queen ants, impregnate holes and tunnels with approved insecticides and back-fill with hard materials well rammed and consolidated. B. EXCAVATION (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) The excavations are to be executed to the widths shown on the Drawings, and to the depth below existing ground levels as directed by the Architect in order to obtain satisfactory foundations. If the contractor excavates to any widths or depths greater than those shown on the drawings or as instructed by the Architect he shall at his own expense fill in such widths or depths of excavation beyond that instructed or shown with concrete to the satisfaction to the Architect. Level and ram bottoms of all excavations to receive concrete, form steppings if necessary or directed to allow for sloping ground, and well water excavations before pouring concrete. The contractor shall report to the Architect when secure bottoms to the excavations have been obtained. Any concrete of other work executed before the excavations have been inspected and approved shall, if so directed, be removed and new work substituted after the excavations gave been approved all at the contractor s expense. Excavations made below required levels shall be filled with mass concrete (1:4:8) at the Contractor s expense.

82 C. ROCK (a) Definition Rock is defined as any material met within the excavation which is of such size or position that it can only be removed by means of wedges, compressed air plant, or other special plant and the Architects opinion shall be final. (b) Other materials to be taken with normal excavations Excavations in any material such as compacted murram, soft tuff, stiff clay or similar materials which in the opinion of the Architect can reasonably, be removed by pick, excavator or similar, means will be deemed to be included in the prices of normal excavation. D. BLASTING No blasting will be permitted without the prior approval of the Architect and local Authority. E. BORROW PITS Borrow pits will only be allowed to be opened up on the site on receipt of permission from the Architect. F. HARDCORE FILLING Hardcore for filling under floors etc., shall be good hard stone, ballast or quarry waste (not magadi or similar soft stone) to the approval of the Architect broken to pass not greater than a 150mm ring or to be 75% of the finished thickness of the layers being compacted whichever is the lesser and graded to contain sufficient smaller pieces to fill all voids so that it can be thoroughly compacted. The filling is to be laid in layers each of a consolidated thickness not exceeding 225mm and well watered and compacted by hand of mechanical tampers. The top surface of the hardcore shall be levelled or graded to falls as required and blinded with a 75 mm layer of similar material finely crushed and well rolled and watered immediately before concrete is laid. A. FILLING OBTAINED FROM THE EXCAVATIONS Filling obtained from surplus excavated materials is to be free from all weeds, roots, vegetable or other unsuitable materials and is to be filled in layers each of not more than 225 mm finished thickness. Each layer to be well watered and consolidated before the subsequent layer is filled in. B. MATERIALS FOUND IN THE EXCAVATIONS No sand, aggregate or other materials found in the excavations is to be used in the works without the written permission of the Architect. C. INSECTICIDE / ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT The top surface of all filling shall be treated with an approved chemical treatment, applied in accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions. The approved specialist treatment shall include a ten year guarantee against termites. D. PROTECTION OF PIPES, CABLES ETC. Before commencing works which include excavations or ground levelling by manual or mechanical excavation the contractor shall at his expense ascertain in writing from the Post Office, K.P. & L. Co. Ltd., Engineer s Department (water & sewers section) and all other public bodies, companies and persons who may be affected, the positions and depths of their respective ducts, cables mains or pipes and appurtenances. He shall thereupon search for and locate such services. The contractor shall at his own expense effectually prop, protect, underpin, alter, divert, restore and make good as may be necessary all pipes, cables or ducts, poles or wires and their appurtenance disturbed or damaged during the progress of the works, or in consequence thereof. Except that such services as required to be removed or altered by virtue of the layout of the permanent work and not the manner in which the work is carried out, shall be so removed or altered at the expense of the Employer. The contractor shall be liable for the cost of repairs to any services damaged as a result of carrying out the works and shall further be liable for any damage which may be shown during the period of maintenance, to have arisen through the execution of these works.

83 The rates for excavation, including excavation in rock, must include for trimming, levelling and preparing bottoms and all faces to receive concrete, etc., and for and extra excavation required for planking and strutting. Prices shall include for excavating in any material encountered unless specifically otherwise described, handling, etc., of extra bulk after excavating, or before consolidating, any extra excavation required for formwork or planking and strutting, circular work, grubbing up any old drains, roots, etc., that may be encountered, for trimming sides and levelling and ramming bottoms, forming steppings and trimming excavation or filling of embankments and batters as required. In his price for the item, keep excavations free from all water, the contractor shall allow and make provision for keeping the whole of the work thoroughly drained and clear of water below the lowest level of any part of them so long as may be required and if considered necessary by the Architect, continuously day and night by petrol or hand pumps or other mechanical appliances, pipes, chutes, dams, manholes, sumps, diversions or any other means necessary for the purpose. Water pumped from the trenches shall be allowed to run down the road channels but shall be conveyed to the nearest surface water sewer, ditch or river through troughs, chutes or pipes. E. RATES OF DISPOSAL Rates of disposal of excavated material are to include for the selection of spoil as it arises and for all double handling and re-excavation from spoil heaps not specifically ordered by the Architect. A. POLYTHENE SHEETING Polythene sheeting shall be 1000 gauge or as described obtained from an approved manufacturer. Joints in sheeting shall be treble folded with 150 mm fold and taped at 300 mm intervals with 50 mm wide black plastic adhesive tape as manufactured by cello tape limited. The sheeting shall not be laid loose with sufficient wrinkles to permit shrinkage up to 15%. B. GRASSED AREAS PART FOUR Areas to be grassed shall be cleared of all debris and roots and dug up to a depth of 300 mm. Where outcrops of rock or murram occur, these will be covered with suitable soil to a depth of 150 mm. CONCRETE WORK SPECIFICATIONS CONCRETE WORK GENERAL A. AUTHORITATIVE STANDARDS AND CODES OF PRACTICE The following authoritative standards are referred to hereinafter: British Standard Specifications are published by the British Standards Institutions 2 Park Street London W.1, England (Abbreviated in text to BS) BS Date Title 12:Pt Portland cement (ordinary and rapid hardening) Methods for sampling and testing of mineral aggregates, sand and fillers 882, 1201: Pt Aggregate from natural sources for concrete (including granolithic) 1881: Methods of testing concrete 1926: 1962 Ready mixed concrete 2499: 1973 Hot applied joint sealants for concrete pavements 3148: 1959 Tests for water for making concrete

84 3921: 1974 Clay bricks and blocks Truck type concrete mixers 4449: 1969 Hot rolled steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete Cold worked steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete Bending dimensions and scheduling of bars for the reinforcement of concrete Steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete American society for Testing and Materials Standard as published by the American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race St., Philadelphia PA 19103, U.S.A (abbreviated in text to ASTM) ASTM Date Tile C88-73 Soundness of Aggregates by use of Sodium sulphate C Comparing Concretes on the basis of the Bond development with Reinforcement steel C Potential Reactivity of Aggregates (Chemical Method) The following codes of practice are referred to hereinafter: The British Standard Codes of Practice published by the Council of Codes of Practice, British Standards Institution 2 Park St, London W.I England (Abbreviated in text to C.P) C.P Date Title 110:Pt.1,2 & The structural use of concrete 116:Pt Structural use of precast concrete BS 5337: 1969 The structural use of concrete for retaining aqueous liquids Should the Contractor wish to substitute any other authoritative standard or code of practice for any listed above he should submit details of any such together with two complete copies to the Engineer for approval with his Tender. Approval will only be given to the use of such standards where the Engineer considers the proposed standard or code of practice will give a quality or finished work equal to or better than the specified standard. All insitu concrete shall be in accordance with CP 110 except where superseded by this Specification. All precast concrete shall be in accordance with CP 116 except where superseded by this specification. A. BENDING SCHEDULES The Engineer will issue bar bending schedules in accordance with BS The Contractor should check these against the drawings before any cutting bending or construction involving the schedule is started. Any discrepancy should be reported to the Engineer immediately for his clarification. The contractor shall be responsible for any delays or additional work caused solely by his failure to check the schedules. B. APPROVALS Well before construction commences the Contractor shall supply to the Engineer for his approval details of his proposed layouts of concreting plant and on site workshop; details of formwork systems and the construction devices, e.g., cranes, chutes, scaffolding, which he proposes to use for the structural work. The information is to be sufficiently detailed to enable the Engineer to approve or otherwise.

85 The Contractor should note that further approvals are required by the Specification before construction starts. The contractor is wholly responsible for obtaining these approvals and no claim for delays will be entertained due to the contractor s failure to obtain such approvals in adequate time. CONCRETE WORK SPECIFICATIONS MATERIALS A. CEMENT Cement, unless otherwise specified, shall be ordinary Portland Cement complying with BS12. The contractor shall obtain a manufacturer s certificate of test in accordance with the appropriate standard for each consignment of cement delivered to the site and shall immediately forward copies of the same to the Engineer for his retention. Notwithstanding the manufacturer s certificate the Engineer may require that any cement delivered to the site be sampled and tested. Any batch so tested which fails to comply with this specification will be rejected. All cement shall be delivered to the site in the original sealed bags of the manufacturer or in approved bulk containers. Cement, unless delivered in bulk, shall be stored in a weatherproof shed, the floor of which shall be raise d at least 150 mm above the ground to allow free air circulation. Cement delivered in bulk shall be stored in a weatherproof silo. All cement shall at all times be protected from deterioration. Each consignment of cement shall be kept separate, identified and used in order of delivery. No two types of cement shall be used in combination. Any cement which upon inspection is considered by the Engineer to have deteriorated in any way will be rejected. B. AGGREGATES OF CONCRETE Aggregates for concrete shall, unless otherwise specified, be aggregates from natural sources complying with BS 882. Additionally, the flakiness index when determined by the sieve method described in BS 812 Shall not exceed 35 for any size of concrete aggregate. Fine aggregate within or finer than zone 4 of BS 882 shall not be used. When tested for soundness in accordance with ASTM Test C the loss of weight after 5 cycles shall not exceed 5 percent for any aggregate. Aggregate which is potentially reactive when tested in accordance with ASTM Test C for the alkali aggregate reaction -shall not be used. The standard for acceptance being that test shall plot to the left of the solid which is shown in figure 2 of the test standard. Well before any concreting work, the Contractor shall forward to the Engineer for approval details of his proposed source of supply of aggregate giving the aggregate group classification and typical physical properties as required by BS 882. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a certificate for his retention showing that all aggregate regularly comply with the requirements of his Specification. The Engineer may require that any aggregate be tested for soundness in accordance with ASTM Test C88-73 before giving approval to any proposed source of supply. The Engineer may require that any aggregate be tested for potential reactivity in accordance with ASTM Test C Notwithstanding any certificate of compliance, the Engineer may at any time require that any aggregate delivered to the site be sampled and tested. Any aggregate so tested which fails to comply with this specification will be rejected. Coarse aggregate shall be delivered ready screened or screened on site separate nominal single sizes within the limits given in BS 882. Aggregates of different sizes of types shall be stored in different hoppers or different stockpiles or approved well drained paved areas which shall be separated from each other. Stockpiles shall be protected against contamination from any source.

86 Any aggregate which has become contaminated or which does not conform to the above requirements may be rejected by the Engineer. A. WATER FOR USE WITH CEMENT Water for use in mixing with cement or for curing concrete shall be from any approved source, clean, fresh and free from organic and other deleterious matter. The Engineer may require that any water be sampled and tested by the method given in BS Water failing the criteria given in the appendix to BS 3148 will be rejected. Water for use in mixing with cement shall neither be hotter than 25 degrees centigrade (77 degrees Fahrenheit) nor colder than 5 degrees centigrade (41 degrees Fahrenheit) at the time of mixing. B. STEEL ROD REINFORCEMENT Steel rod reinforcement shall consist of: (a) Mild steel bar complying with BS 4449 or KS (b) Hot rolled high yield bars complying with BS (c) Cold worked high yield bars complying with BS 4461 as described in the drawing. Where cold worked high yield bars are to be used these shall be square twisted bars formed by a torsion controlled process. The contractor shall obtain a manufacturer s certificate of test in accordance with the appropriate standard for each steel batch relating to reinforcement delivered to site and shall immediately forward copies of the same to the Engineer for his retention. Where hot rolled high yield deformed bar are to be used the results of bond tests to ASTM , using concrete of the same quality as that to be used in the works, shall be forwarded to the Engineer. Notwithstanding the manufacturer s certificate, the Engineer may require that any reinforcement delivered to the site be sampled and tested. Any reinforcement so sampled and tested which fails to comply with this specification will be rejected. All reinforcement shall be stored in clean conditions in an orderly manner to the satisfaction of the Engineer such that the batch to which each piece belongs can be readily identified. C STEEL FABRIC REINFORCEMENT Steel fabric reinforcement shall be electrically cross welded steel mesh reinforcement complying with BS 4483 and of the size and weight specified and made of wire to B.S D TYING WIRE Tying wire for fixing reinforcement shall be either: (a) No. 16 gauge soft annealed iron wire, or (b) No. 18 gauge stainless steel wire. E SPACERS Spacers block required for ensuring that the reinforcement is correctly positioned shall be as small as possible consistent with their purpose, of a shape acceptance to the Engineer, and designed so that they will not overturn when the concrete is placed. Unless otherwise approved they shall be made of concrete with 10 mm maximum aggregate size and mix proportions to produce the same strength as the adjacent concrete. Wire shall be cast in the block for the purpose of typing it to the reinforcement. Spacer block of concrete shall not be used until at least 7 days old. CONCRETE WORK SPECIFICATIONS A. ADMIXTURES

87 No admixtures or cements containing additives shall be used in concrete unless specified or approved by the engineer. Such approval will not be given unless in the Engineer s opinion specific benefit to the density or quality of the concrete will result. B. WALL TIES Wall Ties between concrete and adjoining block or block walling shall be Abbey slots and anchors as supplied by Abbey Building supplies Ltd or similar approved. C. JOINT FILLERS Joint fillers unless otherwise stated shall be flexcell as manufactured by Expandite Ltd, or similar approved and placed in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions. D. JOINT SEALANTS Joint sealants shall be as described in the drawings and approved by the Engineer. Sealant shall be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions. E. HOLLOW CLAY POTS Pots shall be burnt clay blocks conforming to BS 3921 or similar approved. They shall be true to shape and free from cracks or distortion. F WATER STOPS Water stops unless otherwise stated shall be. Sika waterbar. As manufactured by Sika International or similar approved and placed and jointed in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions. WORKMANSHIP G. FIXING STEEL REINFORCEMENT Reinforcement shall be bent accurately in accordance with BS 4466 to the shape and dimensions shown in the schedules. All reinforcement shall be bent at temperatures in the range of 5 and 100 degrees centigrade. Cold worked or any high yield bars shall not be straightened or bent again once having been bent. When it is necessary to bend mild steel reinforcement already cast in the concrete the internal diameter of such bends shall be not less than twice the diameter of the bar. No welding of reinforcement shall be carried out without the approval of the Engineer. All reinforcement shall at the time of concreting be free from mud, oil mortar droppings, loose rust, paint grease, mill scale or other deleterious still blue from the mill shall not be used. All reinforcement shall be fixed in the position shown on the Drawings by the adequate use of spacers, tying wires, chairs, stools etc., and shall be so maintained during the concreting operations. Laps in reinforcement shall be where indicated on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer. Unless otherwise indicated the minimum lap length for rod reinforcement shall be 40 diameters and for mesh reinforcement two complete meshes. A steel fixer shall be in attendance at all times when concreting is in progress to correct any errors, omissions or movement in the reinforcement. In severe test conditions reinforcement shall be shaded from direct sunlight and hosed down with clean water prior to concreting to keep the reinforcement below 25 degrees centigrade (77 degrees Fahrenheit). (a) Nominal Concrete Cover to Reinforcement Unless otherwise directed the nominal concrete cover to steel reinforcing bars (including links and distribution) in any face shall be:- Foundations against earth face Foundation against blinding Columns (main bars) Slabs and stairs Wall (main bars) 20mm 75mm 50mm 40mm 20mm

88 The tolerance on placing of bars achieve nominal cover 5mm A FORMWORK Formwork shall include all temporary or permanent forms required for forming the concrete, together with all temporary construction required for their support. All formwork shall be so constructed that there shall be no loss of material from the concrete. After hardening the concrete shall be in the position and of the sample, dimensions, and surface finish described in this specification or on the Drawings. Where internal metal ties are permitted they or their removable parts shall be extracted without damage to the concrete and the remaining holes filled with mortar. No permanently embedded metal part shall have less cover than that indicated for adjacent steel reinforcement. When holes are to be provided in formwork for weep holes and the like they shall be neatly trimmed to fit the pipe and caulked with the approved material to form a grout tight joint. When concrete is to be deposited to a steeper slope than 15 degrees to the horizontal top forms shall be used to enable the concrete to be properly compacted. The Engineer may require details and/or calculations of any proposed formwork to be submitted for approval prior to work starting. Such approval if given shall not in any way relieve the contractor of his responsibilities for the safety or adequacy of such for its purposes. The inside surfaces of forms, except for permanent formwork, or unless agreed by the Engineer, shall be coated with an approved material to prevent adhesion of the concrete. Such approved material shall be applied strictly and shall not come into contact with reinforcement or other cast-in items. Immediately before concreting all forms shall be thoroughly cleaned out. In the case of deep sections an opening shall be left at the base to enable such cleaning to be adequately completed. In the case of beams, slabs of like members the formwork shall be so arranged that the sides or edges may be removed without disturbance to the soffit or propping system. The erection, easing and striking of the formwork shall be done under the personal supervision of a competent foreman. Formwork shall be struck at such a time and in such a manner as to cause no damage to the structure. The contractor shall inform the Engineer before he intends to strike any formwork. The time at which the formwork is struck shall be the contractor s responsibility but the minimum periods between the completion of any concreting bay and the removal of forms shall be as follows: Vertical formwork Soffits to beams Soffits to slabs Cantilevers 24 hours 21 days 14 days 28 days The periods given above are based on the removal of all props and formwork using ordinary Portland cement under average weather conditions or different cement may cause the above periods to be increased. Should the contractor wish to make use of reduced striking times then he must satisfy the engineer that the strength of the concrete at such time and the structural system is adequate to withstand the dead and imposed loads applied to it. Before making use of reduced striking times the Engineer s agreement must be obtained in writing. Where the structure is of multi storey construction props with head trees and braces shall be provided to distribute the imposed load below the floor being cast. This will normally be 2 storey height below the floor being cast unless otherwise stated. Where sawn formwork finish is specified or in all cases where no alternative finish is specified the surface of the concrete shall be not worse then that obtained by the use of properly designed moulds of closed jointed sawn boards. Small surface blemishes caused by entrapped air will be permitted but the surface should be free of voids, honeycombs or other defects. Where fair faced finish is specified the irregularities of the finish shall be no greater than those obtained from the use of wrought thickened square edge boards arranged in a uniform pattern. The concrete surface shall be smooth, free from fins, lippings, board marks or other irregularities, and even with sharp true arises. Only very minor blemishes or voids shall occur and there shall be no staining or discolouration. The finish is intended to be left as struck and the only treatment generally permitted is light manual abrasion with a carborundum stone to remove minor marks. Patching of any description will not normally be permitted.

89 Where a fair faced finish or other finish part from sawn formwork finish is specified the contractor shall provide a sample panel at least 2.4mxl.2m in vertical surface area including a typical horizontal and vertical joint in the shuttering. The sample panel shall be constructed using the system of shuttering and the construction techniques that the contractor proposes for the actual works. The sample when approved will form the standard for the entire works. All unsuccessful samples shall be removed from the site. Should any concrete in the works in the opinion of the Engineer fail to match the standard sample in surface finish then the Engineer may for this sole reason order the removal of all such substandard concrete which shall be replaced with acceptable concrete all at the contractor s expense. When the striking of formwork would in the opinion of the Engineer cause damage to or prejudice the safety of the structure the formwork shall be left in. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the necessity for leaving in the formwork arises from the contractor s method of working then the cost shall be borne by the contractor, but if it is due to circumstances beyond his control then formwork shall be paid for at rates to be agreed. A. CONSTRUCTION, CONTRACTION AND EXPANSION JOINTS Construction joints will be permitted only at the positions shown on the Drawings and as instructed on the site by the engineer. These joints will in general be spaced to allow a maximum plan area for any bay of 100 sq.m. of maximum length of 12 m in any one dimension. Vertical construction joints shall be properly made to form a vertical grout tight joint. Where reinforcement passes through the face of the joint the stopping off board shall be drilled so that the bars pass through, or the board shall be made in sections with half round indentation in the joint faces for each bar. Under no circumstances shall concrete when being deposited be allowed to, tail off. Construction joints formed with expanded metal or similar will not be permitted for reinforced concrete work. At all construction joints, both horizontal and vertical the surface of the already placed concrete shall be suitably roughened to remove laitance and by exposing the coarse aggregate form a key for adjacent concrete. This work shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the Engineer by the following or other approved method: (a) (b) After the initial set has taken place but before final set of coarse aggregate shall be exposed by the use of a water jet and brushing After final set has taken place the laitance shall be removed and coarse aggregate shall be exposed by bush hammering or chiselling. In both cases the surface is to be thoroughly cleaned after roughening. At least 72 hours shall be left between completion of concreting one bay and the start of concreting any adjacent bay. Contraction joints shall be formed as detailed where shown on the drawings. Expansion joints shall be formed as detailed at the positions shown on the drawings. B. CONCRETE MIXES - DESIGNS MIX Mixes for each class of concrete specified or shown on the drawings shall be designed by the contractor to achieve the specified minimum cube strength combined with high density and adequate workability for the purpose. In order to allow for unavoidable variation the design strength should exceed the specified works cube strength by twice the expected standard deviation. In the absence of previous information a standard deviation of 7MN/M2 should be assumed. Details of any proposed mix design shall be forwarded to the Engineer not less than 60 days before that class of concrete is required to be used on the work for his approval in principle. The details shall include at least the following information:- (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) Source nature and grading of coarse and fine aggregate. Source of cement Nominal maximum size of aggregate Cement content Aggregate/Cement ratio Water/Cement ratio Design density Design slump or compacting factor Design strength

90 Classes of concrete will be referred to by the minimum 28 days work cube strength and the maximum size of aggregate. Classes of concrete shall meet the criteria shown in Table I. The maximum water/cement ratio is herein defined as the ratio of the weight of the free water to the weight of the cement. The free water is that quality of water available for cement. Any water required to be absorbed by aggregate is excluded. The workability of the concrete shall be the minimum consistent with producing a dense, well compacted mass. Due regard shall be paid to size and shape of the section together with any congestion of reinforcement. After the Engineer has approved a design mix in principle the contractor shall prepare a trial mix on site using the plant and materials intended for the works. Each batch of concrete shall be sampled and the following prepared, in accordance with BS1881: (a) (b) (c) nine 150 mm cubes, three for test at 7 days, three for test at 14 days and three for test at 28 days; and three slump tests or where the design slump is less than 25 mm then three compacting factor tests. No structural concrete shall be placed in the works until the Engineer has approved the preliminary tests. Thereafter, the approved mix proportions shall be adhered to throughout the work and may only be varied with the prior approval of the Engineer. A. CONCRETE MIXES - NOMINAL MIXES Mixes for each class of concrete specified of shown on the Drawings shall be used by the contractor. They shall be mixed to achieve high density combined with adequate workability for the purpose. Details of any proposed mix shall be forwarded to the Engineer not less than 5 days before that class of the concrete is required to be used on the works for his approval in principle. Classes of concrete will be referred to by their nominal mix proportions. Classes of concrete shall meet the criteria show in Table II. The workability of the concrete shall be the minimum consistent with producing a dense, well compacted mass. Due regard shall be paid to the size and shape of the section together with any congestion of reinforcement. The Engineer may at his discretion require preliminary tests of concrete quality for nominal mixes unless satisfactory evidence of strength is produced from reliable sources. Where required, these tests shall be in accordance with BS B. CONCRETE MIXES - GENERAL The standard of acceptance of any preliminary tests will be similar to the standard for normal works cubes, slump or compacting factor, except that the minimum cube strengths required shall be those given Minimum Preliminary cube strength at 28 days in Table I or II. For all structural concrete the following representative samples shall be taken and tested in accordance with BS One each day on which less than 50 cu.m of concrete is being poured: (a) Six 150mm cubes - three for test at 7 days and three for test at 28 days; and (b) (c) Two slump tests; or Two compacting factor tests On any day when greater qualities of concrete are being poured then six additional cube tests and two additional slump or compacting factor tests shall be carried out for each 50 cu.m or part thereof. All cubes shall be marked with the date of casting and a reference number. For each cube a record shall be kept of the position in which the batch of concrete from which it was sampled was placed. All cubes shall be tested by an approved testing authority. The concrete cubes tested at 7 days are intended to be indicative only and the target works strengths at 7 days given in Table I are not normally mandatory. It should be noted however, that it is unlikely that cubes failing the 7 days target will subsequently pass the 28 days cube strength. The concrete cubes tested 28 days shall be taken to represent the concrete placed in the works. The standard of acceptance for cube strength tests shall be as follows:

91 The cube strength shall be calculated from the maximum load sustained by the cube at failure. The appropriate strength requirements as given in Table I, shall be considered to be satisfied if (a) (b) None of the strength of the three cubes is below the specified cube strength, or if The average strength of the three cubes is not less than the specified cube strength and the difference between the greatest and the least strengths is not more than 20 percent of that average. The standard of acceptance for the slump test during the production of concrete shall be the design slump +/- 25mm. The standard of acceptance for the compaction factor test during the production of concrete shall be design compacting factor +/ Any concrete which fail to meet the above standards of acceptance shall be either further tested or condemned at the Engineer s sole discretion. Any such tests or the removal of condemned concrete, replacement and associated costs shall be at the contractor s expense. If the strengths required are not attained or maintained throughout the contract will also be required to redesign the mix and resubmit trial mixes in accordance with clause of this specification so as to give a concrete which does comply with requirements of this specification. Mass concrete shall normally be a 1:3:6 mix unless otherwise specified. Blinding concrete shall normally be a 1:4:8 mix unless otherwise specified. A. READY MIXED CONCRETE Ready mixed concrete shall be used only with the approval of the Engineer. When such approval is given it shall be supplied in accordance with BS 1926 except where this conflicts with this specification shall prevail. Truck mixer units and their mixing and discharge performance shall comply with the requirements of BS The use of ready mixed concrete shall not relieve the contractor of any of his obligations and the appropriate clauses of this specification shall apply equally to the ready mixed concrete. Concrete test cubes and slump tests shall be taken on the site at the point and time of discharge in accordance with this specification irrespective of any cubes that the supplier may take at his own works. B. MIXING AND TRANSPORTING CONCRETE All materials for concrete shall be measured by weight in approved weight batching equipment. Such equipment shall be checked at weekly intervals at the contractor s expense and shall be accurate to within 2 percent. Certificates of accuracy shall be submitted immediately to the Engineer. All concrete shall be mixed in approved power driven mixers of a type and capacity suitable for the work. The mixers shall be checked at weekly intervals at the contractor s expense. Certificates of accuracy shall be submitted immediately to the Engineer. All materials shall be thoroughly mixed before water is added and the mixing of each batch shall continue for a period of not less than two minutes after the water is added or such longer period as recommended by the manufacturer of the mixer. The mixture shall be of uniform colour and distribution on discharge and the entire contents of the mixer shall be discharged before recharging. The volume of mixed material shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer. Mixers shall at all times be kept in a clean condition. Prior to the first mix each day bei ng agitated in the mixer a rich cement/sand mix shall be used to cast the inside of the drum, the surplus material being emptied away and not used in the works. The moisture content of the coarse and fine aggregate shall be checked by the contractor at frequent intervals and the amount of water added to the mix adjusted to maintain the design workability. Concrete shall be discharged from the mixer onto a clean, level, water-tight platform or into a clean watertight container. It shall be transported in a manner which ensures that it is of the correct quality and consistency at the point of deposition. All platforms and containers shall be cleaned of the old concrete before the fresh concrete is discharged onto them. Concrete shall not be dropped from a height, thrown or otherwise treated so that segregation, undesirable finish, or defective structure quality results.

92 No extra water shall be added to the concrete mix after it has left the mixer. The concrete shall take adequate precautions to protect concrete in transit from the effects of the weather. Pumping of concrete, which will require a special design mix, will only be permitted with the approval of the Engineer. Should the concreting be stopped due to mechanical malfunction, accident, or other similar cause then the contractor shall inform the Engineer immediately so that necessary measures and precautions can be taken. The cost of any additional work by these stoppages shall be the responsibility of the contractor. A. PLACING AND COMPACTING CONCRETE All concrete shall be vibrated unless otherwise specified. The vibration shall be carried out by experienced operators and with immersion type vibrators to the Engineer s satisfaction. Placing of concrete shall be carried out in layers not exceeding 60mm deep and in sequence from one end of the form to the other. Concrete in foundation and other underground work shall be protected from contamination with fallen earth or rock during and after placing. Any concrete which shows signs of initial setting before or during placing shall not be used, it shall be removed at the contractor s expense. Sufficient vibrators shall be provided to correspond with the rate of deposition of concrete. The vibration shall be continuous throughout the placing of the concrete. Standby vibrators shall be on site during all concrete placing. Vibration must not be allowed to disturb any recently placed concrete that has begun to set. Any water accumulating on the surface of newly placed concrete shall be removed by approved means and no further concrete shall be placed thereon until such water is removed. Suitable means shall be provided to ensure that the temperature of the concrete on placing does not exceed 30 degrees centigrade (86 degrees Fahrenheit). Concrete shall not be placed around reinforcement or against surfaces which are at temperatures above 30 degrees centigrade (86 degrees Curing and protecting concrete Fahrenheit). All surfaces shall be thoroughly damped immediately prior to placing fresh concrete to prevent excessive absorption of water. B. UNFORMED FINISHES FOR CONCRETE Where a concrete surface is specified for receiving a further applied finish or in all cases where no other finish is specified the concrete shall be uniformly levelled and screeded to produce a ridged surface. No further work shall be applied to the surface. Where a concrete surface is specified as exposed with no further applied finish the concrete shall be uniformly levelled and screeded to produce a plain surface. After the concrete has hardened sufficiently, the surface shall be hand or machine floated sufficiently only to produce a uniform surface free from screed marks. C. CURING AND PROTECTING CONCRETE Immediately after compacting and for 7 days thereafter concrete shall be protected against harmful effects of weather including rain, rapid temperatures changes, and from drying out. The methods of protection used shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The method of curing used shall prevent loss of moisture from the concrete. During the curing period horizontal surfaces shall be protected by the following or other approved means: (a) (b) (c) Covering with damp hessian canvas sacks or similar absorbent materials kept constantly damp and wholly covering the exposed concrete surface. Covering with an impermeable material raised approximately 50mm over the surface so to prevent loss of moisture An approved membrane curing compound. During the curing period other surfaces shall be protected by the following or other approved means: (a) (b) Formwork in close contact with the concrete but kept cool at all times. Direct and continuous application of water preferably in the form of mist so as not to

93 damage the surface. (c) Covering as (a) to (c) above All concrete faces or edges, particularly those which are exposed without rendering in the final structure, shall be adequately protected from damage and discolouration at all times. Concrete structures shall not be loaded until the concrete is at least 21 days old or 28 days in the case of cantilevers. With the prior approval of the Engineer the structure may be loaded after this time but in no case will loading greater than the final design loading be permitted. A. TOLERANCE All in situ concrete work shall be dimensionally accurate to within the following tolerances: (a) Between the centre line of principal members columns or beams +/- 5mm up to 15 metres c/c +/- 10mm over 15 metres c/c (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Note the +/- 10mm tolerance shall not be accumulative. In storey height +/- 5mm floor to floor In plumbness of columns and walls +/-10mm on any storey or overall the structure In level of floors +5mm/- 3mm of the true prescribed horizontal surface level. In cross sectional dimensions of column beams and walls +5mm/-3mm in any dimension up to 2 metres overall Cover to reinforcement +5mm/-0 of the stated covers B. MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS Holes, chases, indentations and the like shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings. All such shal l be formed in the concrete and not cut after the concrete has hardened. Should the contractor or any sub-contractor require additional hoes or the like these requirements shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval prior to concreting. Pipes, conduits, fixing bolts and other such cast-in items shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings. Should the contractor or any sub-contractor require additional cast-in items these requirements shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval prior to concreting. Hollow pots shall be laid in the position shown on the Drawings, care being taken to ensure that the units maintain the full specified rib widths throughout. The gaps between adjacent units shall not exceed 3mm. c. PRECAST CONCRETE The materials for precast work shall be similar to the materials for in situ work. The workmanship for precast work shall comply with CP 116 except where this conflicts with this specification when the specification shall prevail. The contractor shall prepare, for each type of precast unit, a drawing indicating his proposed formwork construction, casting methods, de-moulding and handling procedure for the Engineer s approval. Moulds and formwork shall be so constructed that the dimensions of the finished concrete members are within the specified permissible tolerance given clause 407 of CP 116: part 2:1969. Where precast concrete is described as fair faced the mould shall be of metal, or are to have metal or hardboard linings, or are to be other approved moulds which will produce a smooth, dense fair face to the finished concrete and free from all shutter marks, holes, pitings, etc. Precast concrete shall be made of the mixes described on the drawings in suitable moulds, true in form to the shapes required thoroughly tamped into the moulds and around reinforcement and vibrated. All precast work shall be carried out under cover and the period before removal from forms and the period of storing shall be determined and agreed by the Engineer and contractor with due regard to the type of unit, i.e. load bearing or non-load bearing, difficulties of casting, projections, holes and other points which require particular attention.

94 The method of lifting, position of lifting points and curing time before lifting shall be agreed with the Engineer before casting of any units. Extreme care should be taken when handling precast units and any units damaged during the transporting and/ or positioning shall be replaced at the contractor s expense. A. CONCRETE FOR WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES Concrete and its constituents for water retaining structures, in addition to the general and particular provisions in this specification shall comply with the following requirements in this section. In addition to the requirements of clause 4.5 aggregates for concrete in water retaining structures shall have a low drying shrinkage and absorption, as measured in accordance with BS 812 not greater than 3 percent. The Engineer may before approval is given to an aggregate or at any time thereafter require that the aggregate be tested for absorption in accordance with BS 812. Any aggregate failing to comply with this specification will be rejected. In addition to the requirements of clause 4.20 concrete for the water retaining structures shall have a maximum cement content of 400 kg/m3. Blinding concrete under water retaining structures shall be a maximum of 75 mm thick and shall be in class 15/40 concrete. Class 15/40 concrete shall comply with the following requirements:- Minimum works cube strength at 28 days 15MN/M2 Maximum size of aggregate Mix proportions 1 cement: 2.5 fine aggregate: 5 course aggregate 40mm This is a nominal mix and no cubes will be required to be taken. For water retaining structures the provisions of clause 4.19 paragraph are modified. The construction joints will in general be spaced to allow a maximum plan area for any bay of 40 sq.m or maximum lengths of 7.5m in any one dimension. For water retaining structures the provisions of clause 4.19 paragraph five are modified. At least 96 hours shall be left between completion of concreting one bay and the start of concreting any adjacent bay. A kicker of minimum height 150mm shall be cast integrally with the base slab for all water retaining structures. The surface of all concrete for water retaining structures shall not be permitted to dry out even after the 7 days curing period specified in clause All pipes passing through concrete walls or slabs for water retaining structures shall be cast in at the time of concreting and not subsequently fitted. All such pipes shall be provided with a puddle flange fitted to form a seal against the pipe and of an outside diameter 20mm greater than the outside diameter of the pipe. Joint sealants shall be applied not less than 7 days after completion of the structure. On completion of the water structure at a time decided by the Engineer it shall be tested for water-tightness in the following manner. Structures which are elevated shall be filled at a uniform rate not exceeding 1 metre rise in head per 24 hours and allowed to absorb water for 3 days. After this period the water level shall be brought up to the top water level and left for 7 days. During this period the exposed faces shall show no sign of leakage and shall remain apparently dry. Structures founded on or in the ground shall be tested prior to backfilling unless otherwise stated. The structure shall be filled as specified above. After filling to top water level no further water shall be introduced for the next 7 days. The structure will be deemed to be watertight if at the expiration of this time the total drop in surface level does not exceed 10mm after making due allowance for evaporation and absorption and no signs of leakage are observed. Water for testing shall be provided at the contractor s expense. If the structure fails the test above any defects shall be made good or such taken to eliminate leakage as the Engineer shall direct. All such work shall be at the contractor s expense. After completion of any repairs the structure shall be retested using the procedure specified above. Swimming pools should be tested prior to applying internal finishes.

95 (a) Precast Concrete General Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, all precast concrete construction shall be carried out on the Site and shall conform to requirements given elsewhere in these preambles. The maximum size of coarse aggregate concrete shall not exceed 20mm except for thickness less than 75mm where it shall not exceed 10mm. The compacting of precast concrete shall conform to requirements given elsewhere in these preambles except for thin slabs where use of immersion type vibrators is not practicable. The concrete in these slabs may be consolidating on a vibrating table or by any other methods approved by the Engineer. Steam curing of precast concrete will be permitted. The procedure for steam curing shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The precast work shall be made under cover and shall remain under the same for seven days. During this period and for a further seven days the concrete shall be shielded by sacking or other approved materials kept constantly wet. It shall then be stacked in the open for at least a further seven days to season before being set in position. Where steam curing is used these times may be reduced subject to the approval of the Engineer. Precast concrete units shall be constructed in individual forms. The method of handling the precast concrete units after casting, during curing and during transport and direction shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer, providing that such approval shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for damage to precast concrete units resulting from careless handling. Repair of damage to the precast concrete units, except for minor abrasions of the edges which will not impair the installation and/or appearance of the units will not be permitted and the damaged units shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense. Except where precast work is described as "fair face" or as having "exposed aggregate" or terrazzo finishes the moulds shall be made of suitable strong sawn timber true in form to the shapes required. Unless otherwise described faces are to be left rough from the sawn moulds. Where precast work is described as "fair face" the moulds are to be made of metal or are to have metal or plywood linings or are to be other approved moulds which will produce a smooth dense fair face to the finished concrete suitable to receive a painted finish direct and free from shutter marks, holes, pittances, etc. In his prices for such precast work the Contractor shall include for all rubbing down to produce the finish required to the satisfaction and approval of the Engineer. Where precast work is to have an "exposed aggregate" or terrazzo finish the moulds shall be constructed to the requirements given for moulds "finished fair" work. The method of achieving the exposed aggregate finish shall be aggregate transfer" or other approved method. (b) Precast Concrete Cladding Units These shall be cast to the general details shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall submit working/shop drawings for each type of the cladding panels to the Engineer for approval before he commences casting operations The panels shall be cast in special yards and shall be cured adequately before being hoisted into position in the structure, taking care that no parts are broken in the process. The units shall then be joined together with insitu concrete and flexibility connected to the top and bottom beams to allow for limited movement of the combined unit. ( C ) Hollow Block Suspended Construction (Composite Floor Slab) Concrete hollow blocks for use in the composite floor slabs shall be of the standard sizes required or a shown on the drawings and are to be of adequate strength to support the concrete during placing and consolidation by vibration. Blocks are to be manufactured in accordance with the procedure specified in B.S and to be of a mix not weaker than 1:4:8 cement: sandstone using maximum 10mm size aggregate. Concrete blocks are to be cured for at least 28 days before use on the site. During the first seven days of curing, blocks are to be kept permanently damp and protected from exposure to sun and wind.

96 Concrete blocks are to be well wetted before the pouring of cement. Hollow clay filler blocks for use in the composite floor slabs are to be of the sizes shown on the drawings and to be of adequate strength to support the concrete during placing and consolidation by vibration. They shall be obtained from an approved manufacturer. Before any orders are placed, at least 6 sample clay blocks shall be provided for the approval of the Engineer. Any clay blocks subsequently delivered to site which ion the opinion of the Engineer are not of equal standard to the approved samples shall be rejected. Rejected blocks shall immediately be removed from the site and shall not be used in the works. Clay blocks are to be fully cured before delivery or use on site. Clay blocks are to be well wetted before pouring of concrete. (d) Composite Floor Construction The hollow block floor construction is generally to be as shown on the Engineer's Drawings. Care shall be taken in placing blocks to ensure that they are set out in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings and that they run truly in line without encroaching on the width of the insitu ribs. The open ends of hollow blocks, if adjacent to concrete to be placed insitu are to be plugged or stopped to prevent the concrete from flowing into the void and the Contractor is to include for this in his prices. The Contractor should note that slip tiles are not to be used to the Soffits if ribs and he is to take this into consideration in pricing the items of formwork to the soffit of hollow block floor construction. Before concreting is carried out the blocks are to be thoroughly wetted. Care should be taken during concreting that the width of ribs between the rows of blocks and the solid insitu concrete shown on the Drawings adjacent to supporting beams is not encroached upon by the blocks. It is essential that the concrete topping be poured at the same time as the ribs between hollow blocks. Reinforcement shall be positioned accurately with required cover in accordance with the drawings and using the particular spacing blocks with wire ties as previously described. Spacer blocks shall be provided in ribs at not more that 0.2 m Centres. Care must be taken during concreting that the reinforcement is not displaced. Where holes or services occur, the necessary holes or pockets shall be accommodated by the replacing of a hollow block or insitu concrete or the widening of a rib all in accordance with the Engineer's instructions. Prices for such holes through block construction are to include the rearrangement or substitution of the hollow block with solid concrete in addition to the actual formation of the hole. PART FIVE WALLING SPECIFICATIONS MATERIALS A. CEMENT B. LIME Cement used for making mortar shall be as described in concrete work. The lime for making mortar shall be obtained from an approved source and shall comply with BS 890 Class A for non-hydraulic lime. The lime to be run to putty in an approved lined pit or container. The water to be first run into the pit or container and the lime to be added until it is completely submerged, stirred vigorously until all lumps are disintegrated and shall be kept constantly covered with water and regularly stirred for at least four weeks. The resulting milk-lime then to be through a fine sieve and run into a pit or other container and

97 C. SAND D. WATER kept clean and moist for not less than two weeks before being used in the works and moist for not less than two weeks before being used in the works. Sand used for making mortar shall be clean well graded siliceous sand of good sharp hard quality equal to samples which shall be deposited with and approved by the Architect. It shall be free from lumps of stone, earth, loam, dust, salt, organic matter and other deleterious substances, passed through a fine sieve and washed with clean water if so directed by the Architect. Shall be as described in concrete work. E. CONCRETE BLOCKS Concrete blocks shall comply with the requirements of BS 2028, 1384 except where amended or extended by the following clause. Blocks shall have square arises and corners. For fairfaced work damage to arise and corners shall not exceed the removal of 6mm of the blocks depth or thickness. Concrete blocks shall have a minimum crushing strength of 3.5 N/mm2 except when below the damp course level or in contact with soil when they shall have a minimum crushing strength of 7 N/mm2, unless noted otherwise on drawings. Hollow concrete blocks shall not be used below the damp course level or in contact with soil. Concrete blocks used for external walls shall be class A and for internal load bearing walls they shall be at least Class B. Class C blocks shall only be used for non-load bearing partitions. No precast blocks shall be incorporated into the work unless approved by the Architect. The delivery of present blocks from which samples tested do not comply with this specification shall be deemed defective. Any work constructed with blocks from which samples tested do not comply with this specification shall be deemed to be defective. From every 1,000 precast concrete blocks delivered to site ten blocks samples shall be provided for testing. The precast block samples shall be selected in accordance with BS2028, Samples of precast concrete blocks for testing shall be tested for the following properties in accordance with the methods given in BS 2028, 1364 and the test results shall comply with the requirements of BS 2018, 1364 except where amended by this specification:- (a) Drying shrinkage (b) Compressive strength or transverse breaking load (as applicable) (c) Wetting expansion* (d) Density (e) Dimensional Tolerance (f) Cavity size *Test only applicable for concrete blocks made with clinker aggregate. Blocks shall also be tested to determine the suction rate. The test shall consist of weighing the block, placing in a tray of water such that only 3mm of the block side is immersed for a period of sixty seconds +/- 2 seconds; quickly wiping off excess water and reweighing. The suction rate is the increase in weight due to water absorbed and shall not exceed 2 kg/m2/minute. Blocks which have a suction rate exceeding 2kg/m2/minute may be used if the contractor uses an approved water reactive additive in the mortar or can show that the blocks will have a suction rate not exceeding 2kgm2/minute for a period of 24 hours from being laid and provided the blocks comply with all other requirements. Concrete blocks shall be stacked on prepared dry areas free of clinker, ashes and sulphate bearing strata. Blocks of different strengths shall be stacked separately and clearly marked to differentiate the strengths. Blocks shall not be used for a minimum of 7 days after manufacture and shall not be loaded for at least 14 days after laying. For the first 7 days after manufacture, block shall be cured by maintaining in a damp condition, e.g. covering with polythene sheeting after wetting blocks. A. HOLLOW CLAY BLOCKS Hollow clay partition blocks shall comply with the provisions of BS 1190 section 1 and are to be hard, well burnt, true to size and shape and with sharp arises and keyed faces and joints are to be obtained from an

98 approved manufacturer and to be equal in every respect to a sample to be deposited with, and approved by the Architect. Blocks are to be 190 mm high (to give 200mm height including the joint) and of the thickness given herein. Cutting of blocks is to be avoided wherever possible and full use is to be made of quarter, half and three quarter blocks, and blocks with conduit recesses. B. LOUVRE BLOCK WALLING i) To be precast concrete mix 1:1.5:3 or 25N/mm2 (12mm aggregate) but with 10mm finished fair on all exposed surfaces, built in cement and sand (1:5) mortar with straight horizontal and vertical joints to flush pointed both sides. ii) Each block to be size 200mm x 400mm x 200mm high and consisting of two ends each 200m x 200mm x 50mm thick joined with a 50 mm thick twice cranked Louvre with top end of Louvre projecting 40mm above top of blocks.. WALLING SPECIFICATIONS A. STONE All stone shall comply with the requirements of CP for masonry and rubble walls respectively except where amended or extended by the following clauses. Unless otherwise noted, all masonry walls shall be course squared rubble walling with mortar joints. The size of stones for rubble walling shall be such that the length of stone does not exceed three times its height. For coursed squared rubble walls block shall not exceed 300 mm in height and shall be not less than 150 mm in height. Where snacked rubble walls are specified; the snecks shall not be less than 100mm square on the exposed face. Stone for masonry shall have a minimum compressive strength of 10 N/mm2. (Stone shall not be required to be tested to failure). The density of stone for masonry shall be not less than 230 kg/m3. The drying shrinkage of stone shall not exceed 0.05%. Samples of stone provided for testing shall be tested for the following in accordance with the methods given in BS 2028, 1364 and the test results shall comply with the requirements of this specification. (a) (b) (c) Compressive strength Density Drying shrinkage The colour and texture of stone shall be uniform and consistent. Prior to delivering any stone to site the contractor shall supply the Architect with a sample of stone in order that he may approve the colour and texture. The contractor shall ensure that sufficient suitable stone is available for the whole of the project prior to ordering the stone. Where cast stone including described as artificial stone, reconstructed stone, etc., is specified the stone shall comply with the requirements of BS Masonry shall be of stone, having no irregular faces and only the back face if not visible shall be left as from the saw. Prior to ordering dry stone the contractor shall demonstrate that the stone is durable. This may be done by supplying details of building constructed with stone from the same quarry and which has been exposed to the same environment condition for at least ten years. The maximum projection from the face of stone for rubble walls shall be 20mm beyond the specified face of the wall. The contractor shall provide six samples of stone measuring 150mm x 150mm for testing prior to delivering any stone to site. As work proceeds the contractor shall provide six samples 150 x150 x 150mm for testing from every 300m2 of work. All stone shall be stacked on prepared dry areas free of clinker, ashes and sulphate bearing strata. B. WALL REINFORCEMENT Where described walls and partitions shall be reinforced with a 25mm wide strip of No.20S.W.G hoop iron built into alternate horizontal joints in the wall centre. The reinforcement shall be lapped and hooked at running joints, angles and intersections and carried at least 115mm into abutting walls at junctions. C. WALL TIES To be 3mm diameter galvanized mild steel wire twisted butterfly wall ties

99 D. DAMP - PROOF COURSES The bituminous felt sheeting for damp-proof courses shall be hessian based bituminous felt complying with BS743 TYPE 4A weighing not less than 3.85 Kgs per square metre. The sheeting is to be lapped 150mm at running joints and the full width of walls at angles. WALLING SPECIFICATIONS WORKMANSHIP A. CEMENT MORTAR Mortar described as cement mortar 1:4 shall be composed of 1 cubic metre (1498 Kgs) of Portland Cement and 4 cubic metres of sand. Other mixes such as 1:3, 1:5 etc. shall be similarly construed. B. MIXING MORTAR The constituent materials shall be measured separately when dry in specially prepared gauge boxes of sizes to give the proportions specified without consolidation of the contents by ramming and shaking. The mortar shall be mixed in an approved power driven mixer for not less than two minutes per batch and using the minimum quantity of water necessary to obtain a working consistency. The mixer shall be used as close as practicable to the works and mortar shall be used within 30 minutes of mixing. No partially or wholly set mortar will be allowed to be used or re-mixed. C. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION (a) Setting out The contractor shall provide proper setting out rods and set out all work on same for course, openings, heights etc., and shall build the walls, piers etc., to the widths, depths and heights indicated on the Drawings and as directed by the Architect. (b) Building in Wood Frames Openings for doors, ventilators etc., are to be set out and left unbuilt until the wooden frames have been fixed in position. (c) Building in Metal windows and doors Openings for metal frames to be wide enough for the frames to fit without being forced into position. Build the lugs into the joints of the walling and fill into the space between the walling and frames with cement mortar well tamped into the channel of the frames and point all round externally. All frames must be set plumb and level and free from twist. (d) Walls to Receive Plaster & Similar Finishes D. BUILDING WALLING All faces of walls to be plastered etc., to have all projections dressed off and joints raked out as key. (a) Laying and Jointing WALLING SPECIFICATIONS All blocks shall be well wetted before being laid and the top of walling where left off shall be well wetted before commencing. Walls to be kept wet three days after building. All walls throughout the works shall be carried up evenly in 200mm courses except where courses of less depth are required to bring walling up to level of floors, windows and the like and where otherwise described, no part being allowed to be carried up more than one metre higher at one time than any other part and in such cases the joining shall be made in long steps so as to prevent cracks arising and all walls shall be levelled round at each stage. Not more than 3 metres height of wall shall be laid in any one day. (b) Bonding The blocks shall be properly bonded together and in such a manner that no vertical joint in any one course shall be within 115mm of a similar in the courses immediately above or below. All walling of 300mm thickness or less shall be built in single thickness of blocks. Walling exceeding 300mm in

100 thickness shall be built with through bonders not more than 1070mm apart in each course as directed by the Architect. Alternate courses of walling at all angles and intersections shall be carried through the full thickness of the adjoining wall. All perpends, reveals and other angles of the walling shall be built strictly true and square. (c) Tolerances All courses of walls shall be level with a maximum deviation of +/- 3mm in any one metre length and a maximum overall deviation on 10mm for lengths of wall exceeding 3 metres. Walls shall be plumb with a maximum deviation of +/- 3mm in any metre height of wall with a maximum deviation of +/-10 mm in the total height of the wall or any storey. All corners of walls which are shown as being at right angles shall be square with a maximum deviation of 3 in All walls should be straight with a maximum deviation of +/-3mm in any one metre length and a maximum overall deviation of 10mm in any length exceeding 3 metres. All bed and vertical joints shall be an average of 10mm thick with a maximum deviation of +/-3mm of block work, and stone rubble walls. Joints for stone masonry walls shall be 6mm +/- 1 mm thick. (d) Curing All walls shall be maintained in a damp condition for at least 24 hours after laying. Walls under construction shall be dampened by applying water with a brush and no hosing directly on to the wall shall be permitted. When work ceases on any section of wall polythene or hessian shall be draped over the wall, for at least 24 hours. If hessian is used, it shall be maintained continuously wet. (e) Cavities Cavity walls shall be of the overall thickness shown on the drawings. Cavities above ground level between leaves of block or masonry shall be free of mortar droppings or their debris. The Contractor shall take proper precautions to prevent mortar or debris entering the cavity. Cavity below ground level shall be filled with mortar for cavities up to 75mm wide and for cavities over 75mm wide filling shall be concrete mix 1:3:6. Cavities shall be filled such that there is maximum of three times the thickness of the thinner leaf of the wall filled with wet mortar or concrete unless the wall is continuously supported for the depth. (f) Backfilling WALLING SPECIFICATIONS A. REINFORCEMENT WALLS Earth backfilling against walls shall be carried out such that the level of the backfill is always equal on each side of the wall. When a wall has filling material on one side only to a fill width of more than three times the wall thickness, the wall shall be continuously supported during backfilling. Backfilling shall not be carried out until at least seven days have elapsed since the laying of the blocks or stone. Steel reinforcing bars in walls shall be carefully placed and spacers used to ensure that a minimum of 20mm cover is given to the reinforcement unless otherwise specified. Horizontal reinforcement in mortar joints shall be laid such that the reinforcement is not contact with the blocks or stone. B. WALL TIES Wall ties shall be provided to connect walls to steel or concrete columns and beams to connect two unbounded leaves of wall. Walls ties shall be provided at 450mm centre both vertically and 900mm centres horizontally and shall be staggered when used to connect two leaves of unbonded wall. Wall ties shall be embedded to each material by a minimum of 50mm.

101 C. FAIR FACE All concrete and hollow clay block work described as finished with a fair face is to be built to a true and even face with the joints finished as specified hereinafter. D. POINTING Pointing of walls shall be carried out as the work proceeds wherever possible. When coloured mortar is specified for pointing only the pointing shall be carried out after work has been completed. Existing walls shall be prepared for pointing by raking out all loose friable material to a minimum depth of 15mm to form a square recess. The joints shall then be wetted and new mortar shall be forced into joints and finished as directed. E. HOLES, CUTTING AND CHASING (a) All putlog holes shall be not less than one course deep and carefully filled with a block cut to fit size of opening with beds and joints filled with mortar well tamped in after scaffolding is removed, and if in faced walls to match facing. (b) Where walling is cut, holed or chased for conduits, pipes and the like all such cuttings etc., shall be filled in solid with cement mortar (1:4) prior to the application of finishes. PART SIX ROOFING, WATERPROOFING & RAIN WATER PIPES SPECIFICATIONS ROOFING, WATERPROOFING & RAIN WATER PIPES A. TILE ROOFING (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) Tiles are to be uniform in size and shape, free from cracks, twists and other blemishes and are to be true after fixing on the roof. Unless specified all tile battens are to be 50 x 25 mm fin sawn cell cured Podo Carpus or Cypress continuously and securely spiked at raters at such centres up the roof to suit the pitch of the tiles. (In addition Roman tiles Roofs are to have 75 x 50 mm counter battens to suit). Mangolore, Brosley, Roman and Pan tiles are to be purchased from Clayworks Ltd. Cement tiles shall be purchased from Manson Hart Limited and Mareba Enterprises Limited or any other approved manufacturers and shall be laid in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and shall be completed with left hand verge tiles and fascia tiles nailed to battens. At the ridge provide and lay 300mm wide felt under the socketless ridging which shall be matching tinted pointed with oxide purchased from the manufacturer. Where valley tiles are specified, these shall be laid in accordance with manufacturers instructions and the roof tiles to be cut shall be marked by the Contractor, transported to and from the factory where they are to be cut and re-tinted by Manson Hart Limited or Mareba Enterprises Limited before fixing on site. B. POLYTHENE UNDERFELTING 500 Gauge polythene under felting is to be provided to all tile roofs and fixed under roofing battens with 150mm laps. C. ASPHALT ROOFING Asphalt roofing will be executed by an approved specialist roofing sub-contractor. Before any application of roofing the contractor is to ensure that all roof surfaces are thoroughly cleaned by sweeping. Roofing asphalt to be BS 988/1966 Table 3 COLUMN 111 Tropical Mastic asphalt laid in two coats to a total thickness of 20mm on and including black sheathing felt, and finished with either three coats aluminium paint to horizontal and vertical surfaces local grey stone chippings or precast concrete paving slabs as necessary.

102 The first layer of asphalt to be fully bonded to the sheathing felt and the second layer to be laid with a 75mm joint to the first layer. At all junctions of covering with parapet walls, kerbs, eaves, gutters etc., the asphalt is to be turned up a minimum height of 150mm with an angle fillet at the junction with the roof covering and splayed at the tip and tucked 25mm into groove and pointed in cement and sand. Precast concrete tiles are to be 300 x 25mm thick, interlocking, finished fair on exposed face and bedded in bitumen and pointed in cement mortar. ROOFING, WATERPROOFING & RAIN WATER PIPES SPECIFICATIONS A. COLAS ROOF AND PLANTING BOX WATERPROOFING SPECIFICATION 7.01 Colas roof and planting box waterproofing shall be obtained from colas East Africa Limited and laid in accordance with the manufacturers instructions to the approval of the Architect. Surfaces shall be prepared in the following manner:- (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Lay 60mm faced triangular fillets at all internal wall to roof intersections using a mortar comprised of 1 volume of colmastic and 2 volumes of sand. Parapet walls and other vertical surfaces must be smooth. Brickwork shall be flush pointed or rendered with a cement/sand mix, to a height of 250mm. Rain water outlets shall be fixed firmly to but below the level of the roof slab. They should be free to move independently of the downpipe. When the concrete and/or mortar applications are set and dry, brush the surface free of all dirt, dust, laitance and loose materials. Apply, by brush or spray, a coating of colas prime and allow this to dry. Day work joints, shrinkage cracks or fillets shall be treated by applying a heavy coat of Colaskote into which should be embedded a strip of colas membrane 88.08, free of wrinkles. This strip shall extend, in width, 80mm on both sides of the joint/fillet being treated. A further coat of shall be applied over the and allowed to dry. Colas waterproofing shall be applied as follows: (a) (b) (c) Apply heavy brush of colaskote litres per sq. metre laid on in one direction. Allow to dry. Apply a further heavy brush coat of colaskote laid on right angles to the previous coat, and whilst this is still wet, embed a layer of colas membrane (Note: Edges of the membrane should be overlapped by 80mm. Allow to dry. Apply a heavy brush coat of colaskote laid on at right angles to the previous coat. Allow to dry Colas roof waterproofing shall be finished with two coats colaskote aluminium reflective paint. The first coat shall be allowed to dry before application of the second coat. Before application of the first coat of reflective paint the colaskote waterproofing shall be dusted with a clean, sharp, fine sand whilst still wet and excess sand thoroughly brushed off when the emulsion is dry. B. COLAS BASEMENT TANKING SPECIFICATION 7.04 Colas basement tanking shall be obtained from Colas East Africa Limited and applied in accordance with the manufacturers instructions to the approval of the Architect. Surfaces to receive tanking shall be level with no sharp points, edges etc., and shall be clean to receive the tanking ROOFING, WATERPROOFRING & RAIN WATER PIPES SPECIFICATIONS Colas basement tanking specifications 7.04 (cont d) Colas tanking shall be applied in the following manner:- (a) (b) Check the surface to ensure it is smooth and clean. Apply a prime coat of colas prime at the rate of.15 litres (concrete) per square metre.

103 (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) Apply a coat of colaskote at the rate of.75 litres per square metre and allow to dry Apply a further coat of at.75 litre per square metre. Into this apply open weave glass membrane of colas membrane and ensure that the edges are overlapped at least 500mm and the membrane is well brushed out to give no wrinkles in the finished surface. Over the dried film apply a second coat of as in (d) and repeat (c) Apply a towel coat of colaskote at the rate of 3 litres per square metre. Over the finished waterproofing membrane provide a protective coating consisting of Colmastic 30.03, 1 volume and 2 volume sand 6mm thick.. A. CEDAR SHINGLE ROOFING Cedar shingle roofing shall be obtained from an approved supplier to the approval of the Architect. Shingles shall be 75mm wide x 400mm long x approximately 12mm thick or other size approved by the Architect. Prior to fixing shingles shall be well soaked in engine oil to the approval of the architect. Shingles are to be fixed to 38mm x 25mm treated sawn cypress battens with 2 No. 32mm long rust resistant nails (hot dipped zinc, copper or aluminium) in each shingle. Each nail is to be positioned 20mm from the side edge of the shingle and 38mm above the butt line. Shingles shall have a 5mm space between adjacent shingles and joints in any one course shall be separated not less then 40mm from joints in adjacent courses. Each shingle has an exposure of 125mm. B. BITUMINOUS FELT ROOFING MATERIALS (a) Fibre based bitumen felt shall comply with BS 747: part 2,class 1: Type of felt 1A Saturated bitumen 1B Fine 1C self finished bitumen 1D coarse sand surfaced bitumen 1E mineral surfaced bitumen Nominal weight/10m2 7kg 17kg 13kg 20kg 36kg (b) Asbestos based bitumen felts shall comply with BS 747 part 2, class 2: Type of felt Nominal lweight/10m2 2A saturated bitumen asbestos 7kg 2B Fine sand surfaced bitumen Asbestos 16kg 2C self finished bitumen asbestos 13kg 2E mineral surfaced bitumen asbestos 36kg Unless otherwise specified bituminous felt roofing shall comprise the following layers: (a) To main roof areas First layer: saturated bitumen asbestos felt Type 2A, partially bonded. Second layer: self-finished bitumen felt Type 1C, fully bonded. Third layer: mineral surfaced bitumen felt to be aluminium cap sheet finish, fully bonded. (b) To gutters and up stands in felt roofs: First layer: saturated bitumen asbestos felt Type 2A, fully bonded Second layer: self-finished bitumen felt Type 1C, fully bonded Third layer: mineral surfaced bitumen felt Type 1E, fully bonded. A. LAYING Bitumen felt roofing work must be carried out by a sub-contractor approved by the Architect. Laying of the felt is to be carried out generally in accordance with C.P to the following minimum falls.

104 (a) for mineral surfaced felt roofs 1:30 (b) for protected felt roofs 1:60 The contractor sand sub-contractor shall ensure that the roof screed is laid to the correct falls before applying the roofing felt. Before laying covering the contractor shall ensure that all preceding and preliminary work, including all pipes and outlets passing through the roof, formation of grooves and chases, and provision of battens and fillets is complete. Base sheeting is to be laid on a clean, dry base and before work commences the contractor shall obtain the roofing sub-contractor s written agreement that the base is suitable. Sheeting shall be laid in the following manner: (a) Nail under layer at 75mm centres at tops of sloping roofs and screeds. (b) Hot bonding compounds shall be prepared as follows: (i) Heat in kettles fitted with a thermometer. (ii) Do not heat to more than 220 degrees C. (iii) Lay at 200 degrees C. (c) (d) (e) (f) Partial bonding of first layer shall be carried out by spot, strip or frame bonding at centres not exceeding 1800mm with hot bonding compound to the approval of the Architect. Fully bond at perimeter of roof for a width of 450mm, leaving ventilation channels 150mm wide at approximately 1800mm centres. Full bonding of second and subsequent layers shall be carried out by applying hot bonding compound to the previous layer, lay bitumen felt and apply pressure to ensure a firm bond. Remove the surplus squeezing out compound as the work proceeds. Compound should be applied at a minimum rate of 16kg per 1.0m2. Precast adhesion of squeezed-out bonding compound to the surface of mineral-surfaced felt. Sheets shall be laid in the direction of the roof slope with a 50mm side and 75mm end lap Up stands must be at least 15mm high, fully bonded to the structure with tip edge tucked into chase, wedged at 600mm centres and fully bond to up stand. Each lap shall be 100mm and sealed with hot bonding compound. Chases shall be pointed in cement-sand mortar 1:3 (g) Unless otherwise specified eaves shall be formed as follows: (i) Nail one edge of 200mm felt strip at 150mm centres (ii) Fold to form welt 50mm deep and seal with bonding compound. (iii) Fully bond remainder of felt to base and cover with full thickness of built up finish. A. ASBESTOS CEMENT SHEETING Corrugated asbestos cement sheeting shall be obtained from an approved manufacturer by Simbarite Limited, P. O. Box 90662, Mombasa, Kenya. The sheeting shall be of an even colour, free from cracks, chips and other defects. Roofing is to be complete with all hip and ridge coverings as supplied by the manufacturer and is to be fixed in strict accordance with their instructions, including galvanised screws of crook bolts and washers. B. GALVANIZED CORRUGATED IRON SHEETS Galvanised or pre-painted corrugated mild steel sheets for roofing and cladding shall be of the gauge and profile required, and obtained from an approved manufacturer. They shall be fixed with approved crook bolts, washers, etc., to Z purlins. C. TIMBER ROOF TRUSSES All timber to be used shall be as described in carpentry and Joinery hereafter.

105 Roof construction is to include for all necessary timbers, dragon ties, ridges, hips, purlins, valleys, eaves, timbers, etc., and for any eaves soffits, fascias, gang boards as specified or shown on the Drawings. Generally trusses are to be set vertical and level, spiked to wall plates and secured with the wall ties. No timbers used for ties, rafters or purlins shall be over 5.0 metres in length. All joints shall be scarfed and bound with continuous 20 mm hoop iron binding, pitched at 35mm centres scarf in purlins shall occur at trusses but in ties and rafters they shall occur approximately central between joints. The prices for roof trusses shall include for all the foregoing and nails, bolts, etc., necessary to make the required joints. D. ALUMINIUM FLASHINGS Aluminium flashings shall be formed out of 22 gauge super purity aluminium with natural mill finish to BS Where flashings are built into joints or tucked into grooves the minimum depth is to be 25mm and they are to be secured by folded aluminium wedges at 450mm centres and pointed in cement mortar (1:3). E. ROOF SCREED GENERALLY Roof screeds are to be laid to a minimum fall and cross fall of 27mm in 3.0 metres with a minimum thickness of 19mm at rainwater outlets and are to be finished to the entire satisfaction of the sub-contractor executing the roofing. F. CEMENT AND SAND ROOF SCREEDS The roof screeds shall be formed of cement and sand (1:3). The screeds shall be laid in bays, square where possible, of maximum 10 square metres. Each bay shall be formed between stop boards of the correct height and cut on each side to indicate the slope required in the roofing. The screed shall be trowelled with a wood float to true and accurate falls or crossfalls up to the stop boards. A 10mm wide gap shall be left between each screed bay for the full depth of the screed. The screeds shall be allowed to cure thoroughly to attain maximum shrinkage. Any cracks which appear due to shrinkage shall be made good. The gaps between the screed bays shall be filled as follows: 1. Brush or blow out joints to remove dirt, dust, etc., and prime the sides of the joints using a piece of sponge or similar dipped in a mixture of equal volumes of Flintkote./ Type 1 Type 3 emulsion and water. Allow to dry. 2. Fill up joints slightly round on the surface using a 1:2:3 mastic. This mastic shall be prepared by mixing one volume of cement with volumes of sand, adding a little water to dampen the mix, then adding two volumes of Flintkote. Type 1 or Type 3 emulsion. The mastic is thoroughly mixed together adding further water as necessary until it is a uniform brown colour, without being too sloppy. Allow to set and dry. The screed joints shall then be covered with a 200mm wide strip of building paper not bonded to the screed joint and well lapped at angles and junctions before the application of the roof covering. A. LIGHTWEIGHT ROOF SCREEDS Lightweight roof screeds shall be composed of bases of cement, sand and pumice (1:4:8) finished with a 12mm cement and sand (1:5) topping laid whilst the base is still green and trowelled smooth to the satisfaction of the Architect. The screeds are to be laid as described in cement and sand Roof Screeds. B. PVC RAINWATER PIPES PVC rainwater pipes and fittings are to comply with BS 4576 with solvent welded or rubber ring seal joints. Pipes are to be case into concrete or to be fixed to the structure with PVC holder bats built-in or plugged and screwed at maximum 2 metre centres. Bends, swan necks, discharge chutes and fittings generally are to be fixed where necessary to facilitate the flow of water. Rainwater outlets shall be PVC suitable for the roof finish in which they occur with domical PVC grating. C. PROTECTION The contractor is to take all necessary precautions to protect the finished work and must ensure no damage occurs to the roofing until completion of the works. D. COMPLETION OF THE WORKS

106 On completion of the works, the contractor shall clear away, ensure that rainwater outlets are clear and generally leave the roof areas in a clean and watertight condition to the satisfaction of the Architect. PART SEVEN CARPENTRY & JOINERY SPECIFICATIONS CARPENTRY & JOINERY A. GENERALLY All woodwork shall be carried out in accordance with the drawing and the principals of first class joinery construction. Unless specifically stated otherwise, sizes shown on drawings are finished sizes and the contractor must allow for wrot faces. MATERIALS B. QUALITIES OF TIMBER (a) The qualities of timber stated hereinafter are in accordance with the latest Kenya Government Grading Rules. (b) All timber described as prime Grade is to be first Grade (Grade 1) (c) All timber described as selected Grade is to be second Grade (Grade 11) (d) All hardwood is to be prime Grade (Grade 1) (e) All timber for permanent use in the building shall before use be approved by the Architect for quality in accordance with the foregoing specification for its respective grade. Any timber not so approved by the Architect shall be removed from the site forthwith. C. INSECT DAMAGE All timber, whether graded or ungraded, and including shuttering, scaffolding and the like shall be free of live borer beetle or other insect attached when brought upon the site. The contractor shall be responsible up to the end of the maintenance period for executing at his own cost all work necessary to eradicate insect attack of timber which becomes evident including the replacement of timbers attacked, or suspected of being attacked, notwithstanding that the timber concerned may have been inspected and passed as fit for use. D. SEASONING OF TIMBER All carpentry timbers are timbers are to be seasoned to an average moisture content of not more 20%. All joinery timbers are to be seasoned to an average moisture content of not more than 15%. The contractor is to make available on site a metre of testing moisture content of all timber delivered. E. PREPARATION AND PROTECTION OF TIMBER (i) (ii) All timber necessary for the works is to be purchased immediately the contract is signed, and when delivered is to be open stacked for such further seasoning as may be necessary. Preparation of the timber is to be commenced simultaneously with the commencement of the works generally. All timber and assembled woodwork is to be protected from the weather and stored in such a way as to prevent attack by decay fungi, termites or other insects. F. SPECIES OF TIMBER Only those timbers specified are to be used for the works, unless alternatives are authorised by the Architect in writing. CARPENTRY & JOINERY SPECIFICATIONS A. PRESSURE IMPREGNATED TIMBER (i) All timber described as pressure impregnated shall be impregnated under vacuum and Pressure with celcure. or Tanalith. Wood preservative with an average absorption of not less than 6.7kgs. of dry salt per cubic metre. In case of resistant species where this retention cannot be obtained the timber shall be treated to refusal point. All treated timber shall not be exposed to wet conditions for at least 14 days after treatment has been carried out. All cut ends, drilling or

107 fabrications on the site producing new surfaces shall be thoroughly brushed or soaked with celcure B. salts applied in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions. (ii) Any other method of timber impregnations will only be allowed at the Architect s Approval. B. HARDWOOD All hardwood will comply with the requirement of BS 1186 part 1 BS It shall show a straight and regular grain throughout. Hardwood shall be free from wooly texture, soft heart, sap wood, splits, shakes, all evidence of insect of fungi attack and rot and all faults caused by compression failure. There shall be no waney edges. Hardwood shall be free from knots on exposed faces. Any hardwood showing visible imperfections will be rejected. Preservatives shall not be used without the Architect s permission. Where indicated on the drawings, internal hardwoods will be treated with clear sealants as specified elsewhere. C. SOFTWOOD Softwood timber for carcassing work shall be either Podo, Carpus or Cypress to the approval of the Architect and shall be dimensions specified on the drawings. Timber shall be accordance with the Groups listed in this clause. All softwood shall comply with the requirements of BS1186 part 1. Timber shall be free from wooly texture, soft heart, sap wood, splits, shakes, pith showing on the surface, sloping grain exceeding one in eight checks, knots exceeding 25mm of diameter, loose knot or knot holes and any evidence of insect or fungi attack. There shall be no waney edges. Where indicated on the drawings, the softwood will be treated with clear sealer or painted with gloss paint. All softwood is to be pressure impregnated against insect attack before delivery to site. Any ends cut after treatment shall be given two liberal coats of preservative. D. PLYWOOD All plywood shall comply with the requirements of BS 1455, be obtained from a manufacturer to be approved by the Architect and be of the thickness shown on the drawings. Plywood shall be Exterior Grade except where otherwise stated. Plies shall be bonded together with adhesives complying with the requirements of BS 1203 grade WBP. Plywood shall be free from end joints (including joints in veneers) overlaps in core veneers, dead knots, patches and plugs, open defects, depressions due to defects in cure, insect attack (except isolated pinworm holes through face veneers only), fungal attack and from discolouration differing from that normally associated with species. Face veneers shall be hard and durable and shall be capable of being finished to a smooth surface. Face veneers shall closely match the general joinery timber supplied. E. CHIPBOARD Chipboard shall be medium density wood particle board complying with BS 2604 part 2, produced in factories by an approved process. CARPENTRY & JOINERY SPECIFICATIONS A. BLOCKBOARD Block board shall be of approved local or imported manufacture to BS 3444 glued throughout and softwood or hardwood faced as hereinafter specified and equal to a sample to be deposited with the Architect for approval and which when so approved shall form the standard for the works. B. FIBREBOARD Shall be insulating board to comply with BS 1142 of the types specified and of approved manufacture. C. TEMPERED HARDBOARD

108 To be approved manufacture according in all respects with BS 1142 suitable for painting, prepared and fixed in accordance with the maker s instructions. D. WOOD BLOCK FLOORS (i) (ii) To be supplied and laid in 460 mm x 460 mm panels by a specialist all to the approval of the Architect. On completion and immediately prior to applying the clear finish, the surface is to be twice machine sanded using first coarse and the fine sandpaper and brushed perfectly clean. E. TIMBER DOORS Doors are to be designed, manufactured and fixed in accordance with the relevant British standards summarised below:- BS 476 part fire tests etc. BS 4787 part Door dimensions etc. BS 1186 part Quality of timber and workmanship. BS 1227 part 1A Hinges BS 3827 Builder s hardware - glossary F. FLUSH DOORS Generally, the requirement for flush doors is that they have a minimum thickness of 40mm. They shall be faced both sides and there shall be hardwood lippings to all edges. Hollow core and semi-solid types shall contain adequate provision within the core for ironmongery (e.g. lock blocks etc).all hollow and semi-solid doors shall be faced with WBP bonded Exterior grade plywood. Except where indicated doors shall have hardwood veneered faces. Vision panels where required shall be 150mm wide 900mm deep. Flush doors shall be obtained from a supplier to be approved by the Architect. Flush doors shall comply with the requirements of BS 459 parts 1,2 and 3. All edges shall be lipped with hardwood tongued into edge of the door. Fire resistant flush doors are to be constructed in accordance with BS 459 part 3. The core of solid core flush doors shall be constructed of longitudinal laminations of precision planed timber, butt joined and glued with resin based adhesive under hydraulic pressure, the whole forming a rigid fire resistant raft. Where doors are indicated as fire resistant they shall be constructed so as to exceed the requirements stated when tested in accordance with BS 476 part (1972) section 7. A. HARDWOOD VENEERS (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Veneer facings shall be selected to the approval of the Architect. No glass or synthetic fibre stitching will be permitted for jointing veneer leaves together. Veneer shall be free from splits, dote, glue, stains insect or fungi attack and rot. Filling or inlaying of any kind will not accepted. All wood veneers shall be bonded to the core material in such a way that no lifting and blistering shall occur. B. LAMINATED PLASTIC VENEERS Laminated plastic veneers shall be a decorative sheet 1.6mm thick complying with BS 3794 class 1. The pattern will be selected by the Architect. The laminate shall have decorative (pattern) finish on one face only. Patterns will be selected from the manufacturer s standard range. C. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL (a) (b) (c) Tapered timber pellets for filling screw holes must be cut across the grain and shall be of the colour and grain being plugged. Metal fixing devices must be fully rust-proofed. Scramps, brackets, plugs, bolts etc., must be of a type, make and pattern approved by the Architect. Adhesives must be suitable for use in the local conditions and be compatible with the materials with which they are in contact. D. NAILS AND SCREWS Nails shall comply with BS 1201, screws shall comply with BS 1494 and bolts shall comply with BS 916.

109 WORKMANSHIP E. TOLERANCES The method of construction must accommodate tolerance as shown on the drawings and allow for ensuring that repetitive units can be accurately located in relation to grid lines and that tolerances do not accumulate. Reasonable tolerance shall be provided at all junctions between joinery and the building carcass, whether of masonry or frame construction, so that any irregularities or movement may be adequately compensated. F. JOINTING (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) All joints must be made as specified or detailed and the execution of all jointing shall be to the satisfaction of the Architect. Joining surfaces of all connections exposed to the weather are to be thickly primed except where gluing is specified. Surfaces are to be in good contact over the whole area of the joint before fastenings are applied. No nails, screws or bolts are to be placed in any end split. If splitting is likely or is encountered in the course of the work, holes for nails are to be pre-bored at diameters not exceeding 4/5 of the diameter of the nails. Clenched nails must be bent at right angles to the grain. Lead holes are to be bored for all screws. Where the use of bolts and washers is specified the holes are to be bored from both sides of the timber and to be a diameter D+D/16 where D is the diameter of the bolt. nuts must be brought up tight but care is to be taken to avoid crushing of the timber under the washers. Joints in joinery must be as specified or detailed and designed and secured as to resist or compensate for any stresses to which they may be subjected. All nails, springs etc., are to be punched and puttied. Loose joints are to be made where provision must be made for shrinkage, glued joints where shrinkage need not be considered and where sealed joints are required. All glued joints shall be cross-tongued or otherwise reinforced. Glues for load bearing joints or where conditions may be damp must be of the resin type. For non-load bearing joints, or where dry conditions can be guaranteed, resin or organic glues may be used. A. FRAMED WORK The word framed shall mean and include all the best known methods of jointing woodwork together by mortice, tenon, dovetail or other methods, and for forming all necessary stops, mitres or mason mitres in members which are moulded, rebated etc. B. PLUGGING Plugging and fixing to wall in all trades shall be executed by Rawl plugging or similar approved proprietary methods all in accordance with the manufacturer s printed instructions. Hacking of holes and filing with timber plugs will not be permitted under any circumstances C. CARPENTRY WORK (a) (b) (c) (d) All carpentry shall be executed with workmanship of the best quality. Scantlings and board shall be accurately sawn and shall be uniform in width and thickness throughout and shall be as long as possible and practicable in order to eliminate joints All work shall be left with a swan surface except where specified to be wrot. All work shall be accurately set out and in strict accordance with the drawings, and shall be framed together and securely fixed in the best possible manner with properly made joints. Provide all braids, nails, screws etc., as necessary and as directed and approved. Actual dimensions of scantling for carpentry shall not vary from the specified dimensions by more than +3mm or -1mm. Sizes and thickness of wrot carpentry timber are nominal, that is to say a variation of 3mm from the specified sizes will be allowed from each wrot surface unless the

110 D. JOINERY WORK thickness or size id described as finished in which case no variation from the stated thickness or size will be permitted. All joinery work shall be wrot unless otherwise described. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Sizes and thickness of joinery are nominal that is to say a variation of 3mm from the specified sizes will be allowed from each wrot surface unless the thickness or size is described as finished in which case no variation from the stated thickness or size will be permitted. No joinery to be put in hand until the details have been supplied or approved by the Architect and in all cases the details are to be worked to. All joinery shall be executed with workmanship of the best quality in strict accordance with the detailed drawings, moulding shall be accurately and truly run on the solid and all work planed, sandpapered and finished to the approval of the Architect. All arrises to be slightly rounded. All framed work shall be cut out, and framed together as soon after the commencement of the building as is practicable but should not be wedged up until the building is ready for fixing the same and any portions that warp, get in winding, develop shakes or other defects shall be replaced with new. In-door frames etc., the heart face of the timber shall be fixed away from the wall. As soon as required for fixing in the building the framing shall be glued together with glue as described and properly wedged or pinned etc., as directed. All beads, fillets and small members shall be fixed with round or oval braids or nails well punched in and stopped. All larger members shall be fixed with screws, the screws let in and pelletted over with wood pellets to match the grain. Cups and screws for fixing beads and fillets shall be spaced 150mm apart and 25mm from angles. CARPENTRY & JOINERY SPECIFICATIONS (f) All joinery immediately upon delivery to the site is to be sorted and protected from the weather. (g) (h) (i) All joinery is to be primed before fixing but no work is to be primed until it has been approved by the Architect. All fixed joinery which is liable to become bruised or damaged in any way, shall be properly cased and protected by the contractor until completion of the work. When natural finish is specified, the timber in adjacent pieces shall be matched and uniform or symmetrical in colour and grain. A. SOFTWOOD Fixing shall be by means of non-rusting screws with counter sunk heads to proprietary plugs or ground. Nails will not be permitted. Sections shall be neatly and accurately cut so as to avoid splitting of the wood. B. HARDWOODS Hardwoods are as described. In jointed panels each piece shall be of the same species. Joinery for oiling shall have all surfaces of the same species and same character of grain. Fixing shall be by means of brass screws with countersunk heads to proprietary plugs or grounds. Where work is face screwed heads of screws shall finish not less than 6mm below the surface and be covered with round teak pellets of appropriate thickness. Pellets shall be chosen and fixed so as to match colour and pattern of grain so far as is practical. Nailing will not be permitted. Sections shall be neatly and accurately cut with fine toothed saws. D. PLYWOOD

111 Plywood of the required thickness shall be used. The Contractor will not be allowed to make up thickness by gluing together sheets of thinner plywood. Where cutting is required it shall be neatly and accurately performed with fine toothed saws so as to avoid splitting the face veneers and intermediate plies. E. CHIPBOARD Where cutting is necessary it shall be neatly and accurately performed with fine toothed saws so as to avoid splitting the face veneers. Where raw edges arise from cutting these shall be faced with a matching hardwood fillet cut pinned and glued to match factory produced edges. F BLOCKBOARD Where cutting is necessary it shall be neatly and accurately performed with fine toothed saws so as to avoid splitting the face veneers. Where raw edges arise from cutting these shall be faced with a matching hardwood cut pinned and glued to match factory produced edges. G LAMINATED PLASTIC VENEER Laminated plastic veneers are to be fixed with an approved adhesive, care being taken to eliminate all air from beneath the laminate on fixing. The laminate is to be free from chipped or cracked portions and work so disfigured is to be moved and replaced. When the adhesive is set the laminate is to be neatly bevelled off along all rises with a plane. Where plastic laminate is fixed to doors or shelves etc., without a laminate to the outer edge, a raised lipping is to be provided and the laminate finished flush against the lipping. A. FIXING DOORS AND FRAMES Doors shall be properly fitted to give a uniform clearance of not more than 3mm all round and the hinges shall be let into doors. Doors frames shall be properly framed at angles. Door stops shall be housed into grooves in frames. Architraves shall be provided to conceal finishes. Frames shall be fixed to grounds or plugs. Fixing shall be by means of non-rusting screws with countersunk heads. For hardwood frames screw heads shall be finished not less than 6mm below surface of the wood and shall be covered with matching round hardwood pellets of appropriate thickness. Pellets shall be chosen and fixed so as to match colours and pattern of grain so far as is practical. Nailing will not be permitted. Except where indicated doors shall be kept clean for clear polyurethane varnish. Door frames shall be treated to match doors. Glazing shall be wired glass 6mm thick with edges wrapped in wash-leather and secured with hardwood glazing bead size 10mm x 15mm mitred at angles secured with brass screws and cups. B. CONSTRUCTION OF DOORS (a) Flush doors specified as solid construction shall have a 100% solid core of vertical laminate Cedar or equal and approved. (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Flush doors specified as semi-sold construction shall be constructed with timber stiles and rails, in filled with horizontal intermediate rails spaced equally apart and tenoned into stiles. Unless otherwise specified, doors scheduled to receive a clear or veneered finish shall be lipped on all edges. Where panels over doors are specified, such panels shall be constructed in the same way and with the same materials as the doors above in which they are situated, and the panels shall match the doors in every respect. For doors specified as plywood faced, the plywood shall not be less than 3mm thick, complying with the requirements of BS 1455, WBP type. Face veneers shall be Grade 1 for painted doors in every respect. All doors shall be provided with lock blocks of minimum size 300mm x 75mm.

112 (g) (h) (i) Glass beading strips shall be approved wash-leather self adhesive tape turned up over both sides of the glass and glazing surfaces and turned to the straight line. All screws shall be countersunk, and screwed and pelleted in un-painted work. Timber pellets shall be glued and tapped into the hole, making sure the grains line up, and are carefully trimmed back flush with joinery to give a clear, smooth overall surface. C. FITTINGS AND FIXTURES The fittings, etc., are to be accurately constructed in accordance with the detailed drawings. The doors, drawers, etc., are all to fit and open and close smoothly and all work next to walls, floors and ceilings is to be soundly fixed and scribed to fit snugly against same. A. MOULDINGS Moulded work shall be accurately worked to the full size details supplied by the Architect. Mouldings shall be worked on the solid unless otherwise stated. B. CIRCULAR WORK When circular work is specified it shall be built up with an appropriate number of pieces cut to the required shapes. The pieces shall be put together in two (or three) thickness so that they break joint, and shall be secured with hardwood keys and wedges or with hardwood pins (whichever is more appropriate). C SCRIBING D. FINISH Skirting, architraves, plates and other joinery works shall be accurately scribed to fit the contour of the irregular surface against which they will be required to form a close butt connection. All joinery which is to be oiled and painted shall be finished smooth and cleaned by rubbing down by hand with fine glass paper. E. COMPLETION OF WORKS Protection of all joinery and ironmongery must be maintained until completion of the contract as a whole. All joinery and glass is to be thoroughly cleaned before the building is handed over. F. DEFECTIVE WORK All work judged to be defective must be removed and replaced as directed by the Architect. IRONMONGERY G. GENERALLY (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Ironmongery shall be fixed with suitable screws to match and prices shall include for this All locks and ironmongery shall be fixed before the woodwork is painted, handles shall be removed before the painting commences carefully stored and refixed after completion of painting. All locks, springs and other items of ironmongery with moveable parts shall be properly tested, cleaned and adjusted where necessary to ensure proper working order at the completion of the works and left in perfect working order by the contractor. The keys of all locks shall have labels attached with door references marked on before handling to the Architect. All locks shall be provided with a master key system and prices shall include for this as required by the client, and as instructed by the Architect. The client s requirements are to be obtained by the contractor before ordering.

113 PART EIGHT STRUCTURAL STEELWORK AND OTHER METAL WORK SPECIFICATIONS A. STEEL QUALITY Structural steel shall comply with the requirements of B.S.4360 and shall be new and unused. It shall be free of imperfections, distortion, rust, scales of other deterioration or contamination by grease, paint and similar items. B. TESTING The Engineer may, where he so desires call manufacturer s work test certificates in respect of all steel, which tests shall have been performed in accordance with B.S.18. The Engineer may also carry out such further tests as he may consider necessary. C. SECTIONS The dimensions and properties of hot rolled structural steel sections and hollow sections shall be in accordance with B.S.2, part 1 and 2, or B.S.4848 for metric sized sections. D. MINIMUM THICKNESS All steelwork sections other than gauge metal sections, including cleats, gusset plates, etc. shall be not less than 8mm thick unless specifically indicated on the Drawings. E. FORGING All steel for forging and all forgings shall comply with the requirements of B. S. 29, and shall be subject to inspection and approval of the Engineer. F. CASTING All material used in the manufacture of castings and all castings shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 309, 1452 and 3100 and shall be subject to inspection and approval of the Engineer. G. GAUGE METAL SECTIONS Sections shall be manufactured from continuously hot dipped galvanised steel coil to B.S.2989 using steel to B.S.1449, part 1A and 1B, classification CR4 with a guaranteed minimum yield stress of 280 N/mm2. The sections shall be cold formed to the basic shapes given in B.S 2994 with the design and details conforming to Addendum No. 1 to B.S.449 (PD4064). Section shall be sawn and holes may be punched so as to produce a neat round hole with no distortion. Holes and cut ends shall be painted with zinc rich paint as soon as possible after cutting. H. Z PURLINS Z purlins shall be fabricated in the longest practicable lengths with staggered joints. All connections shall have a minimum of four bolts. Sag rods and apex ties shall be provided where indicated. STRUCTURAL STEELWORK AND OTHER METAL WORK SPECIFICATIONS A. TUBULAR SECTIONS For tubular construction, due allowance is to be made for sealing the ends of all tubes and hollow square or rectangular sections with welding or welded plates. Where end make connections to other members, they shall be welded on true and square. Shop joints required in tubular members shall be full penetration but welds on to split backing rings. B. STORAGE Steel shall be stored at least 150mm above the ground and protected against rust and corrosion. C. FABRICATION Structural steelwork shall be fabricated in accordance with B.S.449. D. SHOP DRAWINGS

114 The contractor shall prepare fully detailed working drawings of the structural steelwork and obtain the Engineer s approval before commencing any fabrication. The drawing to be submitted at least one week before it is planned to start fabrication. E. EDGE PREPARATION The longitudinal edges of all plates and cover plates forming plate girders or built-up girders and columns and all edges of gusset plates over 12mm thick shall be machined. Edges which are subsequently wholly incorporated in weld may be machine flame cut. The abutting ends of the parts of all compression members including the caps and bases of stanchions, built-up columns and stiffeners transmitting load through direct contact shall be machined after the members have been fabricated so that all the parts shall be in close contact when the joint is made. The edges of the other members may be machine flame cut, sawn, sheared or cropped but hand flame cutting will not be permitted. All burrs shall be removed by grinding, and sheared and cropped edges shall be dressed. F. STRAIGHTENING All plates, bars and rolled sections shall be carefully trued, straightened and taken out of winding by pressure before they are drilled. Heating or hammering rolled sections and plates will not be permitted. G. TEMPLATES H. HOLES The templates throughout the work shall be mild steel. In cases where actual members have been used as templates for drilling similar pieces, the engineer will decide whether they are fit to be used in the finished structure. All holes in the steelwork shall be drilled out and not punched. Whenever holes are drilled in one operation through two or more separate parts the parts shall be separated after drilling and the burrs removed by grinding. All slotted holes shall be finished with sides of the holes straight and parallel. J JOINTS No joints shall be made in any plate, bar or rolled sections except where shown on the Drawings or described in the specification. STRUCTURAL STEELWORK AND OTHER METAL WORK SPECIFICATIONS A. ASSEMBLING AND MARKING All steelwork shall be inspected in the fabricator s yard by the Engineer and where directed the steelwork shall be assembled to check the accuracy and interchangeability of the work. Before despatch from the fabricator s yard all steelwork shall be cleaned down and clearly marked in paint or stencilled and stamped to facilitate sorting at the site. The markings shall be in conformity with the approved working and erection drawings. B. WELDING GENERALLY No welds will be permitted in any part of the permanent work except where shown or described on the approved working Drawings. All welding of steel shall be executed in accordance with the provisions of B.S.5135 and the workmanship shall be of the highest quality in all respects throughout. All welds shall be of the appropriate dimensions, they shall be sound, free from porosity, slag inclusion, undercutting and other defects, and shall be of clean and regular appearance throughout, and the execution shall be such as to ensure that the parts connected are properly aligned and positioned, free from distortion and so fixed together as to produce a homogeneous section of the correct dimensions. As much of the welding as is practicable shall be executed by means of automatic or semi-automatic processes and manual welding shall be kept to a minimum. All welders shall have completed the tests described in part 6 or B.S.449 and may be required to carry out any of those tests in the presence of the Engineer. C. ELECTRODES All covered electrodes for the manual metal are welding of grades of steel to B.S4360 shall comply with the requirements of B.S639 and B.S.1719: part 1. All electrode wires and fluxes for the submerged arc welding of grades of steel to B.S.4360 shall comply with the requirements of B.S 4164.

115 All electrodes shall be of a type, size and quality appropriate to the class of work for which they are intended and shall be supplied by approved manufacturers and shall be of the heaviest gauge consistent with obtaining adequate penetration. Each batch of electrodes shall be accompanied by the manufacturer s certificates stating the date of manufacture, together with certificates giving the results of the initial test and of the most recent periodic check tests. All electrodes shall be stored in their original unbroken bundles or packages in a warm dry and well ventilated place to which the Engineer shall have access. All electrodes for welding shall be used strictly in accordance with manufacturer s instructions and shall be so chosen that the properties of the deposited metal are in no way inferior to those of the parent metal. Under no circumstances shall electrodes be used in a damp condition and any electrodes which have parts of the flux covering broken away or damaged in any respect whatsoever shall be discarded. D. WELDING TRIALS Whenever so directed by the Engineer and prior to the commencement of fabrication, welding and flame cutting procedure trials shall be carried out on typical examples of the various types and categories of welded members and joints using representative samples of the materials to be employed in the work. These trials shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer the suitability and adequacy of the methods and procedures to be adopted in the fabrication. The samples of material to be used in the aforesaid trials shall be selected and marked by the Engineer when the materials are inspected at the rolling mills and the various types and categories of members and joints shall be welded in a manner simulating the most unfavourable conditions that will be experienced during fabrication or assembly. After completion of welding the various examples shall be sectioned for subsequent examination and testing. Any approval by the Engineer of the welding methods and procedures shall in no way limit or restrict the right and authority of the Engineer to subsequently reject any welds or welded joints that in his opinion fall below the standard appropriate to the class of work. A. WELD TESTING The contractor, his subcontractor and/or his fabricator shall be responsible for the preparation of all welded test pieces as and when required by the Engineer and for the provision, maintenance and efficiency of all apparatus and equipment necessary to the conducting of such tests in accordance with the procedure laid down in B.S.709. Non-destructive testing of welds on completed member and joints shall be carried out by the Engineer during the course of fabrication as required and any length of weld or any welded joints exhibiting any defects shall be rejected and all such defects shall be cut out and replaced with sound work. The entire cost of making good or replacing any such rejection shall be borne by the contractor. The contractor, his sub-contractor and/or his fabricator, shall be responsible for all preparations necessary for the carrying out of non-destructive testing of welds on completed members and completed members and joints to the satisfaction of the Engineer and shall provide all assistance required for conducting such tests. B. WELDING PLANT C. BOLTS All plant used for shop and site welding shall be capable of maintaining at the fusion face the voltage and current specified by the manufacturer of the electrodes and the contractor, his sub-contractor and/or his fabricator shall provide the necessary instruments for measuring the voltage and current as and when required by the engineer. Black bolts and nuts shall be in accordance with B.S and shall have their bearing faces machined. Close tolerance bolts and nuts shall be in accordance with B.S3692 and shall have their bearing faces machined, be turned on the shank and shall be screwed with unified coarse threads to B.S Flat and taper steel washers shall be in accordance with B.S4320. Washers shall be provided under the nuts of all black bolts and close tolerance bolts so that the nut, when screwed up tight, does not bear on the shank of the bolt.

116 Taper washers of correct angle of taper shall be provided under all bolt-heads and nuts that are required to bear on bevelled surfaces. D. HIGH STRENGTH FRICTION GRIP BOLTS High strength friction grip (H.S.F.) bolts, nuts and washers shall be of either high strength load indicating bolts and nuts of an approved pattern or shall be provided with load indicators of an approved pattern under the heads of the bolts. The dimension of high strength friction grip bolts and nuts shall be in accordance with B.S.4395 except only for the dimensions of the load indicating washers shall be supplied by manufacturers approved by the Engineer. Non load indicating bolts or washers may be used with prior approval of the Engineer. The part-turn method of tightening shall be used with these bolts. All bolts shall have clear distinctive marks to identify them. The bolts and washers shall be electro-zinc plated or zinc coated sheradizing and the nuts cadmium plated by the manufacturer to ensure that the nuts do not cease under tension. All components shall be stored carefully to ensure no deterioration of finish. A. USE OF HIGH STRENGTH FRICTION GRIP BOLTS The use of high Strength friction Grip Bolts shall be in accordance with B.S B. SURFACES Surfaces of plates in joints shall be free of paint or any other applied finish (except galvanising), oil, dirt, rust, loose scale, burrs or other defects which would prevent solid seating of the parts or would interfere with the development of friction between them. C. MINIMUM PLY THICKNESS General Grade Bolts - no outer ply, and wherever possible no inner ply, shall be smaller in thickness than half the bolt diameter or 10mm whichever is the less. High Grade Bolts - no outer ply, and wherever possible no inner ply, shall be less than 10mm. D. SPACING OF BOLTS This shall be as shown on the Drawings or otherwise in accordance with B.S.449. The tool to be used for tightening should be taken into account when arranging the disposition of bolts in a joint. E. ASSEMBLY OF JOINT Holes shall be lined up with draft pins until bolts in the remaining holes are fully tightened. Driving of bolts will not be permitted. The ends of the bolts and nuts shall be clear and lightly lubricated. No lubricant shall come into contact with the ply faces. Each bolt and nut shall have a flat round washer and taper washer as necessary. Load indicating washers shall be fitted with the protrusions against the bolt head or against a special nut face washer when fitted at the nut end. F. TIGHTENING Tightening shall be in a staggered pattern agreed with the Engineer before hand, working from the centre of joint outwards. Each bolt tightening operation shall be carried out speedily until the required gap under the load indicating washer is reached. This shall be measured using a feeler gauge. Appropriate allowance shall be made in the gap for the location of the indicating washer relative to the bolt. Tightening may be carried out using manual or power wrenches but not torque wrenches and must be carried out until the bolt reaches the minimum specified tension. Full details must be obtained from the manufacturer regarding details of the installation, tightening and use of load indicating washer to confirm the correct tension has been developed in the bolts. G. BOLT FAILURE If after final tightening a nut or bolt is slackened off for any reason, or becomes slack, the nut, bolt and washer must be discarded and not used again. STRUCTURAL STEELWORK AND OTHER METAL WORK SPECIFICATIONS

117 A. PAINTING The gap under the load indicating device shall be filled with paint. B. PART TURN TIGHTENING In certain circumstances the part turn method may be permitted. The sequence of tightening bolts in a group shall be agreed before hand with the Engineer. The bolts shall be tightened initially with a standard podger spanner to bring the joint surfaces into close contact. This must be checked before the tightening process is completed. A permanent mark shall be cut on the nut and protruding end of the bolt using a cold chisel and the nut finally tightened with an impact wrench to turn it relative to the bolt and specified amount to produce the required minimum tension. C. SHOULDERED BOLTS AND NUTS Shouldered bolts and nuts shall be black bolts and nuts in accordance with B.S.2078 and shall be screwed with unified coarse threads to B.S and shall be of the dimensions shown on the Drawings. Shouldered bolts shall be provided at all expansion and other sliding joints and shall be supplied with all necessary washers. D. ANCHOR BOLTS AND NUTS Anchor bolts and nuts for setting in concrete shall be as shown on the Drawings or as approved by the Engineer and shall be fixed in accordance with the manufacturer s technical information sheets giving full particulars of the bolts including the mechanical properties of the bolts, the safe working loads and methods of fixing and usage. E. PACKING FOR SHIPMENT All cleats, gussets, stiffeners, brackets and other projecting material arising out of fabrication shall be protected from damage while being transported in such a manner as to prevent distortion. All machine surfaces shall be suitably protected. All straight bars, except small pieces, shall be shipped in bundles of convenient size and shall be temporarily bolted together or bound with annealed steel wire. All bolts, nuts, washers, screws, small pieces and other small articles shall be adequately packed in crate or other suitable containers. Each piece, packing, bundle and crate shall be clearly marked with its weight and with the appropriate shipping marks before despatch from the fabricator s yard. F. ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEELWORK The erection of all structural steelwork at the site shall be in accordance with the provision of B.S.449. When lifting and fitting steelwork into position care shall be taken that the members are not twisted, bent or damaged. Suitable slings, blocks, tackles, shear legs, derrick, cranes and other types of lifting appliances and equipment shall be provided and every care and precaution shall be taken to ensure the safety of all persons engaged in such work. The erection of the steelwork shall be carried out in such a manner as not to subject any of the members to overstressing, or reversal of loading, which the members are not designed to support. During erection the steelwork shall be securely braced, propped or otherwise temporarily supported until such time as the steelwork is lined, levelled and braced and bolted in its final position. STRUCTURAL STEELWORK AND OTHER METAL WORK SPECIFICATIONS A. ERECTION BY OTHERS Where the steelwork is to be erected by parties other than the fabricator, then the fabricator shall supply complete drawings of the steelwork with itemised and numbered pieces corresponding to the references stencilled on the actual pieces together with all necessary bolts, washers of all kinds required for the complete erection of the steelwork. The fabricator shall also provide any special instructions on the method and sequence of erection and any notes maintaining stability, or pointing out any erection procedures which can cause overstress or collapse.

118 The erector, if in doubt of any methods proposed by himself or laid down by the fabricator shall consult with the Engineer and the fabricator before continuing. Notwithstanding all instructions the responsibility for erection in a proper manner shall lie with the erector. B. SETTING OUT The steelwork shall be set out accurately to line and level and plumbed vertically (or such other angle as required) in accordance with the Drawings and no permanent fixing or final tightening up of the bolts or other connections or concreting in of steelwork shall be carried out until the steelwork has been approved by the Engineer. C. HOLDING DOWN BOLTS Holding down bolts shall normally be placed and concreted in by the main contractor. The steelwork erector shall check the accuracy of the position and level of the bolts before the bolts are concreted in. Any pockets formed for adjustment or placing of the bolts after the main concrete base is cast shall be as shown on the Drawings or to the Engineer s approval. E. BEDDING OF BASE PLATES Steel stanchions with base plates shall be supported on steel shims or wedges to obtain the correct line and level of the stanchions and the holding down bolts tightened by hand. Prior to bedding the base plates, the space under the plates shall be cleaned out. The base plates shall be bedded using cement/sand 1:2 mortar with sufficient water to make the mortar flow under pressure or by vibration or by rodding until the whole space under the base is completely filled. The steel shims or wedges shall be left in. After hardening of the mortar the holding down bolt shall be tightened by spanner as required. F. CONCRETING IN OF MEMBERS Where any portion of a steel member is designed to be cast into concrete, the surfaces in contact with concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned of paint or other adherent matter. When members are to be concrete in, whether supplied with temporary positioning bolts or otherwise, they shall be lined and levelled and plumbed and firmly supported before concreting in. If base plates are shown on the drawings, these shall be grouted in as above prior to concreting. G. NAILS, SCREWS AND BOLTS Nails, screws and bolts shall be of best quality mild steel of lengths and weights approved by the Architect. Nails shall be to B.S.1202 and bolts to B.S.916. STRUCTURAL STEELWORKS AND OTHER METALWORK SPECIFICATIONS Bolts shall project at least two threads through nuts and all bolts passing through timber shall have washers under heads and nuts. A. FIXING METAL WINDOWS, DOORS, ETC The contractor s prices for fixing metal windows, doors, etc., shall include for assembling and fixing, including screwing to wood frames and cutting mortices for lugs in concrete or walling and running with cement mortar (1:4), bedding frames in similar mortar and pointing in mastic, bedding sills, transomes, mullions in mastic, making good plaster around both sides, and fixing, oiling and adjusting all fittings and frames. B. METAL WINDOWS Metal windows shall be steel standard section windows supplied and installed by the contractor or an approved specialist, sub-contractor. In the case of a specialist sub-contractor, the contractor shall provide any general or special attendance as may be required by the sub-contractor. PART NINE

119 FINISHINGS SPECIFICATIONS FINISHINGS GENERAL A. OTHER SPECIFICATIONS All other specifications of this contract where applicable are deemed to apply equally to the finishings specifications. B SAMPLES The contractor shall prepare at his own cost sample areas of the paving, plastering and rendering as directed until the quality, texture and finish required is obtained and approved by the Architect after which all work executed shall conform with the respective approved samples. C FINISHED THICKNESSES The thicknesses of floor finishes quoted in this section of the specification shall be the minimum requirements. Suspended floors shall have a constant structural thickness and have level top surfaces. The finished floor surface will equally have constant level and any adjustment needed to achieve this effect with the varying floor finish materials is to be made in the screeds beneath the same. Slabs bearing on the ground may be cast to varying levels, and be of constant thickness with varying formation levels, or have varying thicknesses at the option of the contractor. This stipulation in no way relieves the contractor of the requirements of the specifications for the structural work. D MATERIALS GENERALLY All materials shall be of high quality, obtained from manufacturer s to be approved by the Architect. Cement, sand and water shall be as described under concrete work and Block work. E BONDING Bonding compounds, etc., for use in applying plaster and similar finishes direct to surfaces without the use of backings or screeds are only to be used if approved by the architect and are to be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer s printed instructions. F. CHASES, OPENINGS AND HOLES FINISHINGS SPECIFICATIONS All chases, holes and the like which were not formed in the concrete or walling shall be cut, and all service pipes shall be fixed and all holes and chases filled with mortar before paving and plaster work is commenced. In no circumstances will the contractor be permitted to cut chases, holes and the like in finishes pavings or plasterwork. The term plastering refers to the operation internally and rendering to the same operation externally but for ease of reference the term plastering has generally been used in this specification to describe both operations. A MIXES The methods of measuring and mixing plaster shall be as laid down under concrete work and the proportions and minimum thickness of finished plaster shall be in accordance with the following:- Item of work Mix Minimum Thickness and finish Internal Plaster 1 part cement 16mm finish to walls and ceilings. ¼ part lime 4 parts sand specified External Render 1 part cement 12mm finish in two coats 4 parts sand wood float finish unless otherwise

120 Tyrolean finish Ditto 6mm finished thickness in two coats on 10mm plastered backing To obtain greater plasticity a small quantity of lime may be added to the mixes for external plastering at the Architect s discretion but in any case this is not to exceed ¼ part lime to 1 part cement. With regard to the lime mortars gauged with cement, of the cement to small quantities of the lime/sand mix shall preferably take place in a mechanical mixer and mixing shall continue for such time as will ensure uniform distribution or materials and uniform colour and consistency. It is important to note that the quality of water used shall be carefully controlled. Plaster may be mixed either in a mechanical mixing machine or by hand. Hand mixed plaster shall first be mixed in the dry state being turned over at least three times. The required amount of water should then be added and the mix again turned over three times or until such time as the mass is uniform in colour and homogeneous. The plaster shall be completely used within thirty minutes of mixing and hardened plaster shall not be remixed but removed from the site. B PREPARATION OF SURFACES FOR PLASTER ETC. Irregularities in the surfaces to be plastered or rendered shall be filled with mortar, without lime, twenty four hours before plastering is commenced. Joints in block work etc., are to be well raked out before plastering to form a good key. Smooth concrete surfaces to be plastered shall be treated with an approved proprietary bonding agent or hacked to provide an adequate key for the plaster. All surfaces to be plastered or rendered shall be clean and free from dust, loose mortar and all traces of salts. All surfaces shall be thoroughly sprayed with water and all free water allowed to disappear before plaster is applied. As far as practical plastering shall not be commenced until all mechanical and electrical services, conduits, pipes and fixtures have been installed. Before plastering is commenced all junctions between differing materials shall be reinforced. This shall apply where walls join columns and beams, particularly where flush and similar situations where cracks are likely to develop and as directed by the Architect. The reinforcement shall consist of a strip of galvanised wire mesh. Exponent or equal approved 15cm wide which shall be plugged, nailed or stapled as required FINISHINGS SPECIFICATIONS at intervals not exceeding 45mm at both edges. The surfaces to which such mesh shall be applied shall be painted with one coat bituminous paint prior to fixing the mesh. A APPLICATION OF PLASTER AND RENDER After preparation of the surfaces a key coat of cement slurry shall be applied to the wetted surface to be plastered. When this coat is dry the plaster coat shall be applied, by means of a trowel between screeds laid, ruled and plumbed as necessary. This coat which shall be to the required thickness shall be allowed to be so hard and then cured as described. Surfaces are to be finished with a wood or steel float to a smooth flat surface free from all marks. Tyrolean finish shall be applied with an approved machine to give a finish of even texture and thickness. The sprayed finish shall be applied in two separate coats allowing time for drying between coats. Application in one continuous operation to build up a thick layer will not be permitted. The total finished thickness of the two sprayed coats shall be not less than 6mm.. the sprayed finish shall not be applied until all repairs and making good to the undercoat are completed. any plaster which adheres to pipes, doors, windows and the like shall be carefully removed before it has set. Curing shall take place after the application of the second coat. The pressed finish as directed by the Architect. Where coloured tyrolean is required this shall be obtained by the addition to the mix of any approved colour pigment. All plastering and rendering shall be executed in a neat workman like manner. All faces except circular work shall be true and flat and angles shall be straight and level or plumb. Plastering shall be neatly made good around pipes or fittings. Angles shall be rounded to 6 mm radius. All tools, implements, vessels and surfaces shall be at all times kept scrupulously clean and strict precautions shall be taken to prevent the plaster or other materials from being contaminated by pieces of partially set material which would tend to retard or accelerate the setting time.

121 B CURING OF PLASTER Each coat of plaster is to be maintained in a moist condition for at least three days after it has developed enough strength not to be damaged by water. They shall be securely plugged, nailed or stapled as required at intervals not exceeding 450mm at both edges. C ANGLE BEADS Where required by the Architect, salient external angles of plastered walls shall be protected with galvanised mild steel angle beads complying with BS 1246 Fig.7 profile C3. They shall be securely plugged, nailed or stapled as required at intervals not exceeding 450mm at both edges. D PLASTER STOPS Where shown on details, plasterwork shall be stopped against expamet galvanized steel plaster stop reference 565 which shall be securely nailed to wall in the positions indicated on the drawings. E CEMENT AND SAND SCREEDS Screed shall be mixed and formed as described. F GRANOLITHIC PAVING The granolithic paving shall be laid by a specialist floor layer and constructed as follows:- Curing compounds if specified or approved by the Architect shall be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer s instructions. Surface hardening solutions of sodium silicate if purchased as liquid shall be of the grade sold for this purpose. Fourteen days after curing the surface shall be sprayed with three coats of sodium silicate solution and spread evenly with a mop or soft brush. Unabsorbed silicate left on the surface after the last application is to be washed off. Solution is to 1:4 by volume for first coat, 1:3 for second, 1:2 for third, applied at 24 hour intervals. The base concrete structural floor shall be finished with a tamped surface. Shortly before the granolithic topping is to be laid the surface of the base concrete is to be thoroughly prepared to provide a good bond. The base concrete shall be hacked by hand or mechanically so that its laitance is completely removed to expose clean coarse aggregate. All traces of dust formed as a result of hacking etc., shall be removed. The base concrete shall be thoroughly wetted prior to laying. Any excess water shall be removed prior to the grouting. The prepared surface of the base concrete shall be covered with a grout consisting of one part cement and one part sand mixed to the consistency of thick cream and it shall be scrubbed into the surface with a stiff broom. The granolithic topping shall be mixed in the following proportions by weight:- 1 part cement, 1 part fine aggregate and 2 parts coarse aggregate. The water content of the granolithic topping shall be kept as low as possible consistent with obtaining full compaction of the topping with the plant available in order to avoid segregation of excessive laitance and in no circumstances must water/cement ratio exceed 0.42 by weight. The granolithic topping shall be mixed for a period of not less than 11/2 minutes after all the materials have been placed in the mixer drum. No concrete shall be removed from the drum so that some water will enter the drum before the cement and aggregates. Each batch shall be discharged completely before the next batch is introduced. No extra water or other material shall be added to the mix after it has left the mixer. If electrical conduit, trunking or any other items are required to be buried within the granolithic topping and the thickness is reduced at any point the contractor is to ensure that steps are taken to eliminate the possibility of cracking in the granolithic topping by means of galvanised wire mesh reinforcement in the flooring or other approved method. The extent of buried conduits, etc., should be ascertained prior to

122 tendering and allowance for complying with this requirement will be deemed to be included in the rates for granolithic flooring. The granolithic toping shall be laid in areas not exceeding 14M2. The length of any bay should not exceed 1½ times the width of that bay. Joints shall be made in the granolithic topping over all joints in the base concrete and over all supporting beams for suspended floors. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings all contraction and construction joints in the granolithic topping shall be simple but joints without a filler. The forms shall be fixed rigidly on a firm foundation and supported throughout their length so that they will not be disturbed by the spreading and compacting of the concrete. The forms shall be true to line within + or - 1mm and to level within + or -2mm. The forms shall be set well in advance of laying the topping and shall be checked for level immediately before concreting starts. The granolithic topping shall be placed as soon as possible after being mixed in two courses each 31mm thick. In no circumstances should the depth of granolithic spread in one operation be greater than that which can be fully compacted by the means available. No more than 1 hour should elapse between placing the courses. The mix proportions and water content of the granolithic shall be identical in each course. The lower course must be compacted before the upper course and each course of topping shall be fully compacted with neither segregation nor excessive laitance. Particular care shall be taken to ensure full compaction of the concrete should be placed to an adequate surcharge to ensure full compaction. After the topping concrete has been placed, levelled and fully compacted it shall be trowelled at least three times at intervals during the ensuing 6-10 hours so as to produce a uniform and hard surface with high resistance to abrasion. Under no circumstances should cement be sprinkled on the surface and trowelled in to absorb surplus water. As soon as the surface has been finished it shall be protected against rapid drying out by erecting barriers against wind or draughts and against strong sunlight. As soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent damage to its surface the floor shall be cured continuously for a minimum of 7 days by one of the following means:- 1. By means of wet canvas or straw mats or 50mm thickness of damp sand laid on the surface and kept continuously damp in position for the full curing period. 2. By means of building paper, plastic or other waterproofing sheeting which shall be kept in close contact with the surface of the concrete. The covering overlap the sides and ends of the slab and shall be lapped 75mm at all joints. The covering shall be securely held in position for the full curing period. 3. By spraying the surface with an approved proprietary curing medium not less than one gallon of which shall be applied to every 20 m 2 of surface. At the end of the curing period the contractor shall take all precautions required by the Architect to ensure that the floor will dry out slowly. Under no circumstance will artificial heating be permitted in the building for a period of at least six weeks after the topping has been laid and thereafter the temperature shall not be increased rapidly. Side forms shall not be removed from freshly placed granolithic until it is at least 12 months old and then only with the Architect s approval. Care shall be taken to avoid damaging the granolithic. If any damage occurs the contractor will be responsible for making good to the Architect s satisfaction. A INSITU TERRAZZO WORK The terrazzo pavings and screeds under are to be laid and polished complete by an approved specialist firm. Where the screed is to be bonded to the concrete structural sub-floor, the latter shall be finished with a tamped surface and left clean and free from dust and grease. Before laying the screed the surface shall be covered with a grout of one part sand and one part cement brushed in with stiff broom. The screed is to be laid before the grout has set. All screeds under in-situ and precast terrazzo paving are to be laid by the approved specialist firm. The screeds shall consist of one part ordinary Portland cement to three parts sharp washed sand. This mix may be varied by agreement on the responsibility of the approved specialist firm.

123 The screed is to be reinforced with 22 gauge galvanised steel wire netting with mesh not exceeding 1 laid direct on the sub-floor of bays exceeding 1 square metre. The screed backing in-situ skirtings is to be such as to adhere firmly to the various materials of the walls. The thickness of in-situ terrazzo finishes are minimal and they may be increased if the specialist considers it necessary with corresponding reductions to the screed thicknesses providing the overall thickness of the finished flooring is maintained and without adjustment to the price quoted. The following thicknesses are assumed in measuring the terrazzo:- Finish Bedding Screed Total In-situ paving In-situ margins In-situ skirtings 8-12 If electrical conduit, trunking or other items are required to be buried within the depth of the screed and flooring and the total thickness is reduced at any point the flooring specialist is to ensure that steps are taken to eliminate the possibility of cracking in the screed and consequent damage to floor finish by means of galvanised wire mesh reinforcement in the screed and flooring or other approved method. The extent of buried conduit, etc., should be ascertained prior to tendering and allowance for complying with this requirement will be deemed to be included in the rates for terrazzo pavings and screeds under. The in-situ terrazzo paving is to consist of two parts of white marble chippings to one part of white Portland Cement to B.S The marble chippings to be fine (graded 3mm to 6mm in equal proportions) rounded glanular clean and free from dust and impurities. In-situ terrazzo paving should be laid on the screed as soon as practicable and not more than three days after the laying of the screed. After laying the surfaces are to be kept moist until ready for polishing. The in-situ terrazzo paving should be laid in panels separated by dividing strips in the positions shown on the drawings. Dividing strips are to be white plastic the full depth of the paving and screed and bedded into the screed with the tip edges truly levelled with the finish polished floor level. The thickness of the dividing strips is to be 5mm. Polishing of in-situ terrazzo paving is to be carried out by a mechanical polisher with graded abrasives and any necessary water. Making good of any defects during polishing is to be done with cement grout matching in colour that used in the terrazzo paving. The finish of in-situ terrazzo pavings is to be smooth and imperforable and is to be approved by the Architect. The terrazzo pavings is to be washed clean on completion and covered with a thick bed of sawdust or other approved protective layer. This should be maintained and renewed as necessary and cleared away on completion. Lay in-situ skirtings to match paving or of approved colour and finish coved at junction with paving of floor finish to 20mm radius. Execute all required angles and stopped or fair returned ends. Vertical dividing strips to match those used in paving are required at not more than three feet intervals. A diving strip is required between paving and skirting at the commencement of the coving. Facing of diving strip nearest to wall to be 200mm from face of skirting. A horizontal diving strip is required at top skirting finished flush with wall finish over. Where in-situ terrazzo skirtings are required under door frames, etc., a pencil round junction is to be made threshold paving in lieu of coving as shown on drawings. In-situ margins shall have dividing strips to match those used in pavings. They shall be positioned at junctions with paving and skirting and transversely at not more than three feet intervals to continue vertical strip in skirting. All internal angles and coves are to be rubbed by hand with carborundum block to be polished finish matching the finish of the paving to the Architect s approval. A SURFACE HARDENERS

124 Floor hardeners shall comprise an approved type guaranteed by the makers to produce a hard dense concrete with high abrasive resistance, impervious to the penetration of heavy oils, acid or alkali solutions and to be used strictly in accordance with the maker s instructions. The first dressing of sodium silicate for granolithic flooring shall be one part of sodium silicate to six parts of water by volume. Subsequent dressing shall be composed of one part of sodium silicate to four parts of water by volume, for all surfaces. The two liquids shall be well mixed together, sprayed over the flooring and spread evenly with a mop or soft brush, any excess being wiped off and the flooring allowed to dry at least 24 hours after dressing. After final drying, floors shall be washed with clean water. B RATES OF IN-SITU WORK The rates for in-situ work shall include for raking out joints of block work or bonding coat or spraying cement slurry on new concrete surfaces to form key, for work in narrow widths, small and isolated areas rounded arrises, fair and chamfered edges, for making good up to boundaries of other work for making good working around pipes, brackets etc., and for all other incidental labours. Rates shall also include for masking before the application of spray finishes work executed overhead, temporary rules, supports, screeds and templates. TILES, SLAB AND BLOCK FINISHINGS C VINYL ASBESTOS TILES Vinyl asbestos floor tiles shall comply with B.S 3260 of an approved manufacturer to patterns as directed by the Architect. Adhesives are to be recommended by the manufacturer in writing and approved by the Architect. The tiles are to be laid and bedded direct in adhesive on to a cement and sand bed to make up the total paving thickness. The cement and sand screed is to be finished with a steel trowel to a perfectly smooth surface before the application of the mastic and tiling. On completion, vinyl asbestos tiles are to be sealed and polished with wax all in accordance with the manufacturer s printed instructions. FINISHINGS SPECIFICATIONS A CLAY TILE PAVING Clay tile paving are to be in 150mm x 150mm tiles obtained from an approved manufacturer, and are to be laid on prepared screeds. The tiles are to be bedded in cement and sand (1:4) with straight joints in each direction. Upon completion grout in cement and wash and clean down. Tiles are to be cut with an electric tile cutting saw. B GLAZED WALL TILES Glazed wall tiles shall be in accordance with B.S1281 and shall be 150mm x 150mm x 6mm tiles from the standard colour range with cusion edges. Wall tiling shall be carried out in accordance with C. P.212. C PRECAST CONCRETE PAVING SLAB To be all in accordance with B.S.368. The slabs are to be of the sizes given herein and bedded, jointed and pointed in cement lime mortar. (1:2:9). D RATES The rates for tile, slab and block finishings shall include for rounded edge tiles and angles, cutting and fitting up to boundaries and around pipes, brackets, etc., and waste; for work in narrow widths, small and isolated areas and for all other incidental labours. PART TEN GLAZING

125 MATERIALS A GENERAL Glass used in glazing and for mirrors shall be best quality clear glass free from visible defects so as to afford uninterrupted vision or reflection as appropriate, and without obvious distortion. B STANDARDS Glass for glazing and mirrors shall be of approved manufacture and is to comply with B.S.952 in all respects free from flaws, bubbles, specks and other imperfections. C CLEAR SHEET GLASS ETC. The clear sheet glass shall be ordinary glazing (OG) quality. D PLATE GLASS To be of type described and as approved by the Architect. E OBSCURED GLASS To be of type described and as approved by the Architect. I Putty GLAZING SPECIFICATIONS (a) (b) (c) The putty for glazing to wood sashes is to be linseed oil putty all as B.S.544. The putty for glazing to metal windows is to be gold size metal window putty specially designed for tropical use, or patent mastic putty if approved by the Architect. All putty shall be delivered on site in the original manufacturer s sealed cans or drums and used direct therefrom, with the addition only of pure linseed oil if necessary. No mineral or other oils may be used in the putty except genuine linseed oil. F MIRRORS Mirrors shall be polished float glass silverin quality, protected at back with electro-copper backing coated with shellac varnish and paint. The mirrors are to be fixed with chromium plated dome headed mirror screws with plastic or rubber distance pieces and washers unless otherwise stated and rates shall include for this. WORKMANSHIP G GENERAL Glazing of all types and in all locations shall be carefully executed by artisans skilled in this type of work and in conformance with recommendations of C.P.152. Glazing shall be carefully fitted so that it is not subject to pressure and stress imposed by being an overtight fit within the framing. J MEASUREMENTS Putty Each element (door, window etc.) to receive glass shall be accurately measured to ensure a perfect fit subsequently. K SINGLE GLAZING Single glazing shall be executed with glass of the various types described herein. Ordinary (non safety) glass may be pre-cut or cut on site. L WIRED GLASS Wired glass shall be cut so that the wires embedded are truly vertical and horizontal (i.e at right angles to the cut edges).

126 M SAFETY GLASS Safety glass shall be factory cut before delivery to site. Site cutting will not be permitted. N STORAGE AND HANDLING Glass shall be delivered to site in stout containers and clearly marked. The containers shall incorporate sling attachment points for lifting bridles. Glass shall be stored under cover so that the panes are truly vertical. P PROTECTION After fixing glass shall be boldly marked with paper or whitewash so that it is clearly visible. In positions where damage due to construction traffic or activity is likely to occur stout screens composed of hardboard or fibreboard on battens shall be arranged to protect the glass. Q DAMAGE Should any glass delivered to site be found to be damaged it shall not be incorporated into the works without the express permission of the Architect. Should glazing installed be damaged for any reason it shall GLAZING SPECIFICATIONS be removed and replaced free of charge to the satisfaction of the Architect. Should any adjacent works be damaged this shall equally be reinstated free of charge to the satisfaction of the Architect. J DEFECT WORK All glass shall be checked before installation to ensure that defective glass is not installed. Notwithstanding this, if in the opinion of the Architect, any installed glazing is defective it shall be removed and replaced free of charge to the satisfaction of the Architect. K L GLAZING TO WOOD Glazing shall be secured to wood framing with hardwood beads. Edges shall be wrapped in wash-leather so that the wash-leather finishes just below the surface of the bead. No adhesives shall be used. GLAZING TO METAL Glazing shall be secured to metal framing with clip in butyl rubber gaskets. M GLASS THICKNESS Glass thickness shall conform to the recommendations of C.P.152 and the manufacturer s recommendations for sizes of panes relative to the position in the building and the effects of wind pressure (both negative and positive). N CLEANING PART ELEVEN All window glazed panels and mirrors shall be cleaned both inside and out immediately prior to the handing over of the building to satisfaction of the Architect. SPECIFICATIONS PAINTING & DECORATING PAINTING AND DECORATING MATERIALS A B MANUFACTURERS Except where stated all materials shall be obtained from approved manufacturers. The contractor shall state the name and address of the manufacturer whose materials he proposes to use. Once approval has been given the contractor shall not obtain materials from other sources without the prior written agreement of the Architect. GENERAL Each succeeding coat of priming, undercoating and finishing (pigment) or clear coating shall be sufficiently different in colour as to be readily distinguishable.

127 All primers and paints in one system upon a particular surface shall be obtained from the same manufacturer. The mixing of paints, etc, of difference brands before or during application will not be permitted. C EMULSION PAINTS Emulsion paints shall be matt to satin finish vinyl emulsion paint. The first (mist) coat shall be thinned in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions. D GLOSS PAINT Gloss paint shall be hard gloss finish oil paint. E LEAD BASED PAINT The use of lead based paints will not be permitted. F CLEAR FINISHES Clear finishes internally shall be clear polyurethane varnish (one pack). G PRIMERS AND UNDERCOATS Unless otherwise specified, primers and undercoats shall be the type recommended by the manufacture of the finishing coats specified for a particular surface. Primer for external bare metalwork surfaces shall comply with B.S H KNOTTING Shellac knotting shall comply with B.S 1336 J WHITE SPIRIT The white spirit shall comply with B.S PAINTING DECORATION SPECIFICATIONS A TIMBER STAIN Timber stain shall be oil based pigmented stain. The application of this material shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions. Tint and degree of application shall be to the approval of the Architect. B STOPPING The stopping shall be as follows:- (a) (b) (c) plasterwork shall be plaster based filler. Concrete and brick work shall be similar material to the background and finished in a similar texture. Internal woodwork, plywood and blockboard shall be putty complying with B.S.544. (d) External woodwork shall be white lead paste complying with B.S (e) Internal clear wood finishes: the stopping shall be that recommended by the clear lacquer manufacturer. C FILLERS The fillers for internal joinery shall be the type recommended by the paint manufacturer for use with his type of paint or lacquer. Stopper and fillers shall be tinted to match the under coat, and shall be compatible with both undercoats and primers.

128 All materials shall be used strictly in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. D TEXTURED COATING Textured coating is to be of proprietary manufacture approved by the architect and of an approved colour. Technical information concerning the coating is to be submitted to the Architect before ordering, but the minimum qualities of the coating are to as follows:- (a) (b) (c) (d) Suitable for application internally and externally, plastered, rendered, concrete, block stone, brick, asbestos and timber surfaces. Minimum durability of 10 years even in exposed conditions Maintenance free Built- in mould resistant fungicide. WORKMANSHIP A GENERAL Workmanship generally shall be carried out in accordance with B.S.C.P 231, unless otherwise specified. Before painting is commenced floors shall be swept and washed over; surfaces to be painted shall be cleaned before applying paint as specified, and all precautions taken to keep down dust whilst work is in progress. No paint shall be applied to surfaces structurally or superficially damp and all surfaces must be ascertained to be free from condensation, efflorescence, etc.., before the application of each coat. No painting shall be carried out externally during humid, rainy, damp, foggy or freezing conditions, or conditions where surfaces have attained excessively high temperatures or during dust storms. No new primed or undercoated woodwork and metal work shall be left in an exposed or unsuitable situation for an undue period before completing the process. No dilution of paint materials shall be allowed except strictly as detailed by the manufacturer s own direction, either on the containers, or their literature, and with special permission of the Architect. For external work dilution of paints will not be allowed whatsoever. For internal work, where permitted by the Architect, undercoats may be thinned by the addition of not more than 5% thinners. Gloss finish shall not be thinned at all. Metal fittings such as ironmongery etc., not required to be painted shall first be fitted and then removed before the preparatory processes are commenced. When all paining is completed the fittings shall be cleaned as necessary and refixed in position. B BRUSHWORK Unless otherwise specified, all primers and paints shall be brush applied. Written permission must be obtained from the Architect s if an alternative method of application is to be used. C STOPPING AND FILLING Unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer all primers and undercoats shall be stopped flush and rubbed down to a smooth surface with an abrasive paper and all dust removed before each succeeding coat is applied. Care shall be taken to prevent burnishing of the surface. D STIRRING Unless otherwise specified by the paint manufacturer all paint materials shall be thoroughly mixed and/or stirred before and during use, and suitably strained as and when necessary. E INSPECTION No priming coats shall be applied until the surfaces have been inspected and the preparatory work has been approved by the Architect. No undercoats of finishing coats shall be applied until the previous coat has been similarly inspected and approved. F PAINT APPLICATION

129 Each coat of paint shall be so applied as to produce a film of uniform thickness. All paint shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions. Special attention shall be given to ensure that all surfaces including edges, corners, crevices, welds and rivets receive a film thickness equivalent to that of adjacent painted surfaces. PAINTING AND DECORATING SPECIFICATIONS A DRYING All coats shall be thoroughly dried before succeeding coats are applied. Allow a minimum of between application on any one surface, unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer. 24 hours B UPRIMED WOODWORKS Unprimed woodwork scheduled to be painted shall be rubbed down with abrasive paper and dusted off. Care shall be taken to prevent burnishing of the surface. All knots and resinous areas shall be coated with two coats of knotting. Pitch on large, open unseasoned knots and all other beads or streaks of pitch shall be scrapped off, or if still soft, shall be removed with white spirit before applying the knotting. Apply one coat of priming to all surface, two coats to all end grain, to be subsequently painted. Backs of all wood frames in contact with concrete, brickwork, blockwork, and metalwork or similar materials shall be primed before fixing. After priming all joints, holes, cracks shall be stopped and filled, rubbed down and dusted off. C PRIMED WOODWORK Woodwork delivered primed shall be lightly rubbed down with abrasive paper, and dusted off. Touch up bare areas with similar priming including open grained ends. After touch priming all joints holes, cracks and open grained ends shall be stopped and filled, rubbed down and dusted off. D PLYWOOD AND BLOCKBOARD Edges of exterior plywood and blockboard shall be sealed with two coats of aluminium primer and the backs treated with a lead primer. E CLEAR FINISHED WOODWORK All woodwork scheduled to receive a clear finish shall be well sanded with the grain removing all dirt etc.., to give as smooth a surface as possible. Resinous timber shall be swabbed down with white spirit and dried thoroughly. Split or end grain shall be filled with suitable filler recommended by the clear lacquer manufacturer in accordance with their instructions, and of the appropriate shade. F BARE METALWORK Bare metalwork shall be thoroughly cleaned off all dirt, grease, rust and scale by means of chipping, scrapping and wire brushing; particular attentions should be given to the cleaning of welded, brazed and soldered joints. Wash down with white spirit and wipe dry with clean rags. Apply a coat of metal primer immediately the cleaned surfaces have been approved by the Architect. G GALVANIZED METALWORK Galvanized metalwork scheduled for painting shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, grease dusted and washed down with white spirit and wiped dry with clean rags. Any minor areas of rust shall be removed by wire brushing and spot primed with a zinc rich primer. Apply at least one coat of calcium plumbate primer at all surfaces subsequently to be painted. H PRIMED METALWORK If the priming coat of pre-primed metalwork has suffered damage in transit, or during erection on site, the affected areas shall be cleaned off by wire brushing abrading and dusting off, the bared patches touched up with a primer of a similar type to that already applied. PAINTING AND DECORATING SPECIFICATIONS A COPPER

130 Copper scheduled for painting shall be lightly abraded with emery cloth, washed with white spirit and wiped dry with clean rags. Apply a coat of each primer immediately the cleaned surfaces have been approved. B BRICKWORK, CONCRETE ETC. All brickwork, block work, concrete, rendered and plaster surfaces scheduled to be painted shall be brushed down, all holes and cracks filled, all projections such as plaster or mortar splashes etc., removed to leave a suitable dust free surface. All traces of mould oil shall be removed from concrete surfaces by scrubbing with water, detergent and rinsing with clean water. All these surfaces shall be thoroughly dry before any primer or paints are applied. Apply a coat of alkali resisting primer where surfaces are to be finished with oil paints or alkyd type emulsion. Asbestos cement surfaces scheduled for painting shall be brushed down to remove powdery deposits, and a coat of alkali resisting primer applied where such surfaces are to be finished with oil paints or alkyed resin type emulsion. C COLOURS The colour will, be selected by the Architect from the paint manufacturer s standard colour range. D TOXIC WASH Concrete, block work, plaster and timber surfaces which are to be painted shall be washed down prior to painting with a toxic wash applied by brush or spray. A second wash shall be applied two days after the first wash. The surfaces shall be then allowed to dry out completely before application of paint. E PROTECTION Proper care must be taken to protect surfaces while still wet by use of screens and wet paint signs where necessary. F DAMAGE Care must be taken when preparing surfaces, or painting etc., not to stain or damage other work. Dust sheets and covers to the satisfaction of the Architects shall be used to protect adjacent work. Any such stains or damage shall be removed and made good at the Contractor s expense. G CLEANLINESS All brushes, tools,pails, kettles and equipment shall be clean and free from foreign matter. They shall be thoroughly cleaned after use and before being used for different colours, types of classes of material. Painting shall not be carried out in the vicinity of other operations that may cause dust. Waste liquids, oil soaked rag etc., shall be removed from the building each day. Waste liquids shall not be thrown down in any sanitary fittings or drains. H PERFORMANCE If, while the work is in progress, the paint appears to be faulty, such as consistency of colour, drying time, or quality of finish, the work shall be stopped at once and the manufacturer consulted. The manufacturer s of the materials shall be given every facility for inspecting the work during progress in order to ascertain that the materials are being used in accordance to their directions, and to take samples of their products from the site if they so desire for tests. The finishing coats of the various paints or surface finishing shall be free from sags, brush marks, runs, wrinkling, dust, bare or starved patches, variations in colour and texture, and other blemishes. When the work has been completed, the finished surfaces shall not be inferior in quality, colour and finish to the samples approved by the Architect, and imperfections in manufacture shall not be apparent through these finished surfaces. In the event that the Architect is not satisfied that the quality of finish does not comply with the required standards and/or the sample panel the contractor will be required to repaint at his own expense, such work to the satisfaction of the Architect. If in the opinion of the Architect it is necessary to remove completely the unsatisfactory paintwork this shall also be done under the direction of the Architect at the expense of the contractor. A Packaging, Delivery and Storage Specifications 55

131 All paints and surface coatings shall be delivered in sound sealed containers, labeled clearly by the manufacturers, the label or decorated container must state the following:- (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) The type of product The brand name and colour The use for which it is intended The manufacturer s batch number The B.S number if applicable All labels shall be printed containers bearing type written labels will not be acceptable Materials shall be stored under cover in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions, and with local fire and safety regulations. The store itself must be maintained at temperature of not less than 50 degrees f (10 degrees C) and must not be subjected to extreme changes of temperature. B VINYL EMULSION PAINT Surfaces to be painted shall receive one mist coat followed by two full coats of vinyl emulsion paint. Application may be by means of rollers or brushes. C GLOSS FINISH PAINT Surfaces to be painted shall be primed then painted with two undercoats followed by one coat gloss finish paint. D CLEAR POLYURETHANE VARNISH Surface to be clear varnished shall be treated with two coats polyurethane varnish E TEXTURED COATING The manufacturer s instructions concerning application of the coating are to be strictly followed under the direction of the Architect. All surfaces to receive textured coatings are to be clean and dry with surfaces scrapped and brushed before application of the coating. Application of the coating is to be with textured roller or fibre brush as directed by the Architect with a minimum spreading capacity of 1 kilogramme per square metre. Under no circumstances is the coating to be thinned. PART TWELVE PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS PLUMBING GENERAL A REGULATIONS ETC. The whole of the plumbing works is to be executed by a registered plumber and drain layer in strict accordance with the regulations of the local Authorities and to the satisfaction of the Architect. B MATERIALS BLACK STEEL PIPE WORK All black steel pipe work up to 65 mm nominal bore shall be manufactured in accordance with B.S 21. All fittings shall be malleable iron and manufactured in accordance with B.S 143. Pipe joints shall be screwed and socketed and sufficient couplings unions shall be allowed so that fittings can be disconnected without cutting the pipe. Running nipples and long screws shall not be permitted unless exceptionally approved by the Engineer. Specifications 56

132 All black steel pipe work, 80 mm nominal bore up to 150 mm nominal bore, shall be manufactured to comply in all respects with the specifications for 65 mm. Pipe, except that screwed and bolted flanges shall replace unions and couplings for the jointing of pipes to valves and other items of plant. All flanges shall comply with requirements of B.S. 10, to the relevant classifications contained hereinafter under section c of the specification. C GALVANISED STEEL PIPEWORK Galvanised steel pipe work shall be manufactured to comply in all respects with the standards described for black steel pipe work in paragraph (B) above. Galvanising shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of B.S 1387 and B.S 143 respectively. D COPPER TUBING All copper tubing shall be manufactured in accordance with B.S 2871 from C.160 Phosphorus Deoxidized Non-arsenical copper in accordance with B.S Pipe joints shall be made with soldered capillary fittings and connections to equipment shall be with compression fittings manufactured in accordance with B.S 864. Short copper connection tubes between galvanised pipe work and sanitary fitments shall not be used because of the risk of galvanic action. If, as may occur in certain circumstances, it is not possible to make the connections in any other way than by the use of copper tubing, then a brass straight connector shall be positioned between the galvanised pipe and the copper tube in order to prevent direct contact. E CAST IRON PIPEWORK Internal iron pipe work and fitting for use above ground in connection with internal building services shall be manufactured with spigot and socket joints of the weight required by the local Authority and shall comply full with the requirements of B.S 416. All joints on cast iron spigot and socket pipes shall be made with an approved cold caulking compound and contraction which may take place. All cast iron pipe work branches, tees, bends and other fittings shall be supplied complete with inspection covers for cleaning purposes. These inspection covers shall be included as part of the fittings and shall comply with the requirements of B.S 416. A ASBESTOS CEMENT PRESSURE PIPES Where asbestos cement pressure pipes and fittings are used in connection with external, above, ground or buried water services, they shall by manufactured in accordance with the requirements of B.S 486. The classification of these pipes falls into four classes: A., B., C., and D, respectively, and the class to be used shall depend upon the pressure conditions pertaining at site. Where cast iron detachable joints are used by connecting pipes, the material shall comply with B.S 1452 and be suitable protected with a non-toxic compound against corrosion. When jointing components are made in any other material for which there is no B.S specification, then the materials used shall be of quality not less than that required by this standard. Rubber jointing rings shall be used for sealing purposes and shall comply with the requirements of B.S 2494, except where they are likely to be contaminated by the oil products, in which case the gaskets shall be manufactured in accordance with B.S B P.V.C. (HEAD) PRESSURE PIPE AND FITTINGS All P.V.C pipes and fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with B.S The method of jointing to be employed shall be that of solvent welding, using the pipe and manufacture s approved cement. Seal ring joints shall be introduced where it is necessary to accommodate thermal expansion. Specifications 57

133 All bends, valves and hydrant tees etc., in the line of the watermain shall be adequately anchored to resist thrust due to internal water pressure. A concrete block shall be cast under and around the pipe and between it and sides of the trench. Well rammed material shall be used to support the pipe and either side of the concrete. Pipes shall be uniformly laid on a 75mm thick bed,(the full width of trench) of fine grained materials (sand or red soil) and must not be allowed to rest on the joint or on stones etc. In underground installations care shall be taken to ensure that heavy components such as valves are fully supported so that no weight is carried by the pipeline. For the protection of the pipe initial backfilling shall be carried out as soon as possible after laying. The initial backfilling shall be fine grained material thoroughly compacted around the pipe and consolidated to a depth of 6 above the crown of the pipe and at no time shall heavy rocks, stones or other objects be included in the balance of the backfilling that might protrude through the initial layer and come into contact with the pipe. PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS Pipelines shall be tested in sections under internal water pressure normally one and a half times the maximum allowable working pressure for the class of pipe used. Testing shall be carried out as soon as practicable after laying and when the pipeline is adequately anchored. Precautions shall be taken to eliminate all air from the test section and to fill the pipeline slowly to avoid risk of damage due to surge. A A.B.S. WASTE SYSTEM Where indicated on the drawings and schedules, the sub-contractor shall supply and fix A.B.S waste pipes and fittings. Pipes, traps and fittings shall be in accordance with the relevant British standards, including B.S 3943, and fixed generally in accordance with manufacturer s instructions, and B.S 5572:1978. Jointing of pipes shall be carried out by means of solvent welding. method of joint preparation and fixing shall be followed. The manufacturer s recommended Standard brackets, as supplied for use with this system, shall be used wherever possible. Where the building structure renders this impracticable the sub-contractor shall provide purpose made supports, the centers of which shall not exceed one metre. Expansion joints shall be provided as indicated. Supporting brackets and pipe clips shall be fixed on each side of these joints. B. P.V.C SOIL SYSTEM The sub-contractor shall supply and fix P.V.C soil pipe and fittings as indicated on the drawings and schedules. Pipes and fittings shall be in accordance with relevant British Standards, including B.S 4514, and fixed to the manufacturer s instructions, and B.S The soil system shall incorporate synthetic rubber gaskets as provided by the manufacturers whose fixing instructions shall be strictly adhered to. Connections to W.C and pans shall be effected by the use of W.C connector, gasket and cover, sized to suit pan outlet. Suitable supporting brackets and pipe clips shall be provided at maximum of one metre centers. The subcontractor shall be responsible for the joint into the Gully Trap and Drain as indicated on the drawings. VALVES C DRAW-OFF TAPS AND STOP VALVES (UP TO 50 MM NOMINAL BORE) Draw off taps and valves up to 50 mm nominal bore, unless otherwise stated or specified, for attachment or connection to sanitary fitments shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of B.S D GATE VALVES All gate valves 80 mm nominal bore and above, other than those required for fitting to `buried water mains shall be of cast iron construction, in accordance with the requirements of B.S All gate valves required Specifications 58

134 for fitting to buried water mains shall be of cast iron construction in accordance with the requirements of B.S All gate valves up to and including 65 mm nominal bore shall be of bronze construction in accordance with the requirements of B.S The pressure classification of all gate valves shall depend upon the pressure conditions pertaining to the site of works. A GLOBE VALVES All globe valves up to and including 65 mm nominal bore shall be of bronze construction in accordance with the requirements of B.S The pressure classification of all globe valves shall depend upon the pressure conditions pertaining to the site of works. B CHECK OR NON-RETURN VALVES All check or non-return valves 80 mm nominal bore and above shall be of the swing check type of cast iron construction in accordance with the requirements of B.S The pressure classification of all check or non-return valve shall depend upon the pressure conditions pertaining to site of the works. C BALL VALVES All ball valves for use in connection with hot and cold water services shall be of the portsmouth type in accordance with the requirements of B.S 1212, constructed from bronze or other corrosion resistant materials. These valves fall into three pressure classifications as follows:- (i) Low Pressure b maximum (ii) Medium pressure b maximum (iii) High pressure maximum The pressure classification required for each ball valve will be designated in the description of its associated equipment contained in section IV of the specification. D MANUALLY OPERATED MIXING VALVES Mixing valves for shower fittings and other appliances being provided under the sub-contractor works shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of B.S 1415 from bronze or other corrosion resistant materials. WASTE FITMENTS TRAPS E STANDARD AND DEEP SEAL P & TRAPS Where standard or deep seal traps are specified they shall be manufactured in suitable non-ferrous materials in accordance with the full requirements of B.S In certain circumstances, cast iron traps may be required for cast iron baths and in these instances bath traps shall be provided which are manufactured in accordance with the full requirements of B.S PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS A ANTI-SYPHO TRAPS Where anti-syphon traps are specified, these shall be similar or equal to the range of traps manufactured by Terrain-their self-resealing Traps or by Marley Extrusions Ltd their Antisyphon Traps. PIPES SUPPORTS B GENERAL This sub-clause deals with pipe supports securing pipes to the structure of buildings for above ground application. Specifications 59

135 The variety and type of supports shall be kept to a minimum and their design shall be such as to facilitate quick and secure fixing to metal, concrete, masonry or wood. Consideration shall be given, when designing supports, to the maintenance of desired pipe falls and the restraining or pipe movements to a longitudinal axial direction only. The sub-contractor shall supply and install all steelwork forming part of the pipe support assemblies and shall be responsible for making good any damage to builders work associated with the pipe support installation. The sub-contractor shall submit all his proposals for pipe supports to the Engineer for approval before any erection work commences. C STEEL AND COPPER PIPES AND TUBES Pipes runs shall be secured by pipe clips connected to pipe hangers, wall brackets, or trapeze type supports. U bolts shall not be used as substitute for pipe clips withoutthe prior approval of the Engineer. An approximate guide to the maximum permissible supports spacings in metres for steel and copper pipe and tube is given in the following table for horizontal runs. Size Minimal Bores Copper Tube To B.S 659 Steel Tub to B.S mm m 20mm 2.0m 2.5m 25mm 2.0m 2.5m 40mm 2.5m 3.0m 50mm 2.5m 3.0m 65mm 3.0m 3.5m 80mm 3.0m 3.5m 100mm 3.0m 4.0m 125mm 3.0m 4.5m 150mm 3.5m 4.5m The support spacing for vertical runs shall not exceed one and a half times the distances given for horizontal runs. D CAST IRON AND ASBESTOS CEMENT SPIGOT SOCKOT JOINTED PIPES Cast iron and asbestos cement socketed pipes shall generally be supported at every socket joint by means of either PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS Cast iron and Asbestos cement spigot socket Jointed pipes holder bats secured rigidly to the structure, or purpose made straps for attachment to rigid steel support brackets. When holder bats are used, they shall conform to the requirements of B.S 416. Suitable anchors shall be provided at all changes of pipe directions, junctions and tees, to counteract the effect of end thrust loads. A ASBESTOS CEMENT PRESSURE PIPES B Asbestos cement pressure pipes with either cast iron detachable joints or asbestos cement screw joints shall be supported and anchored on either side of the joint. Pipe hangers and trapeze type supports shall not be suitable for the suspension of asbestos pressure pipes unless they are designed with suitable restrictions to prevent swinging while at the same time providing the necessary support requirements. Within building, asbestos pressure pipes shall be carried either on concrete supports or on rigidly fixed steel wall brackets. Suitable anchors shall be provided at all changes of pipe direction, junctions and tees to counterpart the effect of end thrust loads. EXPANSION JOINTS AND ANCHORS Specifications 60

136 Where practicable, cold pipe work systems shall be arranged with sufficient bends and changes of direction to absorb pipe expansion providing that the pipe stresses are contained within the working limits prescribed in the relevant B.S specification. The sub-contractor shall pay particular care when supporting cast iron and asbestos cement pipes in order to ensure that settlement and building movement do not break the pipe joints. Where piping anchors are supplied, they shall be fixed to the main structure only. Details of all anchor design proposals shall be submitted to the Engineers for approval before erection commences. The Sub-contractor when arranging his piping shall ensure that no expansion movements are transmitted from pumps to piping systems or vice versa. being C JOINTING PIPES Joints shall be made strictly in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions. The sub-contractor shall make use of the technical advisory services offered by manufacturers for instructing pipe jointers in the methods of assembling joints. Where manufacturers recommend the use of special jointing tackles, the sub-contractor shall use these for the assembly of all joints to pipes. Sockets shall be laid looking uphill unless otherwise approved. Before making any joints, all jointing surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and dried and maintained in such condition until the joints have been completely made or assembled. Notwithstanding any flexibility provided in the pipe joints, pipes must be securely positioned to prevent avoidable movement during and after the making of the joint. The space between the end of the spigot and the shoulder of the socket of flexibly jointed pipes when jointed shall be as recommended by the manufacturer or ordered by the Engineer. PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS After flexibly jointed pipes, other than PVC pipes have been jointed the gaps between the barrel of the pipes and internal face of the socket shall be sealed with puddle clay, uncaulked rope yarn or other approved materials. The rope yarn or other material must have been treated so as not to support bacterial growth. Where loose collars are used to join the pipes cut for closers, special tools shall be employed to keep the inside of the pipes flush and the collar concentric with the pipe while the joint is being made. Pipes provided with spigot and socket joints of the self-centering instantaneous joint type, such as the rubber ring push fit joint, shall be laid and jointed strictly in accordance with the makers instructions. Generally the joint ring shall be cleaned and inspected for cuts and defects, and socket and spigot examined to ensure freed on form oil, grease, tar and grit. The makers recommended lubricant will be used. A CAST IRON JOINT FITTINGS Cast iron detachable joint collars and flanges shall be tested by striking lightly with a spanner immediately before they are placed and if they fail to ring true shall be set aside and not incorporated in the work until proven sound. The flanges shall be correctly positioned and the component parts including any insertion ring cleaned and dried. Insertion rings shall be fitted smoothly to the flange without folds or wrinkles. The face and bolt holes shall be brought fairly together and the joints shall be made by gradually and evenly tightening bolts in diametrically opposed positions. Only standard length spanners shall be used to tighten the bolts. The protective coating if any, of the flange shall be made good when the joint is completed. Bolts threads shall be wrapped with PTFE tape where directed before use. No washers shall be used on flanged pipe work to be laid below ground. Bolts shall be as specified and shall be of the correct length, leaving a maximum of two threads exposed. B SOLVENT WELDED JOINTS Only the solvent cement recommended by the manufacturer for his pipe joint system shall be used and his instructions on the making of the joint shall be closely followed. Excess solvent cement shall not be applied to the inside of the pipe socket and all surplus solvent shall be removed from the joint and the pipe. Any solvent falling on the trench formation shall be removed by excavating the contaminated soil. Specifications 61

137 Solvent welded pipes jointed outside the trench shall not be lowered into the place until the elapse of time recommended by the manufacturer. The time allowed for curing shall be increased with lower temperatures. CONNECTIONS C CONNECTION OF TUBING TO COLD STORAGE TANKS, HOT WATER CYLINDERS AND SANITARY FITTINGS Each connection of tubing to cold water storage tanks shall be made by drilling a hole in the tank side and using a long screw, union and two back nuts all well screwed up in red lead. Joints of tubing to flanged and bossed connections of hot water cylinders shall be made with a boiler screw, union and back nut screwed up in red lead. Connections to sanitary fittings shall be made with 450 mm lengths of copper tubing bent to shape as required with copper to iron coupling at each end, and red lead joint to union of fittings and tubing. All sanitary-ware and fittings shall be left in a clean and good condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All fittings shall be fixed in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions and shall comply with the general requirements of B.S. code of practice 305 and the particular requirements of the latest applicable B.S specification. Lavatory basin brackets shall be cut and pinned to walls in cement mortar including making good rendering, tiling or plastering etc. A. PIPE SLEEVES Main runs of pipe work are to be fitted with sleeves where they pass through walls and floors. Generally the sleeves shall be of PVC. Except where they pass through the structure, where they shall be mild steel. The sleeves shall have 6 mm 12 mm clearance all around the pipe, or for insulated pipe work all around the insulation. The sleeve will then be packed with slag wool or similar. B CUTTING PIPES Iron pipes shall be cut by a method and with apparatus which provides a clean square cut of the pipe and of the lining, if any, without damage to pipe or lining. All cut or trimmed ends, and the parts of any pipe on which the coating may have suffered damage shall be recoated with bitumen before the pipes are laid. The external area at cut spigot ends of ductile iron pipes shall be ground for a distance of at least 125 mm. Asbestos-cement pipes shall be cut by hacksaw or other approved means to a square and even finish without splitting or fracturing the wall of the pipe. A percentage of the pipes ordered shall be supplied with fully turned barrels and these pipes will set aside for use in cutting specific lengths. When no fully turned pipes are available a hand operated turning machine shall be used to prepare the ends of cut pipes for Johnson Couplings, barrel joints or collar joints. Pitch-impregnated fibre pipes shall be cut by saw and where necessary the end shall be filled or machined to the required 2 degrees taper. Concrete pipes shall be cut to a square and even finish without splitting or fracturing the wall for the pipe. Reinforcement shall be cut back flush with the concrete and bare metal protected with bituminous paint or cement grout as directed. Only steel pipes supplied rounded throughout their length shall be used as cut pipes to form closures. The cutting shall be done by an approved method and apparatus which provides a clean spare cut, without separation of the lining form the pipe wall. Minor damage to the lining may, of permitted, be repaired on site in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions. Where in the opinion of the Engineer the damage is serious the pipe or special shall be returned to the manufacturer for reconditioning. C PIPES BUILT INTO STRUCTURE The outside surface of pipes D PIPES BUILT INTO STRUCTURE The outside surface of all pipes and special castings to be built into structures shall be thoroughly cleaned immediately before installation. Where ordered protective coatings to metal pipes shall be removed from the sections to be built in, while the external surfaces of fireclay and concrete pipes shall be roughened to form a key for concrete or mortar. Sheathing to steel pipes shall be cut away from the sections to be building and Specifications 62

138 after erection the protection shall be completed by applying approve bituminous material around the barrels of pipes of the junctions with structures. PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS Pipes passing through water retaining walls and floors shall, where possible, be built into the structure in-situ. Shuttering shall be formed closely to the outside of the pipes, and concrete shall be placed and compacted thoroughly round pipe and puddle flange, if any. Where fixing in the course of construction is not possible, temporary openings in structures, formed to the dimensions shown by the Engineer shall be left where indicated or directed to accommodate the subsequent erection of pipes and special castings. In water retaining structures, they shall taper to a smaller dimension towards the external faces of structures and shall include where indicated a water top. In basements, dry chambers at pumping stations etc., temporary openings shall taper to a smaller dimension towards the internal faces of structures and shall also include, where indicated a water stop. Prior to in filling, all surfaces against which fresh concrete is to be placed shall be prepared as specified, while the external surfaces of pipe work shall be prepared as described in this clause. A SETTING VALVES Care must be taken to prevent damage to all valves, fire hydrants and the like, and their ancillary equipment. Valves etc., and ancillary apparatus shall be stored in clean condition and in a manner that excludes all water. Where directed, head-stock, motors, gearing or indicators shall be removed, adequately labeled for identification, stored carefully in weather proof premises and be reconnected after erection of the valves. Frost cocks shall be kept clean and free from obstruction. Electrical equipment shall be protected from damp and the damp-proofing seals shall remain intact until the electrical is ready to connect up the equipment. The gunmetal faces and seats of all valves must be kept clean. No valve shall be closed without first wiping the faces with a clean cloth. The cavity beneath the valve door shall be thoroughly cleaned by hand. In the event of accident, fouling matter shall be either dissolved for carefully removed by methods that do not involve scraping of gunmetal faces. All valves shall be set so that operating spindles are truly vertical unless otherwise detailed or directed. Every stuffing box shall be examined when the main is charged with water and leaking boxes shall be adjusted or replaced with square plaited lubricated hemp packing of approved manufacturer. The stuffing box shall not be so tightly packed as to materially affect the friction of the packing on the spindle. No air valve shall be stored before erection in the open in sunlight, or upside down to expose the balls and air cavities. Air valves shall be checked before the main is charged to ensure that the balls and faces are not scored or split and that that all passage ways are clean. The installation of special types of valve and metering equipment must be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions. The direction of opening of the valve shall be indicated on the headstock and on the underside of hydrant covers. Fire hydrants, frost plugs and similar fittings shall be checked before being incorporated in the line and before the main is changed to ensure that all passageways are clean. The installation of special types of valve and metering equipment must be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions. The direction of opening of the valve shall be indicated on the headstock and on the underside of hydrant covers. B PRESSED STEEL PLATE STORAGE TANKS The water capacity of the tanks and the diameter of all pipes and pipe connections therewith will be as detailed on the Drawings and Bills of Quantities. Unless otherwise detailed the proportions of a tank will be such that the height is not less than three quarters of the length and not less than the width. All dimensions must be approved by the Engineer. Elevated pressed steel plate storage tanks will comply with B.S 1564 and will be constructed of 4.76 mm (top row only) and 6.35 mm thick galvanised pressed steel tank plates, 1.22 mm or 1.00m square nominal size, embossed and with external flanges bolted together. Where detailed in the sub-contract the tank will be partitioned centrally, the division wall to be adequately stayed to permit emptying of either half of the tank whilst maintaining full water depth in the other half. The tank will be complete with a pitched or vaulted cover and gable ends of 3 mm thick steel plates lap jointed and supported on bearers and gable end frames respectively; No. 75 mm square access manhole with hinged insect proof cover, 1 No. Float operate water lever indicator; and will be provided with internal and external ladders as follows. Where the tank is constructed to operate in two halves 2 No. Access manholes and internal ladders will be provided. Specifications 63

139 The external ladder will have 40 mm x 6 mm mild steel flat stringers with 12 mm diameter mild steel rugs and will be cleated to the tank at 1.2m intervals. The stringers will be taken 750 mm above the tank cover and bent to return to the cover of a distance of 450 mm from the edge. This ladder will be complete with 40 mm x 3 mm mild steel flat safety hoops of 600 mm diameter, space at 1.2 m vertical centers, truly bent and welded to the stringers. The safety hoops will be joined by 3 No. 40 mm x 3 mm mild steel flat vertical guard strips, evenly spaced and flat fillet welded to the hoops. The internal ladders will have 65 mm x 12 mm steel flat stringers with 20 mm diameter mild steel rings and will be cleated to the tank at 1.2m intervals. The tank bottom plates will be provided with a single pipe pad for the washout pipe connections and double pipe pads for all other pipes which pass through the bottom of the tank. The tanks will be provided and erected complete with all bolts, nuts, washers, internal braces and approved nom-toxic jointing materials (fibre-glass or bitumen impregnated filler strip or approved equal). The whole of the tank steelwork and plates will be galvanised as specified before dispatch and after erection, painted with an approved etching primer and two coats of bitumen based aluminium paint externally and two coats of non-toxic black bitumen paint internally, both as specified. The tank after final erection on its permanent foundation will be filled with water to overflow lever for a period of 24 hours. Any leaks which become apparent will be made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer before acceptance of the work. Both halves of the tank will be tested separately. A PIPEWORK FOR PRESSED STEEL TAN All pipe work associated with the tank and stand will be mild steel pipe to B.S 534 with flanged joints. The pipe work will comprise one bell mouthed standing inlet pipe at designed top water level, one outlet pipe with bellmouth and approved strainer to take water from the level as detailed on the Drawings. Where not detailed the outlet pipe will take water form not less than 75 mm above the tank bottom. One belmouthed standing overflow pipe with its lip 50 mm above designed top water level, and one washout pipe which will be capable of completely draining the tank will be provided. Where the tank is constructed to operate in two halves the inlet, outlet overflow and washout pipes will be duplicated in each half of the tank ABOVE GROUND INSTALLATION B GENERAL Installation of all pipe work valves, fittings and equipments shall be carried out under adequate supervision from skilled staff to the relevant codes and standards as specified herein. The sub-contractor shall be responsible to the main contractor for ensuring that all builders work associated with his piping installation is carried out in a satisfactory manner to the approval of the Engineer. PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS A WATER SERVICES Before any joint is made, the pipes shall be hung in their supports and adjusted to ensure that the joining faces are parallel and any falls which shall be required are achieved without springing the pipe. Where falls are not shown on the contract Drawing or stated elsewhere in the specification, pipe work shall be installed parallel to the lines of the buildings and as close to the walls, ceilings, columns etc. As is practicable. All water system shall be provided with sufficient drain points and automatic air vents to enable them to function correctly. Valves and other user equipment shall be installed with adequate access for operation and maintenance where valves and other operational equipment are unavoidably installed beyond normal reach or in such position as to be difficult to reach from a short step ladder, extension spindles with floor or wall pedestals shall be provided. Screwed piping shall be installed with a sufficient number of unions to facilitate easy removal of valves and fittings, without the need to cut the pipe. Full allowance shall be made for the expansion and contraction of pipe work precautions being taken to ensure that any force produced by pipe movements are not transmitted to valves, equipment or plant. All screwed joints to piping and fittings shall be made with P.T.F.E. Tape in accordance with B.S The test pressure shall be maintained by the pump for about one hour and if the there is any leakage, it shall be measured by the quantity of water pumped into the main in that time. A general leakage of one gallon Specifications 64

140 per 25 mm of diameter, per 1.6 kilometres per 24 hours per 30 metres head, may be considered reasonable but any visible individual leak shall be repaired. B SANITARY SERVICES Soil, waster and vent pipe systems shall be installed in accordance with the best standards practice as described in B.S 5572 to the approval of the Engineer. of modern The sub-contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all ground floor waste fittings are discharged to a gulley trap before passing to the sewer via a manhole. The sub-contractor shall provide all necessary rodding and inspection facilitates within the draining system in position where easy accessibility is available. Where a branch requires rodding facilities in a position to which normal access is unobtainable, then that branch shall be extended so as to provide a suitable purpose made rodding eye in the nearest adjacent wall or floor to which easy access is available. The vent stacks shall terminate above roof level and where stack passes through roof, a weather skirk shall be provided. The subcontractor shall be responsible for sealing the roof after installation of the stacks. The open end of each stack shall be fitted with a plactic coated, or galvanised steel, wire guard. Access for rooding and testing shall be provided at the foot of each stack. C SANITARY APPLIANCES All sanitary appliances associated with the sub-contract works shall be installed in accordance with the best standard of modern practice as described in C.P. 305 to the approval of the Architect. PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS TESTING AND INSPECTION SITE TESTS PIPEWORKS SYSTEMS A UNDERGROUND WATER MAINS After laying, jointing and anchoring, the main shall be slowly and carefully charged with water, so that all air is expelled and allowed to stand full for three days before testing under pressure. A long main shall be tested in sections as the work of laying proceeds and all joints shall be exposed for inspection during the testing. The open end of the main may be temporarily closed for testing under moderate pressure by fitting a water pipe expanding plug, of which several types are available. The end of the main and the plug should be secured by struts or otherwise, to resist the end thrust of the water pressure in the main. If the section of main terminates with a sluice valve, the wedge of the valve shall not be used to retain the water, instead the valve shall be fitted temporarily with blank flange, or if a socket valve with a plug and the wedge shall be placed in the open position while testing. The sub-contractor shall provide suitable end supports to withstand the end thrust of the water pressure in the main. B ABOVE GROUND INTERNAL WATER SERVICE INSTALLATION All water service pipe system installed above ground shall be tested hydraulically for a period of one hour to not less than one and a half times the design working pressure. If preferred, the sub-contractor may test the pipelines in sections. Any such section found to be satisfactory need not be the subject of a further test when the system has been completed, unless specifically requested by the Engineer. During the test, each branch and joint shall be examined carefully for leaks and any defects revealed shall be made good by the sub-contractor and the section re-tested. The sub-contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent damage occurring to special valves and fittings during the tests. Any item damaged shall be repaired or replaced at the sub-contractor s expense. C ABOVE GROUND SOIL WASTE AND VENTILATION PIPE SYSTEM All soil, waste and ventilating pipe system forming part of the above ground installation, shall be given a smoke test to a pressure of 38 mm of water gauge and this pressure shall remain constant for a period of not less than three minutes. Specifications 65

141 Water tests on above ground soil, waste and ventilating pipe systems shall not be permitted. Pressure test shall be carried out before any work which is to be concealed is finally enclosed. Any defects revealed by the tests shall be made good by the sub-contractor and the test repeated to the approval of the Engineer. In all other respects, tests shall comply with the requirements of B.S D SITE TEST PERFORMANCE Following satisfactory pressure tests on the pipe work systems, operational tests shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant B.S code of practice on the systems as a whole to establish that special valves, gauges, controls, fittings, equipment and plant are functioning correctly to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All hot water pipe work shall be insulated with performed fibre glass sectional lagging to thickness of 25 mm. Cold water pipe work shall be installed with performed fibre glass lagging to a thickness of 25 mm where the pipe runs above a false ceiling or in areas where the ambient temperature is higher than normal with the result that pipe sweating, due to condensation will cause nuisance. All lagged pipes which run in a visible position after erection shall be given a canvas cover and prepared for painting as follows:- (i) (ii) Applying a coating of suitable filler until the canvas weave disappears and allows to dry. Apply two undercoats of an approved paint and finish in suitable gloss enamel to colours approved by the Engineer. All lagging for cold and hot water pipes erected in crawlways, ducts, and above false ceiling which, after erection are not visible from the corridors or rooms, shall be covered with a reinforced aluminium foil finish and banded in colours to be approved by the Engineer. In all respects, unless otherwise stated, the hot and cold water installation shall be carried out in accordance with the best standards of modern practice as described in C.P.342 and C.P. 310 respectively, to the approval of the Engineer. The test pressure shall be applied by means of a manually operated test pump or, in the case of long main or mains or larger diameter, by a power driven test pump which shall not be left unattended. In either case precautions shall be taken to ensure that the required pressure is not exceeded. Pressure gauges should be recalibrated before the tests. The sub-contractor shall be deemed to have included in his price for all test pumps, and other equipment required under this clause of the specifications. The test pressure shall be one and a half times the maximum working pressure except where a pipe is manufactured form a material for which the relevant B.S specification designates a maximum test pressure as in the case of cast or spun iron pipes, where the test pressures should not exceed 120, 180 and 240 metre/head of clause B,E or D pipes, respectively. A STERILIZATION OF HOT AND COLD WATER SYSTEMS All underground water mains and above ground water distribution systems, cisterns, tanks, calorifiers, pumps, etc, shall be thoroughly sterilized and flushed out after the completion of all tests and before being fully commissioned for handover. The sterilization procedures shall be carried out by the sub-contractor or specialist employed by the subcontractor in accordance with the requirements of B.S. code of practice 310, clause 409, to the approval of the Engineer. PART THIRTEEN SPECIFICATIONS DRAINAGE DRAINAGE GENERAL A. REGULATIONS ETC. The whole of the drainage is to be executed by a registered plumber and drain layer in strict accordance with the Regulations of local Authorities and to the satisfaction of the Architect. Specifications 66

142 B. CEMENT, SAND ETC The description of material and workmanship contained in the foregoing sections shall apply equally hereto. MATERIALS C. PITCH FIBRE PIPES All pitch fibre pipes and fittings for external services shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of B.S Pipes shall be connected by means of purpose made tapered joints manufactured in accordance with B.S D. PRECAST CONCRETE PIPES Precast concrete pipes for surface water and sewage shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 556 class 1. Where flexible spigot and socket type of flexible rebated type joints are specified, rubber gaskets complying with the requirements of B.S 2494 shall be used except where oil products are likely to be present, in which case gaskets shall comply with the requirements of B.S Where ordinary spigot and socket type ordinary rebated type joints are specified, the joints shall be made with a cement mortar mix. Porous concrete pipes shall comply with the requirements of B.S E ASBESTORS CEMENT PIPES Asbestos cement sewerage pipes and fittings shall comply with the requirements of B.S 3656 with asbestos cement sleeve joints with rubber rings complying with the requirement of B.S 2494 class C. F. CAST IRON PIPES Cast iron drain pipes for building drainage shall comply with the requirements of B.S 437. Fittings for cast iron pipes shall comply with the requirements of B.S 78 or B.S Pipes and fittings will be coated internally and externally with an approved bituminous composition, except those parts to be encased in concrete which shall be coated internally only in the concrete area. G CLAY PIPES Clay pipes and fittings for sewerage or surface water shall comply with the requirements of B.S 65 and B.S 540 with Type 1 sockets and supplied complete with the manufacturer s flexible joint. Clay pipes for use in the construction of French drains shall be British surface water pipes glazed or unglazed manufacture in accordance with B.S 65 and B.S 540 with Type 2 sockets or plain ended and supplied with sleeve couplings. Type 1 socketed and sleeve coupled pipes shall be perforated. A P.V.C DRAIN PIPES P.V.C drain pipes and fittings shall comply with the requirements of B.S 4660:1973. B PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES Concrete manhole ring sections shall be unreinforced ogee jointed complying with the requirements of B.S Shaft and chambers slabs shall be either mild steel reinforced heavy or light duty type, as specified. C PRECAST CONCRETE OPEN CHANNELS Precast concrete invert and side blocks shall be of dense precast concrete free from cracks and spalls. The concrete used shall be nominal 1:2:4 mix. Precast concrete invert and side blocks shall be cast in steel moulds. All arrises shall be true well defined. D GULLIES Precast concrete gullies shall be unreinforced and shall comply with the requirements of B.S 556. Glazed ware gullies shall comply with the requirements of B.S 539. Cast iron gullies shall be of approved manufacture and shall conform with the dimensions and weight specified. Gulley gratings and frames shall comply with the requirements of B.S 497. E MANHOLE COVERS AND FRAMES Specifications 67

143 Manhole covers and frames shall be of cast iron in accordance with the requirements of B.S 497. F MANHOLES LADDERS Manhole ladders and fixings shall be of galvanised mild steel. The steel shall be mild steel grade 43 in accordance with B.S 4360 and shall be galvanised after manufacturer has been completed. G MANHOLE SAFETY CHAINS Manhole safety chains shall be of 10 mm galvanised mild steel short link chain and will comply with the requirements of B. S One end of the chain shall securely attached to 16 mm diameter galvanised mild steel eyebolt and the other end shall have a galvanised hook of attaching to a similar eyebolt. DRAINAGE SPECIFICATIONS A MANHOLE STEP IRONS Manhole step irons shall comply with the requirements of B.S For brick or block manholes, step irons shall be of galvanised malleable cast iron general purpose pattern with 230 mm long tails complying with the requirements of B.S 556. B FILTER BACKFILL MATERIAL Filter backfill material for field or French drains shall consist of hard clean rock, crushed slag or gravel having a grading within the limits given below for Type D or E. The aggregate crushing value of the material as determined by the tests in B.S 8.2 shall not exceed 30%. The material passing 420 micron sieve shall be nonplastic when tested in accordance with B.S Sieve Sized Percentage by passing Weight Type 0 Type E mm mm mm mm mm microns microns 0-10 WORKMANSHIP C UNDERGROUND PIPELINES The contractor shall construct the pipelines using the designs of pipe, bed, haunch and surround details on the drawings. Rigid pipes shall mean pipes of cast or spun iron concrete, asbestos cement, clay or similar materials. Flexible pipes shall mean pipes of steel PVC or other plastic, pitch fibre, ductile iron or similar materials. Rigid joints shall mean joints made by bolting together flanges integral with the barrels of the pipes, by welding together the barrels of the pipes by caulking sockets with non-deformable materials, such as cement mortar, run lead or by similar techniques. Flexible joints shall mean joints made with factory made jointing materials, loose collars, rubber rings etc., and which allow some degree of flexing, however small, between adjacent pipes. D TRENCH EXCAVATION

144 Trenches for pipes other than those forming part of a field or French drain shall be excavated to a sufficient depth and width, subject to the following restrictions, to enable the pipe, joints, bed, haunch and surround to be accommodated. From the bottom of the trench to a level 300 mm above the crown of the pipe trench widths shall not be less than the minimum nor greater than the maximum figures shown in the Table A. Battering the sides of trenches shall only be permitted above this level where approved. The minimum width of trench shall be used for measurement purposes. Table A- pipe Trench widths Nominal Internal Diameter (mm) Min.Trench Width(mm) Max.Trench Width (mm) Above 1200 Outside dia. Of Outside dia. Above 1200 Pipes plus 800 mm of pipes plus 1000mm All sheeting and supports are to be out with the minimum width stated. The contractor shall provide whatever additional pipe protection is directed should the specified maximum width be exceeded due to his method of working. The contractor shall fill up with well compacted granular bedding material with 1:2:4 mix concrete where ordered by the Architect, any excessive depth or trench arising from his method of working. Where the trench formation is in ground that, in the opinion of the Architect, is too soft to afford proper support to the pipes, either (i) (ii) The trench shall be excavated down to solid ground and the extra shall be refilled with lean mix concrete, granular bedding material, gravel or broken stone, as the Architect directs, well compacted to form even bed or: The pipe shall be supported by facines, piles or such other means as the Architect may direct. The contractor shall avoid unduly disturbing the finished trench formation and shall make good disturbed areas and excavate any wet or puddled material which might result from his failure to do so. Voids shall be made good as the previous clause.

145 Where directed trenches close to existing structures be opened in short lengths and refilled or partly filled with lean mix concrete or other approved material. The material excavated in forming pipelines shall if unsuitable be run to spoil and replaced with suitable materials as so defined. Suitable material shall be set aside for use as backfill. Unsuitable material shall comprise all material such as material from bogs, marshes, swamp peat, logs, stumps, perishable material, clays having a liquid limit exceeding 80 or a plasticity content greater than 30% of the dry weight. All surplus excavated material shall be disposed of to spoil hips provided by the contractor. A PIPELAYING GENERAL On arrival at the site, pipes shall be carefully inspected for damage ends, cracks or other defects and any found to be faulty shall be marked and set aside for a decision from the Architect as to their acceptability. Pipes with damaged ends shall be either completely replaced or have the ends to the extent, and trimmed, as directed by the Architect. The contractor shall ensure that all pipes are properly hauled both by his staff and by any cartage contractor employed by him. During transport, pipes shall not be allowed to rest on narrow cross members of vehicles or anything else that might give concentrated loads due to the weight of the pipe or bumping of the vehicle but must be properly supported on soft material. Sufficient labour and equipment must be handed before unloading is commenced and under no circumstances must any pipes be dropped or thrown from a vehicle. The Architect shall have the right to reject consignments or stocks of piping from which failed pipes have been drawn, or order them to be pressure tested outside the pipelines at the contractor s expense even though no defects are apparent, it there is reason to believe that mishandling has taken place. Flat braided wire slings or band slings shall be used for slinging all pipes except externally coated pipes and plastic pipes for which only special band slings not less than 300 mm wide shall be used. Chain or rope slings, hooks or other devices working on scissors or grab principles must not be used. Subject to the requirements of inspection before acceptance protective bolsters, caps or discs on the ends of flanges, specials or fittings shall not be removed until the pipes, special or fittings are about to be lowered into the trench. Before a pipe is lowered into the trench it shall be thoroughly examined to ensure that the internal coating or lining and the outer coating or sheathing are undamaged. Where necessary the interiors or pipes, specials and fittings shall be carefully brushed clean. Any damaged parts of the coatings or lining shall, before a pipe is used, be made good as directed. Pipelaying shall not commence until the bottom of the trench and the pipe bed have been approved. Flexible pipes, rigidly jointed, may be joined on the ground surface before lowering into the trench. All joints shall be supported by slings as the pipes are lowered and the pipe-line must not be deformed to a greater extent than recommended by the manufacturer. Pipes must be brought to the correct alignment and inclination, concentric with the pipes already laid. All pipes less than 600 mm in diameter with flexible joints must be accurately marked prior to laying to ensure that the correct gap is left in the joint. An indelible mark shall be made on the spigot end on top of the pipe barrel to the depth of the socket less the detailed or specified joint gap. After correct jointing the mark should be flush with the face of the socket. PVC pipes must be stored and handled carefully and must be in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations. A WITHDRAWAL OF SUPPORTS During the placing of bedding, haunching, surrounding or anchoring material, temporary side supports and sheeting shall be removed except where directed to be left in and the full width of the trench will be infi lled with bedding haunching, surrounding or anchoring materials. B BEDDING AND PROTECTING PIPES GENERAL Bedding, hauching, surrounding and anchoring pipes shall be to the arrangement and dimensions shown on the drawings. A cavity of adequate size shall be excavated in the sides and bottom of the trench or left in the pipes bed at each joint and at each sling position.

146 The bottom of the trench or surface of the bed shall be finished to a smooth even surface at the correct levels to permit the barrel of the pipe to be solidly and evenly bedded throughout its whole length between joint and sling holes. The preparation of the trench bottom or surface of the bed shall be completed for at least one full pipe length in advance of the pipe laying, except where in exceptional circumstances another arrangement is approved. No bedding material shall be place in trenches containing water. Where granular bedding is to be used, stones, bricks or similar materials shall not be used below or against the pipe to locate them in position in the trench or to level the pipes. Sufficient infill materials shall be placed around the barrels of pipes to prevent movement. Where directed, puddle clay dams 500 mm thick shall be constructed around the pipe and across the trench as haunching and surrounding proceeds. The dams shall be at intervals not exceeding 30 metres or as directed and their height shall be determined by the Architect. Where directed by the requirements for testing pipelines the method of haunching and surrounding pipes shall be modified to leave pipe joints exposed. Where there is a high ground water table all pipes shall be surrounded in an approved free drainage material. C CONCRETE BEDDING, HAUNCHING, SURROUNDING AND ANCHORING Concrete for bedding, haunching or surrounding pipes shall be 1:2:4 nominal mix concrete and no back filling of the trench shall be done until the concrete has reached a strength of 15 N.mm2. Before placing concrete, pipes shall be supported near each joint on a precast concrete block or on engineering bricks with a padding of two layers of hessian based damp proof course or material of similar yield between the barrel of the pipe and the supporting block. The surface of the support shall be perfectly smooth for at lease 75 mm by 75 mm under the pipe, and the size of the blocks shall be as directed. Concreting of bedding, haunching or surrounding shall not be done until the pipes have been jointed and inspected. The concrete shall be vibrated into place under the pipe and concrete shall be in full contact with the underside of the pipe throughout its length. The concrete shall be placed in one operation and shall be well worked form a homogeneous mass. There shall be no horizontal construction joint in the concrete below the level of the half pipe. The pipe shall be carefully anchored against flotation. Concrete beds, haunches and surrounds of pipes with rigid joints shall be formed in lengths not exceeding 10.0 metres which shall be separated by a soft wood joint filter 25 mm thick. Concrete bedding, haunching pipes shall be discontinuous at flexible pipe joints. Shaped formwork made from fibreboard or other equally compressible material of the thickness stated in the contract and of size and shape equal to the next section of the concrete protection to the pipes shall be used and left at the pipe joint as shown on the drawings. The formwork shall be neatly cut and properly supported by temporary strut and rails where necessary. PVC pipes shall be wrapped in polythene sheet or roofing felt about 2 mm thick before being haunched or anchored in concrete. Nominal 1:2:4 mix concrete shall be placed at all bends, tees, junctions, changes of direction and gradients to prevent movements of pipelines due to thrust from water pressure, in such positions and quantities as directed. Concrete pipe anchorages and thrust blocks in trench shall be placed against undisturbed ground. Any loose or disturbed material shall be removed immediately before the concrete is placed. Concrete anchorages to PVC pipes shall be placed to support half the circumference of the pipe. The pipe must not be encase. Where compliance with the requirement would result in concrete above the pipe, the anchorage concrete shall be placed beneath the pipe and the pipe will be restrained by straps as shown on the drawings. A PLUG Immediately after laying, the open end of a pipe shall be sealed with wooden plug or approved stopper of appropriate size to prevent the entry of material which might contaminate the pipelines, damage the linings, obstruct the waterway or effect the working of valves, meter etc. Plugs shall be unperforated and shall be shaped to fit exactly so that water from the trench excavations shall not be allowed to gain access to the pipeline.

147 The plugs in sewers may, with the Architects approval, be provided with small holes for drainage purposes, but water from the trench excavation which is heavily charged with silt shall not be allowed to gain access to the pipe. Where work is interrupted for a period, the plug left in position shall be regularly inspected for their fixing to ensure that there has been no tampering by unauthorised persons. Whenever any plug is removed, the immediate length of pipe shall be examined for dirt or obstructions and shall be cleaned as required. Adequate precautions must be taken by way of backfilling or other means to anchor each pipe securely to prevent flotation of the pipeline in the event of the trench being flooded. No equipment, clothing or apparel must be left or sorted inside pipelines. B JOINTING PIPES Joints shall be made strictly in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions. The contractor shall make use of the technical advisory services offered by manufacturers for instructing pipe jointers in the methods of assembling joints. Where manufacturers recommend the use of special jointing tackles, the contractor shall use these for the assembly of all joints to pipes. Sockets shall be laid looking uphill unless otherwise approved. Before making any joints, all jointing surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and dried and maintained in such condition until the joints have been completely made or assembled. Notwithstanding any flexibility provided in the pipe joints, pipes must be securely positioned to prevent avoidable movement during and after the making of the joint. The space between the end of the spigot and the shoulder of the socket of flexibly jointed pipes when jointed shall be as recommended by the manufacturer or ordered by the architect. After flexibility jointed pipes, other than PVC pipes have been jointed the gaps between the barrel of the pipes and the internal face of the socket shall be sealed with puddle clay, uncaulked rope yarn or other approved material. The rope yarn or other material must have been treated so as not to support bacterial growth. Where loose collars are used to join pipes cut for closers, special tools shall be employed to keep the inside of the pipes flush and the collar concentric with the pipe while the joint is being made. Pipes provided with spigot and socket joints of the selfcentering, instantaneous joint tupe, such as the rubber ring push fit joint, shall be laid and jointed strictly in accordance with the makers instructions. Generally the joint ring shall be cleaned and inspected for cuts and defect, and socket spigot examined to ensure free recommended lubricant will be used. A CAST IRON JOINT FITTINGS Cast iron detachable joint collars and flanges shall be tested by striking lightly with a spanner immediately before they are placed and if they fail to ring true shall be set aside and not incorporated in the work until proven sound. The flanges shall be correctly positioned and the component parts including any insertion ring cleaned and dried. Insertion rings shall be fitted smoothly to the flange without folds or wrinkles. The face and bolt holes shall be brought fairly together and the joints shall be made by gradually and evenly tightening bolts on diametrically opposed positions. Only standard length spanners shall be used to tighten the bolts. The protective coating, if any, of the flange shall be made good when the joint is completed. Bolts threads shall be wrapped with PTFF tape where directed before use. No washers shall be used on flanged pipework to be laid below ground. Bolts shall be as specified and shall be the correct length, leaving a maximum of two threads exposed. B CEMENT MORTAR JOINTS The spigots and sockets of concrete pipes shall be thoroughly moistened before cement mortar joints are made. In making ogee joint to concrete pipes a thick layer of cement shall be applied to the butting faces, the pipe being laid shall be well driven against the other, and the jointed finished off inside, flush with the pipe wall. The outside of the joint shall be pointed up with a 75mm wide x 25mm thick mortar fillet all round and central about the joint. In making yarn and mortar joints for concrete and clay pipes, the spigot of the last pipe laid until it bears on the back face of the socket and shall be centred in the socket. Two turns of tarred yarn shall then be firmly caulked into the back of the socket with a proper caulking tool. Mortar consisting of 2 parts of sand to 1 part of cement shall then be pressed firmly into the joint to fill the socket completed and shall be neatly bevelled off at 45 degrees from the outside edge of the socket. Joints made with cement mortar shall remain exposed for at least 3 hours to allow for the initial set of the cement. All joints shall be examined and approved before the refilling of the trench is commenced

148 C BACKFILLING TRENCHES If the contractor allows material to become unsuitable, which when excavated was suitable for re-use, and it is unsuitable when required for backfilling, he shall run it to spoil and make good by replacing with suitable material. Where required to meet the specification for testing pipelines, trenches shall be partially backfilled to provide anchorage, but joints shall be left exposed. Backfilling shall whenever practicable be undertaken immediately the specified operations preceding it have been completed. No backfill material shall be placed in trench containing water. In trenches in roads, verges and where shown on the drawings above 300mm over the crown of the pipe backfill, material shall be deposited in layers each not exceeding 225mm thickness and each compacted to 100% with a moisture content between with the moisture content between 0.8 and M.C. Power rammers or vibrating plate compactors shall be used to compact the backfilling from one metre above the crown level of the pipe to the surface. In trenches in fields or open country backfill material above 300mm over the crown of the pipe may be placed by machines provided the method of operation ensure that the materials slides or rolls into position and does not drop from a height. The backfill material must not include any stones or boulder of dimensions exceeding 150mm in any position. Sufficient space shall be left to receive the original thickness of solid, turf or other materials removed from the surface. The surfaces shall be restored by replacing the materials in their proper order and form, and by compacting then to such a level as shall ensure that after settlement is complete the surface level of refilled trenches shall be within 30mm of that of the adjacent undisturbed ground. Where directed, trenches shall be backfilled with lean mix concrete made with 1kg cement to 12 kg aggregate. The aggregate will be as, clinker, gravel, stone or other hard material, approved by the architect, and free from sulphates, dust and other deleterious material. A FIELD OR FRENCH DRAINS Trenches for drains up to 150mm in diameter shall be excavated to a width of at least four times the normal diameter of the pipe; above 150mm diameter the width shall be the diameter plus 450mm. Where shown on the drawings pipes for drains shall be bedded on a 75mm thickness of lean mix concrete which shall also be brought up until at least one-third of the depth of the pipe is supported and in the case of perforated pipes, no line of operations is thereby blocked. Non-circular pipes shall be bedded as shown on the drawings. Socketed pipes shall be laid with a space of about 12mm between the spigot and the inner end of the socket. Ogee jointed porous concrete and perforated clay pipes with rebated joints shall be dry jointed. Perforated pitch fibre pipes may be jointed with any of the joints specified in B.S Trenches for drains shall be backfilled with materials approved by the architect. The pipes, the filter materials and the surface over drains shall at all times be kept free of obstructions. B OPEN SURFACE WATER CHANNELS Excavation shall be carried out generally as described for pipework. The invert shall be finished to a true line and fall and sides shall be trimmed to the slopes indicated. Invert blocks and sides slabs shall be laid on a 100mm thick bed of suitable approved granular material formed and well compacted. They shall be jointed by thickly covering the joint face with mortar and driving the next unit firmly against that previously laid. The excess mortar squeezed out of the joint shall be neatly trowelled off. Channels ends shall be saturated with water and newly completed joints shall be protected and cured as for concrete pipes. C MANHOLE INSITU CONCRETE Manholes of insitu concrete will be formed as for block work manholes, the block work being replaced by insitu mass 1:2:4 nominal mix concrete. Precast concrete manholes for sewers of up to 1200mm diameter shall be constructed as detailed on drawings using precast concrete component.

149 Manhole cover slabs may be cast insitu using reinforced nominal 1:2:4 mix concrete precast using reinforced nominal 1:1½:3 mix concrete. Unreinforced precast concrete chamber rings shall be surrounded with a minimum thickness of 150mm nominal 1:3:6 mix mass concrete as detailed on the drawings. Step irons 230mm long shall be set into the external concrete surround to the manhole and the slots through the chamber rings filled with cement mortar. A CHAMBERS Chambers for access to valves and fittings on pressure pipelines for water or sewage, unless otherwise directed shall be constructed in concrete block work. B SEPTIC TANKS Septic tanks shall be constructed to the dimensions and general arrangement detailed on the drawings and in the contract. Tanks with block work shall be constructed as for manholes. C TESTING FOR SEPTIC TANKS Septic tanks and other chambers shall be tested by filing with water after completion of backfilling. The first 1.0 metre of depth may be filled as quickly as the supply permits. Between this and top water level the rate of filling must not exceed 1.0 metre in 24 hours. After filling to top water level no further water shall be introduced for 2 days. At the end of this period the tanks shall be topped up to top water level and allowed to stand for 24 hours. The test shall be considered satisfactory if the fall in water level in 24 hours does not exceed 15mm. In the event of a fall exceeding the above tank will be emptied and any defects made good prior to retest as before, all at the contractor s expense. D CONNECTION TO SEWER All connections to sewers are to be made with angle junctions set at the correct angle to minimize the use of bends. All angles shall not exceed 45 degrees. The open ends of all house connections and other pipes not required for immediate use shall be sealed up with purpose made stoppers secured in position. The ends of connections and all junction positions will be clearly marked by posts and painted boards of a type and size to be approved by the Architect and the board shall be plainly marked with the letter S and the size and depth below kerb level or ground level. A length of 4.5 mm galvanised iron wire shall be fixed to the face of the last pipe and the marking post. Every care shall be taken to prevent the marking boards being disturbed and the contractor shall take responsibility for their safety. The information shall also be painted on the kerbs in an approved manner when all works are complete and the contractor shall record the position of all branches fixing distances from the manhole immediately downstream of the branch. DRAINAGE SPECIFICATIONS A TESTING SEWER Wherever possible, testing shall be carried out from manhole to manhole. Short branch drains connected to main sewer between manholes shall be tested as one system with the main sewer. Long branches shall be tested separately. Pipes not exceeding 750mm nominal diameter shall be tested in one of the following ways:- i. WATER TEST A test pressure of 1.2 metres head of water above the soffit of the sewer shall be applied at the high end but not more than 6 metres at the low end by means of a stand-pipe. Steeply graded sewers shall be tested in stages where the above maximum head shall be exceeded if the whole section is tested in stages where the above maximum head shall be exceeded if the whole section is tested at once. A period of one hour shall be allowed for absorption. The loss of water over a period of 30 minutes shall be measured by adding water from a measuring vessel at regular intervals of 10 minutes and noting the quantity required to maintain the original water level in the standpipe. The average quantity of water added for sewers up to 300mm nominal bore must not exceed 0.06 litre per hour per 100 linear metres per mm of nominal bore of sewer. For sewers

150 exceeding 300mm nominal bore the average quantity of water added must not exceed 0.12 litre per hour per 100 linear metres per mm of nominal bore of the sewer. ii. AIR TEST The length of sewer under test shall be effectively plugged and air pumped in by suitable means e.g. a hand pump, until a pressure of 100mm head of water is indicated in a U-tube connected to the system. The air pressure must not fall to less than 75mm head of water during a period of 5 minutes, without further pumping, after a period of 2 minutes for requisite stabilization. Sewers will be tested: i. after laying and placing concrete if any but before backfilling over joints and ii. after backfilling has been completed. Sewers constructed of steel, spun iron or other materials designed for high pressure shall be tested in accordance with the provisions of clause below. Pipes exceeding 750mm nominal diameter shall be tested as required by the contract. Where required by the contract the sewer shall be tested for obstruction by the insertion and pulling through of twin-coupled rubber plunges of the same diameter as the sewer. Sewer shall be tested for infiltration after backfilling. All inlets to the system shall be effectively closed and the residual flow shall be deemed to be infiltration. The following limits of infiltration must be exceeded:- i. for sewers not exceeding 750mm nominal internal diameter, 0.08 litre per hour per 100 linear metres per mm of nominal bore of the sewer. ii. for sewer exceeding 750mm nominal internal diameter 0.16 litre per hour per 100 linear metres per mm of nominal bore of the sewer. Infiltration to manhole must not exceed 5 litres per hour per manhole B MANHOLES AND CHAMBERS Manholes and chambers shall be constructed in accordance with the drawings and specifications and in the positions as detailed on the drawings or directed by the Architect. Pipes in and out of manholes are to be as short as practicable and shall be built in monolithically with the manhole and the manhole made watertight. Where line, level and pipe diameter permit and where approved by the architect, the pipeline may be laid broken through the manhole position subject to the pipe joints external to the manhole not exceeding 600mm from the inner face of the manhole wall. The depth of the main channel must not be less than the diameter of the largest pipe. Where pipes have been laid unbroken through the manhole position the crown of the pipe shall be broken out to the half diameter over the full length of the manhole and the benching completed as directed by architect. Branch bends shall be curved in the direction of flow and will be trowelled smooth with a steel float finish. Spaces between branch bends shall be completely filled with concrete and the faces above the main and branch channel inverts shall be trowelled smooth with a steel float finish. Bases and benching shall be formed in 1:2:4 nominal mix concrete trowelled smooth with a steel float finish Manholes inside buildings and elsewhere as shown in the contract shall have cast iron pipes with access openings and bolted cover plates with the requisite branches in lieu of open channels and branch bends. The bottom of the manhole shall be brought up in concrete to the underside of the cast iron cover plate of the access pipe and benched up at slope of 1:12 and trowelled smooth. Manhole covers and frames shall be fixed in the position shown, the frame shall be solidly bedded in cement mortar so that generally the cover when in position are fair and even with the adjacent surfaces except where directed by the architect when they shall be kept 75mm above the adjacent surfaces. Where shown or directed frames shall be bedded on one or two courses of block work in cement mortar. Step irons are not required where the depth to benching is less than 900mm and the diameter of the largest pipe is less than 450mm. Channels more than 450mm in depth shall have one or more step irons in a recess, or

151 toe holes and hand rail or post within easy reach, as detailed. A manhole shaft (excluding the 1-2 courses of block work under the cast iron cover) shall not be constructed unless the complete length shall exceed 1.0 metres. Where depth from ground level to top of benching exceeds 4.5 metres a ladder may be used instead of a step iron where directed. Manhole ladders shall have brackets (not less than two pairs per ladder) of material equal to the stingers built into the block work or concrete at intervals of not more than 2.0 metres. In deep manholes suitable rest chambers shall be provided at about 6 metre intervals, each with a landing platform incorporating a hinged trap door immediately under the ladder as detailed in the contract. Cover slabs of manholes shall be reinforced as shown on the drawings, minimum cover to steel 40mm, and the concrete shall be as detailed in the contract. All manholes on sewers of 600mm diameter and over shall be provided with safety chains across the mouth of the sewer on the downstream side and handholds or a 25mm solid bar handrail shall be provided on the edges of all benching platforms etc., as detailed or directed. The contractor shall supply two sets of lifting keys for each pattern of manhole cover incorporated in the work. All manholes and chambers when completed must be watertight and to the satisfaction of the architect. A CONCRETE BLOCKWORK MANHOLES Concrete block work manholes for sewers up to 750 mm diameter shall be constructed as detailed on the drawings, using concrete blocks as specified laid in English bond beds and vertical joints shall be completely filled with mortar as the blocks are laid. External joints shall be flush pointed and internal joints shall be raked out to receive rendering as work proceeds. Cuts blocks shall only be incorporated when necessary for closures. Where built into manhole walls, pipes of 375mm diameter and above shall have 150mm thick concrete relieving arches turned over to the full thickness of the block work. Where the depth of the invert exceeds 5.0 metres below the finished ground level the arch shall be 300mm thick. Walls of manholes up to 2.0 metres deep and up to 4.0 metres shall be increased in thickness to 400mm block work. Walls over 4.0 metres deep and upto 7.0 metres shall be 600mm block work and over 7.0 metres deep manholes shall be precast concrete or insitu concrete as directed by the architect. Overall manhole deep manholes shall be adjusted to the nearest half block size with the approval of the architect. Manhole shafts shall be 750mm by 675mm and where ladders are used this size shall be increased to 825mm by 675mm with the shaft top corbelled as necessary. Step iron having tail 230mm long shall be built in at 300mm vertical intervals as shown with the uppermost step iron from 60mm to 900mm from the top of the manhole cover as detailed.

152

153 PRELIMINARIES

154 SECTION NO. 1 PRELIMINARIES PRELIMINARY PARTICULARS Shs. Cts. A. PARTIES The Employer is Ministry of Health National Health Public Laboratories P.O. Box , Nairobi. The Architect is Sk Archplans. P.O. Box Nairobi. The Quantity Surveyor is Aegis Development Solutions Ltd. Project Managers & Quantity Surveyors P.O. Box Nairobi. The Services Engineers is Feradon Associates Ltd. P.O. Box Nairobi. The Structural Engineers is Armitech Consultants Ltd, P.O. Box Nairobi For the purpose of the works, which are under the control of the Consultants named above, the respective Consultants shall be deemed to be vested with the duties and be representatives of the Client. Pr/1

155 SITE Shs. Cts. A. The site is situated in Moi Teaching and Referral Hospital (MTRH) Eldoret The contractor shall visit the site to acquaint himself with its nature local conditions, position of power water supplies, access roads or any other limitations. The contractor must obtain the Architect s approval and directions regarding the use of any materials found on site. B. DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS The works involves construction of a Biosafety Level II (BSL II) Laboratory. Overall, the works involve; MAIN BUILDING a) Excavations b) Foundation works in reinforced concrete and stone walling c) Concrete frame in reinforced concrete class 25 to beams colums and roof slab. d) Walling in machine cut stones plastered and painted to approval. Partions interally includes masonary as described, glass partition in aluminium framing e) Roof structure in light gauge steel trusses covered with IT5 Roofing sheets f) Windows in aluminium sliding and fixed with glazing. g) Doors to be in aluminum and flush doors. h) Finishes internally to be in approved ceramic and granito tiles to floor and walls in wet area, terrazzo finish in labs and common areas, walls to be plastered and painted. Ceiling to be in lat acoustic tiles, gypsum and pvc panels. i) Joinery to be in MDF to details and approval. EXTERNAL WORKS To involve; a) Storm drainage in inverted block drains with side slabs, kerbs and channels. b) Foul drainage sytem including a septic tank and soak pit. Carried to Collection Shs. Pr/2

156 ACCESS TO SITE Shs. Cts. A. B. The access to site shall be through the main road or as otherwise directed WORKING AND STORAGE SPACE Working and storage space will be confirmed to the Area designated by the Architect within plot boundary. WORKING HOURS C. Working hours shall be those generally adopted by good employers in the Building and Civil Engineering Trades in Kenya. The work must be carried out to the minimum inconvenience to the occupants of the buildings adjoining the premises. In particular, no hammering, mechanical drilling or other unduly noisy work may be commence before 8.00 a.m. or continued after 6.00 p.m. unless with prior approval of the Architect. DRAWINGS D. The Drawings used in preparing the Bills of Quantities are scheduled in Appendix A at the end of these Bills. Drawings may be inspected at the offices of the Architect or Quantity Surveyor by prior appointment. Carried to Collection Shs. Pr/3

157 CONTRACT PARTICULARS FORM OF CONTRACT Shs. Cts. A. The Contractor will be required to enter into a Contract which will be the starndard tender document for procurement of public works published by the Pubic Procurement Oversight Authority (PPOA). The Contractor's attention is called to the following Clauses of the Conditions of Contract, which shall be read as incorporated herein, and he shall allow any sums, which he considers necessary for the carrying out and observance of such conditions. B. C. Clause 1.0 Clause 2.0 Definitions. Contract Documents D. Clause 3.0 Lanaguage and Law of Contract E. F. G. H. I. K. L. M. N O P Q R Clause 4.0 Project Manager s Decisions Clause 5.0 Delegation Clause 6.0 Communications Clause 7.0 Subcontracting Clause 8.0 Other Contracts Clause 9.0 Personnel Clause 10.0 Works Clause 11.0 Safety and Temporary Works Clause 12.0 Discoveries Clause 13.0 Work Programme Clause 14.0 Possession of Site Clause 15.0 Access to Site Cluase 16.0 Instructions carried to Collection Shs. Pr/4

158 FORMS OF CONTRACT (Continued) Shs. Cts. A. B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U Cluase 17.0 Extension or Acceleration of Compleion Time Clause 18.0 Management Meetings Clause 19.0 Early Warnings Clause 20.0 Defects Clause 21.0 Bills of Quantities Clause 22.0 Variations Clause 23.0 Payment Certificate, Currency of Payment and Advance Payment Clause 24.0 Compensation Events Clause 25.0 Price Adjustment Clause 26.0 Retention Clause 27.0 Liquidated Damages Clause 28.0 Performance Securities Clause 29.0 Dayworks Clause 30.0 Liability and Insurance Clause 31.0 Completion and Taking Over Clause 32.0 Final Account Cluase 33.0 Termination Clause 34.0 Payment upon Termination Clause 35.0 Release from Performance Clause 36.0 Corrupt gifts and Payment of commision Clause 37.0 Settlement of Disputes Carried to Collection Shs. Pr/5

159 APPENDIX TO THE CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT The Appendix to the Conditions of Contract will be filled as follows: - Shs. Cts. A Name of Contractor s Surety To be inserted in the Form of Tender B. C. D Name of Employer s Surety N/A 16.2 Amount of Surety N/A 18.1 Period for Submission of Programme 1 week after Award of Contract E. F. Period for possession of site the architect within 14 days of receipt Contract Period the form of Tender by the Tenderer To be decided by of notice of acceptance of Tender To be inserted in G Date for commencement of Works To be decided by the Architect within 14 days of Notice of Acceptance of Tender 20.2 Date for practical completion To be determined after acceptance of Tender H. Carried to Collection Shs. Pr/6

160 APPENDIX TO THE CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT (continued) Shs. Cts. A. B C D E F Name of Bank for purpose of 34.6 Interest calculation Central Bank of Kenya 34.1 Interval for application of payment certificate Monthly 34.4 Minimum amount of payment certificates N/A Percentage of certified value retained 10% Limit of retention fund 10% G Period of release of interest on retention money to Contractor N/A H I J Period of final measurement and valuation Agreed stages 41.6 Defects liability period Six Months 43.1 Damages for delay in completion At the rate Kshs. 100, per Week or part thereof. Carried to Collection Shs. Pr/7

161 GENERAL MATTERS A. SUFFICIENCY OF TENDER The Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied himself before tendering as to the correctness and sufficiency of his Tender for the Works and of the rates and prices stated in the priced Bills of Quantities, which rates and prices shall cover all his obligations under the Contract and all matters and things necessary for the proper completion and maintenance of the Works. B. STAMP CHARGES The Contractor shall allow for the payment of all Stamp Charges in connection with the Surety Bond. C. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS Terms used in these Bills of Quantities shall be interpreted as follows: - Shs. Cts. "Approved" shall mean approved by the Architect. "As directed" shall mean as directed by the Architect. "B.S." "C.M."/ M 3 "S.M."/ M 2 "L.M."/M "MM" "Kg." "No./nr." shall mean the current British Standard Specification published by the British Standards Institution, 2 Park Street, London W.1. England. shall mean Cubic Metres. shall mean Square Metres. shall mean Linear Metres. shall mean Millimetres. shall mean Kilogrammes. shall mean Numbers. D. FIGURED DIMENSIONS Figured dimensions are to be followed in preference to dimensions scaled from the Drawings; but whenever possible dimensions are to be taken on the Site or from the Buildings. Before any work is commenced by Sub- Contractors or Specialist Firms, dimensions must be checked on the Site and/or buildings and agreed with the Contractor, irrespective of the comparable dimensions shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of such dimensions. Carried to Collection Shs. Pr/8

162 GENERAL MATTERS (Cont d) Shs. Cts. A. PROVISIONAL WORK All "provisional" and other work liable to adjustment under this Contract shall be left uncovered for a reasonable time to allow all measurements needed for such adjustment to be taken by the Quantity Surveyor. Immediately the work is ready for measurement, the Contractor shall give notice to the Quantity Surveyor. If the Contractor makes default in these respects he shall, if the Architect so directs, uncover the work at his own expense to enable the measurements to be taken. B. PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS Provide a Provisional Sum of Shillings Ten Thousand for Progress Photographs, to be expended at the discretion of the Architect. 10,000 C. PLANT, TOOLS AND SCAFFOLDING The Contractor shall provide all necessary hoists, tackle, plant, vehicles, tools and appliances of every description for the due and satisfactory completion of the Works and shall remove same on completion. The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain all temporary scaffolding, sufficiently strong and efficient for the due performance of the Works, including Sub-Contract Works, provide special scaffolding as and when required during the Works and remove on completion and make good. Such scaffolding shall be constructed of tubular steel or timber of sufficient scantlings and be provided with planked footways and guard-rails to approval. All such plant, tools and scaffolding shall comply with all regulations whether general or local, in force throughout the period of the Contract and shall be altered or adapted during the Contract as may be necessary to comply with any amendments in or additions to such regulations. Scaffolding is not measured hereinafter, and the Contractor must allow here or in his rates for the above Carried to Collection Pr/9

163 GENERAL MATTERS (Cont d) Shs. Cts. A. EXISTING SERVICES Prior to commencement of any work the Contractor is to ascertain from the relevant Authorities the exact position, depth and level of all existing electric cables, water pipes or other services in the area and he shall make whatever provisions may be required by the Authorities concerned for the support and protection of such services. Any damage or disturbance caused to any services shall be reported immediately to the Architect and the relevant Authority and shall be made good to their satisfaction at the Contractor's expense. B. TRANSPORT TO AND FROM THE SITE The Contractor shall include in his prices for the transport of materials, workmen, etc., to and from the site of the proposed Works, at such hours and by such routes as are permitted by the Authorities. C. PUBLIC AND PRIVATE ROADS, PAVEMENTS, ETC. The Contractor will be required to make good, at his own expense, any damage he may cause to the present road surfaces and pavements within or beyond the boundary of the Site, during the period of the Works. In particular, all existing trees, shrubs, plants, etc., which may be destroyed or damaged during the progress of the Works are to be made good by the Contractor to the approval of the Architect. D. POLICE REGULATIONS The Contractor is to allow for complying with all instructions and regulations of the Police Authorities. E CONTRACTORS' SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall constantly keep on the Works a literate Englishspeaking Agent or Representative, competent and experienced in the kind of work involved, who shall give his whole time to the superintendence of the works. Such Agent or Representative shall receive on behalf of the Contractor, directions and instructions from the Architect and such directions and instructions shall be deemed given to the Contractor in accordance with the Conditions of Contract. The Agent shall not be replaced without the specific approval of the Architect. Pr/10 Carried to Collection Shs.

164 GENERAL MATTERS (Cont d) Shs. Cts. A. CONTRACTORS' SUPERINTENDENCE (Continued) It is to be a specific condition of this Contract that the successful Tenderer shall provide on site throughout the period up to the Date for Practical Completion a suitably qualified, experienced and competent person to ensure that the works are carried out to the standard required by the specification and detailed on the Drawings; and shall ensure that upon any termination of employment a suitable replacement is found. Before the Tenderer's offer is accepted the Architect will personally interview the Contractor's proposed Representative. A curriculum vitae of past experience and qualifications must be provided for the Architect's scrutiny. The Architect's decision will be final regarding the suitability of the proposed Representative. B. WATER All water shall be fresh, clean and pure, free from earthy vegetable or organic matter, acid or alkaline substance in solution or suspension. The Contractor shall provide at his own risk and cost all water for use in connection with the Works (including the work of Sub-Contractors). The Contractor shall provide at his own expense all temporary distribution pipes, storage tanks, meters, etc., and he shall clear away same upon completion of the Works. C. LIGHTING AND POWER The Contractor shall provide at his own risk and cost all artificial lighting and power for use on the Works, including all Sub-Contractors' and Specialists' requirements and including all temporary connections, wiring, fittings, etc., and clearing away on completion. The Contractor shall pay all fees and obtain all permits in connection therewith. Pr/11 Carried to Collection Shs.

165 GENERAL MATTERS (Cont d) Shs. Cts. A. SAFETY The Contractor shall comply at all times with the requirements of the Factory Act (Cap 514), Building Construction Rules, Supplement 18, Legal Notice No. 40 dated 5th April, 1984 and ensure that the safety of his workpeople and authorized visitors to the Site is protected at all times. In particular there shall be proper provision of planked footways and guardrails to scaffolding, etc., protection against falling materials and tools and the Site shall be kept tidy and clear of dangerous rubbish. The Contractor shall appoint a Safety Officer as required by the Factory Act and notify the Factory Inspector of his name. The Safety Officer shall be on site at all times and all directions given by the Architect to the Safety Officer shall be deemed to be Architect's Instructions, and shall be complied with promptly without additional cost to the contract. The Architect shall be empowered to suspend work on the Site should he consider these conditions are not being observed, and no claim arising from such a suspension will be allowed. B. PROTECTIVE CLOTHING The Contractor shall provide all protective or any other special clothing or equipment for his employees that may be necessary. This shall include, inter-alia, safety helmets, gloves, goggles, earmuffs, gumboots, overalls, etc. according to the type of work. The Contractor shall ensure that safety helmets are worn by all staff on site at all times. Carried to Collection Kshs. Pr/12

166 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP Shs. Cts. A. GENERALLY All materials shall be new unless otherwise directed or permitted by the Architect and in all cases where the quality of goods or materials is not described or otherwise specified, is to be the best quality obtainable in the ordinary meaning of the word "best" and not merely a trade signification of that word. All materials and workmanship shall, unless otherwise specified or described, conform to the appropriate British Standards Institution Specification current at the date of Tender. The Contractor shall order all materials to be obtained from overseas immediately after the Contract is signed and shall also order materials to be obtained from local sources as early as necessary to ensure that such materials are on Site when required for use in the Works. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall replace or make good at his own expense any materials lost or damaged. The Works throughout shall be executed by skilled workmen well versed in their respective trades. B. REJECTED WORKMANSHIP OR MATERIALS Any workmanship or materials not complying with the specific requirements or approved samples or which have been damaged, contaminated or have deteriorated, must immediately be removed from the Site and replaced at the Contractor's expense, as required. C. PROPRIETARY MATERIALS Where proprietary materials are specified herein-after the Contractor may propose the use of materials of other manufacture but equal quality for approval by the Architect. All materials and goods, where specified to be obtained from a particular manufacturer or supplier are to be used or fixed strictly in accordance with their instructions. D. CONCRETE TESTS Concrete test cubes, i.e. per set of three as later described, including testing fee, labour and materials, making moulds, transport and handling, etc. Successful tests only (PROVISIONAL): Sets of three: No. Shs: (Tenderer must insert rate and extend) Carried to Collection Shs. Pr/13

167 TEMPORARY WORKS Shs. Cts. A. OFFICE AND SHEDS The Contractor shall erect and maintain a temporary office accommodation for his own use, and ample temporary watertight sheds for the proper storage and protection of materials and for the use of artisans and remove when ordered. Floors of sheds shall be at least 150mm above ground level. B. OFFICES AND SERVICES FOR THE ARCHITECT The Contractor shall provide and maintain where directed on the site, an approved weather and sun-proof lock-up office for the sole use of the Architect and his representatives with a total floor area of not less than 15 square metres. The office shall be constructed with stone, concrete or wood floor and the walls and ceilings internally lined with fibreboard. The office and latrine shall be removed on completion. The Contractor shall keep on site and maintain in good condition one dumpy or quickset level The Contractor shall keep on site and maintain in good condition one dumpy or quickset level and levelling staff, and one 30 metre steel tape, a fax machine or a computer with facilities in lieu for the use of the Architect and his representatives. The Contractor shall provide a computer on site with full internet facilities for the period for the Architect and Clerk of Works use. C. TELEPHONE The Contractor shall provide a telephone connected to the Town Exchange for the period of the Works, and shall pay all fees and rental for the same. A GSM mobile Phone facility in lieu of a fixed line shall be acceptable in lieu. D. SANITATION The Contractor shall provide the necessary latrines for his staff and workmen to the requirements and satisfaction of the Health Authorities and maintain the same in a thoroughly clean and sanitary condition and pay all conservancy fees during the period of the Works and remove when no longer required. Carried to Collection Shs. Pr/14

168 TEMPORARY WORKS (Contd) Shs. Cts. A. EXISTING AND ADJACENT PROPERTY The Contractor must take all steps necessary to safeguard existing and adjacent property, make good at his own expense any damage to persons or property caused thereon, and hold the Employer indemnified against any such claim arising. The Contractor will be held fully responsible for the safety of the existing and adjacent buildings and for any damage caused in consequence of these Works. He must reinstate all damages at his own expense and indemnify the Employer against any loss. The Contractor must take such steps and exercise such care and diligence as to minimize nuisance from dust, noise or any other cause to the occupiers of the existing and adjacent property. B. HOARDING The Contractor shall enclose the Site with a hoarding with opening and gates as required, constructed of substantial timbers to approval and covered with new-galvanized iron corrugated sheeting painted to approval. Overall provisional length of site to be enclosed 50 metres C. WATCHING AND LIGHTING The Contractor shall provide at his own risk and cost all watching and lighting as necessary to safeguard the Works, plant and materials against damage and theft. D. TEMPORARY ROADS The Contractor shall provide where directed all temporary access roads, tracks and paths necessary for the execution of the Works, including making good when no longer required. E. SIGNBOARD The signboard and lettering of the same for display of the General and Subcontractors shall be of an approved size and design. The consultant s names shall be printed in 50 mm letters. The signboard shall be well maintained throughout the Construction period. Carried to Collection Shs. Pr/15

169 NOMINATED SUB-CONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS Shs. Cts. A. (See also under FORM OF CONTRACT Clauses 31.0 and 32.0) NOMINATED SUB-CONTRACTORS The Contractor shall be responsible for Nominated Sub-Contractors in every respect and in particular it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that each Sub-Contractor commences and completes the work in such manner and is ready on the Site with his materials, labour and special plant at such times so as to conform with the Progress Schedule, as specified previously, and to ensure satisfactory progress. The Contractor shall also accept liability for and bear the cost of General Attendance on Nominated Sub-Contractors which shall be deemed to include for: Allowing the use of standing scaffolding, maintenance and alteration of all scaffolding, retention of all scaffolding until such time as all relevant Sub- Contractors' works are complete and removal of all scaffolding on completion. Providing space for office accommodation, and for storage of plant and materials; allowing use of sanitary accommodation; the supply of all necessary water, and lighting; and clearing away all rubbish. The items for "General Attendance" given herein-after following Prime Cost Sums in respect of Sub-Contractors' work shall be deemed to include all the above. The Contractor shall also accept liability for and bear the cost of Special Attendance on Nominated Sub-Contractors which shall include for one or more of the following: Unloading, storing, hoisting, placing in position, providing power, provision of special scaffolding. The items for "Special Attendance" given herein-after following Prime Cost Sums shall include any one or more of the above items as set out in the particular reference. Cutting away for and making good after the work of Sub-Contractors as may be required will be measured and valued separately by the Quantity Surveyor. Carried to Collection Shs. Pr/16

170 Shs. Cts. NOMINATED SUB-CONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS (Cont d) A. NOMINATED SUPPLIERS The Cost of "Fix Only" materials to be obtained from Nominated Suppliers which are covered by Prime Cost or Provisional Sums shall include for taking delivery where directed, checking with invoices or indents, reporting and claiming damages for shortages and damaged goods, defraying demurrage, signing for as having been received in good order, transporting, unloading, storing, covering and protecting until the time of fixing, unpacking, replacing anything lost or damaged, sorting, assembling, hoisting to required levels and fixing as described. Before placing any orders with Nominated Sub-Contractors or Nominated Suppliers the Contractor must ascertain that the terms and conditions of the quotations and the dates of delivery of materials or execution of works comply with the terms of Contract and the Progress Schedule. B. PRIME COST RATES Where description of items include a Prime Cost rate per unit this rate is to cover the net supply cost of the unit only. The Contractor's price must include for the cost of the unit at the rate stated, plus waste, taking delivery, storage, fixing in position, profit and overheads. The actual net cost per unit will be adjusted within the Final Account against the Prime Cost rate stated. Carried to Collection Shs. Pr/17

171 Shs. Cts. PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. PROTECTION The Contractor shall cover and protect from damage, including damage from inclement weather, all finished work and unfixed materials, including that of Sub-Contractors, etc., to the satisfaction of the Architect until the completion of the Contract, and carefully preserve all trees or bushes on or near the Site. CLEANING B. The Contractor shall, upon completion of the Works, at his own expense, remove and clear way all surplus excavated materials, plant, rubbish and unused materials and shall leave the whole of the Site and Works in a clean and tidy state to the satisfaction of the Architect, including clearing away and making good all traces of temporary access roads, offices, sheds, camps, etc. Particular care shall be taken to leave clean all floors and windows and to remove all paint and cement stains. He shall also, at the discretion of the Architect, remove all rubbish and dirt as it accumulates. The Contractor is to find his own dump and shall pay all charges in connection therewith. The contractor shall keep and maintain cleanliness in all their work areas to the highest standards expected of a branch. No debris dust or construction material shall be left in the branch during branch working hours Carried to Collection Shs. Pr/18

172 A. B. C. D. CONTINGENCIES Provide a Provisional Sum of Shillings Three Million, Two Hundred Thousand for Contingencies to be omitted or expended in whole or in part at the discretion of the Architect. TRAINING LEVY The Contractor's attention is drawn to Legal Notice No. 237 of October, 1971, which requires payment by the Contractor of Training Levy on all Contracts of more than Shs.50,000/- in value and his Tender must include for all costs arising or resulting there from. STANDARD LEVY The Contractor s attention is drawn to Legal Notice No. 267 of 22 nd June, 1990 which requires payment by the Contractor of Standard Levy. His tender must include for all costs arising or resulting. VALUE ADDED TAX The Contractor's attention is drawn to the Finance Bill dated June, 1993 which stipulates that the Value Added Tax shall be charged on the value added in the provision of building services. The Contractor shall include the amount of the Value Added Tax in all their rates. Shs. Cts. 3,200, Carried to Collection Shs. Pr/19

173 Shs. Cts. COLLECTION From Page No. Pr/1 " " " Pr/2 " " " Pr/3 " " " Pr/4 " " " Pr/5 " " " Pr/6 " " " Pr/7 " " " Pr/8 " " " Pr/9 " " " Pr/10 " " " Pr/11 " " " Pr/12 " " " Pr/13 " " " Pr/14 " " " Pr/15 " " " Pr/16 " " " Pr/17 " " " Pr/18 " " " Pr/19 " " " Pr/20 SECTION NO. 1 TOTAL TO SUMMARY SHS. Pr/20

174 BILLS OF QUANTITIES

175 MRTH LAB Bill 1 Demolitions Section 1 Demolitions Item Shs Cts A B The Contractor is advised to visit the site and acertain the number, sizes and condition of the existing buildings and the condition of all structures to be demolised including sizes of structural elements and all materials to be recovered before quoting for this item. No claim shall be entertained for want in understanding or discrepancy in description of work appearing hereunder. Demolish 1 No existing building of approximate size 11.8 x14.4 m and approx. 3.6 m high,single storey building previsiouly used a mortury built with load bearing natural stone wallplastered and painted, mabati roof cover on timber Roof structure, mild steel casement windows, timber doors, remove all plumbing and mechanical Installations, grab up foundations. Sterilize and Safely dispose all debris Allow for steralization of the the enire site occupied by the mortury building before and ager demolition to lessen possibilities of chemical infection to the surrounding item item To Collection Shs Project: 241DA Page 1/1-1

176 Bill 1 Demolitions Section 1 Demolitions Item Credit Shs Cts A The contractor shall give credit for taking away all the demolished materials for his own use an amount of Kenya Shillings indicated on the amount column which shall be netted from the cost of the works. The contractor is advised to visit the site to ensure that the material is of satisfactory quality for any use intended as the consultants shall not take responsibility for quality and quantity of the material arising from the demolitions item To Collection Shs COLLECTION Page 1 Page 2 To Summary Shs Project: 241DA Page 1/1-2

177 MRTH LAB Bill 1 Demolitions SUMMARY Shs Cts Section 1 Demolitions Page 2 To Summary Shs Project: 241DA Page 3

178 MRTH LAB Bill 2 Laboratory Section 1 Substructures (All Provisional) Item Shs Cts Site clearance A Clear designated areas of site of shrubs, bush and small trees, grub up roots, fill with selected soil and burn debris 840 m2 B Cut down trees, grub up roots, fill with selected soil and burn debris >500 but not exceeding 1000 mm girth 6 nr C Cut down trees, grub up roots, fill with selected soil and burn debris >1000 girths 4 nr D Cut down trees, grub up roots, fill with selected soil and burn debris not exceeding 500mm girth 12 nr E Excavate to remove topsoil and load, wheel and deposit where directed, average depth 200 mm 785 m2 Excavation including maintaining and supporting sides and keeping free from water, mud and fallen materials F To reduce levels 236 m3 For foundations commencing at reduced level G not exceeding 1.50 metres deep 195 m3 For column bases commencing at reduced level H not exceeding 1.50 metres deep 251 m3 To Collection Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/1-4

179 Bill 2 Laboratory Section 1 Substructures (All Provisional) Item Excavation including maintaining and supporting sides and keeping free from water, mud and fallen materials Shs Cts A Extra over for breaking up existing hardcore 54 m3 B Extra over for excavating in Class I rock 28 m3 C Extra over for excavating in class II rock 56 m3 D Extra over for excavating in sog rock 28 m3 Disposal E Backfilling around foundations 463 m3 F Load and cart away surplus spoil 439 m3 Imported filling G Hardcore bed blinded to receive concrete, thickness 300 mm 570 m2 H Stone dust blinding to hardcore, etc., thickness 50 mm 570 m2 Damp-proof membranes I 1000 Gauge polythene laid under surface beds 651 m2 Anti-termite treatment J Termidor 25 EC. chemical anti-termite treatment executed by an approved specialits under a ten-year guarantee to surfaces of hardcore, etc. 651 m2 To Collection Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/1-5

180 Bill 2 Laboratory Section 1 Substructures (All Provisional) Item Shs Cts Plain concrete 1:4:8 A Blinding under foundations and bases, thickness 50 mm 404 m2 Vibrated reinforced concrete class 25 B Column bases 94 m3 C Beds, thickness 150 mm 651 m2 Vibrated reinforced concrete class 25/20 D Foundations 39 m3 E Columns 10 m3 Hot rolled high yield ribbed steel bar reinforcement to B.S F 8 to 32 mm Diameter bars kg Steel mesh fabric reinforcement to B.S G Layer of mesh fabric reinforcement laid in blinding (measured nett - no allowance made for laps) ref. no. A m2 Formwork H Sides of foundation strip footing 94 m2 I Sides of foundation strip footing curved on plan 45 m2 J Sides of columns 91 m2 K Sides of column bases 188 m2 L Sides of columns curved on plan 20 m2 To Collection Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/1-6

181 Bill 2 Laboratory Section 1 Substructures (All Provisional) Item Formwork Shs Cts A Edges of slabs, etc mm girh 165 m Natural stone foundation walling in cement 1:3 mortar B Walling, 200 mm 410 m2 C Ditto walling curved on plan, 200 mm 116 m2 Bituminous felt damp proof courses laid in and including levelling screed of cement mortar D In walling, width 150 mm 20 m E In walling, width 200 mm 373 m Cement and sand (1:4) paving F Finish to plinths steel trowelled smooth, 20 mm 69 m2 Prepare and apply two coats bituminous paint G Rendered plinths 69 m2 To Collection Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/1-7

182 Bill 2 Laboratory Section 1 Substructures (All Provisional) Item Shs Cts COLLECTION Page 4 Page 5 Page 6 Page 7 To Summary Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/1-8

183 MRTH LAB Bill 2 Laboratory Section 2 Superstructure Concrete Item Shs Cts Vibrated reinforced concrete class 25 A Beams 56 m3 B Ramp Beams sloping not exceeding 15 degrees 6 m3 C Ring beams 56 m3 D Steps and staircases 10 m3 Vibrated reinforced concrete class 25/20 E Suspended slabs, thickness 150 mm 680 m2 F Suspended slabs laid to slope not exceeding 15 degrees, thickness 175 mm 46 m2 G Columns 40 m3 Hot rolled high yield ribbed steel bar reinforcement to B.S H 8 to 16 mm Diameter bars kg I 8 to 32 mm Diameter bars kg Formwork J Soffits of slabs 848 m2 K Sloping soffits of slabs 97 m2 L Sloping soffits of stairs 50 m2 M Sides and soffits of beams 427 m2 N Sides and soffits of beams curved on plan 150 m2 O Sides and soffits of ring beams curved on plan 150 m2 To Collection Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/1-9

184 Bill 2 Laboratory Section 2 Superstructure Concrete Item Formwork Shs Cts A B C D E F G H I Sides and soffits of sloping beams Sides and soffits of ring beams Risers,150 mm Edges of stairs, etc., extreme height 300 mm Wrought formwork Sides of columns Sides of columns to achieve a curve as per the microscopic feature Sides of columns, Curved on plan Sides of sloping ramps mm Hollow block suspended floors, etc. Slab comprising: 230 x 230 x 305 mm hollow pot block, 305 x 120 mm ribs in VRC Class 25 and 65 mm topping with Fabric Mesh Reinforcement, Ref. A98, overall thickness 380 mm 63 m2 427 m2 125 m 32 m 298 m2 65 m2 79 m2 52 m 168 m2 To Collection Shs COLLECTION Page 9 Page 10 To Summary Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/2-10

185 MRTH LAB Bill 2 Laboratory Section 3 Walling Item Shs Cts A B C D E F curved Machine cut Natural Stone External walling in cement and sand 1:3 mortar Walling, 200 mm Curved Machine cut Natural stone Internal walling in cement and sand 1:3 mortar Walling, 150 mm Walling, 200 mm Machine cut Natural Stone External walling in cement and sand 1:3 mortar Walling, 200 mm Machine cut Natural stone Internal walling in cement and sand 1:3 mortar Walling, 150 mm Walling, 200 mm 128 m2 31 m2 81 m2 385 m2 268 m2 763 m2 G H Powder coated approved aluminium sections RAL No or 7535 by General Aluminium Fabricators Ltd. or other equal and approved 100 x 50 x 3 mm aluminium frames rebated as detailed 12 x 12 x 1.2 mm aluminium glazing beads and washers screwed as detailed 87 m 174 m To Collection Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/3-11

186 Bill 2 Laboratory Section 3 Walling Item Shs Cts A B Laminated glass 6 mm Glass and glazing to aluminium frames with PVC glazing and weather seal strips Glass Filming One-way patterned film and fixing as supplied by "3M" or other equal and approved suppliers 48 m2 48 m2 To Collection Shs COLLECTION Page 11 Page 12 To Summary Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/3-12

187 MRTH LAB Bill 2 Laboratory Section 4 Roof Construction & Rain Water isposal Item Shs Cts Waterproofing with APP membrane in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions A APP membrane torch welded and fixed in accordance with manufacturers instructions to reinforced concrete roof slab 165 m2 B C D E Colour "kra Grey" 26 Gauge galvanised iron roofing sheets type IT5 prepainted to an approved standard colour Sheeting laid with 94 mm side laps and minimum 200mm end laps fixed to metal purlins with and including hook bolts, washers and nuts at 800 mm c/c Colour "Kra Grey" 26 Gauge galvanised iron roofing sheets type IT5 prepainted to an approved standard colour Raking cutting on sheeting Purpose made curved ridge 300mm girth 18 Gauge pressed steel sheet Gutters, girth m2 253 m 80 m 163 m To Collection Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/4-13

188 Bill 2 Laboratory Section 4 Roof Construction & Rain Water isposal Item Polycarbonate roof Shs Cts A Suply and install 12mm Thick polycarbonate roof and roofing to ramp area and entance canopy; to be laid in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions including all necessary supports structures. 97 m2 Sawn Cypress treated as described B Brandering 50 x 50 mm including plugging to concrete beam/wall and bolting to metal purlin as necessary 163 m Light weight Roof Structure as Per " SAFAL MITEK LTD" or other equal and approved C Supply and Fix ULTRASPAN truss components to engineering calculations of trusses to structural design consultant for an approval with accessories mentioned as; Pre-coated GI/AZ steel members i.e. Top Chords or RaGer, Bottom Chords or Tie Beam, Webs or members or struts,truss joining accessories required for only ULTRASPAN trusses like C/Z connector, Fascia Cleat, etc; Screws 12x20; Apex Covers; Supply of Pre-coated GI/AZ Battens or Hat Channel and including Submission of Detailed Fabrication drawing to structural engineer for approval 845 m2 To Collection Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/4-14

189 Bill 2 Laboratory Section 4 Roof Construction & Rain Water isposal Item Shs Cts 16 Gauge galvanised mild steel pipes, gu ers and fiungs A B C D E F Pipes jointed with hemp gasket and cold caulking compound fixed to walls with bracketd diameter 100mm U.P.V.C. Pipes, gu ers and fiungs to B.S Part 1 (References to Terrain Product Handbook PH. 05) Pipes (2100) with solvent welded joints encased into masonry, diameter 150 mm Extra for bend (2108) in pipe, diameter 150 mm Extra for branch (2109) in pipe, diameter 150 mm Extra for shoe (2110) in pipe, diameter 150 mm Extra for access pipe (2137) in pipe, diameter 150 mm 126 m 120 m 20 nr 20 nr 20 nr 20 nr G H UPVC Ceilings Upvc celing as per 'vista' or equal and approved ceiling in eaves Cement and Sand (1:4) beds and backings Protective screed to wateproofing 22 mm 98 m2 165 m2 To Collection Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/4-15

190 Bill 2 Laboratory Section 4 Roof Construction & Rain Water Disposal Item Shs Cts Prepare, prime and apply two undercoats and one gloss finishing coat oil paint to metal A General surfaces of gutters down pipes, etc. 202 m2 Full bora B Supply and fix Full bora to roof slab to drain roof floor storm water as per engineers detail, 150 diameter 20 nr To Collection Shs COLLECTION Page 13 Page 14 Page 15 Page 16 To Summary Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/4-16

191 MRTH LAB Bill 2 Laboratory Section 5 External Finishes Item Shs Cts A B Cement and sand 1:4 rendering Rendering to walls finished with a steel trowel, thickness 15 mm Extra over cement sand mortar, vertical and horizontal keypointing to machine cut stone externally 585 m2 513 m2 C Prepare and apply three coats Crown "Permacote" or other equal and approved exterior quality paint Rendered surfaces externally 585 m2 To Summary Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/5-17

192 MRTH LAB Bill 2 Laboratory Section 6 Internal Finishes Item Shs Cts A B Gypsum board Ceilings 12 mm ceilings with and including approved aluminium framing to soffits including all materials and labour to form an even joint free finish to soffits to approval 150 x 15 mm decorative moulded gypsum cornice 680 m2 780 m C D E F G H I J Lime plaster Plaster to walls Plaster to columns Plaster to soffits Plaster to sides and soffits of beams Polished non slip granito floor tiles 600 x 600 mm floor tiles fixed with approved adhesive and pointed in matching cement 100 x 6 mm skirting fixed with approved adhesive and pointed in matching cement Ceramic wall tiles Supply and fix coloured "Saj" or other equal and approved ceramic wall tiles including bedding in approved adhesive and pointing in white cement Plastic edging strip 2343 m2 296 m2 995 m2 692 m2 650 m2 715 m 378 m2 120 m To Collection Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/6-18

193 Bill 2 Laboratory Section 6 Internal Finishes Item Terrazo flooring Shs Cts A B C D E F G H I 12mm thick, Terrazzo flooring fixed with approved adhessive, in floor 20mm thick, Terrazzo flooring fixed with approved adhessive, in Landings 165 x 20mm thick, Terrazzo floor Finish fixed with approved adhessive in Risers, with non-slip grooves and rounded edging 300 x 20mm thick, Terrazzo floor Finish fixed with approved adhessive in Treads, with non-slip grooves and rounded edging 300 x 20mm thick, Terrazzo floor Finish fixed with approved adhessive in waist, with non-slip grooves and rounded edging 150mm wide x 18mm thick, Terrazzo floor Finish fixed with approved adhessive in Skirting Ceramic tile paving 300 x 300 x 6 mm Coloured Saj or other equal and approved Paving fixed with approved adhesive Cement and Sand (1:4) beds and backings Beds to receive flooring, etc., finished with a steel trowel, thickness 24 mm Beds to receive Ceramic floor Tiles flooring, etc. finished with a wood float, thickness 24 mm 767 m2 12 m2 62 m 172 m 173 m 822 m 50 m2 650 m2 50 m2 To Collection Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/6-19

194 Bill 2 Laboratory Section 6 Internal Finishes Item Cement and Sand (1:4) beds and backings Shs Cts A B C Beds to receive Granito flooring, etc. finished with a wood float, thickness 22 mm Screed to ramps, landings, treads and risers to receive paving, thickness 24 mm Backing to tile dados, etc., thickness 22 mm 650 m2 102 m2 378 m2 D E F G H Prepare and apply three coats plastic emulsion paint to Gypsumboard soffits Prepare and apply three coats silk vinyl emulsion paint on Plastered walls Plastered columns Plastered beams Plastered soffits 680 m m2 296 m2 692 m2 995 m2 To Collection Shs COLLECTION Page 18 Page 19 Page 20 To Summary Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/6-20

195 MRTH LAB Bill 2 Laboratory Section 7 Windows Item Shs Cts A Precast concrete window cill 150 mm wide window cill with 3 labours 184 m Wrought Hardwood B Window board with one labour plugged 150 x 25 mm 184 m C D Metal louvred windows Mild steel louvred window comprising 100 x 50 mm mild steel stiles, top and middle rails, 200 x 50 mm bottom rail, infilled with 18 gauge mild steel 45 degrees complete with painting, 100 x 50 mm frame with insect mesh fixed to frame, overall size 1200 x 1000 mm Mild steel louvred window comprising 100 x 50 mm mild steel stiles, top and middle rails, 200 x 50 mm bottom rail, infilled with 18 gauge mild steel 45 degrees complete with painting, 100 x 50 mm frame with insect mesh fixed to frame, overall size 1800 x 1000 mm 2 nr 16 nr To Collection Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/7-21

196 Bill 2 Laboratory Section 7 Windows Item Powder coated aluminium windows and doors including mullions and transomes Shs Cts A B C 75 x 50mm Powder coated Aluminium window "Type W1" comprising slidding pannels and Fixed panels, complete with 6mm thick toughenned laminated, non reflective glass pannel with aluminium beads, rubber beading,all ironmongery and fixing to masonary jambs and pointing all round with silicon overall size 1500 x 1500 mm high. 75 x 50mm Powder coated Aluminium window "Type W2" comprising slidding pannels and Fixed panels, complete with 6mm thick toughenned laminated, non reflective glass pannel with aluminium beads, rubber beading,all ironmongery and fixing to masonary jambs and pointing all round with silicon overall size 2000 x 1500 mm high. 75 x 50mm Powder coated Aluminium window "Type W3" comprising slidding pannels and Fixed panels, complete with 6mm thick toughenned laminated, non reflective glass pannel with aluminium beads, rubber beading,all ironmongery and fixing to masonary jambs and pointing all round with silicon overall size 900 x 1000 mm high. 32 nr 53 nr 20 nr To Collection Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/7-22

197 Bill 2 Laboratory Section 7 Windows Item Powder coated aluminium windows and doors including mullions and transomes Shs Cts A 75 x 50mm Powder coated Aluminium window "Type W3" comprising slidding pannels and Fixed panels, complete with 6mm thick toughenned laminated, non reflective glass pannel with aluminium beads, rubber beading,all ironmongery and fixing to masonary jambs and pointing all round with silicon overall size 4000 x 1000 mm high. 3 nr To Collection Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/7-23

198 Bill 2 Laboratory Section 7 Windows Item Curtain wall system ConWall TM CW 60 as supplied by an approved manufacturer and bolted to RC beams with the following specifications: 75 x 50 mm x 2mm thick powder Coated Mullions and transomes with moment of Inertia adequate for the structural requirement to the façade taking cognizance of wind load, span and building height. Deflection to be limited to 1/175 of span. Colour to Architect's approval; Dry glazing with EDPM gaskets for fixed glass; Structurally glazed vents without any visible frame to outside with friction stay opening devices or manufacturers recommended equivalent stay system; Powder coated mild steel fixing brackets; Provision for expansion / contraction in the system; System should be weather tight; Each glass pane should be ventilated via the 4 corners; System should have integral pressure equalization with condensation and drainage provision; Fire barrier provision in between each floor; Glass: 8 mm thick toughened and tinted solar glass unless otherwise specified ;Pressed aluminum powder coated cills under all windows Shs Cts A Curtain walling with 8mm thick Laminated and toughened non-reflective glass panelling on alluminium framework (75 x 50 x 3 mm thick ) bolted to RC beams) 167 m2 To Collection Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/7-24

199 Bill 2 Laboratory Section 7 Windows Item Shs Cts COLLECTION Page 21 Page 22 Page 23 Page 24 To Summary Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/7-25

200 MRTH LAB Bill 2 Laboratory Section 8 Doors Item Shs Cts Flush doors to B.S. 459 (Part 2) A 45 mm Semi solid core flush doors faced both sides with 6 mm interior quality plywood for painting, 12 mm decorative planted moulding on both sides and hardwood lipped all round, size 800 x 2100 mm 20 nr B 37 mm solid core flush doors faced both sides with 6 mm exterior quality mahogany veneered for polishing and hardwood lipped all round, overall size 900 x 2400 mm; Door Type D-1 as per Architect's later schedule 6 nr Doors, frames and finishings in wrought hardwood C Architraves 40 x 25 mm 343 m D Frame with 2 labours plugged 150 x 50 mm 185 m Ironmongery - supply and fix with matching screws E Pairs brass butt hinges 100 mm 39 nr F Two lever mortice lock as per union catalogue 26 nr G Three lever mortice lock as per union catalogue 1 nr H Aluminium kicking plate SAA union 5000, size 900 x 300 mm 26 nr To Collection Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/8-26

201 Bill 2 Laboratory Section 8 Doors Item Ironmongery - supply and fix with matching screws Shs Cts A Indicator bolt as per union catalogue 20 nr B Oval brass mounted door stop as per union catalogue 70 nr C Hat and coat hook as per union catalogue 20 nr D Overhead door closer as per union catalogue 76 nr E Male Symbol plate union nr F Female Symbol plate union nr G Disabled Symbol plate union nr Powder coated aluminium doors glazed with 8 mm tinted glass complete with all lugs, starbars, hinges and fasteners, stainless steel handles and 5 lever lock Re. 2201/ etc. built into wallling including bedding frames in cement mortar and pointing around in mastic H Door overal size, 1200 x 2400 mm High 44 nr I Door overal size, 1500 x 2400 mm High, in two equal leaves 1 nr Knot, prime, stop and apply two undercoats and one ma finishing coat oil paint to woodwork J General surfaces 99 m2 To Collection Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/8-27

202 Bill 2 Laboratory Section 8 Doors Item Knot, prime, stop and apply two undercoats and one ma finishing coat 'crown' varnish to woodwork Shs Cts A B Timber surfaces, mm girth Timber surfaces, mm girth 343 m 185 m To Collection Shs COLLECTION Page 26 Page 27 Page 28 To Summary Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/8-28

203 MRTH LAB Bill 2 Laboratory Section 10 Joinery FiUngs Item Shs Cts A B C D E Plain concrete 1:3:6 Plinths, thickness 100 mm Vibrated reinforced concrete 1:2:4 Worktop, thickness 75 mm Steel mesh fabric reinforcement to B.S Layer of mesh fabric reinforcement laid in slab or bed (measured nett - no allowance made for laps) Re: A142 Formwork Soffits of slabs Edges of slabs, etc mm girth 10 m2 158 m2 158 m2 158 m2 175 m F Load bearing "Selected machine cut" natural stone Internal walling in cement sand 1:3 mortar Walling reinforced as described, 150 mm 175 m2 G FiUngs Provide for Fittings a Provisional Sum of Shillings Nine Hundred and Seventy Thousand Only item 970, To Collection Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/10-29

204 Bill 2 Laboratory Section 10 Joinery FiUngs Item Shs Cts A B C D 32 Cement and sand (1:4) screed To receive ceramic tiles to worktops Lime plaster Plaster to masonry walls Cement and Sand (1:4) beds and backings Beds to receive epoxy, etc., finished with a steel trowel, thickness 32 mm Epoxy Resin to worktops Epoxy Resin to worktop including edges 6 mm thick 10 m2 350 m2 158 m2 193 m2 E Prepare and apply three coats silk vinyl emulsion paint on Plastered walls 350 m2 To Collection Shs COLLECTION Page 29 Page 30 To Summary Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/10-30

205 MRTH LAB Bill 2 Laboratory Section 10.1 Balsuterading and Railing Item Shs Cts Balustrades A B C Handrail and Railing Staircase handrail comprising 75mm diameter x 1.5mm thick circular hollow section stainless steel handrail welded to 900 mm high 40 x 4 mm stainless steel balusters at 1000m centres, twice bent with one end split to form fish tail grouted into masonry wall (m/s) in 1:4 mortar,3 No. 25 mm diameter stainless steel horizontal railing and curced to radius to approval 900 mm high balusters comprising 75 mm circular hollow mild steel section and 25 x 25 x 2 mm wrot iron balusters at 200 mm centres in decorative patern as per the architects detail and 40 x 40 mm baluster supports at 1000 mm centres 900 mm high curved balusters comprising 75 mm circular hollow mild steel section and 25 x 25 x 2 mm wrot iron balusters at 200 mm centres in decorative patern as per the architects detail and 40 x 40 mm baluster supports at 1000 mm centres 40 m 30 m 21 m To Summary Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/

206 MRTH LAB Bill 2 Laboratory Section 11 Builders Work in Connection wit h Electrical Inst llations Item Shs Cts Cut away for and a end in all trades on the Sub-Contractor installing the following points in a mainly concealed system, including chases, holes and recess, notching timber, etc., and making good all finishes A Main switchboards 1 nr B Meter panels 1 nr C Lighting points with associated switches 210 nr D Socket outlet points 180 nr To Summary Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/11-32

207 MRTH LAB Bill 2 Laboratory Section 12 Builders Work in Connection with Mecha n ical In Item Shs Cts Chasing and making good for small pipe in Stone walls Holes for small pipe through Concrete slabs 150 mm nr Holes and pipe sleeves for large pipe through Stone wall, thickness 200 mm nr Holes and pipe sleeves for small pipe through Stone wall, thickness 200 mm nr To Summary Shs Project: 241DA Page 2/12-33

208 MRTH LAB Bill 2 Laboratory SUMMARY Shs Cts Section 1 Substructures (All Provisional) Section 2 Superstructure Concrete Section 3 Walling Section 4 Roof Construction & Rain Water Disposal Section 5 External Finishes Section 6 Internal Finishes Section 7 Windows Section 8 Doors Section 10 Joinery Fittings Section 10.1 Balsuterading and Railing Section 11 Builders Work in Connection with Electrical Installations Section 12 Builders Work in Connection with Mechanical Installations Page 8 Page 10 Page 12 Page 16 Page 17 Page 20 Page 25 Page 28 Page 30 Page 31 Page 32 Page 33 To Summary Shs Project: 241DA Page 34

209 MRTH LAB Bill 3 External Works Section 4 Foul Drainage Item Shs Cts A B C D E F G H I Excavation of drain trenches including maintaining and supporting sides and keeping bo oms free from water, mud and fallen materials, grading bo oms, backfilling in appropriate material and loading and carting away surplus excavated material For 150 mm upvc drain pipe average depth 1000 mm UPVC Drain pipes and fiungs to K.S (references to Terrain Product Handbook 07) Pipes (1800) with lip seal joints laid in trench, diameter 150 mm The following in inspection chambers Excavate for inspection chambers, etc., including back filling and loading and carting away surplus excavated materials Extra over for excavating in sog rock Extra over for excavating in hard rock Reinforced concrete class 25 suspended slab 150 mm Plain concrete 1:4:8 blinding under slab 50 mm Plain concrete 1:2:4 to 20 mm gauge aggregate in base slab 150 mm Formwork to soffit of slab 30 m 30 m 2 m3 1 m3 1 m3 3 m2 3 m2 3 m2 3 m2 To Collection Shs Project: 241DA Page 3/4-35

210 Bill 3 External Works Section 4 Foul Drainage Item The following in inspection chambers Shs Cts A B C D E F G Formwork to edge of slab, thickness 150mm Connect end of drain pipe to 150 mm concrete side and make good, diameter 225 mm Solid concrete block walling in cement mortar 150 mm Medium duty recessed rectangular manhole cover and frame to B.S. 497 Table 5 Grade B and bedding frame in cement mortar and setting cover in grease to opening size 450 x 450 mm 12 mm Cement and sand (1:1) rendering to sides finished with a steel trowel The following in septic tanks Allow for a provissioal sum of Kenya shillings Twenty Thousand Only for connection of the drainage system to existing septic tank and soakpit, to structural engineer's approval Testing Allow for testing the whole of the Drainage Installation to the satisfaction of the Architect and Local Authorities and for replacing any defective work free of charge 15 m 13 nr 9 m2 5 nr 10 m2 item 20, sum To Collection Shs Project: 241DA Page 3/4-36

211 Bill 3 External Works Section 4 Foul Drainage Item Shs Cts COLLECTION Page 35 Page 36 To Summary Shs Project: 241DA Page 3/4-37

212 MRTH LAB Bill 3 External Works Section 6 Parking and Driveways Item Shs Cts Excavation including maintaining and supporting sides and keeping free from water, mud and fallen materials A To reduce levels 172 m3 Filling, etc. B Blinding hardcore 344 m2 Sub-base and base courses C Approved imported filling in compacted layers 69 m3 D Hardcore filling in compacted layers n.e 150mm thick overall thickness 300 mm thck 344 m2 Concrete block paving (as manufactured by Bamburi Special Products or other equal and approved) E Normal Loading blocks size 210 x 105 x 60 mm (minimum strength 45N per square mm) laid on and including 50 mm screeded sand bed and compacted surface vibration 344 m2 Precast concrete kerbs and channels to B.S. 340 F 102 x 254 mm Kerb, rounded on one corner, laid on and including concrete 1:3:6 base size 225 x 100 mm hauched up behind 143 m To Collection Shs Project: 241DA Page 3/6-38

213 Bill 3 External Works Section 6 Parking and Driveways Item Precast concrete kerbs and channels to B.S. 340 Shs Cts A 254 x 127 mm Channel block, battered on one face, laid on and including concrete 1:3:6 base size 200 x 100 mm 143 m To Collection Shs COLLECTION Page 38 Page 39 To Summary Shs Project: 241DA Page 3/6-39

214 MRTH LAB Bill 3 External Works SUMMARY Shs Cts Section 4 Foul Drainage Section 6 Parking and Driveways Page 37 Page 39 To Summary Shs Project: 241DA Page 40

215 MRTH LAB SUMMARY Shs Cts Bill 1 Demolitions Bill 2 Laboratory Bill 3 External Works Page 3 Page 34 Page 40 Total Shs Project: 241DA Page 41

216 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

217 REPUBLIC OF KENYA MINISTRY OF HEALTH (NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORY SERVICES) TENDER DOCUMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF A LABORATORY AT MOI TEACHING REFERRAL HOSPITAL (MTRH) ELDORET SUB-CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS AND BILLS OF QUANTITIES VOLUME II OF III ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES REF: MOH/RFP/WB/EAPHLNP/001/03 ARCHITECT: SK ARCHPLANS LTD P.O. Box: Nairobi. STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: ARMITECH CONSULTANTS P.O Box Nairobi PROJECT MANAGER AND QUANTITY SURVEYOR AEGIS DEVELOPMENT SOLUTIONS LIMITED Blue Violet Plaza, Suite 603 P.O. Box Nairobi ELECTRICAL/ MECHANICAL ENGINEERS FERADON ASSOCIATES P.O.BOX Nairobi. OCTOBER, 2017

218 MINISTRY OF HEALTH NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORTORY SERVICES PROPOSED LABORATORY AT MRTH ELDORET SUB-CONTRACT FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES CONTENTS PAGES 1. CONTENTS 1 2. SPECIAL NOTES FOR ALL TENDERERS DEFINITIONS 5 4. PART A: GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 5. PART B: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 6. PART C: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION 7. PART D: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR FIRE ALARM INSTALLATIONS 8. PART E: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SERVICES 9. PART F: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM A1-A24 B1-B8 C1-C11 D1-D16 E1-E23 F1-F PART G: BILLS OF QUANTITIES G/1-G/30 Feradon Associates, Consulting Engineers, Kasuku Drive, Off Bogani Road P O Box , Ronald Ngala, NAIROBI. October, 2017

219 MINISTRY OF HEALTH NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORTORY SERVICES PROPOSED LABORATORY AT MRTH ELDORET SUB-CONTRACT FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES SPECIAL NOTES FOR ALL TENDERERS: Important: The site for the proposed works has a number of existing installations. The Sub-contractor will be required to ensure there s no interference with supply of services to neighbouring organizations. The sub-contractor will be required to take all precaution and care so that no damage will occur to the existing installations on site. The sub-contractor is also advised to secure all the necessary insurance policies as he will be solely held responsible for any damages to the existing system, injuries to persons resulting from his activities and/or interference with normal operations of the building that may result from his negligence, actions or otherwise. 1. These notes shall form part of these specifications and conditions. 2. The tenderer is required to check the number of pages in this document and should any be found to be missing or the figures indistinct, he must inform the Engineers at once and have the same rectified. Should the tenderer be in doubt about the precise meaning of any item, word or figures, or for any reason whatsoever observe any apparent omission of words or figures, he must inform the Engineer in order that the correct meaning may be decided upon before the date for the submission of the tenders. 3. No liability whatsoever will be admitted nor claim allowed in respect of errors in the completed tender due to mistakes in this document which should have been rectified in the manner described above. 4. The tenderer shall not alter or otherwise qualify the text of this specification. Any alteration or qualification made without authority will be ignored and the text of the specification as printed will be adhered to. 5. The tenderer shall be deemed to have made allowances in his unit prices generally to cover items of preliminaries or additions to Prime cost Sums or other items, if those have not been priced against the respective items. 6. The tenderer's price shall include all government taxes including duties, V.A.T. etc. No claims whatsoever will be allowed in respect of duties, VAT etc if the tenderer fails to include them in his unit prices. It is also to be noted that VAT will be included in the unit rates and NOT worked out as a percentage of the total. 7. In no case will any expenses incurred by the tenderer in preparation of this tender be reimbursed. 8. The copyright of this specification is vested in the Engineers and no part thereof may be reproduced without their express permission, given in writing. 9. The specifications must be priced in Kenya Currency i.e. Shillings and Cents. 10. All the tenderers must make a declaration that they have not and will not make any payment to any person which can be perceived as an inducement to enable them to win this tender. 11. The works shall be carried out in accordance with provisions of the 17th Edition of IEE wiring Regulations, the most current Kenya Standards governing such works, and relevant provisions of the current KPLC by-laws. 12. The proposed domestic sub-contractors MUST be approved by the Services Engineers before commencement of Work. In any case the name of the Domestic Sub-contractor submitted does not meet the above qualifications then the bidder will submit another name to the satisfaction of the Services Engineers and the Client. Once the domestic sub-contractor is approved by the Services Engineers then they can only be replaced with the written approval of the Services Engineers and the Client.

220 13. Prior to accepting any domestic sub-contractor proposed by the Main contractor, both the Electrical/Mechanical Engineer and the Client shall conduct comprehensive due diligence on the proposed firm including physical inspection of their offices, interview with the directors, management and the technical staff of the proposed firm, inspection of their equipment to be used on the project, and visits to at least three (3) successfully completed projects by the proposed firm where confidential reports/comments will be invited from the owners/users of the completed projects. 14. Preliminaries for this sub-contract to be included in the Main-Contract. 15. The domestic sub-contractors MUST meet the following qualifications. i) Electrical Installations Show proof of Registration under the Kenya s Company Act. Show proof of Registration with the National Construction Authority minimum NCA 3. Show Proof of Technical Competence of key staff. Submit detailed CVs showing names and qualifications and a list of projects handled. Proof of at least Five projects completed in the last Five years relevant to this sub-contract in both complexity and magnitude. The projects submitted must have minimum subcontract values of Ksh. 15 Million or more. Include referees (Contact Persons and their telephone contacts) Show proof Class B registration as an electrical contractor with the Energy Regulatory Commission/ Ministry of Energy. Show proof of Tax Compliance with Kenya Revenue Authority. Show copies of VAT and PIN Certificates ii) Communications Services Show proof of Registration under the Kenya s Company Act. Show proof of Registration with the Ministry of Public Works/National Construction Authority. Show proof of Registration with Communications Authority of Kenya Show Proof of Technical Competence of key staff. Submit detailed CVs showing names and qualifications and a list of projects handled. Proof of at least Five projects completed in the last Five years relevant to this sub-contract in both complexity and magnitude. The projects submitted must have minimum subcontract values of Ksh. 5 Million or more Show proof of Tax Compliance with Kenya Revenue Authority. Show copies of VAT and PIN Certificates iii) Security Installations Show proof of Registration under the Kenya s Company Act. Show proof of Registration with the Ministry of Public Works/National Construction Authority. Show proof of Registration with Communications Authority of Kenya Show Proof of Technical Competence of key staff. Submit detailed CVs showing names and qualifications and a list of projects handled. Proof of at least Five projects completed in the last Five years relevant to this sub-contract in both complexity and magnitude. The projects submitted must have minimum subcontract values of Ksh. 5 Million or more Show proof of Tax Compliance with Kenya Revenue Authority. Show copies of VAT and PIN Certificates iv) Nurse Call System Installations Show proof of Registration under the Kenya s Company Act. Show proof of Registration with the Ministry of Public Works/National Construction Authority. Show proof of Registration with Communications Authority of Kenya

221 Show Proof of Technical Competence of key staff. Submit detailed CVs showing names and qualifications and a list of projects handled. Proof of at least Five projects completed in the last Five years relevant to this sub-contract in both complexity and magnitude. The projects submitted must have minimum subcontract values of Ksh. 5 Million or more Show proof of Tax Compliance with Kenya Revenue Authority. Show copies of VAT and PIN Certificates v) UPS Installations Show proof of Registration under the Kenya s Company Act. Show proof of Registration with the Ministry of Public Works/National Construction Authority. Show Proof of Technical Competence of key staff. Submit detailed CVs showing names and qualifications and a list of projects handled. Proof of at least Five projects completed in the last Five years relevant to this sub-contract in both complexity and magnitude. The projects submitted must have minimum subcontract values of Ksh. 2 Million or more Show proof of Tax Compliance with Kenya Revenue Authority. Show copies of VAT and PIN Certificates vi) Fire Alarm and Detection Systems Installations Show proof of Registration under the Kenya s Company Act. Show proof of Registration with the Ministry of Public Works/National Construction Authority. Show Proof of Technical Competence of key staff. Submit detailed CVs showing names and qualifications and a list of projects handled. Proof of at least Five projects completed in the last Five years relevant to this sub-contract in both complexity and magnitude. The projects submitted must have minimum subcontract values of Ksh. 2 Million or more Show proof of Tax Compliance with Kenya Revenue Authority. Show copies of VAT and PIN Certificates Signed (As in Tender)... Date/Stamp...

222 DEFINITIONS The following terms and expressions used in the Sub-Contract document shall have the following meanings: Client MINISTRY OF HEALTH NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORY SERVICES Architects: SK ARCHPLANS LTD P.O. Box: Nairobi. Electrical/Mechanical Engineers: Feradon Associates Ltd., Consulting Engineers, P. O. Box , NAIROBI. Project Managers and Quantity Surveyors: Aegis Development Solutions Ltd P. O. Box , NAIROBI. Civil/Structural Engineers: ARMITECH CONSULTANTS P.O Box Nairobi.

223 PART A: GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS A1

224 PART A/1: GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS CONTENTS CLAUSE NO. DESCRIPTION PAGE 1. GENERAL A3 2. INSTALLATION OF CABLES A4 3. CONDUIT AND CONDUIT FACILITIES - MILD STEEL CONDUIT SYSTEMS A5 4. CABLE TRUNKING SHEET STEEL A7 5. CABEL TRAYS A8 6. PROTECTION OF PVC/SWA/PVC CABLES A9 7. TERMINATION OF CABLES A10 8. SEGREGATION OF SERVICES A10 9. IDENTIFICATION OF CABLES A EARTHING A LIGHTING PROTECTION A FUSED SWITCH UNITS, SWITCH FUSES AND ISOLATORS A CONTROL PANELS AND CUBICLES A DISTRIBUTION BOARDS A LABELLING AND ENGRAVING A MOUNTING HEIGHTS A LUMINAIRES A CEILING ROSES A LAMPS A EXTERNAL LIGHTING A LIGHTING SWITCHES A SOCKET OUTLETS A INSPECTION AND TESTING A AS BUILT DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTATION A20 APPENDIX 1 SUPPLEMENTARY SPECIFICATION FOR FOR PVC INSULATED CABLES A21 A2

225 PART A: GENERAL ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION 1 GENERAL Quality of Materials Regulations and Standards This section specifies the general requirement for plant, equipment and materials forming part of the Sub-contract Works and shall apply except where specifically stated elsewhere in the Specification or on the Contract Drawings. All plant, equipment and materials supplied as part of the Sub-contract Works shall be new and of first class commercial quality, shall be free from defects and imperfections and where indicated shall be of grades and classifications designated herein. All products or materials not manufactured by the Sub-contractor shall be products of reputable manufacturers and so far as the provisions of the Specification is concerned shall be as if they had been manufactured by the Sub-contractor. Materials and apparatus required for the complete installation as called for by the Specification and Contract Drawings shall be supplied by the Sub-contractor unless mention is made otherwise. Materials and apparatus supplied by others for installation and connection by the Sub-contractor shall be carefully examined on receipt. Should any defects be noted, the Sub-contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer. Defective equipment or that damaged in the course of installation or tests shall be replaced as required to the approval of the Engineer. The Sub-contract Works shall comply with the current editions of the following: a) The Kenya Government Regulations. b) The United Kingdom Institution of Electrical Engineers (IEE) Regulations for the Electrical Equipment of Buildings. a) The United Kingdom Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) Guides. d) British Standard and Codes of Practice as published by the British Standards Institution (BSI) e) The Local Council By-laws. f) The Electricity Supply Authority By-laws. g) Local Authority By-laws. h) The Kenya Building Code Regulations. i) The Kenya Bureau of Standards 1.03 Power Supply on Site The supply voltage will be 240 volts single phase of 415 volts 3 phase 50 Hz. TN-S system, viz. separate neutral and protective conductor throughout the system. A3

226 2. INSTALLATION OF CABLES General Bending of cables shall be in accordance with table 52c of the IEE Regulations and no cable shall be bent to radius less than that specified by the cable manufacturers. Cables shall be rated for the maximum connected load with due consideration to the following factors:- (i) Voltage drop not in excess of 4% of the nominal voltage. (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) Ambient temperature. Degree of excess-current protection. Grouping. Cables run under defined conditions. Cables in conduits and Trunking PVC/SWA/PVC Cable All cables shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) insulated to BS 6604, "PVC-insulated cables (nonarmoured) for electric power lighting", 450/750 volt grade, unless an alternative is specified elsewhere in the contract documents. The quality and size of cables contained in any one conduit shall comply with IEE Regulation and Appendix 12. No cable with a cross-section area of less than 1.5mm 2 shall be used. All cables installed in a conduit or trunking system shall be PVC single insulated conductors and shall be colour coded in accordance with the IEE Regulation and Table 52A. Final sub-circuits shall be run in conduits separate from main or sub-main cables. All cables in conduit shall be drawn in simultaneously. All cables shall be drawn in without the use of excessive force, Without the use of lubricants and the wiring shall be easily withdrawable. These cables shall comprise copper conductors unless specifically detailed otherwise, laid up with PVC fillers bedded with an extruded inner PVC sheath, armoured with a single layer of galvanized steel wires, aluminium or strip as specified, and covered overall with PVC sheath. Cables shall be manufactured to BS 6346 "PVC insulated cables for electrical supply" with conductor dimensions and resistances in accordance with BS , "copper conductors in insulated cables and cords", Armouring shall be galvanised steel to BS Attention is drawn to Chapter 52 of the IEE Regulations and Appendix 9. Where the armour wires of cables are used to provide protective conductor they shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 54 of the IEE Regulations, particularly section 543; alternatively, additional cables with copper conductors shall be installed to reduce the impedance to a level which ensures compliance with Section 543 of the IEE Regulations. Unless permission is given by the Engineer, no joints will be allowed. In the event of joints being authorized, they shall be made using plastic boxes of approved design filled with an approved cold pouring plastic or resin compound. The cable box shall incorporate suitable copper tapes and clamps to bond the armouring of the jointed cables. The PVC/SWA/PVC cables should be terminated in the cable manufacture's approved glands. These shall be of the compression type providing controlled radial compression of the sheath seal. The gland shall incorporate an armour clamping ring and earthing ring and, where used outdoors, a lead washer shall be used to ensure a watertight joint between the gland and the unit to which it is fitted. The earthing ring shall be rigidly fixed to the item of equipment and terminated using brass nuts, bolts and washers. All gland terminations shall be protected by a PVC shroud which shall fit tightly over the cables. A4

227 The electrical Sub-Sub-Contractor is responsible for determining the true nature and extent of cable routes. No claim on the grounds of lack of knowledge will be entertained. All cable routes shall be agreed with the Engineer. After the cables have been installed and terminated, but prior to putting into service, they shall be subjected to an insulation test of 500 volts and the results of these tests (recorded on test sheets) forwarded to the Engineer. 3. CONDUIT AND CONDUIT FACILITIES - MILD STEEL CONDUIT SYSTEM Conduit Fittings Fixing of Conduits Conduits Conduits shall be installed as required by the IEE Regulations and as detailed in this specification. All metal conduits must be heavy gauge, seam welded, steel tube screwed conduits manufactured to BS 31, "steel tube screwed conduits and fittings for electrical wiring", Class B, BS 4568, "Steel conduit and fittings with thread of ISO form for electrical installation", for metric conduit, unless specified otherwise. Conduits shall be finished black stove enamelled, except in positions exposed to water (other than water used in construction), steam condensation or the action of weather, where hot galvanised conduits shall be used. Any conduits work rejected by the Engineer shall be replaced at no extra cost. No conduit smaller than 20 mm in diameter or longer than 50mm diameter shall be used. All bends in conduit shall be in accordance with the IEE Regulation 529-5, and made in a conduit bending machine fitted with a former of the correct radius for each conduit size. Conduits shall be secured in an efficient pipe vice whilst being screwed. Conduit system shall be installed so as to ensure compliance with requirements of IEE Regulations Attention is drawn to Appendix 12 of the IEE Regulations. Conduit fittings shall have same finish as the conduits being used and shall comply with BS 31 or BS All conduit fittings shall be screwed or loop-in malleable iron circular type, fitted with covers secured by brass screws. Rectangular adaptable steel boxes may be used on multi-conduit runs. All circular type boxes must be fitted with long screwed spout conduit entries with the screwed thread terminating within the spout and the edges of the internal orifice of the box rounded and smoothed to act as a bush except for the adaptable steel rectangular boxes and loop-in conduit boxes, in which case male bush and coupling must be used for conduit connections. In concealed installation, boxes shall be fixed with the rims flush with the finished surface, but when, for any reason whatsoever, the rims are below the surface, suitable extension rings of the required depth shall be provided and installed to finish flash with the surrounding surfaces and with the lids of sufficient oversize (7.5 mm minimum all round) to cover the junction between box and plaster. In no case will the use of site-manufactured bends, sets, elbows, inspection elbows or tees be permitted. All conduits must be firmly and rigidly fixed to be entirely without whip or movement. Space-bar saddles, or strap saddles, must be used on the timbers in roof spaces and will be allowed when the conduits are run on the underside of exposed unsealed floor or ceiling joints. Pipe hooks or crumpets will not be allowed except for security conduits in chases, or screeds, when the top of the hook must at least be 10 mm below the finished surface of the wall, or 25 mm below the floor finish. Pipe hooks shall be galvanised. The finish of the saddles must in all cases conform to the finish of the supported conduits. Galvanised, sherardised or cadmium plated screws shall be used in all cases where galvanised conduits are installed. A5

228 The standard cast iron distance saddle, (single fixing base and two-screw fixing top), must be used for all conduits run on the surface of walls and ceilings etc., fixed at intervals of not more than 1.2 metres. Conduit Runs and Concealment Flexible Metallic Conduit The routes of the conduit installation shall be agreed with the Engineer prior to commencing the installation. Conduits shall be installed atleast 150 mm from, and preferably under, any hot water pipes and atleast 50 mm from other surface pipes and cables. Conduits shall be bonded to other surfaces in accordance with the requirements of IEE Regulations and to inclusive. Each continuity test shall be applied to the system before plastering, screeding, or casting of concrete is commenced. Surface work will be allowed where certain pre-fabricated methods of construction preclude the concealment of the runs, and or fair-faced brickwork or block work or other unplastered walls. Conduit runs shall be planned to obviate the need for draw-in boxes, but where the use of such boxes is unavoidable they shall be accessible at all times and be fitted with covers. When Conduits are specified as being installed on the surface the runs must be arranged to render the whole system as neat and inconspicuous as possible, having regard to the existing architectural features. All vertical and horizontal runs must be taken where conduits converge and run together near distribution centres to obtain a symmetrical layout. The distance between the conduits shall be maintained through bends and sets and shall not vary noticeably. Flexible Conduit shall comply with the BS 731 part 1. "Flexible steel conduit and adaptors for the protection of electrical cables." It shall be used for the final connection from a rigid conduit installation to the terminal boxes of all the equipment provided with a means of positional adjustment and /or where vibration may reasonably be expected to occur. Flexible conduits shall be PVC sheathed and shall be terminated using approved glands. In all instances a separate PVC insulated green and yellow coloured protective conductor complying with table 41A1 or 41A2 and section 543 of the IEE Regulations shall be installed, terminating at each end into purpose-made earthing terminals. Under no circumstances will flexible conduits be accepted in lieu of sets and bends in a rigid conduit installation. In normal circumstances flexible conduits shall have a minimum length of 300 mm and a maximum unstretched length of 800mm. It shall permit a full range of withdrawal, adjustment or movement of the equipment. Locking, Bushing and Coupling All conduit ends must be filed square and rearmed before erection to ensure freedom from internal burrs and roughness. Running couplings shall only be used on black enamelled steel conduit installations, and the use of this shall be kept to the minimum. All running couplings shall be secured by means of the lock nuts or lock rings, and the exposed thread painted after installation. A6

229 Continuity and Earthing Every conduit connection to the equipment, boxes, distribution boards, loop-in boxes, cable trunking etc, shall be made by means of a screw coupling and a male hexagonal headed smooth bore brass bush. The smooth bore shall be fitted to secure the conduit to the item connected via a purpose-made clear hole to be closed by the bush and coupling when fitted. Paint must be removed from the surface of the item connected to allow it to be covered by the end of the coupling which shall be filed, clean and square, to ensure a good mechanical and electrical metal to metal joint. Any exposed area of metal from which paint has been removed must be made good in a matching paint. Bushes shall be fitted and tightened by means of correctly fitting spanners. Mutilated bushes damaged whilst being fitted must be removed and replaced. Conduits connecting via couplings shall be connected by a means of 15 mm long threaded section and shall have a gap of approximately 2 mm between them. No thread shall be exposed except running couplings. The whole of the conduit installations shall be mechanically and electrically sound and continuous throughout their length in accordance with the IEE Regulations. Where the conduit system is used to provide a protective conductor it shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 54 of the IEE Regulations particularly Section 543; alternatively, a separate protective conductor shall be installed in the conduit to comply with Section 543 of the IEE regulations. 4. CABLE TRUNKING-SHEET STEEL Trunking shall only be installed in situations which will remain readily accessible throughout the life of the buildings. No cable trunking shall be installed behind a plastered ceiling or in other inaccessible situations. All cable trunking shall comply with BS 4678, part 1 "Steel surface trunking" and part 2 for "Steel underfloor (duct) trunking". Sheet steel cable trunking may be used on installations employing steel conduits, for connecting two or more switchboards together or where several conduits would otherwise have to run alongside each other. Proper allowance should be made for the derating of cables installed together in a container system. The cables must be capable of carrying the current imposed by the equipment connected. Attention is drawn to Chapter 52 of the IEE Regulations, particularly Section 522, and Appendix 9: the current carrying capabilities of cables indicated shall not be exceeded. The Engineer must be consulted as to precise details concerning trunking routes and applications. All lengths of trunking shall be heavy gauge zinc coated steel connected together by internally fitted rectangular couplings of sufficient width to provide a minimum bearing face of 25mm, to which the lengths shall be bolted on site or welded at the factory. Adequate provision shall be made to allow for expansion. All Tee pieces and bends shall be formed with similar means of connection and the inner radii area shall be such that cables will not be bent through a radius less than that prescribed in the IEE Regulations. Only bends and tees of approved pattern will be accepted. All fixing screws within the trunking shall be of the round head type. The trunking shall have an over-lapping well-fitted lid securely fixed to the trunking by approved means that will avoid damage to the cables. Self-tapping screws shall not be used. All necessary accessories including long sleeve couplings, end piece, bends, sets, tees, reducers, branches, fillets, pinracks, cable retainers etc., shall be purpose-made units rather than being fabricated on site. A7

230 Where a change in direction of trunking run occurs, the deviation should be effected by a purposemade unit manufactured on similar lines to the bends and tee pieces described above. Where this is not practical, changes in direction shall be fabricated in a neat workmanlike manner. All joints shall fit closely and gaps will not be permitted. All burrs and sharp edges shall be removed and no screw shall protrude into the trunking. Trunking shall be firmly attached to its associated equipment either by bolted flanges or by male bushes and couplings. Where trunking is connected to equipment by means of flange connectors, the entry into the equipment shall be of the same cross-section as the trunking. Where trunking does not terminate in equipment, the otherwise open end shall be capped with a cover suitable bolted in position. Where communications, extra low voltage circuits (category 1) etc., are contained in a trunking, the requisite number of separate compartments shall be provided to segregate the wiring. Where conduits are taken off such trunking they shall not pass through other compartments unless prior permission is obtained from the Engineer. The entire trunking is required to be recessed in the structure of the building, the finished edge of the trunking is to be installed flush with the plasterwork. Trunking runs shall be so arranged that the lid or cover plate is always on the top or side and not underneath, unless this cannot be avoided, in which case the Engineer's permission shall be obtained. Wherever trunking passes through walls, vertical partitions etc., a fixed piece of trunking lid shall be fitted to the trunking extended 25 mm either side of the wall or other barrier, this is to allow removal of the adjacent lid without disturbing the building fabric. Care shall be taken to ensure that no opening is left between the trunking and the building structure through which fire might spread. In addition a suitable barrier of incombustible material shall be provide and fitted inside the trunking, in accordance with the IEE Regulations On vertical runs of trunking internal incombustible barriers shall be fitted at the distance between floors or 5m, whichever is the less, in accordance with IEE Regulations All necessary trunking support work, hangers, brackets and fixing requirements shall be provided by the electrical Sub-Sub-Contractor. Earth links of the appropriate size and type shall be installed at every jointing coupling, manufactured bend, etc., throughout the entire trunking system. Where trunking is used to provide a protective conductor it shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 54 of the IEE Regulations, particularly Section 543; alternatively, a separate protective conductor shall be installed in the trunking to comply with section 543 of the IEE Regulations. In cases where sheet steel trunking is installed and there is danger of movement, a flexible earth conductor shall be installed bonding all joints in the trunking. This shall be fitted in addition tothe standard earth links. Cable retaining strips shall be fitted at 1 m intervals. Insulated cable support pins shall be fitted at intervals of 4 m in vertical runs of trunking and at the top of the vertical trunking. 5 CABLE TRAYS Cable trays shall be formed from perforated steel of not less than 0.9 mm thickness up to and including 100 mm width mm thickness from 150 mm up to and including 300 mm width - and 2.00 mm thickness above 300 mm width. They shall be galvanised unless otherwise specified. Tray shall be adequately sized to support the cable without bunching. Support shall be by means of steel brackets installed at intervals necessary to provide a rigid fixing and ensure that no undue deflection occurs in the complete installation. The brackets shall be galvanised prior to fixing. Dome-headed bolts, nuts and washers of finish suitable to the tray shall be used between tray and brackets. A8

231 Fixing to the surfaces of walls, ceilings, etc. shall be by means of expansion-type masonry plugs or bolts. Fixings shall be galvanised unless otherwise stated. Cable trays shall be installed using factory-formed bends, elbows, tees, couplers and risers etc. Site fabrication of elbows etc., will only be permitted with prior approval of the Engineer and where it is not possible to obtain the necessary factory-made item. Where cuts have been made, the try shall be painted with zinc rich paint. Holes which have been cut to allow cables to pass through shall be suitably bushed. Suspension sets shall comprise threaded M12 cadmium plated hanger roads together with nuts and locking washers, verticle hanger brackets, support channel, tray hold-down clips etc., all of which shall have a galvanised finish. All cables shall be securely fixed to traywork and the complete installation must be carries out in a neat and workmanlike manner without crossovers. A 25% reserve margin in size and weight shall be allowed for all cable tray works. Cables of 30 mm diameter and above shall be fixed using the appropriate size cable straps of approved manufacture. On light duty multi-cable runs, cable straps of plastic coated metal shall be used to secure cables. Bunching of cables will not be permitted. Cables shall be clipped by means of copper or brass saddles and clips where high temperature or humid conditions are likely to be experiences. In all cases, saddles, clips, straps, etc., shall be fixed to the tray by means of brass screws or bolts and nuts. 6. PROTECTION OF PVC/SWA/PVC CABLES General Cables Direct in Ground Cable routing shall be such that the maximum degree of protection against accidental damage is obtained by running cables along the inside of channels and beams, etc. Cables shall be laid in performed trenches or duct throughout all paved areas. Ducts shall be installed for underground cables before the paving is constructed. Cable ducts shall be sealed at both ends using materials which are resistant to any likely corrosive and insect attack in the area concerned. All cables rising through floors and trench covers, except in switch rooms, shall be protected by a length of steel pipe which shall project at least 150 mm above the finished surface level. The open end of the pipe shall be sealed with a suitable compound. Care must be taken that all phases of single core cables pass through the same protective steel duct. All excavation and backfilling of cable trenches will be carried out by the main Sub-Contractor unless otherwise specified, but the electrical Sub-Sub-Contractor shall in any case make sure that trenches are made to a depth as specified. The electrical Sub-Sub-Contractor shall lay cables direct in the ground in the following manner:- 75 mm (3 inches) of dry fine sand shall be placed to form a bed for the cables. After cables have been laid they shall be covered with additional dry fine sand well punned over and around the cables to a level of 75 mm above the top of the uppermost cable. Mechanical punners shall not be used for this work. The electrical Sub-Sub-Contractor shall supply and install concrete cable tiles which shall be carefully placed over the cable forming each circuit. A9

232 Cables above Ground Until all the cables have been laid in the trench and have been covered with their protective tiles, no sharp metal tools such as spades or fencing stakes, shall be used in the trench. Rollers used during laying of cables shall have no sharp projecting parts liable to damage the cables. For main cable runs the cable shall be run on approved tray or ladder rack, and secured to it at intervals of not more than 400 mm horizontally and 600 mm vertically. Cables shall be dressed together and fixed with a common saddle. If the number of cables is such as to require the tiering of cables, the number of tiers shall generally be two. 7 TERMINATION OF CABLES Cables shall be terminated in accordance with Chapter 52 of the IEE Regulations, particularly Section 527. Cables shall be terminated by one of the following methods:- (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) The cable conductors shall be sweated into lugs of the appropriate size for the cable and equipment terminal. The cable conductors shall be secured by compression type lugs of the correct size for the cable and equipment terminal. The cable conductors shall be secured in pinch screw terminals. The cable shall be secured by means of clamps. Where cables are required to terminate at connectors, as at lighting points, such connectors shall secure all the strands of stranded cables. Care shall be taken to ensure that cables are not damaged during preparation for termination. Cables terminating at pinch screw terminals shall be twisted together and single cables shall have the conductor doubled back to ensure adequate purchase for pinching screws. Cables connected to lamp holders or other components at which heat is produced shall be insulated with heat resisting material capable of withstanding, without detriment, the temperature encountered. All terminations on PVC/SWA/PVC insulated cables shall be by compression type glands of an approved design and manufacture with facilities for clamping the armouring the outer sheath of the cable. Glands mounted outdoors shall incorporate a seal to prevent ingress of moisture into the gland, and all glands shall be fitted with a thermoplastic shroud. Where circular terminations are to be made, these shall be completed using Ross Counterney terminals. Where cables are terminated in "Klippon" type terminals with parallel faced jaws, the individual cores shall be terminated using the appropriate flat or hook blade crimped lugs. Where the terminal faces are concaved, the cores shall be terminated in wires pin crimped lugs. The electrical Sub-Sub-Contractor shall avoid multiple connections under one screw or one pin. Where more than two wires are required, a common termination jumper bar shall be used. Terminals shall be mounted on rails or supports. All internal wiring is to be clearly marked by markers. 8 SEGREGATION OF SERVICES Cables of differing voltages shall be segregated so that there is no possibility of a fault in a power cable damaging any adjacent cables or imposing a different voltage upon them. A10

233 9 IDENTIFICATION OF CABLES All cables shall be fitted with non-corrosive cable identification bands at each end, and at all changes of direction where they leave a group of cables. All cables cores connected to equipment having marked terminals shall be fitted with non-corrosive identification bands bearing markings corresponding to those of the terminals at both ends. 10. EARTHING The whole of the metallic portion of the installation, other than current carrying parts, shall be electrically and mechanically bonded to the consumer's main earth terminal and also if applicable, to the lighting protection system or other points specified. The installation shall be earthed in accordance with the Sixteenth Edition of the Regulations for Electrical Installation issued by the IEE, BS CP1013, "Earthing" and BS 6651' "The protection of structures against Lightning". The electrical Sub-Sub-Contractor's attention is drawn to Chapter 54 of the IEE Regulations. A main earth terminal shall be supplied and installed adjacent to the electricity supply cable termination. The terminal shall be of ample size and capacity to suit the installation. All items of equipment, switchgear, etc., shall be bonded to this earth terminal using PVC insulated PVC sheathed cables, coloured green and yellow and sized in accordance with Tables 41A1 of the IEE Regulations. An invorine label reading "SAFETY ELECTRICAL CONNECTION - DO NOT REMOVE" in engraved upper case characters not less than 4.75mm high, shall be permanently fixed immediately adjacent to or on the earth terminal. A heavy duty copper clamp complying with BS. 951 shall be used to bond the main protective conductor to the electricity supply cable armouring or metallic sheath (where applicable the armouring and sheath shall be bonded together). All protective conductors shall, where possible, be enclosed within metal trunking or conduit serving switchgear, distribution board etc., so as to provide mechanical protection. Where protective conductors are run on building surfaces they shall be properly fixed and supported by means of PVC coated metal saddles along selected routes. Earth continuity between separate items of switchgear, distribution boards etc., mounted adjacent to one another shall be affected by means of high conductivity continuous copper tape, or PVC sheathed cable, coloured green and yellow, and sized in accordance with the Table 41A1 or 41A2 and Section 543 of the IEE Regulations, connecting all items to the earth terminal. All items of switchgear, accessories, luminaries, conduits, and the outer sheaths of MICS cables, the armouring of all PVC/SWA/PVC cables together with all other items of electrical plant and equipment shall be effectively earthed by means of a protective conductor in accordance with Table 41A1 and 41A2 and section 543 of the IEE Regulations. At every terminal point on the fixed wiring an integral earth terminal shall be provide e.g. BESA boxes, accessory boxes etc. A protective conductor shall be provided and installed between this terminal and the earth terminal on the associated switch, socket outlet, luminaire etc. Each circuit protective conductor shall be connected to a multi-way earth terminal provided and fixed within each distribution board. The earth terminal shall be provided with an adequate number of ways such that not more than one conductor per terminal shall be installed and the earthing conductors shall be connected in the same sequence as the current carrying conductors. All metal piped services, e.g., Heating, Water and Gas Services, metal wastes and piped services at sinks, baths and showers etc., shall be bonded to the earth terminal in accordance with the IEE Regulations A 50mm section of each gas and water pipe, at position close to their entry into the relevant building, shall be cleaned and made smooth. A copper earthing clamp designed to permit the connection of protective conductors shall be provided and sized in accordance with Table 41A1 and 41A2 and Section 543 of the IEE Regulations. A11

234 The clamp shall be a proprietary type or shall be fabricated from high conductivity copper strip, minimum size 40 mm x 4 mm which shall encircle the cleaned sections of the pipe. A permanent label indelibly marked with the words, "SAFETY ELECTRICAL CONNECTION - DO NOT REMOVE" in legible type not less than 4.75 mm high, shall be permanently fixed at the points of connections. The final connection of bonding conductors from gas, water pipes and other services to the earthing terminal shall not be completed until earth electrode and earth impedance tests have been satisfactorily completed. Bonding connections to pipework shall be as unobstructive as possible where practicable shall be made in service ducts or accessible voids and shall be readily on the Record Drawings. All materials and sundry item shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned, necessary to completely and effectively earth the installation. The installation shall be fully protected against dampness and corrosion and the effect of electrolytic action between dissimilar materials. A completely permanent installation shall be provided which shall be fully accessible for regular testing and inspection. The value of earth resistance from any point of an installation to the general mass of earth shall be low enough to ensure operation of circuit protective devices and shall in any case not exceed four(4) ohms for electrical equipment, seven (7) ohms for lighting protection. Each earthing cable shall terminate in an approved design of cable lug. Where earth conductors are run upon structures or walls they shall be fastened by means of heavy gauge non-ferrous fasteners not more than 0.75 m apart on horizontal runs and not more than 1.2 m apart on vertical runs and to give a minimum clearance of 4 mm from the fixing face. In the event of the electrical sub-sub-contractor not being able to establish a suitable earth connection to the electricity supply cable, earth electrodes shall be installed which shall be galvanised or copper clad steel extendable rods not less than 16 mm diameter and not less than 1.2 m in length. Connections to electrodes shall be made by means of solderless mechanical clamps. To avoid corrosion, all earth system connections shall be cleaned bright and immediately covered with silicon MS4 compound or approved equal. Earth pits, where required, shall be in accordance with the Sub-Contractor's relevant drawings, with the facility to disconnect the earth ring while measuring the electrode earth resistance. 11 LIGHTNING PROTECTION Lighting protection shall be provided on high buildings/structures more than 10 m in height. such protection shall be effected by bonding each individual building/structures direct to the earthing system, in accordance with the BS CP 326, by a minimum size of 170mm 2 conductor. 12 FUSED-SWITCH UNITS, SWITCHFUSES AND ISOLATORS The above units comply with BS 5419 and shall be 500 volt type and installed where specified and indicated on the relevant drawings. All switchgear shall be provided with suitable locks for padlocking the switches in the 'OFF' position. The cover shall be interlocked with the operating mechanism to prevent it from being opened in the 'ON' position. This interlocking shall also prevent the switch from being closed with the cover open unless for maintenance purposes. The cover shall be gasketted to prevent ingress of dust. The switch action mechanism shall be of the parallel operation (double break type having cartridge fuses mounted switches) and shall be ASTA certified to meet adequately all the duties specified. The end plates shall be removable for drilling for conduit or cable entry and shall be fitted with additional distance pieces where necessary. Switchgear boards shall be fixed to the wall/floor by Rawl bolts or other approved fixings. No building alteration shall be allowed when moving the switchboard into position, the switchboard being supplied in sections to be built in position, if so required. A12

235 Switchgear shall be delivered to site when required to suit the progress of the works. Care shall be taken to preserve the manufacturer's paint finish. Any refurbishing etc. shall be carried out, using paint obtained from the switchboard manufacturer, to the original standard of finish. All fuses in switchgear shall be HRC fuses sized for the fused-switch units or switch-fuses etc., in which they are incorporated. They shall be ASTA certified for compliance with BS 88, Category of Duty 440 A.C 5 Class 01 and in all cases fuse links shall be selected to provide circuits discrimination. 13 CONTROL PANELS AND CUBICLES The details specified in clause 4.11 shall apply as far as fused switches, bus-bars and rating etc are concerned. The panels shall be constructed from rolled steel channel minimum size 60 mm x 30 mm deep x 5 mm or equivalent angle section clad with sheet steel of 3 mm gauge. 2 mm gauge may be used for covers and doors of not more than 1 m square. Terminals shall be of the "Klippon" standards rail-mounted feed-through type or approved equal. All terminals shall be identified by means of numbered or lettered marking tags, which shall be identical to the number of letter applied to the cables. Cables shall be identified as terminations by means of cable markers as manufactured by "Klippon" or approved equal. 25% spare terminals capacity within wiring duct shall be provided. All components motors, starters, relays, timbers, etc. shall be labelled showing their reference and function and these shall relate to the panels' schematic wiring diagram provided with the "As-built" drawing and manuals. All control panels shall be fitted with multi-pole isolating switches through which all electricity supplies shall pass. The door(s) of the control panel shall not open unless the isolating switch is in the "off" position. A facility to lock the control panel-isolating switch in the "off" position shall be included. 14 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS General Fused Distribution Boards All distribution boards, unless stated otherwise, shall be miniature Circuit Breaker Distribution Boards and shall be of surface or flush type, as specified. Facilities for local isolation of the distribution boards shall be provided by either a local fused-switch unit or an integral isolating switch, whichever is specified. Where surface mounted on a flush installation, all conductors shall terminate behind the board in an adequate box. For surface mounting, trunking shall be fixed between the board and ceiling level, or conduits run directly into the board. Adequate earth continuity connection shall be made between the various components. All fuse boards shall be of 500 volt rating to BS part 11 "Particular requirements for Fuse boards". The details specified in clause 4.12 shall apply as far as cabinet and construction, cabling arrangements, bus bars, neutral bars, earthing and isolating switches are connected. Fuse banks shall be spaced so as to obviate the necessity for insulating barriers, but protection shall be provided by means of insulating shields to prevent accidental contact with the main bus bars and connections. All fuses lighting and heating circuits shall be of the HRC cartridge type, ASTA certified, for compliance with BS. 88, category of Duty 440 A.C 5 class 01. Miniature Circuit-Beaker Distribution Boards MCB distribution boards shall comply with BS part 12 'Particular requirements for miniature circuits-breaker boards'. The cases shall be constructed of heavy gauge sheet steel, in such a manner as to afford rigidity and maximum ease of wiring for full size circuit and main cables. A13

236 Miniature Circuits Breaker (MCB) The cover shall be provided with an efficient gasket or alternatively designed with generous overlapping edges to prevent the ingress of dust. Components shall not be manufactured from zinc alloy in conjunction with sheet steel where they are relied upon for earth continuity. Where the cover is required to be lockable, cylinder type locks shall be provided, having two keys per lock. All locked distribution boards shall be handed to the Engineering Supervisor on completion of the works. The cases shall be provided with detachable cable/conduit terminating plates, which shall be reversible and interchangeable from top to bottom. All screws and nuts used in the construction of the case shall be fitted with shake proof washers and care taken to ensure efficient earth continuity. An external earthing terminal with cable socket shall be fitted. All MCB banks shall be fitted to frames, with robust locking plates provided to ensure the frames rigidly in the fixed position. The banks shall be so spaced to obviate the necessity for insulating barriers, but protection shall be provided by means of insulating shields to prevent accidental contact with main bus bars and incoming mains cable. Bus-bars shall be of high conductivity, hard drawn copper conductors connected to the MCB contacts by means of spring washered screws or bolts, unless plug-in type MCBs are specified. Neutral bars shall be similar to the main bus bars and shall have two screw terminals per way for rating of 30 amps or over. Single screw connections will be allowed for capacities up to 30 amps. The neutral bars shall have one terminal for each MCB within the board, and connection of conductors to the neutral bar shall be in the same order as the MCB ways. Where installations are carried out with cables with a protective conductor, all distribution boards shall also contain internal earthing bars similar to the neutral bars detailed above, with one terminal for each MCB within the board. Earthing conductors shall be connected in the manner described for neutral conductors to neutral bars. Where a main integral isolating switch is provided in an MCB case it shall be arranged to isolate incoming live and neutral main cables from the bus-bars. The isolator switch shall be rated at 500 volts and of the quick make-and break pattern with positive action. Incoming and outgoing terminals shall be fitted with two clamping screws and outgoing conductors to the bus-bars shall be high conductivity hard drawn copper rods. Isolating switches shall comply with IEE Regulations, Part 537, and shall be capable of carrying their full rated load continuously and shall 'make' or 'break' their full rated load without undue burning of the contacts. All MCBs shall have movements which are positive in both directions (make and break) so as to enable units to be closed decisively by the operation of the handle, and to be able to assume the 'OFF' position unless the contacts are definitely separated, to safeguard against false indications. The hand shall be trip free to make it impossible for the operator to hold the breaker in the closed position under faulty conditions. The operating mechanism and arc chambers of the circuit breaker shall be separated from the terminals and fixing screws. Terminal identification shall be readily discernable as viewed from the front of the board with automatic and clear signal identification for both 'ON' and 'OFF' position. All terminals shall be readily accessible from the front and each wiring chamber shall be closed by a screw fixed cover which protects the terminals and prevents dust from settling on the insulation.` Where the full capacity of a distribution board is not required the electrical Sub-Sub-Contractor shall fix blanking plates in the vacant MCB housings. All MCBs shall be rated at 500 volts minimum, and comply with BS "Miniature and moulded case circuits breakers" and 4752 part 1, "Circuit breakers". A14

237 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB) Where specified, MCCBs shall be of the thermal/magnetic type, having a quick make, quick break, trip free mechanism which prevents the MCCB from being closed or held against short circuits or overloads. Tripping of every multi-pole MCCB shall be such that operation ensures simultaneous action in all phases. Clear indication shall be provide for the three positions of operation of the mechanism - 'ON', 'OFF' and 'TRIPPED'. The operation shall be such that the MCCB shall trip automatically under fault conditions and, to reset, the dolly shall require first moving through the 'off' position. All MCCBs shall be provided with facilities for locking the breaker in 'OFF' position. All MCCBs shall be rated at 500 volts minimum, be ASTA certified for this operational duty, and comply with BS and BS Part LABELLING AND ENGRAVING Labelling All fused-switch units, switch-fuses, switches, bus-bars chambers, distribution boards etc., and all items of equipment on the main panel shall be identified in accordance with section 514 of the IEE Regulations and shall have securely fitted externally a white 'Traffolyte', 'Formica' or other approved plastic laminate label engraved with 6 mm high black letters detailing the function of the equipment and any reference number. Red, yellow, blue, plastic laminate phase discs shall be fixed inside all switchgear and distribution boards to indicate to which phase of the supply the various circuits are connected. The colourings shall comply with Part 524 of the IEE Regulations. Each TP or TP & N item of switchgear shall have fitted on the cover a white plastic laminate label having 'CAUTION' VOLTS' engraved in 10 mm high red lettering. 5.2 Engraving The electrical Sub-Sub-Contractor shall allow for engraving of all switched fused spurs, double pole switch accessories and any other accessories, which are customarily required. The accessory plate shall be engraved in either black or red, capital letters 5 mm high, detailing and appliance or equipment being supplied by the accessory e.g., 'WATER PUMP' etc. 16 MOUNTING HEIGHTS The approximate position of main switchgear, control equipment distribution boards, fittings and accessories shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Actual positions shall be determined on site by the Engineer. Unless otherwise stated on the relevant drawings or directed by the Engineer the following mounting heights of all accessories above finished floor level shall be adhered to: - Lighting Switches Socket Outlet and Spur Distribution Boards 1400 mm to centre 300 mm to centre (or 150 mm above work top level to centre) 1800 mm to lower edges. All groups of accessories shall be in line either vertically or horizontally or as specified. 17 LUMINAIRES All Luminaires shall be of the manufacture, size and type specified and shall comply in all respects to BS 4533 "Electric Luminaires". A15

238 The electrical Sub-Sub-Contractor shall supply and install all luminaires including lamps, lampholders, control gear, capacitors, glassware, diffusers or other attachments, heat resistant internal cables, fuses and terminals and all necessary suspension gear. In case where Luminaires are supplied by the client the Sub-Sub-Contractor shall deliver to site store, install, commission and set to work. Unless otherwise stated, Luminaires shall be suitable for Class 1 normal indoor environments, giving a degree of protection against ingress of moisture or dust. All Luminaires shall be assembled and installed in accordance with the respective manufacturer's instructions/recommendations, in the position and mounting heights specified. Luminaires shall not be installed under dirty and hazardous site conditions, and any damage or deterioration to luminaires installed under these conditions shall be made good by the electrical Sub-Sub-Contractor. The Luminaires shall be cleaned free of dust and dirt after completion of the installation. Where dirt, dust, corrosion or other conditions cause imperfections in the luminaires, they shall be replaced. Luminaires, diffusers, attachments or glassware etc., shall be properly stored to final erection, in such a manner as to avoid damage of any kind. Luminaires fixings shall generally be suitable for direct connection to conduit boxes or as otherwise specified. Luminaires not provided with suitable BESA box shall be modified as necessary. Where a flexible cord supports, or partly supports, a luminaire the maximum mass supported by the cord shall not exceed the values set out in IEE Regulations The minimum cross-section area flexible core to the employed shall be 0.75mm 2. Specified attention shall be given to Chapter 52 of the IEE Regulations, particularly Regulation and 521-6, Appendices 9 and 10. Pendant tungsten luminaires shall be fitted with heat resistant flexible cord complying with BS 6500, capable of continuous operation with a conductor temperature of 150 degrees C. The cable shall be of the circular multicore type, finished white, if not otherwise specified. Ceiling mounted tungsten luminaires, spotlights and other luminaires of the category 'hot' luminaires shall be wired internally with cable suitable for continuous operation at 185 degree C. Where cable tails are provided they shall be of the heat resistant type capable of operation at 185 degree C. Exterior luminaires, fixed to the walls of buildings etc., shall be wired such that final circuit wiring terminates within the luminaire. All final circuit cables so installed shall be provided with heat resistant sleaves from the connection point within the luminaire for a distance of 300 mm. All flourescent and other discharge luminaires shall be provided with an integral fused connector block. The rating of the fuse shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to protect the internal wiring of the luminaire and to provide discrimination between final circuit protection and luminaire protection. All recessed and semi-recessed luminaires in ceilings shall be connected by three core 0.75 mm 2 high temperature flexible cord from the terminals of the luminaires to a plug-in ceiling rose fixed and connected to an accessible outlet box in the wiring system, within the suspended ceiling immediately above the luminaire. The ceiling rose shall be accessible via the opening provided in the ceiling. The electrical Sub-Sub-Contractor shall ensure that the methods of suspension for luminaires are electrically and mechanically sound. A16

239 Luminaires suspended by means of tubes shall be fitted to ball joints allowing a swing of at least 20 degrees all round. Reliable earthing between the fixed and moving parts shall be provided by means of a flexible braided copper tape. Fluorescent luminaires shall be provided with a minimum of two fixings, except in the case of recessed modular luminaires or surface-mounted luminaires exceeding 300 mm in width, where four number fixings (one from each corner) shall be provided by means of conduit drops or threaded rods. Normally visible luminaires support shall be conduit. All fluorescent luminaires shall be solidly mounted with all assembly nuts, bolts and accessories made tight to prevent vibrations and noise. Anti-vibration packing shall be fitted where necessary. luminaires mounted direct to trunking shall be fixed by means of the manufacturer's recommended fixing assemblies. Unless stated otherwise, all luminaire supports shall be fixed to the building primary structure. Luminaires shall not be supported from suspended ceiling unless otherwise specified. The electrical Sub-Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for mounting and fixing arrangements. Break joint rings of approved colour shall be provided for all suspended luminaires and fluorescent battery luminaires where the batten is of insufficient width to cover completely the conduit box and its associated clearance hole in the ceiling. The metalwork of all luminaires shall be effectively bonded to the earthing system in accordance with Chapter 54 of the IEE Regulations. Care shall be taken to ensure that the internal wiring of luminaires and the cable of any fixed wiring shall not be in contact with high temperature areas in luminaires. Lighting track shall be of the type, size, finish, number of circuits and manufacture specified and shall comply with the requirements of the relevant section of BS The positions of luminaires as shown on the Drawings are approximate only and exact position shall be determined after reference to the Engineering supervisor. 18. CEILING ROSES Surface mounted ceiling roses shall be of all insulated, high impact moulded plastic construction complying with BS. 67 and shall be suitable for direct attachment to conduit outlet boxes. Recessed or semi-recessed ceiling roses shall be manufactured from porcelain. Break joint rings shall be provided when used on flush conduit outlet boxes. Ceiling roses shall not be connected to fixed wiring in such a manner that one of the terminals remains 'live' when the associated switch is in the 'off' position, unless that terminal is inaccessible to touch when the ceiling rose cover is removed, e.g. for replacement flexible cord. Terminals shall be provided for switched live, neutral and protective conductors. Loop-in facilities shall also be provided. 19 LAMPS Lamps shall be compatible with the luminaire for which they are intended and shall be of the wattage, type and colour specified. Lamps shall be of the correct voltage rating for the particular electricity supply concerned. Tungsten filament lamps, unless otherwise specified, shall be of the 'PEARL' type and of the longlife type giving 2000 hours average life. Luminaires designed to accommodate lamps with reduced physical dimensions shall be fitted with lamps of the mushroom type of approved equal. A17

240 20 EXTERNAL LIGHTING External lighting system shall comprise the lighting points at the position shown on the Drawings and shall include the provision, erection and connection of all lighting columns, bollards, wall and ceiling luminaires and the provision and connection of all control gear together with the laying, jointing and connection of all necessary cables. All excavation, trenching, backfilling etc., will be undertaken by the main Sub-Contractor. All lighting columns shall be of the type specified, suitable for looping in and out three No.2 Core PVC/SWA/PVC cables of the specified size. Where discharge lamps are specified the associated controlgear shall be mounted in the base of the column above the fused 'cut out', all on a timber board housed within the base of the column. Each lighting column/bollard shall be completed with all adaptors, spigots, mounting brackets, luminaires, controlgear and lamps and shall be provided with a base compartment and locking door. All column/bollards shall be fixed in the position specified. Cable routes are shown on the relevant drawings and the electric Sub-Sub-Contractor shall lay the lighting cables in the trenches. All connections shall be made in an approved manner, and the installations shall be finished complete and handed over in working order to the full satisfaction of the Engineer. 21 LIGHTING SWITCHES Lighting switches shall be of the type, size and manufacture as specified. Wall and ceiling switches shall comply with BS Wall and ceiling switches controlling A.C lighting circuits shall be rated 20 amp and be of the slow break quick make, type unless stated otherwise. Where several switches on one phase are shown at one position, a ganged box shall be used. Where switches at any location are connected to different phases, purpose-make phase barrier switches shall be installed. The phases shall be separated by means of rigidly fixed barriers and the cable for each phase shall be confined to the area enclosed by the barriers for that phase. Switches connected to a particular phase shall have separate cover or covers fitted over each phase. The covers shall be engraved "CAUTION 415 VOLTS". The switch plate of the specified finish shall be fitted over phase covers to render the switch unit indistinguishable from the switches that are not phase barrier switches. Alternatively, each gang shall have its own piping and box for each phase, physically separated from other phases with similar arrangements. For flush position on a plastered or equivalent finish wall, the switches shall have overlapping plates. In any places where the finish is fair-faced brickwork, the wiring shall be installed on the back of the wall and make a back entry into the accessories. Each switch in these areas shall be neatly recessed and incorporate an overlapping plate. For surface-mounted positions and such Plant Rooms, Electrical Switch room etc., employing a surface-mounted system or wiring, switches shall be surface-mounted, having metal front plates of an aluminium finish, mounted in matching metal boxes. A18

241 22 SOCKETS OUTLETS All socket outlets and plugs shall be supplied and installed in accordance with the manufacture, type, sizes and finish specified. All round pin 2A,5A, 15A,and 30A socket outlets shall comply with the requirements of BS 546. All sockets outlets shall be switched, unless otherwise specified. All switched sockets outlets shall be complete with steel boxes of the same manufacture, complete with earth terminal. Assemblies shall comply fully with the requirements of the IEE Regulations concerning the bonding of protective conductor terminals and each such terminal shall be connected by a conductor, having a minimum cross-sectional area of 2.5 mm 2, to a permanent earthing terminal incorporated in the associated box providing an effective, solid connection to the earth continuity conductor of the installation. Where the assembly does not provide a reliable electrical contact between the cover plate and box with effective connection of metal operating bars and toggles, then an insulated earthing lead shall be provided, solidly connected to the metal plate and operating bar or toggle and terminating at the fixed earthing terminal incorporated in the associated box. 13 amp sockets will generally be installed using ring circuits in accordance with Appendix 5, Table 5A of the IEE Regulations. All plugs shall be of mounded rubber or other resilient material complying with BS 1363 or BS 546. The plug shall have internal cord grip. 13 amp plugs shall be fitted with cartridge fuse links to BS The fuse rating shall be selected to give protection to the flexible cord or cable connected. All fuses installed within 13 amp plug top, fused spurs, clock connections etc., shall be cartridge fuse links rated at 240 volts, ASTA certified for compliance with BS 1362 'General purpose fuse links for domestic and similar purposes', or BS 464 'Cartridge fuse links (rated at up to 5 amperes) for AC and DC service', or BS 2950 'Cartridge fuse-link for telecommunications and light electrical apparatus'. All equipment, which is locally fused, shall have fitted fuses with characteristics, which are recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment. If any appliance or equipment suffers due to incorrect fusing of the appliances, such appliances or equipment shall be repaired or replaced at the electrical Sub-Sub-Contractor's cost, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 23 INSPECTION AND TESTING A visual inspection shall be made in accordance with IEE Regulations References shall be made to appendix 14 of the IEE Regulations, which is a checklist for initial inspection of installations. The electrical installation shall be inspected and tested by the electrical Sub-Sub-Contractor in accordance with part 6 of the IEE Regulations. Where any part of installation is to be concealed within a building, fabric tests shall be made to ensure that the installation is satisfactory prior to concealment. Upon completion of the works the whole installation shall be subjected to the tests detailed hereafter and every defect shall be noted, corrected and brought to the notice of the Engineer. All tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer to his full satisfaction and he shall be given at least one week's notice in writing of the proposed tests. A19

242 All labour and test instruments shall be provided by the electrical Sub-Sub-Contractor and the instruments shall be correctly calibrated and certified for the limits of accuracy required and shall be operated by competent person. If, in the Engineer's opinion, a particular instrument is not suitable, then an acceptable alternative shall be provided. The Engineer shall be at liberty to demand the use of any testing instrument or apparatus that he may reasonably consider to be necessary in the execution of the testing. In the event of the installation failing to pass the test, the Engineer has the full authority of the Employer to deduct from the Contract Price all reasonable expenses incurred, due to him being required to attend a repetition of the test. The following items, where relevant, shall be tested in the sequence indicated. Standard methods of testing, in respect of some of the following regulations of this section, are given in Appendix 15 of the IEE Regulations. i) Continuity of ring final circuit conductors. ii) Continuity of protective conductors, including main supplementary equipotential bonding. iii) Earth electrode resistance. iv) Insulation resistance. v) Insulation of site-built assemblies. vi) Protection of barriers or enclosures provided during erection. vii) Insulation of non-conducting floors and walls. viii) Polarity. ix) Earth fault loop impedance. x) Operation of residual current devices and fault voltage operated protected devices. Upon completion of all tests and commissioning, two copies of detailed certificates shall be provided by the electrical Sub-Contractor to show that the equipment, materials, installation etc., have been tested and commissioned. One copy of each, duly completed and signed shall be submitted to the Engineer within 154 days of the results being obtained. The second copy of the certificates shall be retained to be included with operator and maintenance manuals. The results of the test and details of completion for the electrical test shall be detailed on the Test and Completion Certificates respectively; issued by the National Inspection council for Electrical Installation Contracting or other approved authority. 24 AS BUILT DRAWINGS, AND DOCUMENTATION Within one month of the date of completion the electrical Sub-Contractor shall provide 3 prints of all electrical drawings showing the electrical installations "As built". In case the electrical Sub- Contractor fails to provide "As Built" drawings as required, these will be prepared by others at the expense of the electrical Sub-Contractor. A20

243 APPENDIX 1 SUPPLEMENTARY SPECIFICATION FOR PVC INSULATED CABLES AND NON-METALLIC CONDUITS WIRING SYSTEM. 1. PVC 1 CABLE The wiring shall be carried out in 250-volt grade or 440 volt grade for 3-phase PVC Insulated cable, as specified elsewhere run in non-metallic conduit. The cable shall be of the sizes specified on the drawing. 2. INSTALLATION OF WIRING Cable shall be drawn into accessories, distribution boards and switchgear after the erection of the conduit system. Under no circumstances shall it be permitted to draw cable into an incomplete section of the conduit installation. 3. JOINTS IN CABLES The wiring shall be carried out on the looping-in principle. All joints shall be made at the terminals of main switches, distribution boards, ceiling roses, switches and socket outlets, etc. and fixed apparatus only. No joints shall be made in boxes unless approved. 4. CAPACITY OF CONDUITS The cable shall run in the conduit so as not to exceed the capacities as set out in Table 10 of the IEE Regulations (13 th Edition with current amendments). Conduits shall be best quality new super high impact grade heavy gauge 'A' riding PVC unplasticised conduits as manufactured by Egetude limited suitable for plain connections. Conduit of sizes less than 20 mm shall not be used without the written authority of the D.R. 5. BENDING The conduit shall be bent and formed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions: - i) Small size, i.e. 20 and 25 mm shall be bent cold by inserting the correct size bending spring. It is essential for right angle bends that the conduit is bent past 90 degrees to allow for "spring back". ii) Large size of conduit shall be pre-heated before inserting rubber cord to prevent kinking. Conduit badly formed or bent or damaged in any way, shall not be used. 6. JOINTING Joints shall be made water-tight by the use of 'Egaweld' cement applied with a brush or rug. 'Egaweld' shall be applied to the complete circumference of conduit. Conduit shall be thoroughly cleaned at the ends to ensure a good adhesion of the fittings. 'Egaweld' shall not be permitted to enter into the conduit. 7. CONDUIT FITTINGS All conduit fittings and accessories, including couplers, ordinary clips, saddles, pipe hooks, reducers, stopping plugs, lockouts and male and female bushes shall be manufactured dimensionally, similar to B.S.S. 31/1940. Solid tees shall not be used. Solid inspection elbows or bends or inspection tees shall be used only in exceptional circumstances and then only with D.R.'s approval. A21

244 Where it eases the installation of cast-in-situ back entry boxes on the loop-in system, purpose made bends manufactured by Egatube and comprising a tight bend with a push socket at one end and a threaded socket at the other end may be used with the D.R.'s approval. 8. FIXING OF CONDUITS Conduit shall be installed on the loop-in system and shall either be cast-in-situ in the main concrete structure, concealed in chases cast in concrete walls, or chases cut in solid partition walls, run in ceiling spaces or in hollow partitions of floors, or concealed below the floor screed, whichever shall prove to be the most suitable method of installation for use in the building under construction. Unless it is clearly specified or shown on the drawing, the method of installing conduit shall be subjected to the approval of the D.R. Sunken conduit run in chases in walls shall be fixed by means of mild steel pipe hooks or nonmetallic saddles spaced not more than 1 m apart. Where conduit is concealed behind plaster it shall be sunk to a depth of either 10 mm below finished plaster level, or installed flush with the structural wall level before application of plaster, whichever is the lesser depth. Conduit fixed on the surface of walls or ceiling shall be fixed by spacer bar saddles fixed not more than 1 m apart. Surface conduit shall also be fixed 230 mm on both sides of all boxes, the box itself securely fixed. Where such an arrangement of boxes and saddles would prove to be both unsightly and unnecessary, short lengths of conduit not exceeding 1 m in length between boxes need not be secured further than by connection to the adjacent boxes. In such cases the D.R. reserves the right to insist upon additional fixing being provided, should he for any reason whatsoever consider such additional fixing necessary. Where two or more lines of conduit run parallel to each other, on the surface of walls, etc., the distance between them shall not be less than 15mm and conduits shall not cross. Conduit shall be installed in such a manner as to prevent interference with other services and shall be kept at least 180 mm clear of gas or water pipes, and heat in excess of 68 degrees C. A means of expansion shall be provided in conduit runs in excess of 6 m without any bend or set, by use of 'Egetude' expansion couplings, which shall also be used at building expansion joints. Conduit cast-in-situ shall be frequently secured to the steel reinforcement work, with heavy binding wire to prevent movement of the conduit and conduit boxes during the pouring and vibrating of the concrete. Outlet boxes shall be securely fixed to the shuttering with nails, or by means, which shall be visible as a marker on removal of the shuttering only where marks can be concealed. Conduit shall be installed after the first grid of steel reinforcement work is securely fixed and all open ends of conduits shall be protected by couplings plugged with a suitable nonmetallic stopping plug. The number of right angle bends in conduit cast-in-situ shall not exceed two between boxes. Immediately prior to installation the wiring all conduit and fittings shall be dried and cleaned out by drawing through a cloth swab. Rawl plugs shall be used for fixing to brickwork, self-tapping screws for fixing to aluminium section, raw nuts, raw-anchors spring toggles, gravity toggles or rawlbolts, shall be used for fixing to other materials as approved by the D.R. Corners shall be turned by easy bends or sets made in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions without altering the section or splitting conduit. 9. CIRCULAR INSPECTION Boxes will not be permitted in floors unless approved. Boxes cast-in-situ must face downwards from the ceiling/floor section. Small standard circular non-metallic conduit boxes, conforming dimensionally with B.S. 31/1940 with standard circular non-metallic (4mm) lids and nylon fixing screws, shall be provided and fixed at all junctions. The above circular boxes or equivalent looping boxes shall be provided and securely fixed for all ceiling points. When the conduit is run on the surface, all circular boxes for ceiling points shall be fixed with screws. A22

245 Where ceiling roses occur and the ceiling box is recessed below the finished level of the ceiling, suitable extensive rings to accommodate the ceiling rose must be provided. Where ceiling boxes, including extension rings, are flush with the ceiling surface, break joints rings shall be provided to hide the joints. Where a non-metallic outlet box of thermoplastic material is used for the suspension of a lighting fitting, care shall be taken to ensure that the temperature of the box does not exceed 60 degrees c. The weight suspended from the box shall not exceed 3 kg. Where wiring system incorporates galvanised conduit and trunking, the trunking shall be deemed to be galvanised unless specified otherwise. The number of cables to be installed in trunking shall be such as to permit easy drawing in without damage to the cables, and shall in no circumstance be such that a space factor of 45% is exceeded. Conduit and trunking shall be mechanically and electrically continuous. Conduit shall be tightly screwed between the various lengths so that they butt at the socketed joints. The internal edges of conduit and all fittings shall be smooth, free from burrs and other defects. Oil and other insulating substance shall be removed from the screw threads. Where conduits terminate in fuse-gear, distribution board, adaptable boxes, non-spouted switchboxes, etc., they shall, unless otherwise stated, be connected thereto by means of smooth bore male brass brushes, compression washers and sockets. All exposed threads and abrasions shall be painted (using an oil point for black enamelled tubing and galvanised tubing immediately after the conduits are erected. All bends and sets shall be made cold without altering the section of the conduit. The inner radius of the bend shall not be less than four (4) times the outside diameter of the conduit. Not more than two right angle bends will be permitted without the inter-position of a draw-in box. Where straight runs of conduit are installed, draw-in boxes shall be provided at distances not exceeding 15 m. No tees, elbows, sleeves, either of inspection or solid type, will be permitted. Conduit throughout shall be of sufficient section and so arranged with draw-in boxes to allow easy drawing in and out of any one or all of the cables in the conduit. Conduits shall be swabbed out prior to drawing in cables, and they shall be laid so as to drain off all condensed moisture without injury to end connections. Conduits and trunking shall be run at least 150 mm clear of hot water and stem pipes, and at least 75 mm clear of cold water and other services unless otherwise approved by the D.R. Conduits installed and buried in walls shall allow a minimum of 15 mm cover. These conduits and those cast-in-situ concrete slabs shall be given one coat of rust prevention paint before installation of conduit and before concrete is placed. Sunk circular conduit boxes shall be provided with break joint rings of white moulded material or metal. Surface conduit shall be run in square symmetrical lines and shall be marked on site for approval before installation. Conduits shall be fixed by means of distance saddles spaced at not more than 1.2 m for 20mm and 50mm conduit and 1.5 m for larger sizes. Conduits shall be fixed each side of conduit boxes at a distance not exceeding 250 mm, and the saddles shall be equally spaced. Where conduit runs enter specified areas requiring flameproof equipment, barrier boxes shall be inserted immediately before the conduit enters the flameproof area. All conduit installed within this area shall be solid drawn galvanised, as shall be conduit fittings and accessories and Buxton Certified as suitable for Group 11 Hazards. Equipment shall comply with B.S 229, B.S.S. 889, and Code of Practice C.P In no case shall conduits from different distribution boards be connected at one box, likewise cables from different distribution boards shall not be housed in the same conduit specified. All conduit boxes, except loop-in pattern concrete floor shall be fixed direct to the structure apart from the support provided by the conduits. Box lids where required shall be heavy gauge metal, secured by means of zinc plated or cadmium steel screws. All adaptable boxes and lids of the same size shall be interchangeable. A23

246 Boxes used in conjunction with mineral insulated copper sheathed cable boxes shall be galvanised and painted after erection. Draw-in boxes in the floor are generally to be avoided but where they are essential they must be grouped in positions approved by the D.R. and covered by suitable floor straps, with non-ferrous tray and covers. The floor trap covers are to be recessed and filled in with a material to match the floor surface. The Sub-Contractor must take full responsibility for the fillings of all covers, but the fillings in materials will be supplied and the filling shall be carried out by the Main Building Sub-Contractor. Where it is intended to fix enclosed lighting fittings directly to a box to suspend a fitting of weight in excess of 3 kg., Egetude steel insert clips shall be used. 10. SWITCH AND SOCKET OUTLET BOXES All boxes intended for switches, socket outlet or other outlets shall be fitted with brass ferrules to accommodate fixing screws. 11. STOPPING PLUGS All spare ways in junction boxes, etc., left for possible future extensions shall be fitted with the stopping plugs. 12. EARTHING Where fittings and accessories require earthing, an earth continuity conductor be run through the conduit. The earth continuity conductor shall be a green coloured PVC insulated copper wire of minimum size 2.5 sq. mm and shall be continuous between terminals. Where the earth terminal is formed by a brass screw and washer, "Ross Courtney type terminations shall be used. All switch, socket outlet, ceiling boxes etc., shall be supplied with an earth terminal. 13. EARTH CONTINUITY Each final sub-circuit that is required to be earthed shall be provided with its own individual earth continuity conductor which shall be run from a terminal on the earth bar in the distribution board or consumer's control unit protecting any particular final sub-circuit. A24

247 PART B: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS B1

248 PART B: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS CONTENTS ITEM DESCRIPTION PAGE NO. SECTION 1 GENERAL B3 SECTION 2 SUPPLY AND DISTRIBUTION B4 SECTION 3 LIGHTING AND SMALL POWER INSTALLATIONS B5 SECTION 4 FIRE ALARM INSTALLATIONS B7 SECTION 5 INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATION AND SECURITY SERVICES B8 B2

249 Exclusions PART B: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 1: GENERAL The electrical Sub-Contractor shall supply labour and supply, deliver, install, fix, connect, test, label, and commission the electrical works, clean, complete and working to every detail as described in the specification and by related specifications to the satisfaction of the Consulting Engineer/Architect. Excluded from this Sub-contract is:- i) Control panels for motor-starters and internal wiring between control-panels, motor thermostat. etc. B3

250 SECTION 2 SUPPLY AND DISTRIBUTION Main Switch Board Supply and Distribution system The power supply shall be from the KPLC grid. The external distribution shall be effected through underground cables to run in a ducted distribution system Mains power distribution is through ducts and mainly cable ladders. The schematic for main switchboard are shown on drawings, together with Transformer room details, including trenching. All switch fuses, fuse switches, MCCB s including meters shall be of reputable manufacture meeting current British and Kenya Standards as stipulated in the general specifications. Any other quality that does not strictly meet these standards shall not be acceptable. Unless specifically stated otherwise, vertical power distribution shall be via riser (bus-bar) trunking. All incoming circuit breakers in the Main Switchboard to be motorized and set at different timings to allow for sequential loading of the standby generator. Exact trunking details to be given at the time of approving shop drawings for the main switchboard. B4

251 SECTION 3 LIGHTING AND SMALL POWER INSTALLATIONS INSTALLATION SYSTEM With the exception of where otherwise noted on the drawings, the installation shall throughout be carried out in PVC insulated copper cables of not less than 1.5 mm 2 copper drawn in high grade PVC conduit. LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM Indoor Lighting Types of accessories and fixed apparatus to be used shall be as manufacture MK or Crabtree. Subject to the approval of the Engineer equivalent makes may be used. All light fittings to be of manufacture shown on the detailed descriptions, or approved equivalent. CONNECTIONS TO FIXED APPLIANCES The Sub-contractor shall supply and interconnect flexible cords between spur units/outlets boxes and the appliances where the symbol for flex connections are shown. All connections shall be made by white heat-resisting PVC flexible cords having fuse rating in accordance with the respective circuits subjected to a minimum of 0.75mm 2. MOUNTING HEIGHTS AND LOCATIONS All mounting heights stated shall mean the heights from finished floor level to underside of the accessory. Each mounting heights for wall fixtures shall, however, be re-confirmed on site. Lighting control Switches 1400 mm above floor level and 100 mm away from architrave. If mounted in a column they shall be located in the centre. Sockets Outlets 300 mm above finished floor except for areas that are otherwise stated. Connection Units and Outlets Connection units having cord outlets shall be located as to limit the length of the flex cord to approx. 600 mm and be located slightly higher than the inlet on the appliances. The same applies to outlet boxes. Conduit Boxes (General) Where one fitting is shown in a room the box shall be in the centre (unless otherwise stated). Where two or more fittings are to be installed they shall be half of the between two fittings. Where one row of fittings is to be installed they shall be located in the centre. Where installed between beams they shall be in between two beams. All boxes shall be with covers. B5

252 WALL AND CEILING FINISHINGS LIGHTING FITTINGS FIXING AND LOCATION The Sub-Contractor is to obtain information regarding the ceiling claddings before any installation is commenced as he will be held responsible if the conduit boxes as well as boxes for switches and socket outlets, telephone, etc are not installed at the right depth. The sub-contractor shall supply, deliver to site, install and commission all the fittings. The tenderer may submit an alternative schedule of equal makes of fittings with the tender where applicable. Where appliances fittings shall be supplied complete with bulbs or tubes, the tubes shall be as Thorn Manufactures. The bulbs shall also be Thorn make. Equivalent makes may be substituted subject to due approval of the Engineers, and the sub-contractor proving that what is specified is not available. Details of fixing and location of various fittings are as shown on relevant drawings. Fluorescent and incandescent fittings shall, in addition to being fixed to the conduit boxes, also be fixed by means of PVC covered rawplugs (no wooden plugs) at the fixing centres. A rubber gasket shall be fitted on the conduit boxes for the outdoor fittings in order to provide a waterproof seal. All switch panels shall be as MK manufacture or equivalent subject to the Engineer's approval. Each panel shall be fed from a particular phase as NOT more than one shall be allowed inside one panel. Separate conduits shall be installed to each panel. POWER INSTALLATIONS INSTALLATION SYSTEM The sub-contractor shall include for all installations shown on the drawings. The sub-contractor shall satisfy himself that there is a continuous conduit, trunking and /or duct system to facilitate installation of the entire power installation and shall be held responsible where continuity does not exist. The installation system for the indoor installation shall be carried out in concealed PVC conduits, PVC ducts and surface mounting trunking. The size of the cables shall not be less than 2.5 mm 2 for ring main circuits. B6

253 SECTION 4 4. FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 4.01 INSTALLATION The installation for the above shall be carried out using PVC 1.5mm 2 copper cables in high impact grade PVC conduit. All cables for fire alarm installations to be fire-resistant. Tests for fire resistance will be performed as part of this sub-contract. The sub-contractor shall ensure continuous link-up between individual break-glass call units, detectors, bells and panels. B7

254 SECTION 5 INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATION AND SECURITY SERVICES INSTALLATION SYSTEM In the tender for electrical installations supports for all cables in the communications and security services shall be included. The electrical tender shall include for trunking, conduits etc. to ensure a continuous supply system from the telephone switchroom to any individual outlet. Holes in structures shall be provided by the main-contractor. The conduits shall at each point terminate in deep switch-boxes as specified for lighting control switches. MOUNTING HEIGHTS AND LOCATIONS Mounting heights shall be as for socket outlets. BLANK-OFF PLATES As MK list No white. B8

255 PART C: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL LIGHTNING PROTECTION C1

256 PART C: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL LIGHTNING PROTECTION CONTENTS ITEM CONTENTS PAGE NO. 1.0 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS C3 2.0 MAJOR COMPONENTS C3 3.0 BONDING C8 4.0 LIGHTING PROTECTION DESIGN C9 5.0 EARTHING SYSTEM DESIGN C10 C2

257 PART C: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL LIGHTNING PROTECTION 1.0 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS This consideration is based on the provisions of BS If it has been established that a structure requires lightning protection, certain general design considerations need to be made. Could, for instance, any of the metallic components in or on the structure be incorporated into the lightning protection scheme? Could the metal in and on the roof be used? Should window cleaning rails, window frames, handrails surrounding the structure be incorporated in the protection network? The reinforcing bars or the steel frame of a structure may well provide a conductive path within the lightning protection system. If metallic components in a building are not used, then the structure will require externally fitted conductors. A Lightning Protection System can incorporate all natural conductors, all externally fitted conductors, or a combination of both. BS 6651 does not, however recommend the routing of conductors inside the structure. MAJOR COMPONENTS The principle components of a lightning protection system should comprise the following: Air termination networks Down conductors Earth termination networks Bonding to prevent side flashing Air Termination Networks It is now accepted that lightning can strike the upper part of tall structures. BS 6651 now introduces the concept of air termination networks on all sides of tall buildings (ie, vertical air termination networks). No part of the roof within the air termination network should be more than 5m from a conductor. For large flat roofs, this will be achieved typically by a network mesh of 10m x 20m. For high risk structures, ie, explosive factories, etc. the air termination mesh is reduced to 5m x 10m. If a building s metal reinforcing bars are to be used as down conductors, these should be connected to the air termination network in the correct number of positions. BS 6651 advises the use of a rolling sphere to determine zones of protection. To minimize the likelihood of a lightning strike damaging the side of the buildings, it is suggested that the rolling sphere method be applied to identify those areas where an extension of the air termination network should be considered. This recommendation could be summarized as follows:- Where there is a risk that a lightning strike to the sides of a structure may cause masonry to be dislodged, then an extension of the air termination network should be considered. To ensure complete continuity of the lightning protection system BS 6651 recommends that: Where structures vary in height and have more than one roof termination network, the lower roof network should not only be joined to its down conductors, but also joined to the down conductors of the taller portions of the structure. This will ensure that a lightning strike to a lower portion of the structure will not lead to side-flashing to other remote down conductors and will provide a multi down conductor path for the lightning current to disperse. C3

258 The protective systems of churches and similar non-conducting structures should include air termination networks, down conductors and earth termination networks. It is, however, very difficult to design protective systems for these structures collectively. BS 6651, therefore, advises that such structures should be treated as special cases: that the presence of a tower or spire should be disregarded when designing the protection of the lower parts of the structure. For less complex tall structures of varying heights, the rolling sphere method as described should be employed. The rolling sphere method is a simple means of determining where the zones of protection should be located. Wherever the sphere touches the structure determines the extent of the air termination network. There is a reference in BS 6651 to the use of covered conductors for air termination networks. Although it advocates that, wherever possible, bare conductors should be used, it permits the use of PVC covered or painted conductors. Down Conductors The function of a down conductor is to provide a low impedance path from the air termination network to the earth termination network, to0 allow the lightning current to be safely conducted to earth. BS6651 advocates the use of various types of down conductors. A combination of strip and rod conductors, reinforcing bars, structural steel stanchions, etc. can be used as all or part of the down conductor systemproviding they are appropriately connected to the air and earth termination networks, and are known to offer good electrical conductivity. The code suggests there is no advantage in using shielded coaxial cables as down conductors. In fact there is thought to be the disadvantage that potentials up to hundreds of kilo-volts can occur between the inner and outer conductor (shield) at the top of the down conductors so triggering a side flash. Down conductor systems should, where possible, take the most direct route from the air termination network to the earth termination network. Ideally they should be symmetrically installed around the outside walls of the structure starting from the corners. Routing to avoid side-flashing should always be given particular attention in designing any installation. Down conductors should be positioned no more than 20m apart around the perimeter at roof or ground level, whichever is the greater. If the structure is over 20m in height, then the spacing is reduced to every 10m or part thereof. Sharp bends in down conductors at the edge of the roofs are unavoidable and are permitted in BS 6651; however, re-entrant loops in a conductor can produce high inductive voltage drops which could lead to the lightning discharge jumping across the side of the loop. To minimize this problem BS 6651 recommends that the length of the conductor forming the loop should not exceed eight times the width of the open side of the loop. Earthing General Earthing plays a vital role in all electrical systems. The main reasons for earthing are:- To protect people and livestock To protect equipment To permit the equipment to function correctly To ensure the reliability of electrical services. A good earth connection should possess the following characteristics:- Low electrical resistance between the electrode and the earth. The lower the earth electrode resistance the more likely the lightning or fault current will choose to flow down that path in preference to any other, allowing the current to be conducted safely to and dissipated in the earth. C4

259 Good corrosion resistance. The choice of material for the earth electrode and its connections is of vital importance. It will be buried in soil for many years so has to be totally dependable. Ability to carry high currents repeatedly. Ability to perform the above functions for a minimum of 30 years. Soil Conditions Achieving a good earth will depend on local soil conditions. A low soil resistivity is the main aim, and factors that affect this are: Moisture content of the soil. Chemical composition of the soil, eg. Salt content. Temperature of the soil. Note: It is now deemed bad practice to use salt as a chemical means of reducing soil resistivity, because of its very corrosive nature. Salt along with other chemicals, has the disadvantage of leaching out of the surrounding soil after a period of time, thus returning the soil to its original resistivity. Once the soil resistivity has been calculated from the local soil measurements, the appropriate earth electrode system can be chosen by using typical formulae listed below: Horizontal Strips (Rectangular Section) R = ρ/275l Log10 200L²/wD Horizontal Strips (Circular Section) R = ρ/275l Log10 100L²/dD Vertical Strips (Rectangular Section) R= ρ/275l Log10 800L/w Vertical Strips (Circular Section) R = ρ/275l Log10 400L/d Where: R= Apparent earth electrode resistance in ohms. ρ= Soil resistivity in ohm.cm D= Depth of electrode in metres. d= Diameter of electrode in centimeters. L= Length of electrode in metres. W= Width of electrode in centimeters. Assume we use a standard 5/8 diameter rod (nominal diameter 14mm) Actual shank diameter 14.2mm Thus d = 1.42cm L =? If we let L = 6m and substitute to see what value of R is obtained R = 10,000/275 x 6 x Log10 400x6/1.42 = x = ohms Thus 6m of extensible rods (5x1.2m) can be used to obtain the desired resistance value of 20 ohms. C5

260 The above example illustrates the importance of the accuracy of the soil resistivity figure. If the survey is inaccurate, then the calculated apparent elecvtrode resistance R will be inaccurate and misleading. Solid Plates or Mats Earth plates or mats can be buried instead of driving rod electrodes but installation is expensive and time consuming. Reinforcing bars in foundations as natural earths This is an economical method of using the mass of metal already underground in the form of the reinforcing bars, within the structure s foundations. Precautions should be taken to ensure there is electrical continuity between these re-inforcing bars and the earth/lightning protection connections above ground. Underground Pipe Work System Buried water pipes were previously considered to be a reliable method of earthing but he increasing use of plastic pipes or replacing metal joints with plastic ones now makes this method unreliable. Other forms of earth electrode can be used, including ring conductors or radial strips emanating from a particular point, or a combination of conductors with earth rods. Voltage Gradient A further factor affecting the choice of an electrode system is the electrical considerations. Step and touch voltages on the surface of the ground in the vicinity of earth electrodes must be restricted to safe values. This can be achieved by using electrodes to form a ring around the area to be protected. The electrodes must be buried sufficiently deep to reduce surface potential. An effective method of reducing the voltage gradient of rod electrodes is to install them with the top of the electrode some distance beneath the surface of the soil. The connection between the electrode and down conductor being made with insulated conductor. An example of how effective this can be is illustrated by tests which gave the following results. The maximum voltage gradient over a two metre span adjacent to a 25mm diameter earth electrode was 85% of the total electrode potential when the top of the assembly was at ground level. This electrode potential was reduced to 20% when the electrode was buried 0.3 m below ground level and 5% when buried 1.0 m below ground level. One of the biggest problems for the installation contractor is of obtaining an earth resistance of, say, one ohm or less in an area of high soil resistivity. Unfortunately, there is no magical solution. However, several options are available to the contractor in the form of soil conditioning agents. Soil-Conditioning Agents Introducing a soil conditioning agent into the ground can reduce the soil resistivity and hence reduce the earth resistance. There are various agents available, the choice of any particular one will depend on the type of earth required temporary or permanent; the locality; the condition of the soil, etc. C6

261 As previously mentioned moisture forms an important part in obtaining a low soil resistivity value and it is the impurities in the water that produce this. One way of reducing the soil resistivity is to pour chemical solutions i.e.: copper sulphate; sodium carbonate; calcium sulphate, over the local area and allow it to migrate through the soil. The disadvantage of this is the large volume of solutions required, which makes it a cumbersome and time-consuming exercise. Also chemicals will eventually leach out of the local soil, returning it to its original high resistivity. Dissolving chemicals into the soil is also likely to encourage corrosion of the earth electrode. Hence the reason for the British Standard Code of Practice 7430 on Earthing and BS6651 Protection of Structures against Lightning not recommending the use of a salt as a means of reducing the soil resistivity. Other soil-conditioning are available including Bentonite and Marconite. Bentonite is used as an earth-electrode back-fill to reduce soil resistivity by retaining moisture. The clay consists largely of sodium montmorillonite, which when mixed with water sells to many times its dry volume. It has the ability to hold its moisture content for a considerable period of time and to absorb moisture from the surrounding soil (e.g. from rainfall). Marconite is a conductive carbonaceous aggregate which when mixed with conventional cement, effectively increases the surface area of the earth-electrode, thus lowering its earth resistance. Ideal for use on sub-stations and transmission/distribution networks or in hot, dry climates, and also has electromagnetic screening and anti-static flooring applications. Both products have applications with deep-driven electrodes. The ground/soil in question can be drilled using a portable drill rig, transported to the site. Significant depths can be reached depending on the type of ground. The electrode assembly can then be inserted into the pre-drilled hole and back-filled with Bentonite or Marconite, or any other appropriate conditioning agent. It is vital with any earthing system that regular inspection is carried out for possible damage. Regular checks on earth electrode resistance to ensure optimum protection are advised. The key to arriving at a successful earthing electrode system is not to sacrifice quality for cost. Many products currently on the market fall far short of the recommended standards. BS 7430: 1991 Code or Practice for Earthing contains recommendations for material specification to ensure components are corrosion-resistant and provide adequate mechanical strength. The correct choice of material and installation should ensure a life span of 30 years for the earth electrode. Earthing Lightning Protection Systems There are two stages in testing an earth network for satisfactory resistance. 1) An earth electrode should be connected to each down conductor with a test link incorporate into every down conductor path. With the test link removed and without any bonding to other services, etc, the earth resistance of each individual earth electrode should be measured. The resistance, in ohms, should not exceed ten times the number of down conductors on the structure. For example, if there are fifteen down conductors equally spaced around a building, then the resistance of each electrode with the test link removed should not exceed 10 x 15 = 150 ohms. 2) With the test links replaced the resistance to earth of the complete lightning protection system is measured at any point on the system. The reading from this test should not exceed ten ohms. This is still without any bonding to other services. C7

262 BONDING Corrosion BS 6651 provides a guide to the minimum dimensional requirements of various electrode systems. For example, where earth rods are chosen, the minimum combined rod length to complete an earth electrode system should be 9 metres therefore a small structure with only two down conductors would have a minimum requirement of 4.5 metres for each electrode. Each local earth rod electrode should be a minimum length of 1.5 metres. It must be remembered that this dimensional requirement does not effect, in any way, the need to obtain the satisfactory earth resistance values mentioned in (1) and (2) above. All metal work on or around a structure must be bonded to the lightning protection system if side-flashing is to be avoided. When a lightning protection system is struck, its electrical potential with respect to earth is significantly raised and, unless suitable precautions are taken, the discharge may seek alternative paths to earth by side-flashing to other metal-work in or on the structure. Typically, water pipes, gas pipes, metal sheaths and electrical installations which are in contact with earth, remain at earth potential during a lightning discharge. Even metal parts that are not in contact with earth will see a potential difference between them and the lightning protection system during a discharge, even if this potential is smaller in magnitude to the metal parts in direct contact with earth. It is vital that all exposed metal work is bonded into the lightning protection installation. There are two ways of preventing side-flashing. The first is to isolate nearby metal from the lightning protection system. So, even if a strike occurs, the clearance distance between the metalwork and the lightning protection system would be so great that the strike would prefer to follow the lightning protection path rather than jump across to the metal work. Obviously, this will not be practical for certain fixed metal installations, for example central heating systems or metal windows. In these cases, the second method of preventing side-flashing has to be considered, that of connecting the metal work to the lightning protection system with an appropriate bond. To determine whether the distance between the suspect metal work and the lightning protection system is large enough for the metal work to be considered isolated or close enough to be bonded BS 6651 provides a mathematical means of determining the minimum isolation distance for a given set of parameters. Simple formulae are used in conjunction with two curves to evaluate the minimum isolation distance required between the suspect metalwork and the lightning protection system. If the figure obtained, with the given set of parameters, results in, say, a separation distance, of 2m, then if the actual gap is less than 2m, bonding is required. If the gap is greater then 2m, then isolation is sufficient, and no bonding is required. BS6651 also provides specific recommendations for protecting buildings which contain explosives or highly flammable contents, dwelling houses/domestic properties, fences, trees and structures near trees, structures with radio and television aerials and a whole range of other miscellaneous structures including tents, sports stadiums, bridges, etc. The code also mentions that internal bonds can be half the cross sectional area of external bonds as they are, at most, only likely to carry a proportion of the total lightning current. As mentioned earlier the correct choice of materials for a lightning protection system is vital. Metal fittings must be compatible with the metal or metals used externally on the structure over which the system passes or with which it may be in contact. Aluminium and copper, the two metals most commonly used in lightning, protection systems, are not compatible, so great care must be taken when both are used in a system particularly where they come into contact with each other. C8

263 If aluminium is selected as the material for air termination networks and down conductors, it has to be connected to copper at or around the test clamp. This connection should be positioned at he beginning of the earth termination network. This is because both BS 6651 and the Earthing Code BS 7430 do not permit aluminium to be buried underground. Simple and effective means of joining aluminium and copper conductors in one connector do exist. Ingots of high purity copper and aluminium are friction welded together forming an effective electrical and mechanically robust joint. This termination, if used in conjunction with contax inhibitor grease minimises the effect of corrosion. The contact surfaces of dissimilar metals should be kept completely dry and protected against the ingress of moisture, otherwise corrosion will occur. A particularly effective means of excluding moisture is to use inhibitor pastes, bitumastic paint, or approved protective wrappings. As aluminium is prone to corrosion when in contact with Portland cement and mortar mixes, aluminium conductors need to be fixed away from the offending surface with an appropriate fixing. Earth conductors between the test clamp(s) and earth electrodes should be protected against corrosion where they enter the ground for a distance of 0.3m above and below ground level. This can be achieved by using PVC protective sleeving. LIGHTNING PROTECTION DESIGN For a well-designed lightning protection system, the following information will be required: 1. Drawings of the structure requiring protection, showing the roof plan and at least two elevations. These drawings should be clear, precise and have the scale shown. 2. The materials used in the construction of the structure should be stated along with information on the type of fixings permissible (e.g. can the roof be drilled to take screw plugs). 3. For what purpose is the structure being used? (i.e. its use will determine the risk category of the structure). 4. The proximity of other structures, trees and its general locality. 5. Information regarding any unusual features such as aerial masts on the roof of buildings, which may not be shown on the drawings. 6. At what stage of construction is the structure (i.e. complete, partly built, etc). 7. Notification of code that the scheme is to be designed to e.g. BS 6651 (1992). 8. Is there any soil resistivity data available? C9

264 EARTHING SYSTEM DESIGN General statements regarding earthing have been made earlier. This Section however is specifically aimed at assisting with earth electrode calculations whether they be for a simple power earth, or for a more complex design, say a high voltage sub-station. Why do we require an Earth? The function of an earth system for an electrical installation can be split into three broad bands: i) To limit the potential of any part of the installation to a pre-determined value with respect to the general mass of earth. ii) iii) To permit the flow of current in the event of a fault to earth so that the protective equipment has time to operate and thus isolate the faulty circuit. To ensure that, if a fault occurs, non current carrying metalwork associated with the equipment does not attain a dangerous potential respect to the general mass of earth. Points (i) and (ii) are normally essential to the security of the system, and are generally known as system earthing. Point (iii) is aimed at ensuring safety of humans, animals and property and is sometimes known as equipment earthing. How do we choose our Earth Electrode System? Having determined that there is an earthing requirement, how do we go about deciding what type of earth electrode we should use? The previous chapter elaborated the various types of earth termination networks available, and their differing properties are a major consideration. However, the most significant factor that will govern our choice is the ground itself. A borehole survey of the ground where the earthing is to be installed will indicate whether rock is present and at what depth, a factor that will not only affect the electrical consideration but will also have a direct bearing on installation costs. The information required by the earth electrode designer, however, is the resistivity of the soil: that value of rho that will enable him to calculate the earth resistance i.e. the resistance of the soil to the passage of electric current. Compared to a length of copper conductor the soil or earth could be regarded as a relatively poor conductor of electricity; for example, the resistivity of copper is 1.72 x 10-8 ohm metres, whereas chalk in Norfolk might register a value of 100 ohm metres. In reality, however, the earth s enormous mass, and, hence, its large cross-sectional area for the current path, gives it quite a low resistance, i.e. the earth is, in fact, a good conductor. Since soil strata differs significantly from country to country, or even from site to site, it is not possible to be specific about the correct choice of earth electrode system without carrying out a detailed soil resistivity survey. Soil Resistivity Measurements A technique for measuring the earth s resistivity was proposed by the American, Dr. Frank Wenner, in a scientific paper published in Since that time it has been universally accepted as the most popular method to employ. The Wenner method gives the average resistivity of the soil between ground level and a given depth. Using this method, Furse site surveys measure the soil resistivity of various depths up to a minimum of 20 metres. This enables the plotting of a soil resistivity v. depth graph to reveal the optimum earth electrode system and where in the soil-strata it should be located. C10

265 Earthing Design If the objective is to achieve a desired resistance to earth for a particular installation, e.g. one ohm, then formulae given in BS 7430 (1991) can be used to calculate the required amount of electrodes. If the earthing requirements are more comprehensive, for instance achieving a stipulated resistance to earth and also addressing the problems associated with step and touch voltages, then an internationally accepted standard such as IEEE standard 80 (1986) Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding, should be employed. Other nationally recognised standards on earthing may be used to calculate the earth electrode requirements, but most design efforts concentration BS7430 and IEEE80. For BS 7430 systems the resistance values are calculated to allow the Designer simply to select the bill of quantities which gives his required resistance. IEEE80 designs include a schematic drawings representing the earth grid layout; from this, accurate site installation drawings can then be produced. C11

266 PART D: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM D1

267 PART D: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CONTENTS ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION PAGE NO. 1.0 SYSTEM DESIGN D3 2.0 ZONE DETAILS D3 3.0 ADDRESSABLE SYSTEMS D4 4.0 BREAK GLASS AND MANUAL CALL POINTS D4 5.0 ALARM SOUNDERS D4 6.0 SELECTION OF EQUIPMENT DETECTION TYPES D5 7.0 LIMITS OF CEILING HEIGHT D7 8.0 CEILING HEIGHT LIMITS WITH RAPID ATTENDANCE D8 9.0 CONTROL EQUIPMENT D STANDBY POWER SUPPLIES D WIRING D INSTALLATION OF CABLES D ROUTINE TESTING OF SYSTEM D ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE DECTECTION SYSTEMS D SYSTEM FEATURES D SYSTEM OPERATION D ANALOGUE DETECTORS D ANALOGUE REPEATER PANELS D LOOP INTERFACE UNITS D16 D2

268 SECTION A: SYSTEM DESIGN The Code of Practice for design, installation and servicing This specification is for the design and installation of fire detector alarm systems for general applications and is based on BS5839 Part 1: Property Protection A satisfactory fire alarm system for he protection of property will automatically detect a fire at an early stage, indicate its location and raise an effective in time to summon the fire fighting forces (both resident staff and fire brigade). The general attendance time of the fire brigade should be less than 10 minutes. Therefore an automatic direct link to the fire brigade is essential. Life Protection A satisfactory fire alarm system for the protection of life can be relied upon to sound a fire alarm while sufficient time remains for the occupants to escape. ZONE DETAILS Zoning of the system To ensure a fast and unambiguous identification of the fire source, the protected area should be divided into zones. When determining the area to be covered by a zone, consideration should be given to accessibility, size, the fire routine determined for the premises, and particularly in occupied premises, that each zone is accessible from the main circulation routes leading from the where the control panel is sited. In general the following guide lines for the size of a zone should be observed: Notes: 1. If the total area (i.e. the total of the floor areas of each storey)of the building is not greater than 300m 2 then the building need only be one zone, no matter how many floors it has. 2. The total floor area for a zone should not exceed 2000m The search distance should not exceed 30m. This means the distance that has to be travelled by a searcher inside a zone to determine visually the position of a fire should not exceed 30m. The use of remote indicator lamps outside doors may reduce the number of zones required. 4. Where stairwells or similar structures extend beyond one floor but are in one fire compartment, the stairwell should be a separate zone. 5. If the zone covers more than one fire compartment, then the zone boundaries should follow compartment boundaries. 6. If the building is split into several occupancies, no zone should be split between two occupancies. 1. A fire compartment is an area bordered by a fire resisting structure usually at least 30 minutes resistance. 2. Zone limits can be relaxed only in certain manually operated systems. D3

269 3. It may be an advantage to have manual call points on separate zones to detectors. This will avoid misleading information regarding the position of fire, particularly on staircase landings. 4. Removal of a detector from a zone circuit must not isolate a break glass call point on the same circuit. 3.0 ADDRESSABLE SYSTEMS In an addressable system several zones may be connected to the control panel by a single loop circuit. Maximum area covered by one loop is 10,000 sq m. In addressable systems the detector or manual call point in alarm can be shown by the use of an alpha numeric display. This on its own will not be acceptable and the zone in which the detector/manual call point has operated must be displayed. The zonal indication may be mounted adjacent to the control panel, and the plan of the building/floor should also be displayed. This means, the use of mimic diagram would seem to be the most suitable means for zone identification. However in small systems where the identification of location of an incident by an individual device is not confusing, then zonal information may not be required. BREAK GLASS AND MANUAL CALL POINTS The break glass call point is a device to enable personnel to raise the alarm in the event of a fire, by simply breaking a frangible element and thus activating the alarm system. The following guidelines should be observed for the correct siting and positioning of break glass call points: 1. Break glass call points should be located on exit routes and in particular on the floor landings of staircases and at all exits to the open air. 2. Break glass call points should be located so that no person need travel more than 30m from any position within the premises in order to give an alarm. 3. Generally, call points should be fixed at a height of 1.4m above the floor, at easily accessible, well-illuminated and conspicuous positions free from obstruction. 4. The method of operation of all call points in an installation should be identical unless there is a special reason for differentiation. 5. Manual and automatic devices may be installed on the same system although it may be advisable to install the manual call points on separate zones for speed of identification. ALARM SOUNDERS An important component of any fire alarm system is the alarm sounder, normally a bell or electronic sounder, which must be audible throughout the building in order to alert and/or evacuate the occupants of the building. The following guidelines should be observed for the correct use of alarm sounders: 1. A minimum sound level of either 65dBA or 5Dba above any background noise likely to persist for a period longer than 30 seconds, whichever is greater should be produced by the sounders at any occupiable point in the building. D4

270 2. If the alarm system is to be used in premises such as hotels, boarding houses etc., where it is required to wake sleeping persons then the sound level should be 75dBA minimum at the bedhead. 3. All audible warning devices used in the same system should have a similar sound and be distinct from any other audible alarms used for other purposes. Except in noisy areas where high performance sounders may be required. 4. A large number of quiter sounders rather than a few very loud sounders may be preferable to prevent noise levels in some areas from becoming too loud. 5. It is unlikely that sounder noise levels in a room will be satisfactory if more than one dividing wall or door separates it from the nearest sounders. 6. The level of sound provided should not be so high as to cause permanent damage to hearing. 7. The number of fire alarm sounders used inside a building should be sufficient to produce the sound level recommended, but should in any case be at least two. Other requirements include: 1. The sounders should be arranged on at least two separate circuits, so that the failure of one circuit does not case all sounders in the building to fail. 2. Frequency range between Hz. 3. Most single doors will cause a 20db drop in sound level. Fire doors 30db. 4. Where mains sounders are being used to supplement 24V DC sounders, the 240V AC supply should be monitored. 5. To achieve 75db at the bedhead, a sounder should be installed in the bedroom. SELECTION OF EQUIPMENT DETECTION TYPES When choosing the type of detector to be used in a particular area it is important to remember that the detector has to discriminate between fire and the normal environment existing within the building, i.e. smoking in hotel bedrooms, fumes from forklift trucks in warehouses, steam from bathrooms, kitchens etc. Heat detectors Heat detectors may be the Point type (which responds to temperatures surrounding one particular spot), or the Line type (which responds to temperature change along its line). All Point type heat detectors should include a fixed temperature element operating at a pre-determined temperature. Some may also include a rate-of-rise element designed to operate in response to a rapid rise in temperature. Heat detectors are in general less sensitive than other types of detector and should therefore not be used where a small fire will cause unacceptable losses. Smoke detectors There are two principal methods of smoke detection: the ionisation chamber, and the optical scatter chamber. The detection method chosen will usually depend on the type of risk to be protected against. In the ionisation chamber, an electric current flows between two electrodes and is reduced by smoke. Ionisation detectors are particularly sensitive to small particle smoke such as that produced in rapidly burning fires but are relatively insensitive to large particle smoke such as that produced by overheated PVC or smouldering polyurethane foam. In the optical chamber, light is scattered, or in some cases absorbed by smoke. Optical detectors are more sensitive to large particles found in optically dense smoke, but are less sensitive to the small particle smoke. D5

271 Today, optical smoke detectors are more widely used than ionisation types due to the growing use of flame retardant materials in building construction, decoration and furnishings. Careful consideration must be given to any specific risks that might occur. Siting and spacing of detectors In a building the greatest concentration of smoke and heat will generally collect at the highest parts of the enclosed areas and it is here therefore, that detectors should normally be sited. Heat detectors should be sited so that the heat sensitive element is not less than 25mm, nor more than 150mm, below the ceiling or roof. If a protected space has a pitched or north light roof, then smoke detectors should be installed in each apex. The following parameters should be followed when spacing detectors: The maximum horizontal distance between any point in the area and the nearest detector: 1. Under flat horizontal ceilings and corridors more than 5m wide Heat Detectors i) For Point type Heat Detectors 5.3m (maximum area 50m 2 ) ii) For Point type Smoke Detectors 7.5m (maximum area 100m 2 ) Max area of coverage per detector = 50m 2 Max distance covered = 5.3m (for square layout this is 3.5m to wall 7m between detectors) Smoke Detectors Max area of coverage = 100m 2 Max distance covered 7.5m (for a square layout this is 5m to wall, 10m spacing) 2. In a corridor less than 5m wide (where adjoining rooms are protected by automatic detection) ADD to the maximum horizontal distance 50% of the difference between 5m and the actual width of the corridor. e.g.: In a 2m wide corridor, the difference between: 2m and 5m = 3m 50% of 3m = 1.5m Maximum distance of travel for a Point type Smoke Detector = 7.5m + 1.5m = 9m 3. In the apex of a pitched or north light roof A row of detectors should be sited in the apex. One row of detectors should be sited at the highest point, a minimum distance of 0.5m from the vertical wall. ADD to the maximum horizontal distance 1% for each degree of slope up to a maximum increase of 25% e.g.: A Point type detector at the apex of a 20 degree slope. 20% of 7.5m = 1.5m Maximum distance of travel 9m The maximum area of coverage may also be increased proportionally. 4. Obstructions (i) e.g.: Where the passage of smoke or hot gas from a position to a detector is likely to be disturbed by a ceiling obstruction (such as a beam) having a depth greater than 150mm, but less than 10% of the height of the ceiling, then the horizontal distance should be decreased by twice the depth of the obstruction. For a point type smoke detector obstructed by a beam of 200mm depth Maximum distance of travel D6

272 = 0.2 x 2 = 0.4m 7.5m 0.4m = 7.1m (ii) (iii) Where a ceiling obstruction, such as a beam, is greater than 10% of the height of the ceiling then the areas either side of the obstruction should be considered as separate rooms. Ceiling beams less than 150mm can be ignored. 5. Detectors (Other than beam type) Detectors should not be mounted less than 500mm from any walls or partitions. Where rooms are divided into sections by walls, partitions or storage racks reaching within 300mm of the ceiling, the dividers should be considered as if they reach the ceiling. 7.0 LIMITS OF CEILING HEIGHT Detectors should not normally be mounted on ceilings higher than the general limits on Table 1 below. If small sections of a ceiling (not exceeding in total 10% of the ceiling area) exceed in height the general limits of the table, those higher sections may be protected by Point type heat detectors provided that the ceiling height in the higher sections does not exceed 10.5m, or by Point type smoke detectors provided that the ceiling height in the higher sections does not exceed 12.5m. Limits of ceiling height Detector type Ceiling heights in metres General Limits Rapid attendance Heat detectors BS5445: Part 5 Grade Grade Grade Point smoke detectors BS 5445: Part 7 High temperature heat detectors BS 5445: Part 8 Optical beam smoke detectors BS 5839: Part Siting limits for smoke beam detectors Minimum (m) Maximum (m) Height of optical beam above floor * Optical beam length Distance of optical beam from a flat ceiling or apex Horizontal distance between optical beams measured at right angles to a beam Horizontal distance between optical beam and an adjacent wall or partition. See Note 7.0 * The height may be increased to 40m provided that the rapid attendance criteria are met. D7

273 Note: Generally the beam should not pass closer to the wall or partition than 500mm, and not closer to an obstruction than 500mm. However, up to 3m of the beam may be closer than this. 8.0 CEILING HEIGHT LIMITS WITH RAPID ATTENDANCE Although an increased ceiling height means that the fire will be larger when it is detected, the size of the fire when fire fighting starts will also depend on the delay between detection and the start of fire fighting. If this delay is small, then the increase in fire size at detection due to a higher ceiling can be acceptable. If the detection system is automatically connected to the fire brigade either directly or via a central (fire alarm) station and the usual attendance time of the fire brigade is not more than 5 minutes, then the rapid attendance limits of ceiling height given in the table in the top right may be applied. If small sections of a ceiling (not exceeding in total 10% of the ceiling area) exceed in height the limits of the table in the top right, those higher sections may be protected by Point type heat detectors if their height does not exceed 18 metres. CONTROL EQUIPMENT WIRING The control and indicating panel will depend on the size of the protected building and the extent of the automatic protection provided. Specification of equipment would be based on numbers of zone circuits, sounder circuit, battery standby, remote center link ancillary control relays, and other individual customer requirements. Next to the control unit should be a diagrammatic plan showing zone locations. Siting of control and indication equipment 1. In an area of low fire risk 2. On the ground floor by entrance used by the fire brigade. 3. In an area common to all building users. 4. Where automatic detectors are in use, the control equipment area must be protected. 5. Alarm sounder must be sited next to the control unit STANDBY POWER SUPPLIES Standby supplies will usually be from secondary batteries with automatic chargers. These batteries must have an expected life of at least 4 years and the code specifically bans the use of automotive type batteries. When the mains supply fails the standby must be able to operate the alarm load for 30 minutes after a certain minimum duration. The minimum duration varies with the type of system and building occupancy. For life protection (L) if a mains failure will be recognized within 12 hours, a standby duration of 24 hours is required. If the 12-hour requirement is not likely to be met, a standby of 24 hours after the detection of the fault is required. For property protection (P) if the mains failure will immediately be recognized then a 24 hours standby is required, if not, then the required duration is 24 hours longer than the building may remain unoccupied. The satisfactory operation of a fire alarm system depends on the interconnection of its components. Some interconnections may have to function correctly for significant periods after being attacked by fire, e.g: cables to power supplies, control equipment and sounders. Other cables must function when a trigger device operates, but are not needed after an alarm has been raised, e.g: cables to manual call points, smoke detectors and heat detectors. Cables can therefore be classed in two groups: D8

274 1. Cables permissible if operation is not required during fire, e.g: Cables to manual call points, smoke and heat detectors. 2. Cables permissible if operation is required during a fire, e.g: Cables to power supplies, control equipment and alarm sounders. While mineral insulated cables are preferable for fire alarm applications, the following cables can be used for the two groups: Group 1 1. MICC to BS 6207: Part 1 with or without PVC sheath. 2. Cables complying with BS 6387 at least in categories AWX or SWX or A or S. 3. PVC insulated to BS 6004 sheathed or non-sheathed with mechanical protection. 4. Rubber insulated to BS PVC single type BK, BR and BU to BS PVC insulated SWA to BS Cross-linked polyethylene or hard ethylene-propylene rubber insulated SWA 8. to BS 5467 Group 2 9. Polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed coaxial cable to the dimensional requirements of BS 2316: Part 3 but with a minimum of 16-strands/0.2mm diameter central conductor. 10. Cables designed for the detection of heat. Cables 1 & 2 in Group 1 may be used for Group 2 applications. All the other cables shown above may also be used provided that they are protected either by burying them within a wall and covering them with 12mm of plaster or equivalent, or protecting them from a significant fire risk by shielding them with a wall, partition or floor having a minimum demonstrate 0.5 hour fire resistance. These requirements may in certain cases be reduced when included in areas of low risk or when covered by an automatic extinguishing system. Certain cables may also need mechanical protection against impact, abrasion or rodent attack. As a guide, cables 1, 6 and 7 above will not need further protection but all others may in risk circumstances. BS5839 Part 1 gives full details. Other types of cables can be used provided that their suitability can be clearly demonstrated. Conductors carrying fire alarm power or signals should be separated from conductors used for other systems INSTALLATION OF CABLES Cables should be installed in accordance with the good practices recommended in the latest edition of the IEE wiring regulations. Connection to a mains supply should be via an isolating switch fuse reseved solely for the purpose. Its cover must be painted red and labelled fire alarm do not switch off. Conductor size should take voltage drop into account. In any case conductors should have a cross-sectional area of not less than 1 square mm or, if stranded, of not less than 0.5 square mm. D9

275 Where possible, cables should be routed through areas of low fire risk. Cables installed in damp, corrosive or underground locations should be PVC sheathed. Where there is a risk of mechanical damage, cables should be protected accordingly. Cables in cavities or voids should be separated from other cables by 300mm, unless enclosed in a conduit, ducting or trunking. Screened cables complying to be BS 7629 can be run in duct or tray without segregation. ROUTINE TESTING OF SYSTEM The system should be regularly tested and serviced. BS5839 Part 1 makes the following recommendations: Daily (i) (ii) Check that the panel indicates normal operation. If not, record any fault indicated in the event log and report the fault to a responsible person. Check that any fault recorded for the previous day has received attention Weekly (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) Operate a manual call point or smoke detector to ensure the system operates properly. Each week a different detector should be checked. Check that the sounders have operated and then reset the system Check the battery connections. Complete the event log with details of date, time, trigger device tested and enter Routine Weekly Test the Action Required and reported to a responsible person Quarterly (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) Check entries in the log book and take any necessary action. Examine the batteries and their connections. Operate a manual call point or smoke detector to ensure the system operates properly, checking that all sounders are operating. Check that all functions of the alarm control panel operate by simulating fault conditions. Visually check that structural alterations have not been made that could have an effect on the siting of detectors and other trigger devices. Complete the event log with details of date, time, trigger device tested and Quarterly Test in the event sections. Any defects or alterations to equipment should also be entered. Annually (i) (ii) (iii) Carry out an inspection as detailed for the quarterly inspection. Every detector should be tested in situ. All cable fittings and equipment should be checked to ensure that they are secure and undamaged. D10

276 SECTION B: ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE DETECTION SYSTEMS Analogue Addressable Systems provide combined enhanced detection sensitivity and reduced false alarm potential to create a safer, trouble-free detection environment. Analogue addressable systems should achieve levels of fire detection and protector which embrace the virtues of fast and accurate response and high levels of detection sensitivity with a significantly reduced false alarm potential. The addressable system to meet the following:- The requirements of BS. EN54 Pt. 2 and 4: 1998 Installer-friendly plug in feature 2km maximum loop length Up to 120 devices per loop. Other Required Features:- Programmable sounder circuits direct from control panel. Capability to add manual sounder circuits, via loop alarm interface units. Sounders wired directly on to the detector loop Large capacity high intensity LCD-8 lines, with 40 characters per line Capacity for repeater panels on loop Facilities for on-site programming Password protected user and service menus Networking facility Dirty detector fault warning facility Day/night sensitivity adjustment capability Coincidence detection Pre-alarm facility Power supply remote option Network Capability The loop control panels should be capable of being interconnected easily to produce larger systems. When a fire or fault condition is detected on any of the control units an event message is passed to all the other panels connected to the system. It should be possible to interconnect fire detection systems on larger sites to form a single-site network. Within information from individual panels, available across the network, an overall fire plan, involving alerting or evacuating affected parts of the site can be implemented. D11

277 When a fire or fault condition is detected on any of the control units, an event message is passed on to all other panels connected to the system. Each panel will then display event information such as panel number, loop, zone/sector and address data. Alarm line operation across the network can be facilitated using zone and sector numbering. Alarm sounder options Alarm sounders can be connected to the system as follows: (i) On dedicated alarm lines, wired directly from the control panel. Four and eight separate alarm outputs to be are provided in the two and four loop control panels respectively. Each alarm circuit to be separately programmable to activate from any designated zone or zones of devices on the detection loop. (ii) (iii) Additional alarm lines to be connected to the system via alarm line interface units. Each unit to provide four programmable alarm line outputs and be capable of being positioned anywhere on the detection loop wiring. Where loop-wired sounders are used, these should be connected directly on the detector loop wiring. These units to be programmed either to sound a general alarm or be individually operated by a signal from any designated zone or zones of detection devices-hence offering a complete analogue addressable system on a single pair of wires. Electronic sounders to give sound outputs complying with the requirements of BS5839 Pt 1: The sounders to be capable of giving various sound types. Additional programmable features The following additional features to be programmed into the system: - address to zone number allocation (up to 128 zones) - address to device type (e.g. detector or call point) - zone, address, device type and sector text (24 characters each) - zone or sector intermittent alarm pattern allocation - 2 stage alarm timer - zone or sector to auxiliary relay timed operation. Further relays may be added by using remote relay interface units. - auxiliary input operation (e.g. silence/sound/evacuate etc) - 40 characters of site text displayed by the panel in normal state, with the time and date. - customer fire or fault programming - double knock/coincidence - day/night sensitivity - adjustable detector threshold levels D12

278 SYSTEM FEATURES Styled for the buildings of tomorrow Information relating to the status of the system to be clearly indicated via the panel s alphanumeric 8 line, high intensity liquid crystal display. 1, 2 or 4 Loop options Operation The panels to be capable of being connected to either 1, 2 or 4 detector loops each loop being up to 2 km in length and 4 or 8 programmable sounder circuits, respectively. Additionally, the panels to be capable of being networked together to provide even higher levels of detection and alarm system capacity. When networked, each panel to be configured to provide information relating to the entire fire detection system, thus enhancing the level of building safety. Access level one controls to be positioned on the front of the panel, for ease of operation. Level two controls are to be concealed behind a key operated cover, and once exposed, they should enable the operator to interrogate the system s memory to obtain information on the location, status and progress of any fire incident. Further levels of control, for example the disablement of, and reinstatement of detectors and zones, to be available via a security access code. The system s memory to be capable of recording historical information relating to the minimum, maximum and current analogue levels received from any address, providing the facility for the constant monitoring of detector condition and a record of normal fluctuations in the environment at each location, for simplification of routine testing and maintenance procedures. Installation Each panel to be supplied with address modules 1-60 for each loop. These are to be inserted into each appropriately numbered detector or call point on the system. Address modules to be supplied separately to cater for systems with more than 60 addressable devices per loop. Standard The system to comply with BS EN54 Pt Control and Indicating Equipment (CIE) and BS EN54 Pt Power Supply Equipment (PSE) SYSTEM OPERATION Operational characteristics The following is a brief summary of the main functions and the expected operational characteristics of the system. Adjustable pre and full alarm facilities Adjustable pre and full alarm thresholds to be set for individual detector addresses. Once a pre-alarm threshold has been reached, a signal to be sent to designated locations, alerting those responsible for system monitoring, that the potential for a fire incident may exist. When the full alarm threshold is reached, the system to automatically provide warning signals to pre-determined areas of the system, for purposes of facilitating orderly evacuation of those areas affected. D13

279 A day/night operation facility to be provided to give a desensitized level of detection during the day and full sensitivity during night time operation, without affecting immediate alarms from manual call points. Automatic detector fault facility High and low- level fault thresholds to be indicated. If a device s analogue level drifts, over a period of time from its normal background value, a fault indication to be given at the panel, showing the address of the detector. The detector can then be inspected and serviced or replaced if necessary. This facility to be included to increase building safety through simplification of routine maintenance, and testing. Line extensions Alarm and relay extension lines to be connected at any address on the analogue detection loop, using the appropriate interface. Repeater facility The dedicated repeater panel to be either connected to the detection loop, or spurred directly from a panel, if preferred. The Repeater Unit to be supplied with an 80 character LCD and integral power supply unit. Enhanced detector addressing Each system to be programmed to provide an address/detector indication for each device, which enables a DEVICE TYPE ERROR indication to be displayed at the control panel in the event of a wrong device being fitted. PC control colour graphics and date acquisition facility This add-on package, to feature a PC and monitor, complete with software and the origination of up to 12 site plans. Additional plans can be added as extras. D14

280 SECTION C: ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE DETECTORS ANALOGUE DETECTORS The analogue photoelectric smoke detector is ideally suited to the detection of slow burning fires. It employs an infra-red light source and photodiode to provide early warning of a hazard. Smoke particles entering the detection chamber cause light scatter, which is detected by the photodiode. The detector to be resistant to false alarms caused by dust, insects, high humidity and draughts. Analogue Ionization Smoke Detector Particularly suitable for identifying clean burning fires. The detector to incorporate twin sampling chambers which provide enhanced stability and inhibit the potential for false alarms caused by changing environmental conditions. Analogue Heat Detector to be capable of being configured by the control panel to operate either as a fast response, medium response heat detector, or a high temperature detector. Common Mounting Base to be compatible with detectors (both analogue and conventional). The base to incorporate a secure locking tab and position indicator, facilitating the correct orientation of the detector for optimum viewing of the detector s LED ANALOGUE REPEATER PANELS Analogue Addressable Repeater Panel The repeater unit to incorporate a 2 x 40 character liquid crystal display, with the optional facility of an integral printer. Additional features to include own log, to receive and store information from the main panel, and an output to facilitate the addition of a mimic repeater panel. The standard unit to be surface or flush mounted. Slimline Mimic Diagram (SMD) The slimline machine is designed to augment the information provided by main or repeat panel. The SMD helps to maximize alarm flexibility, whilst reducing system wiring to an absolute minimum. The module is installed either as a sounder detector base or as a stand-alone wall or ceiling mounted unit. Either option is accommodated directly on the two wire detector loop. The fully programmable SMD to allow alarm organization on a single sounder, zonal or general alarm basis. The self-powered facility to allow up to 120 detection devices and up to 55 addressable sounders to be connected on to the loop wiring. The SMD to have selectable tones, continuous intermittent or warble. To be used in systems designed to BS5839 Pt 1. The sound output to be rated at 93 db. Addressable Sounder The loop wired addressable sounder is to be used with analogue addressable fire systems. Installed either in conjunction with a detector or on a stand alone basis, the sounder is addressed and powered directly from the detector loop. The unit to provide a sound level of 85 dba, and offer continuous intermittent or warble sound types, all within the recommended BS5839 Pt 1 frequency. Each analogue loop to have a maximum of 30 units. D15

281 19.0 LOOP INTERFACE UNITS To help provide input/output signals from anywhere on the loop wiring. This device to enable automatic operation of building plant in the event of a fire or the interface with existing fire detection or fire extinguishing systems to be easily incorporated. Alarm/power supply interface units to allow additional alarm lines to be wired from any loop location. Each unit to provide the facility for using four independent programmable alarm circuits (1A maximum per alarm line, 3A maximum load). Alarm lines to be controlled without the need to wire directly back to the panel. Relay/power supply interface unit to provide four additional programmable relay contacts (5A, 30 VDC) to enable output signals for operating external equipment. This unit to have a dedicated 240VAC supply and should be capable of being connected at any address location on the detection loops. Interface units, loop maximums. A maximum of 3 alarm interfaces and 4 relay interfaces may be connected to each loop controller, with each loop controller controlling two loops. As a two loop panel contains a single loop controller, a maximum of 3 alarm line interfaces and 4 relay interfaces may be connected to loops 1 and 2 or a combination of both. A four loop panel contains 2 loop controllers enabling a maximum of 3 alarm interfaces to be connected to either loop 1 or 2 with a similar number on either loop 3 or 4. Short circuit isolator provides protection of the detection loop. This ensures that the remainder of the loop protected by the short circuit isolator arrangement continues to function should a fault occur. Standard interface unit enables a spur, containing a maximum of 5 standard detectors, and an unlimited number of conventional call points to be connected to the detection loop. UP to 10 interface units may be connected to a loop. Conventional call points should be wired before conventional detectors on any spur circuit. They should not be mixed. Input/Output interface unit provides both input and output signals directly on to the loop. Input signals from other fire protection systems can be displayed at the control panel. Output signals can be provided in order to operate plant shut down or door release equipment ADDRESSABLE BREAK GLASS CALL POINTS The call point is addressed in a similar manner to the addressable detector bases, using the same set of address modules. There is no restriction on the number that may be used on a loop, up to a maximum of 120 address points. An LED indicator is incorporated as standard to confirm that the unit has operated. Weatherproof break glass callpoint For exterior applications, where required. D16

282 PART E: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SERVICES E/1

283 PART E: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SERVICES CONTENTS ITEM DESCRIPTION PAGE NO. 1.0 AN OVERVIEW OF CABLING STANDARDS E/3 2.0 HORIZOTNAL CABLING SYSTEM STRUCTURE E/4 3.0 BACKBONE CABLING SYSTEM STRUCTURE E/5 4.0 OPEN OFFICE CABLING E/6 5.0 HORIZONTAL DISTANCES OF OPTICAL FIBER LINKS (LONG WORK AREA CABLES) E/6 6.0 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CLOSET E/7 7.0 TWISTED-PAIR (BALANCED) CABLING E/8 8.0 UTP TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTOR E/9 9.0 FULLY SHIELDED TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTOR E/ UTP CONNECTING HARDWARE VS. CABLE NEXT PERFORMANCE E/ SCREENED CABLING (ScTP) E/ FULLY SHIELDED CABLING (SSTP) E/ OPTICAL FIBER CABLING E/ CABLING SPECIFICATION CROSS-REFERENCE CHART (ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A AND ISO/IEC 11801) E/ MODULAR WIRING REFERENCE E/ RECOMMENDED CABLING PRACTICES E/ UTP CONNECTOR TERMINATIONS E/ ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A E/ TIA/EIA-569-A-1 E/ TIA/EIA-569-A-2 E/23 E/2

284 AN OVERVIEW OF CABLING STANDARDS ANS/TIA/EIA-568-A and ISO/IEC The latest editions of the ANS/TIA/EIA-568-A (568-A) AND iso/iec ( 11801) cabling standards were both published in The following overview provides some of the requirements and recommendations of each standard including differences between them. ANS/TIA/EIA-568-A Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard. The Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) TR42.1 (formerly TR41.8.1) working Group on telecommunications cabling published the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A standard in ISO/IEC Information Technology Generic Cabling for Customer Premises. The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) SC 25/WG 3 Working Group on telecommunications cabling published the ISO/IEC standard in Following are highlights of the 568-A standard and related Telecommunication Systems Bulletins (TSBs) with notes on differences in terminology and technical requirements with respect to For clarity and consistency, 568-A based terminology is used in the following overview. Purpose To specify a generic voice and data telecommunications cabling system that will support a multiproduct, multi-vendor environment. To provide direction for the design of telecommunications equipment and cabling products intended to serve commercial enterprises. To enable the planning and installation of a structured cabling system for commercial buildings that is capable of supporting the diverse telecommunications needs of building occupants. To establish performance and technical criteria for various types of cable and connecting hardware and for cabling system design and installation. Scope Specifications are intended for telecommunications installations that are office oriented. Requirements are for structured cabling system with a usable life in excess of 10 years. Specifications addressed: - Recognized Media - Cable and connecting Hardware - Performance - Topology - Cabling Distance - Installation Practices - User Interfaces - Channel Performance E/3

285 Cabling Elements Horizontal Cabling: - Horizontal Cross-connect (HC) - Horizontal Cable - Transition Point (optional) - Consolidation Point (optional0 - Telecommunications-Outlet/Connector (TO) Backbone Cabling - Main Cross-connect (MC) - Interbuilding Backbone Cable - Intermediate Cross-connect (IC) - Intrabuilding Backbone Cable Work Area (WA) Telecommunications Closet (TC) Equipment Room (ER) Entrance Facility (EF) Administration HORIZONTAL CABLING SYSTEM STRUCTURE The horizontal cabling system extends from the telecommunications outlet in the work area to the horizontal cross-connect in the telecommunications closet. It includes the telecommunications outlet, an optional consolidation point or transition point connector, horizontal cable, and the mechanical terminations and patch cords (or jumpers) that comprise the horizontal cross-connect. Some points specified for the horizontal cabling subsystem include: Recognized Horizontal Cables: 4 pair 100 unshielded twisted-pair. 2-fiber (duplex) 62.5/125 m or multimode optical fiber 9note: 50/125 m multimode fiber will be allowed in 568-B) A minimum of two telecommunications outlets are required for each individual work area. First outlet: 100 twisted pair (category 5e is recommended) Second outlet: 100 twisted pair. Two-fiber multimode optical fiber either 62.5/125 m or 50/125 m. One transition point (TP) is allowed between different forms of the same cable type (i.e. where undercarpet cable connects to round cable) 50 coax and 150 STP-A cabling is not recommended for new installations. Additional outlets may be provided. These outlets are in addition to and may not replace the minimum requirements of the standard. Bridged taps and splices are not allowed for copper-based horizontal cabling. (Splices are allowed for fiber). E/4

286 Application specific components shall not be installed as part of the horizontal cross-connect (eg. Splitters, baluns). The proximity of horizontal cabling to sources of electromagnetic interference (EM) shall be taken into account. BACKBONE CABLING SYSTEM STRUCTURE The backbone cabling system provides interconnections between telecommunications closets, equipment rooms, and entrance facilities. It includes backbone cables, intermediate and main cross-connects, mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for backbone-to-backbone cross-connections. The backbone also extends between buildings in a campus environment. Equipment connections to backbone cabling should be made with cable lengths of 30m (98 ft) or less. The backbone cabling shall be configured in a star topology. Each horizontal cross-connect is connected directly to a main cross-connect or to an intermediate cross-connect, then to a main crossconnect. The backbone is limited to no more than two hierarchical levels of cross-connects (main and intermediate). No more than one cross-connect may exist between a main and a horizontal crossconnects may exist between any two horizontal cross-connects. A total maximum backbone distance of 90m (295 ft.) is specified for high band-width capability over copper. This distance is for uninterrupted backbone runs. (No intermediate cross-connect). The distance between the terminations in the entrance facility and the main cross-connect shall be documented and should be made available to the service provider. Recognized media may be used individually or in combination, as required by the installation. Quantity of pairs and fibers needed in individual backbone runs depends on the area served. Recognized backbone cables are: 100 UTP 150 stp-a 625/125 Multimode Optical Fiber Single mode Optical Fiber Multipair cable is allowed, provided that it satisfies the power sum crosstalk requirements. The proximity of backbone cabling to sources of electromagnetic interference (EMI) shall be taken into account. Cross-connects for different cable types must be located in the same facilities. Bridged taps are not allowed. WORK AREA: The telecommunications outlet serves as the work area interface to the cabling system. Work area equipment and cables used to connect to the telecommunications outlet are outside the scope of 568-A and 11801, but are expected to be specified in the next edition of these standards. E/5

287 4.0 OPEN OFFICE CABLING: Additional specifications for horizontal cabling in areas with moveable furniture and partitions have been introduced in TIA/EIA TSB75. Horizontal cabling methodologies are specified for open-office environments by means of multi-user telecommunications outlet assemblies and consolidation points. These methodologies are intended to provide increased flexibility and economy for installation with open office work spaces that require frequent configuration. HORIZONTAL DISTANCES OF COPPER LINKS (OPEN OFFICE) Copper work area cables connected to a MuTOA, shall meet the requirements of 568-A (sec and 11.5). The maximum length of copper work area cables shall be determined according to: C = (102 H)/12 W = C 7 (<29 m) Where: C is the combined length of the work area cable, equipment Cable, and patch cord (m). W is the length of the work area cable (m). H is the length of the horizontal cable (m) The above equations assume that there is a total of 7m (23 ft.) of patch and equipment cables in the telecommunications closet. Table 1 shows the application of these formulae. The length of work area cables shall not exceed 20m (66 ft). The MuTOA shall be marked with the maximum allowable work area cable length. Length of Horizontal Cable Maximum Length of Work Area Cable Maximum Combined Length of Work Area Cables, Patch Cords, and Equipment Cable H W C m (ft) m (ft) m(ft) 90 (295) 3 (10) 10 (33) 85 (279) 7 (23) 14 (46) 80 (262) 11 (36) 18 (59) 75 (246) 15 (49) 22 (72) 70 (230) 20 (66) 27 (89) Table 1 Maximum Length of Work Area Cables 5.0 HORIZONTAL DISTANCES OF OPTICAL FIBER LINKS (LONG WORK AREA CABLES) For optical fiber cables, any length combination or length of the horizontal channel does not exceed 100m (328 ft). When deploying a centralized fiber cabling topology, the general guidelines of TSB72 shall be followed. E/6

288 6.0 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CLOSET Telecommunications closets are generally considered to be floor serving facilities for horizontal cable distribution. They may also be used for intermediate and main cross-connects. Some specifications related to the telecommunications closet: Closets shall be designed and equipped in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A. Cable stress from tight bends, cable ties, staples, and tension should be avoided by well-designed cable management. Only standards-compliant connecting hardware shall be used. Cables and cords used for active equipment connections are outside the scope of the standard (10m total allowed for patch cords, equipment cables, and work area cables for each link). Application-specific electrical components shall not be installed as part of the horizontal cabling. Horizontal cable terminations shall not be used to administer cabling system changes. Instead, jumpers patch cords, or equipment cords are required for re-configuring cabling connections The two types of schemes used to connect cabling subsystems to each other and to equipment are known as interconnections and cross-connections. DEFINITIONS: Cross-Connection: A connection scheme using patch cords or jumpers that attach to connecting hardware on each end. Interconnection: A connection scheme that provides for direct connections to building cabling from equipment without a patch cord. E/7

289 7.0 TWISTED-PAIR (BALANCED) CABLING The six categories of transmission performance specified for cables, connecting hardware and links are: Designation Transmission Characteristics Description 3 Transmission characteristics Meets applicable are specified up to 16 MHz. category 3 and Class C requirements of ISO/IEC (including amendments A.1 & A.2), ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A (including addenda A-1, A-2, & A.3) and TSB67. Requirements are specified to an upper frequency limit of 16MHz. 4 Transmission characteristics are Meets applicable specified up to 20 MHz category 4 requirements of ISO/IEC (including amendments A.1 & A.2), ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A (including addenda A-1, A-2 & A-3) and TSB67.Requirements are specified to an upper frequency limit of 20 MHz. This classification is a superset of 3 5 Transmission characteristics are Meets applicable ca specified up to 100 MHz. Category 5 and class D requirements of ISO/IEC (including addenda A-1, A-2 & A-3), TSB67 and draft TSB95. Requirements are specified to an upper frequency limit of 100 MHz. This classification is a superset of 4. 5e Transmission characteristics are Performs to category specified up to 100 MHz. 5e and additional class D requirements of draft amendment 3 of ISO/IEC 11801, and draft addendum 5 to ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A. Requirements are specified to an upper frequency limit of 100 MHz. This classification is a superset of Transmission characteristics Performs to category Will be specified up to 250 MHz. 6 and class E requirements under development by ISO/IEC and TIA. E/8

290 Requirements are expected to be specified to an upper frequency limit of at least 250 MHz. This classification is a superset of 5e 7. Transmission characteristics will Performs to category Be specified up to 600 MHz. 7 and class F requirements under development by ISO/IEC. Requirements are expected to be specified to an upper frequency limit of at least 600 MHz. This classification is an electrical superset of 6. Category 6 and 7 industry are currently under development. UTP TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTOR 8-position modular jack per IEC (.568-A states that all pairs must be connected). Pin/pair assignment: T568A Optional assignment to accommodate certain systems: T568B. Durability rating 750 mating cycles minimum. Backward compatibility and interoperability is required. FULLY SHIELDED TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTOR. Entirely new interface design to support class F cabling. Will require a new wiring pin/pair assignment. Transmission measurement methods for category 7 are under study. Durability rating 1000 mating cycles minimum. UTP CONNECTING HARDWARE VS. CABLE NEXT PERFORMANCE. Specifications cover all types of connectors used in the cabling system including the telecommunications outlet/connector. Does not cover work area adapters, baluns, protection, MAUs, filters, or other application-specific devices. Temperature range -10 C (14 F) to 60 C (140 F). Outlets shall be securely mounted. Outlet boxes with unterminated cables must be covered and marked. Transmission requirements are much more severe than cable of a corresponding category. Performance markings should be provided to show the applicable transmission category and should be visible during installation (for example 5e) in addition to safety markings. Installed connectors shall be protected from physical damage and moisture. UTP LINK PERFORMANCE MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION Link category marking should be clearly visible on both ends (component markings are not sufficient). Labelling, markings, and color-coding shall be provided in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-606. E/9

291 SCREENED CABLING (ScTP) ScTP: As a result of the release of TIA/EIA/IS-729 and the maturity of the 568-A and standards, telecommunications groups recognize the presence of an overall shield over four twisted-pairs; a media hybrid termed Screened Twisted-Pair or ScTP cabling. Color-coding: Pair 1 = White/Blue-Blue Pair 2 = White/Orange-Orange Pair 3 = White/Green-Green. Pair 4 = White/Brown-Brown 0.51mm (24 AWG) 100 Ω 4-pair enclosed by a foil shield. A copper conductor drain wire of.040mm (26 AWG) or larger shall be provided. Should be marked 100 Ω ScTP, in addition to any safety markings required by local or national codes. Same mechanical and transmission requirements apply to backbone and horizontal cables. Additional performance requirements, including surface transfer impedance, is specified in the IS- 729 standard entitled, Technical Specifications for 100 Ω Screened Twisted-Pair Cabling. ScTP Connectors: Interface and pair assignments same as IEC ( 568-A states that all 4 pairs must be connected). Additional transfer impedance and shield mating interface requirements specified in the IS-729 standard entitled, Technical Specifications for 100 Ω Screened Twisted-pair Cabling. ScTP Patch Cords: Specifications call for 26 AWG (7 0.15mm) or 24 AWG (7 0.20mm) stranded conductors. Allows for an overall shield. Less severe attenuation than horizontal cable. ScTP Installation Practices: Shield shall be bonded at both ends at the Telecommunication Grounding Busbar. The difference between the two grounds shall be no more than 1.0 V RMS. FULLY SHIELDED CABLING (SSTP) Fully shielded cabling requirements are under development by ISO. Cable and connector specification will extend to at least 600 MHz and are intended to support the pending class F cabling requirements. Fully Shielded Cable: Color-coding: Pair 1 = White/Blue-Blue Pair 2 = White/Orange-Orange Pair 3 = White/Green-Green Pair 4 = White/Brown-Brown Four 0.51mm (24 AWG) or larger 100 Ω twisted-pairs each enclosed by an individual foil shield with an overall shield provided over the four-pairs. Mechanical and transmission requirements are under development by ISO. Fully Shielded Connectors: Interface and pair assignments are under development by ISO and will be entirely different from the T568A and T568B assignments. Mechanical and transmission requirements are under development by ISO. E/10

292 Fully Shielded Patch Cables. Mechanical and transmission requirements are under development by ISO. Fully Shielded Installation Practices: Installation Practices are under development by ISO.- TSB67 Transmission Performance Specifications for Field Testing of UTP Cabling Systems This bulletin provides users with the opportunity to use comprehensive test methods to validate the transmission performance characteristics of installed category 5 and lower grade UTP cabling systems. The categories of UTP cabling systems in this bulletin also correspond with the UTP cabling categories of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A.Additional transmission performance and applicable field test requirements are referenced in TSB95, 568-A-5 and amendment 2 to (FDAM 2) Some points specified for TSB67 transmission field testing for UTP Cabling Systems UTP cabling systems are comprised of cables and connecting hardware specified in TIA/EIA-568- A. Required test parameters include wire-map, length, attenuation, and crosstalk. Two levels of pass or fail are indicated, depending on measured margin compared to minimum specifications. Testing of NEXT loss is required in both directions. Level II equipment meets the most stringent requirements for TSB67 measurement accuracy. Level IIe equipment will be required to verify category 5e and FDAM 2 performance. Requirements are intended for performance validation and are provided in addition to 568-A requirements on components and installation practices. OPTICAL FIBER CABLING The current 568-A specification on optical fiber cabling consists of one recognized cable type for horizontal subsystems and two cable types for backbone subsystems: Horizontal 62.5/125 μm multimode (two fibers per outlet). Backbone /125 μm multimode or singlemode. 568-B will allow the use of 50/125 μm multimode optical fiber in both the horizontal and backbone in addition to the types listed above. All optical fiber components and installed practices shall meet applicable building and safety codes Optical Fiber Patch Cords: Shall be a two-fiber (duplex) indoor cable Of the same type as the cables to which they connect. Shall allow for easy connection and reconnection and ensure that polarity is maintained (568SC) configuration required). Shall perform a pair-wise cross-over of fiber positions A and B. (If provided in simplex form, one connector shall be identified as A and the other B.) Installation of Optical Fiber Connecting Hardware: Connectors shall be protected from physical damage and moisture. Capacity for 12 or more fibers per rack space [44.5mm (1.75 in.)] should be provided. Optical fiber connecting hardware shall be installed: - To provide well organized installation with cable management. - In accordance with manufacturer s guidelines. Optical Fiber Cabling Installation: A minimum of 1m (3.28 ft.) of two-fiber cable (or two buffered fibers) shall be accessible for termination purposes. Testing is recommended to assure correct polarity and acceptable link performance. Informative Annex H of 568-A is provided for recommended optical fiber link performance testing criteria. E/11

293 Optical Fiber Work Area Connector: A simplex or duplex SC connector shall be used at the work area. Recommended adapter and connector is the 586SC (a duplex SC that is capable of simplex operation). Optical Fiber Connections: Connector designs shall meet the requirements of the corresponding TIA FOCIS documents. Telecommunications outlet/connector boxes shall be securely mounted at planned locations. The telecommunications outlet/connector box shall have: - The ability to secure optical fibers. - Cable management means to assure a minimum bend radius of 25mm (1.00 in.) and should have slack storage capability. - Provisions for terminating a minimum of two optical fibers into a 568SC adapter. Identification of fiber types: - Multimode connectors and adapters shall be identified with the color beige. - Single mode connectors and adapters shall be identified with the color blue. The two positions in a duplex connector are referred to as position A and position B. The 568SC adapter performs a pair-wise cross-over between position A and position B of two mated connectors. Optical fiber runs intended for future connections shall be stored in a telecommunications outlet/connector box. Small Form Factor (SFF) Connectors: Qualified SFF duplex and multi-fiber connector designs may be used in the main cross connect, intermediate cross-connect, horizontal cross-connect, and consolidation points. A TIA Fiber Optic Connect Intermateability Standard (FOCIS) shall describe each SFF design. The SFF design shall satisfy the requirements specified in Annex A of the proposed 568-B.3 standard. Some advantages of SFF connectors include compact size, modular compatibility with the eight position modular copper interface, and adaptability to high-density network electronics. TSB72 Centralized Optical Fiber Cabling Guidelines This Telecommunications Systems Bulletin (TSB) provides the user with the flexibility of designing an optical fiber cabling systems for centralized electronics typically in single tenant buildings. It contains information and guidelines for centralized optical fiber cabling. Some points specified in TSB-72 for a centralized optical fiber cabling system include: Intended for single-tenant users who desire centralized vs. distributed electronics. Implementation allows cables to be spliced or interconnected at the telecommunications closet such that cables can be routed to a centralized distributor for total cable lengths of 300m (984 ft.) or less, including patch cords or jumpers. Allows for migration from an interconnection or splice to a cross-connection scheme that can also support distributed electronics. Pull-through implementations are allowed when total length between the tele-communications outlet/connector and centralized cross-connect and centralized cross-connect is 90m (295 ft.) or less. Connecting hardware required to: - join fibers by re-mateable connectors or splices, - connectors shall be 568SC interface, - provide for simplex or duplex connection of optical fibers, - provide means of circuit identification, - allow for addition and removal of optical fibers. E/12

294 Note: Some multi-mode fiber implementations may be limited to an operating range of 220m to support 1000BASE-SX TIA/EIA-568-A-1 Propagation Delay and delay Skew This addendum to 568-A describes propagation delay and delay skew requirements for all 568-A compliant 4-pair 100Ω cables. Propagation delay and delay skew requirements of multipair cables are subject to additional study. Propagation delay is equivalent to the amount of time that passes between when a signal is transmitted and when it is received at the other end of a cabling channel. Delay skew is the difference between the pair with the least delay and the pair with the most delay. Transmission errors that are associated with excessive delay and the delay skew include increased jitter and bit error rates. The maximum propagation delay skew requirement for 4-pair 100Ω cables is frequency dependent and is specified by the following equation: Delay (ns/100m) / ƒmhz Cable delay skew shall not exceed 45 ns/100m between 1 MHz and the highest referenced frequency for a given category. It is anticipated that the requirements of 568-A-1 will also be applicable to pending category 6 cable propagation delay and delay skew specifications while more stringent performance criteria will be specified for pending category 7 cables TIA/EIA-568-A-2 Corrections and additions to TIA/EIA-568-A This addendum to 568-A provides modifications and corrections to the content of 568-A as a result of advances in telecommunications research and development. Revisions are as follows: 1. Centralized optical fiber cabling is referenced in two locations (5.2.1 and 7.4.1) as an alternative to the optical cross-connection located in the telecommunications closet when deploying 62.5/125 µm optical fiber cable in the horizontal. TIA/EIA TSB72 Centralized Optical Fiber Cabling Guidelines are also referenced. 2. The ANSI/ICEA reference in section was updated to ANSI/ICEA S for specifying the physical and mechanical requirements of 568-A recognized cables. 3. Additional text was incorporated into section specifying that the connecting hardware used for 100Ω UTP cabling shall not result in or contain any transposed (e.g transposition of pairs 2 or 3) or reversed (also called tip/ring reversals) pairs. It is further noted that applications requiring transposed or reversed pairs shall utilize adapters, work area or equipment cords to swap pairs. 4. A reference to the TSB67 field test methodologies is added to section The 568SC optical fiber connector axial pull off strength requirement was decreased from 22 N (5 lbf) to 19.4 N (4.4 lbf) 6. Globally, the word polarization was replaced with polarity. 7. The initial contact resistance specified in Annex A for connecting hardware was increased from 1 mω to 2.5 mω and the contact resistance measurement method was re-written to be more user-friendly. E/13

295 8. A provision for common mode terminations for testing connecting hardware NEXT loss and return loss was incorporated into Annex B. This revision accommodates telecommunications networking implementations that may employ common mode terminations in the active equipment TIA/EIA-568-A-3 Addendum 3 to TIA/EIS-568-A As a result of the demand for open office architecture and the need to support multiple telecommunications applications in a shared sheath, this addendum to 568-A addresses revised performance specifications for hybrid cables. 568-A-3 also introduces a new term called bundled cables to describe 4-pair cable assemblies that are not covered by an overall sheath (as specified for hybrid cables), but by any generic binding method such as speed-wrap or cable-ties The new hybrid and bundled cable requirements state that power sum NEXT loss between all non-fiber cable types within that cable shall be 3 db better than the specified pair-to-pair NEXT loss for each cable type TIA/EIA-568-A-4 Production Modular Cord NEXT Loss Test Method and Requirements for Unshielded Twisted-Pair Cabling TIA/EIA-568-A-4 defines a generic and non-destructive methodology for NEXT loss testing of modular plug cords. NEXT loss performance requirements for category 5 modular plug cords, when measured with the particular test head specified in the Standard, are provided. Note that, although the methodology may be used as the basis for determining the minimum NEXT loss performance requirements of other categories of modular plug cords, at present, the Standard does not define a test head or specific test limits for category 5e or category 6 patch cords. The methodology described in the Standard contains the detailed NEXT loss calculations (which are based upon patch cable NEXT loss, test head NEXT loss, and cable and connector attenuation contributions) for the determination of the NEXT loss limits for any category patch cord and suitably designed teat head TIA/EIA-568-A-5 Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-pair 100Ω Enhanced Category 5 Cabling. 568-A-5 specifies enhanced category 5 (category 5e) performance requirements. These requirements are recommended for new category 5 cabling installations and are expected to become the de facto minimum standard for category 5 cabling. This document addresses the minimum equal level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT) and return loss requirements necessary to support developments in applications technology and defines the minimum performance needed for a worst case for-connector channel to support applications that utilize full-duplex transmission schemes, such as Gigabit Ethernet. To ensure additional crosstalk headroom for robust applications support, this document also specifies power sum performance requirements for category 5e cables and cabling. Addendum A-5 is a normative document and, unlike TSB95, it provides mandatory requirements, not recommendations. TIA/EIA TSB95 Additional Transmission Performance Guidelines for 100Ω 4-pair Category 5 Cabling. TSB95 outlines minimum recommendations for the new channel parameters of return loss and equal level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT). These return loss and ELFEXT recommendations are specified to ensure the support of Gigabit Ethernet over installed or legacy category 5 cabling and were derived from worst case performances of channels with only two connection points. The two-connector channel topology is consistent with the IEEE committee s assumption that cabling used to support Gigabit Ethernet systems will most likely utilize an interconnect instead of a cross-connect field and will not include a consolidation or transition point connection. Existing installed category 5 cabling should be verified to ensure that performance meets the minimum recommendations of this document. Channel configurations with three or E/14

296 four connectors that meet the specified ELFEXT and return loss recommendations will also support Gigabit Ethernet. Because the specifications of this document are applicable for the qualification of existing, installed cabling only, they are not recommended to be used As the minimum performance criteria for new category 5 cabling. TIA/EIA/IS-729 Technical Specifications for 100Ω Screened Twisted-Pair Cabling. IS-729 is an interim standard that supplements TIA-568-A and ISO/IES screened twisted-pair cabling specifications by describing additional technical requirements on the outlet interface, shield effectiveness, installation practices, and performance relative to ScTP links and components ISO/IEC 11801:1995 FDAM 2 Draft Amendment 2 to ISO/IEC The performance specifications in ISO amendment 2 provide new requirements for return loss and ELFEXT loss to compliment the existing ISO class D requirements. The new specified return loss and ELFEXT loss requirements are in harmony with the values proposed in 568-A-5, however, the document does not specify additional NEXT loss margin over and above the existing class D requirements. FDAM 2 also includes propagation delay and delay skew requirements for channels and permanent links that are in harmony with the requirements of TIA/EIA-568-A-1 The requirements of amendment 2 to ISO/IES are normative and this document will become the governing international standard for new class D cabling installations. E/15

297 CABLING SPECIFICATION CROSS-REFERENCE CHART (ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A AND ISO/IEC 11801) The following chart provides a side-by-side comparison that highlights many of the fundamental similarities and differences between ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A and ISO/IEC ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A (and addenda) Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard ISO/IEC (and amendments) Generic Cabling for Customer Premises HORIZONTAL UTP CABLE Solid 4-pair 0.51mm (24 AWG) specified (0.64mm (22 AWG) solid also allowed). An overall shield ((ScTP) is optional. Performance marking should be provided to show the applicable performance category. These markings do not replace safety markings. Colour-coding: White/blue-blue White/orange-orange White/green-green White/brown-brown. HYBRID AND BUNDLED CABLES Hybrid/Bundled cables: Hybrid/bundled cables that contain multiple units of recognized horizontal copper cables are subject to additional NEXT loss requirements between cable units. These requirements assure a minimum of 3 db additional power sum crosstalk isolation between applications that may operate on adjacent binder groups. All detailed specifications for the individual cable units used in the hybrid assembly still apply. Hybrid bundled cables shall meet the transmission requirements specified in TIA/EIA-568-A-3. UTP PATCH CORDS AND CROSS-CONNECT JUMPERS. Patch cords must use stranded cable for adequate flex life Standard cables must meet the minimum performance requirements for horizontal cable except that 20 percent more attenuation is allowed by 568-A and 50 percent more attenuation is allowed by Color-code for cross-connect jumpers: One conductor white, the other a visibly distinct color such as red or blue. Performance markings should be provided to show the applicable transmission category in addition to safety markings. Insulated O.D of stranded wires should be 0.8mm (0.032 in.) to 1mm (0.039 in.) to fit into a modular plug. Production performance specifications for plug cord assemblies are addressed in 568-A-4 Color codes for stranded, 100 UTP patch cord: Option 1 Option 2 White/blue-blue PAIR 1 green-red White/orange-orange PAIR 2 black-yellow White/green-green PAIR 3 blue-orange White/brown-brown PAIR 4 brown-slate Note: Because of their identical pair groupings, patch cords terminated with either T568A or T568B pair assignments may be used interchangeably, provided that both ends are terminated with the same pin/pair scheme. E/16

298 BACKBONE UTP CABLE Performance markings should be provided to show the applicable performance category. These markings do not replace safety markings. Services with incompatible signal levels should be partitioned into separate binder groups. Guidelines for shared sheaths are provided in Annex D of 568-A. Transmission requirements are equivalent to horizontal cables except that NEXT loss performance is based on power-sum rather than worst-pair characterization to allow for multiple disturbing signals (of the same type) in the same sheath. Note: Tip conductors have colored insulation that corresponds to that of the binder group. Ring conductors have colored insulation that corresponds to that of the pair. Backbone UTP cables consist of solid 0.51 mm (24 AWG) cables that contain more than four pairs (typically multiples of 25-pairs are used). An overall shield is optional. Color-coding (specified by reference to ICEA) Styles: MODULAR WIRING REFERENCE Modular Jack There are four basic modular jack styles. The 8-position modular outlets are commonly and incorrectly referred to as RJ45. The 6-position modular jack is commonly referred to as RJ11. Using these terms can sometimes lead to confusion since the RJ designation actually refer to very specific wiring configurations called Universal Service Order Code (USOC). The designation RJ means Registered Jack. Each of these basic jack styles can be wired for different RJ configurations. For example, the 6-position jack can be4 wired as an RJ11C (1`-pair), RJ14C (2-pair), or RJ25C (3-pair) configuration. An 8-position jack can be wired for configurations such as RJ61C (4-pair) and RJ48C. The keyed 8-position jack can be wired for RJ46S, and RJ47S. The fourth modular jack style is a modified version of the 6-position jack (modified modular jack or MMJ). It was designed to eliminate the possibility of connecting DEC data equipment to voice lines and vice versa. MODULAR PLUG PAIR CONFIGURATIONS It is important that the pairing of wires in the modular plug match the pairs in the modular jack as well as the horizontal and backbone wiring. If they do not, the data being transmitted may be paired with incompatible signals. Modular cords wired to the T568A color scheme on both ends are compatible with T568B systems and vice versa. STRAIGHT THROUGH OR REVERSED? Modular cords are used for two basic applications. One application uses them for patching between modular patch panels. When used in this manner modular cords should always be wired straight through (pin 1 to pin 1, pin 2 to pin 2, pin 3 to pin 3, etc). The second major application uses modular cords to connect the workstation equipment (PC, phone, FAX etc) to the modular outlet. These modular cords may either be wired straight-through or reversed (pin 1 to pin 6, pin 2 to pin 5, pin 3 to pin 4, etc.) depending on the system manufacturer s specifications. This reversed wiring is typically used for voice systems. The following is a guide to determine what type of modular cord you have HOW TO READ A MODULAR CORD Align the plugs side-by-side with the contacts facing you and compare the wire colors from left to right. If the colors appear in the same order on both plugs, the cord is wired straight-through. If the colors appear reversed on the second plug (from right to left), the cord is wired reversed. E/17

299 COMMON OUTLET CONFIGURATIONS Two wiring schemes have been adopted by the 568-A and standards. They are nearly identical except that pairs two and three are reversed. T568A is the preferred scheme because it is compatible with 1 or 2-pair USOC systems. Either configuration can be used for Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) and high speed data applications. Transmission categories 3, 4, 5, 5e, and 6 are only applicable to this type of pair grouping. USOC wiring is available for 1-, 2-, 3-, or 4-pair systems. Pair 1 occupies the center conductors, pair 2 occupies the next two contacts out, etc. One advantage to this scheme is that a 6-position plug configured with 1, 2, or 3 pairs can be inserted into an 8-position jack and still maintain pair continuity. A note of warning though, pins 1 and 8 on the jack may become damaged from this practice. A disadvantage is the poor transmission performance associated with this type of pair sequence. None of these pair schemes is cabling standard compliant. 10Base-T wiring specifies an 8-position jack but uses only two pairs. These are pairs two and three of T568A and T568B schemes. The MMJ is a unique wiring scheme for DEC equipment. RECOMMENDED CABLING PRACTICES Do s Dont s: Terminate each horizontal cable on a dedicated telecommunications outlet. Locate the main cross-connect near the center of the building to limit cable distances. Maintain the twist of horizontal and backbone cable pairs up to the point of termination. Tie and dress horizontal cables neatly and with a minimum bend radius of 4 times the cable diameter. Do not use connecting hardware that is of a lower category than the cable being used. Do not create multiple appearances of the same cable at several distribution points (called bridged taps) Do not over-tighten cable ties, use staples, or make sharp bends with cables. Do not place cable near equipment that may generate high levels of electromagnetic interference. UTP CONNECTOR TERMINATIONS Pair twists shall be maintained as close as possible to the point of termination. Untwisting shall not exceed 25mm (1.0 in) for category 4 links and 13mm (0.5 in) for category 5, category 5e, and category 6 links. Follow manufacturer guidelines for category 3 products, if no guidelines exist, then untwisting shall not exceed 75mm (3.0 in). Connecting hardware shall be installed to provide well-organized installation with cable management and in accordance with manufacturer s guidelines. Strip back only as much jacket as is required to terminate individual pairs. UTP CABLING INSTALLATION PRACTICES. To avoid stretching, pulling tension should not exceed 110N (25 lbf) for 4-pair cables. Installed bend radii shall not exceed: - 4 times the cable diameter for horizontal UTP cables times the cable diameter for multi-pair backbone UTP cables. Horizontal cables should be used with connecting hardware and patch cords (or jumpers) of the same performance category or higher. E/18

300 Avoid cable stress, as caused by: - cable twist during pulling or installation - tension in suspended cable runs - tightly cinched cable ties or staples - tight bend radii. Important Note: Installed UTP cabling shall be classified by the least performing component in the link. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces. The TIA TR42.3 (formerly TR41.8.3) Working group on Telecommunications Pathways & Spaces published the ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A ( 569-A) Standard in Following are highlights of the 569-A Standard: Purpose Standardize design and construction practices. Provides a telecommunications support system that is adaptable to change during the life of the facility. Scope Pathways and spaces in which telecommunications media are placed and terminated. Telecommunications pathways and spaces within and between buildings. Commercial building design for both single and multi-tenant buildings. Elements Horizontal Backbone Work Area Telecommunications Closet Equipment Room Main Terminal Space. Entrance Facility HORIZONTAL Pathways from telecommunications closet to work area. Includes: Pathway Types: Underfloor-Network of raceways embedded in concrete consisting of distribution and header ducts, trenches, and cellular systems. Access Floor-Raised modular floor tile supported by pedestals, with or without lateral bracing or stringers. Conduit-Metallic and nonmetallic tubing of rigid or flexible construction permitted by applicable electrical code. Tray & Wireway-Prefabricated rigid structures for pulling or placing cable. Ceiling-Open environment above accessible ceiling tiles and frame work. Perimeter-Surface, recessed, molding, and multichannel raceway systems for wall mounting around rooms or along hallways. E/19

301 Space Types: Pull Boxes-Used in conjunction with conduit pathway systems to assist in the fishing and pulling of cable. Splice Boxes-a box, located in a pathway run, intended to hold a cable splice. Outlet Boxes-Device for mounting faceplates, housing terminated outlet/connectors, or transition devices. Design Considerations: Grounded per code and ANSI/TIA/EIA-607 ( 607) Designed to handle recognized media as specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A ( 568-A) Not allowed in elevator shafts. Accommodate seismic zone requirements Installed in dry locations BACKBONE Pathways routed from closet-to-closet. Building Backbone Types: Ceiling Conduit Sleeves-An opening, usually circular, through the wall, ceiling, or floor. Trays Typically the most convenient and cost effective backbone pathway design in multi-story buildings, is to have stacked closets located one above the other, connected by sleeves or slots. Design Considerations: WORK AREA Grounded per code and 607 Accommodate seismic zone requirements Water should not penetrate the pathway system Tray, conduits, sleeves, slots penetrate closets minimum 25mm (1 in.) Designed top handle all recognized media (as specified in 568-A) Integrity of all fire stop assemblies shall be maintained. Primary location where the building occupants interact with dedicated telecommunications equipment. Design Considerations: At least one telecommunication outlet box location shall be planned for each work area. This location should be coordinated with the furniture plan. A power outlet should be nearby. Control center, attendant, and reception areas shall have direct and independent pathways to the serving telecommunications closet. Furniture System design: - Cable access via walls, columns, ceilings, or floors. Fittings that transition between building and furniture pathways require special planning. - Furniture pathway fill capacity is effectively reduced by furniture corners, and connectors mounted within the furniture pathway systems. - Furniture pathways bend radius shall not force the installed cable to a bend radius of less than 25 mm (1 in.) - Furniture spaces designed to house slack storage, consolidation points, or multi-user telecommunications outlet assemblies shall provide space for strain relieving, terminating, and storing slack for the horizontal cables. E/20

302 - Slack storage and furniture pathway fill, shall not affect the bend radius and termination of the cable to the connector. - Furniture pathway openings shall comply with either of two sizes: 1) Standard NEMA opening (NEMA OS 1 (Ref D. 14), WD-6 (Ref D. 15)) 2) Alternate opening: Power/telecommunication separation requirements is governed by applicable electrical code for safety. Minimum separation requirements of Article of ANS/NFPA 70 (National Electric Code) shall be applied. TELECOMMUNICATIONS CLOSETS Recognized location of the common access point for backbone and horizontal pathways. Design: Dedicated to telecommunications function. Equipment not related to telecommunications shall not be installed, pass through or enter the telecommunications closet. Multiple closets on the same floor shall be interconnected by a minimum of one (78 (3) trade size) conduit, or equivalent pathway. Minimum floor loading 2.4 kpa (50 lbf/ft2). Design Considerations: Minimum one closet per floor to house telecommunications equipment/cable terminations and associated cross-connect cable and wire. Located near the center of the area being served. Horizontal pathways shall terminate in the telecommunications closet on the same floor as the area served. Accommodate seismic zone requirements. Two walls should have 20mm (0.75 in.) A-C plywood 2.4m (8ft.) high. Lighting shall be a minimum of 500 lx (50 foot candles) and mounted 2.6m (8.5 ft.) above floor. False ceilings shall not be provided. Minimum door size 910mm (36 in.) wide and 2000mm (80 in.) high without sill, hinged to open outwards, or slide-to-slide or removable, and fitted with a lock. Minimum of two dedicated 120V 20A nominal, non-switched, AC duplex electrical outlet receptacles, each on separate branch circuits. Additional convenience duplex outlets placed at 1.8m (6 ft.) intervals around perimeter, 150mm (6 in.) above floor. Access to the telecommunications grounding system as specified by ANSI/TIA/EIA-607. HVAC requirements to maintain temperature the same as adjacent office area. A positive pressure shall be maintained with a minimum of one air change per hour or per code. EQUIPMENT ROOM A centralized space for telecommunications equipment that serves specific occupants of the building. Any or all of the functions of a telecommunications closet or entrance facility may alternately be provided by an equipment. Location Site locations should allow for expansion. Accessible to the delivery of large equipment. Not located below water level. Away from sources of EMI Safeguards against excessive vibration Sizing shall include projected future as well as present requirement. E/21

303 Equipment not related to the support of the equipment room shall not be installed in, pass through, or enter the equipment room. Design Considerations Minimum clear height of 2.4m (8 ft.) without obstruction. Protected from contaminants and pollutants. Access to backbone pathways. HVAC provided on a 24 hours-per-day, 365 days-per-year basis. Temperature and humidity controlled range 18 C (64 F) to 24 C (75 F) with 30% to 55% relative humidity measured 1.5m (5 ft.) above floor level. Separate power supply circuit shall be provided and terminated in its own electrical panel. Minimum lighting 500 ix (50 foot candles). Switch location shall be near entrance door to room. Minimum door same as telecommunications closet. Double doors without center post or sill is recommended. Access to ground per ANSI/TIA/EIA-607. MAIN TERMINAL SPACE Centralized space that houses the main cross-connect. Commonly used as a separate space in multi-tenant buildings to serve all tenants. Location considerations are as specified for equipment room. Provisioning area as specified for telecommunications closets except power is reduced to convenience receptacles. ENTRANCE FACILITY Consists of the telecommunications service entrance to the building and backbone pathways between buildings. Location Providers of all telecommunications services shall be contracted to establish requirements. Location of other utilities shall be considered in locating the entrance facility. Alternate entrance facility should be provided where security, continuity or other special needs exist. Equipment not related to the support of the entrance facility should not be installed in, pass through, or enter the telecommunications entrance facility. Dry location not subject to flooding and close as practicable to building entrance point and electrical service room. Design Considerations. Accommodate the applicable seismic zone requirements. A service entrance pathway shall be provided via one of the following entrance types: Underground, buried, Aerial, Tunnel. Minimum one wall should be covered with rigidly fixed 20mm (0.75 in.) A-C plywood. Minimum lighting same as telecommunication closet. False ceilings shall not be provided. Minimum door same as telecommunications closet. Electrical power same as telecommunications closet. No convenience receptacles mentioned. Grounding same as telecommunications closet. E/22

304 MISCELLANEOUS Fire stopping per applicable code Horizontal pathway separation from Electromagnetic interference (EMI) sources: - Separation between telecommunications and power cables (Article of ANSI/NFPA 70) - Building protected from lighting (ANSI/NFPA 780 (Ref D.4) - Surge protection (Article 280 of ANSI/NFPA 70 and 9.11 of ANS/IEEE 1100 (Ref D.1) - Grounding (ANS/TIA/EIA-607) - Corrected faulty wiring (Section 7.5 of ANSI/IEEE 1100) Reducing noise coupling: - Increase separation from noise sources - Electrical branch circuit line, neutral, and grounding conductors should be maintained close together. - Use of surge protectors in branch circuits - Use fully enclosed grounded metallic raceway or locate cabling near grounded metallic surface TIA/EIA-569-A-1 Perimeter Pathway Addendum This addendum deals with the constriction, applications, premises design and installation of perimeter pathways also known as surface raceway systems. It describes both single and multi channel systems mounted on walls s at a variety of heights and directions. The sizing of such pathways are based on 40% fill for initial installations but allows up to 60% fill for moves adds or changes to the installed cabling system during its life cycle. Fitting for perimeter raceway systems must allow for the band radius requirements of the installed cable TIA/EIA-569-A-2 Furniture Pathway Fill Addendum. The sizing of such pathways are based on 40% fill for initial installations but allows for up to 60% fill for moves, adds and changes to the installed cabling system during its life cycle. Furniture fittings such as outlets and connectors used to terminate the installed cables need to be considered when determining the percentage of fill. Fish and pull techniques may result in reduced capacity of the pathway as compared to furniture manufacturers which allow placing cables into the pathways SP-4198 Revision to subclause 4.3, Access Floor, of TIA/EIA-569-A Introduces low profile floors as compared to standard height floors. Low profile floors are 6 or lower while standard height floors are 6 or greater. This revision describes the use of access floors as it refers to guidelines and installation SP-4517 Addendum 4 to ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A Poke-Thru Devices A poke-thru is a device for routing cables through a floor while maintaining the fire-rating integrity of the floor. These devices are an option for routing horizontal cables when other pathway types are not typical. Types include flush floor mount and those that rise up above floor level, also known as pedestal, raised, tombstone or monument. E/23

305 PART F: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM F1

306 PART F: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM CONTENTS ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION PAGE NO. 1.0 GENERAL TENDER REQUIREMENTS F3 2.0 GENERAL SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY F4 3.0 READER AND READER HOUSING F5 4.0 DOOR CONTROLLERS F7 5.0 ALARM MONITORING F ACCESS CONTROL / ALARM INTERFACE F CENTRAL NETWORK CONTROLLER F PC ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM F OPTIONAL MODULES F CABLING F WARRANTIES F COMMISSIONING AND TRAINING F16 F2

307 GENERAL TENDER REQUIREMENTS The tenderer shall include for the design, cost estimation, supply and commissioning of a complete, integrated access control and alarm point monitoring system, compliant with the technical and performance criteria set out in this document. The system shall broadly comprise the following: a) A central administration computer (PC) for the system administration, addition and editing of tokens/cards, report generation and acknowledgement of system alarms. b) Door controllers and door functions. c) Readers, door monitoring contacts and exit switches. d) Alarm control functions on fire doors and other auxiliary alarm points. The tenderer shall supply a complete and functionally working system including all control equipment, hardware and software, cabling and ancillary services. The tenderer is to make himself familiar with all matters related to the system, its requirements and installation. The tenderer shall seek clarification of any relevant matters (insert a suitable contact name and telephone number). After the tender has been awarded there shall be no price variation without prior agreement. A complete clause by clause compliance response is required. The systems control software and hardware shall be designed, manufactured and originate from reputable manufacturers, who shall comply with BS EN ISO 9002 or such equivalent standard in the country of origin. The tenderer shall demonstrate his competence with the equipment he is tendering by either: The tenderer shall obtain a letter signed by a company director or head of training from the original equipment manufacturer. The letter must state the name of tendering company and a statement to the effect that the tenderer is of sufficient competence to install the tendered equipment. The tenderer shall provide proof in the form of training certificates from the original equipment manufacturer. Certificates will contain named individuals and the course applicable to the equipment being tendered. The named individuals must be employed by the tenderer and play an active part in the installation of equipment. F3

308 2.0. GENERAL SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY 2.1 Electronic Key The access control system shall be based on a non-contact proximity reader technology. The method of operation shall be based on electro-magnetic induction. Each electronic key or card (token) shall have a unique pre-programmed code. The code shall be set at the time of manufacture and must not be capable of being reproduced. Programmable tokens are not acceptable. The token shall have a code that produces no less than sixty-eight (68) thousand million different possible combinations. Any token can be enrolled on to any system in the world. Tokens that contain a facility or site code are not acceptable. Existing tokens must be able to be enrolled on to the system. The token shall be capable of being attached to a key ring and shall be read when held amongst mechanical metal keys. The token shall carry a minimum of 15 years manufacturer's guarantee against electronic failure. The token shall be a credit card sized flat card and have a thickness of no greater than 1.3 mm. The card shall have an option of a high coercivity magnetic stripe and shall allow the printing of a photo ID directly on to the surface of the card. The card shall carry a lifetime manufacturer's guarantee against electronic failure. The token shall not contain a battery. If the system uses "Master" or "Editor" then these tokens shall not be different from any of the other tokens. Any token shall be able to be selected and used as a Master or Editor token. If a Master or Editor token is lost then the system must accept a new master or editor from any of the existing tokens. F4

309 READER AND READER HOUSING The readers shall be a designed for general purpose use and be suitable for interior or exterior installation. They shall be slim units with a pleasing appearance that blend in with most installation requirements. Ideally the units shall be made of flame retardant plastic. All readers will carry a lifetime warranty against electronic failure. Two sizes of standard reader are required: a) Surface mounted to fit a standard UK single gang electrical back box with 60 mm screw spacing. The reader shall have dimensions no greater than: 86 mm (H) x 86 mm (W) x 15 mm (D) b) A slimline reader to be mounted on door mullions is also required. It shall have dimensions no greater than the following: 130 mm (H) x 40 mm (W) x 15 mm (D) The readers shall be capable of internal or external mounting without additional environmental protection and shall operate from -20 C to +50 C. All reader types must be of a fully potted assembly and capable of being mounted on exterior walls without additional weather protection. All readers shall be capable of being mounted on a metallic surface or behind materials without any adverse effect on the ability to read the token. non-metallic Reading of the token shall be 100% reliable with no misreads. There shall never be a need to present the token to the reader a second time. The reader cabling shall use multi-stranded unscreened six core cable and the reader shall be capable of operating up to 1,000 metres from its control unit without the need of an additional power supply. Cable from the reader shall be permitted to run next to mains carrying conductors without adverse effect. The reader shall incorporate tamper detection to signal that the connecting wires have been broken. This shall be achieved without the use of a tamper switch. The reader shall incorporate an LED(s). The LED(s) will operate in the following manner: - LED is constant red when door is closed and secure. - LED turns green on successful access and remains green until the door lock is re-secured. - LED(s) flash when an unsuccessful access attempt has been made. and/or Vandal Resistant Readers Vandal resistant readers are to be manufactured from brushed finished stainless steel. The stainless steel shall be of no less than 16 gauge (1.6 mm) and to BS 1449 grade 304. The reader shall be fixed with a key symbol on its front and its dimensions shall be no greater than the following: 100 mm (H) x 100 mm (W) x 16 mm (D) F5

310 It shall be secured with non-standard tamper proof screws. and/or Vandal Resistant Brass Readers Vandal resistant readers are to be manufactured from lacquered brushed finished brass. The brass shall be of no less than 12 gauge (2 mm) and of CZ 108 half hardened to BS The reader shall be fixed with a key symbol on its front and its dimensions shall be no greater than the following: 100 mm (H) x 100 mm (W) x 16 mm (D) It shall be secured with non-standard tamper proof screws. and/or Token and PIN Reader For more sensitive areas a higher security level may be required. In these areas a token and personal identification number (PIN) reader shall be used. The mode of operation shall be such that a token only can be used or token and PIN. This shall be automatic and programmable from the reader's door controller or the administration PC. The reader shall be finished in stainless steel surround and shall be flush mounted with the following maximum dimensions: OR 144 mm (H) x 100 mm (W) x 35 mm (D) and protrude no more than 5 mm from flush. The reader shall be finished in lacquered brushed finished brass surround and shall be flush mounted with the following maximum dimensions: OR 144 mm (H) x 100 mm (W) x 35 mm (D) and protrude no more than 5 mm from flush. The reader shall be finished in stainless steel and shall be surface mounted with the following maximum dimensions: OR 200 mm (H) x 100 mm (W) x 30 mm (D) The reader shall be finished in lacquered brushed finished brass and shall be surface mounted with the following maximum dimensions: 200 mm (H) x 100 mm (W) x 30 mm (D) F6

311 DOOR CONTROLLERS The access control system must be of high integrity and therefore must employ door controllers with fully distributed intelligence with no degraded mode of operation. There shall be no loss of functionality in the event of communications interruption. The relationship of door contact inputs, auxiliary inputs and system alarms to relay outputs must be maintained at all times. Systems that have a degraded mode of access in the event of communications interruption, especially any that will allow access by site code only will not be accepted. OR The door controller shall store up to 1000 transactions and have the ability to be connected to a modem via a build in serial port. The door controller shall have the ability to have keys added and deleted by a remote PC over the public telephone network. The door controller shall unlock the controlled door within 0.3 seconds from the completion of a valid access attempt. It should be possible to lengthen others, or shorten, this time duration through the The door controller shall report the following to the PC administration system: Access Authorised No Access - Level - Locked Out - Time - Unknown ID - Visit Time No Entry - Passback No Exit - Passback Entry Authorised (for anti-pass back doors) Exit Authorised (for anti-pass back doors) PIN Reader Duress Incorrect PIN Exit Out of Hours Repeated Key Use Request For Exit Request For Entry The reader technology offered shall be proximity. The principle of operation shall be electromagnetic induction. The door controller must also support other reading technologies. The door controller shall have an option of an in-built user interface comprising of a keyboard, display and administration reader. The keyboard shall have at least 40 individual keys consisting of the ten numeric and 26 alphabetic characters. The display shall be of at least 16 characters and shall be clearly visible in darkness. The user interface shall display the state of any attached auxiliary inputs and any alarms that occur within the door controller. If communications are interrupted to the controller then an audible sounder will sound and a short English language description of the alarm displayed. The sounder may be silenced by a nominated editor or master token being presented to its administration reader. F7

312 All events must be DATE and TIME stamped at the door controller as they occur. The system must maintain a system clock and all door controllers must be automatically synchronised for DATE and TIME at least once a day. To ensure the integrity of the system if power to the door controller is lost (both mains supply and back-up battery) then the controller's data must be maintained in non-volatile memory. If communications are interrupted before power failure then all events must be maintained. The door controller must have a minimum of a 2,500 event transaction log that stamps the time and date at source and not when received by the central controller. To increase reliability, the lock outputs shall be a solid state device and not a relay. The solid state device must have a selectable output, capable of sourcing power to its attached lock at 12V DC at 1 Amp or 24V at 0.5 Amps continuous. The solid state lock output must be protected against short circuit and overload. The door controller shall control no more than eight doors. When anti-pass back is implemented the controller shall control no more than two doors. Anti-pass back shall be implemented within the controller. Pass back between the two doors shall not be affected by communication interruptions. Timed anti-pass back shall be available so that a token holder violating the pass back rules shall be refused access for a minimum of ten minutes after his next attempt to gain access. When turnstiles are used the door controller set-up shall be selectable so that the IN reader can operate one lock output and the OUT reader another lock output and yet be reported as the same turnstile. Alternatively the door controller set-up shall be selectable so that both readers can operate the same lock output. The door controller shall include an integral power supply. This power supply shall have sufficient capability to deliver power to the controller and up to four readers. It shall also provide power for up to four locks continuously rated at 12V DC at 1 Amp or 24V DC at 0.5 Amps. The power supply shall in addition provide sufficient charge for two 6.0 Amp hour standby back-up batteries. The controller shall monitor its readers for cable tamper. The door controller shall be networked on to a data bus whose maximum length is not less than one thousand metres. The data bus shall be a single unscreened cable of no more than eight multistranded conductors. The door controller shall have a card holder data base of at least 10,000 token holders on systems of up to 32 doors and at least 18,000 token holders on larger systems. Visitor tokens are required. These shall be the same as personnel tokens but be allocated a start and finish date for their validity on the system. The door controller shall have a minimum of four auxiliary output relays. These relays shall be programmed via the PC administration system to respond to auxiliary inputs or door controller alarms. Each relay may be operated according to a time profile. F8

313 Each of the door controller's four doors shall have a door contact input. This input shall be used to indicate the following: Unauthorised Access Door Left Open Door Closed The door contact shall also indicate to the system when the door has been opened and closed after an authorised access or request to exit operation. Closing the door shall cancel any unused lock release time. If anti-pass back is being used on a door, then an authorised access transaction is not reported until the door has actually opened. The door controller shall be mounted in a secure metal cabinet of sufficient size to enable easy cable handling and room for at least two 6.0 Amp hour back-up batteries. It shall have dimensions no greater than: 450 mm (H) x 450 mm (W) x 100 mm (D) The door controller shall be programmable so that any controller can be configured to be a network master controller, a network slave controller, a dial-up remote master, or a stand alone door controller. The stand alone door controller shall have a serial RS232 printer output to print transactions and its database set-up. It shall also have a 2,500 event log with time and date stamping with individual token reporting. The master door controller shall have the ability to be assigned an IP address so that it may function on a TCP/IP network as part of a LAN or WAN. The door controllers shall have the capacity of being assigned one token as a master and at least 32 other tokens as editor tokens. The editor tokens can have restrictions placed on what functions they can carry out on the door controllers. Remote sites with dial-up connection to central network controller The door controllers shall if required have the ability of being connected to the system by a dial-up connection over public switch telephone network (PSTN) lines. The central network controller shall dial-up remote sites at least twice a day to download any changes to the system set-up and to receive all event information from the door controllers. You should also be able to utilise an X25 network using X28 PADs. Alarm dial-back on remote dial-up sites Sites that are connected by dial-up modem shall have the ability to call the central network controller at any time in the event of an alarm occurring at the remote site. F9

314 ALARM MONITORING Alarm Event Managers (AEMs) shall be supported and shall be attached to the door controllers from which they derive their power. There shall be at least one AEM per reader channel. The AEM shall manage all auxiliary alarms and auxiliary relay outputs. The AEM shall have a minimum of eight, four state inputs and eight switchable relay outputs. The relay contacts shall have a rating of no less than 2 Amps at 30 VDC or 0.4 Amps at 125 VAC. The inputs shall be selectable to be normally open or normally closed. The AEM must distinguish four states for each input. The input states are: Normal, Active, Open circuit and Short circuit. Any of the door controllers 36 possible relay outputs (four AEMs and four onboard relays) can be activated by any event within the door controller. Each relay output shall be programmed so that it can be operated by at least four separate events. The AEM shall be fitted with a test button and an LED display so the states of each of the eight inputs can be displayed. The LED display shall indicate if each input is normal, active, short or open circuit. It shall also display the state of the case and reader tampers. Each input shall have a name field of 45 characters and a description of each input that shall be no less than 300 characters long. Alarm Inputs shall be able to be grouped according to area and will be able to be manually disabled via the central administration system, or alarms can be automatically activated or deactivated by the use of a time profile. Alarm Inputs shall be able to be grouped according to area and can be enabled and disabled An input shall also be able to be configured as a 24 hour input and will always be active. Each input must have the ability of being configured as normally open or normally closed. Inputs will usually have four states, but may also be required to have two state inputs. Further alarm functions shall include "Acknowledge Required" and "Relay Follows Input". A graphic bit map may also be attached to each input and displayed when the alarm is being accepted. To prevent the system being flooded by erroneous alarms a re-arm count shall be available. This shall be programmable so that from one to five alarm activation s within a time period will be transmitted as an alarm but and any alarm activation's after that will be ignored and the input described as being in an alarm state. The re-arm count will be reset once the alarm input is disarmed and re-armed either manually or automatically by a time profile. The AEM shall be housed in a 1.2 mm mild steel enclosure painted with an epoxy coating complete will tamper switch. It shall have dimensions no greater than 184 mm x 148 mm x 38 mm. The AEM shall have a maximum cable distance from its door controller of no less than 500 metres. F10

315 ACCESS CONTROL / ALARM INTERFACE Alarm interface managers (AIMs) shall be attached to the door controller and alarm panel. There shall be at least one AIM per two reader channels. The AIM shall allow assigned security tokens to arm or disarm the linked alarm panel. Ordinary keyholders shall be able to gain entry at the main entrance to the premises once the security keyholder has disarmed the alarm. There shall be the facility to disable perimeter doors when the panel is armed by the use of reader inhibitor modules. CENTRAL NETWORK CONTROLLER The Central Network Controller (CNC) shall be located with the PC Administration system. It shall manage all communications to the door controllers. Connection to the local door controllers shall be via a six wire data bus. Remote sites shall use dial-up modems via the PSTN. The CNC shall manage all local and dial-up communications independently of the PC Administration system. The CNC shall communicate with up to 128 sites. One of the sites shall be local and of at least 128 doors. At least 32 other sites shall be of at least 32 doors. The remaining sites shall be of at least 4 doors. The CNC shall have at least three communications ports each of which maybe connected to a dial-up modem. The CNC shall have a buffer of at least 10,000 events. It shall annunciate all alarms if the PC is offline. Annunciation of the alarms will be via a scrolling display of at least 16 characters. It shall also have an audible warning alarm. The time clocks of all controllers on the system, whether local or remote, shall be synchronised by the central network controller automatically at least once a day or manually by an authorised operator as required. It shall be possible to connect up to twenty CNCs to the system. The system shall have the possibility of expanding to at least 2560 sites with at least 30,640 doors. It shall be possible to connect door controllers directly via serial RS232 rather than with the use of dial-up PSTN lines. In this case the system shall have a capacity of at least 4,480 doors. As resilience and integrity of the system are of paramount importance the system shall have a distributed topography so that not more that four CNCs or master door controllers are connected to any work station or file server of the PC administration system. If the PC network fails then CNCs or masters connected to its associated work station will continue to function, gather transactions and announce alarms. PC ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM The administration system shall be based on PC's running under Windows NT4.0, Microsoft Windows Version 3.11 or Windows 95 operating systems. In general the system shall be simple to use and to operate. The PC shall not be solely dedicated to running the access control software. It must be possible to run other Windows programs such as word-processing or database programs on the PC at the same time. However any alarms that occur on the access control system must be presented over those other applications without delay. Other programs that are running will be put into the background, but data and information must not be lost. F11

316 The PC shall meet the following specification: PC Pentium 800 Mhz processor, 128 Mb RAM, 4.0 Gb disk drive, 3.5 inch disk drive, CD Drive, PC sound card and speakers, Colour SuperVGA (800x600) display, with 256 colours, 32,000 colours when used with Photo, parallel, mouse and two serial ports, Windows 3.11, Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0. One year on-site maintenance agreement for the PC. The system shall archive all events and transactions to the PC hard disk. The hard disk shall store no less than 18,000 and up to 40,000 transactions per mega byte of hard disk. The software shall be simple to upgrade and easy to expand from a small single site to a large multisite, multi-pc system. Multiple Workstations The system shall have the capacity for at least 50 workstations including the main administration PC. These PC's shall be connected by a network. System Divisions The system may be split into 'divisions'. A division shall be a set of one or more sites. Each division will have its own personnel records, token and access information which will be stored in the door controllers on the site. The system shall have between 1 and 128 divisions, to administer independent installations from a central point. Using divisions will simplify the administration of systems with a large number of sites and token holders. Token holders shall be able to exist in more than one division with the same ID device. The administrator shall be able to restrict system operators as to which divisions they can edit and view database information. The system shall allow each PC on the system to be configured so as to only display transactions and alarms from designated divisions. Detailed on-line Help The system offered must have an on-line help facility. This shall provide details of all functions that the system can perform. It is considered imperative that the Help facility is context sensitive in that the Help menu or information given is relevant to the task the operator is performing. Editing and Administration reader Each PC or workstation on the system shall have an administration reader. This shall be provided either as part of the CNC or a PC interface kit. Operators must use their proximity token to log onto the system and to accept alarms. The use of an operator password may also be required. The administration reader shall also be used to enrol new tokens into the system and to identify tokens that are already in the system database. Operator Privileges Operators of the PC administration system must be uniquely identifiable. There shall be a minimum of 128 operators. Each operator shall have independent system privileges. The system shall record which operator is currently logged on. When system alarms require acceptance, regardless of which operator is currently logged on, the system shall ask for the operator's name and password. If authorised the operator should present their token to the administration reader to accept the alarm. Personnel Database The personnel database shall have at least 10,000 token holder records and on larger system configurations at least 18,000 token holder records per division. There shall be a capacity of at least 750 visitor records per division. There shall be up to 128 separate divisions on the system. F12

317 Import and Export The system shall have a facility for importing or exporting the personnel database. The import and export shall be achieved via an ASCII text file with field separators. Card Trace The system shall have a facility to tag or track the use of a token. This facility shall be able to cause an alarm on PC. Access privileges of the token holder will remain the same and the token holder will be unaware that they are being traced. Extra information fields The personnel database shall have at least twenty extra information fields. The titles of these fields must be user definable. Each information field must be at least 120 characters in length. Each division shall have its own unique extra information fields. Departments and Work groups When adding new token holders it shall be possible to assign a Department and a Work Group to the token holder. Departments restrict the access groups that can be selected for each token holder record. There shall be at least 128 Departments per division. Work Groups are a subset of Departments and further restrict the number for access groups that can be chosen. There shall be at least 128 Work Groups per division. It shall also be possible to generate reports by Department and Work Group. ASCII transaction file The PC security administration system shall provide the facility of a data file that contains all personnel access transactions in ASCII data format. This is separate and additional to the system event log. The format of each record shall consist of personnel identification number, date (DD/MM/YY), door number, time (HH:MM), site number and transaction type. The file should contain at least 15,000 transactions. Start and End Dates It is required that all ID devices may have the option of a start and end of validity date. Alarm Monitoring and Graphics maps An alarm manager program shall allow the operator to see any alarms that occur easily and clearly. A text message shall be attached to each alarm and shall tell the operator what action should be taken for each individual alarm. It must be possible to attach a graphic illustration in the form of a bitmap to specific alarms. There shall be the optional facility to record sounds, including spoken messages, which can be linked to specific alarm events. The alarm manager program shall keep track of all alarm events, which operator acknowledged them and what action was taken. Real-time transaction window and real-time printer The system shall have a window where it is possible to display all transactions. It must also be possible to route transactions to a real-time printer. The types of transactions that are displayed or printed may change throughout the day and on different days of the week. For example, some transactions will be displayed only during normal working hours. Outside normal working hours those same transactions may be required to be displayed and printed. It shall be possible to fix the transaction window so that it is always "on top" of all other windows. Time Profiles The system shall have a minimum of 128 time profiles per division. Each time profile shall consist of at least three time periods. Each time period shall have a start time and end time and the days of the week it will operate. This shall include system holidays. F13

318 Access Groups The system shall have at least 128 access groups per site and shall have at least 128 divisional access groups per division. An access group shall consist of two lists of access areas each of which may have a time profile for when access is authorised to those areas. An access area is an area of common security, i.e. a door or number of doors that lead in to a physical area. There shall be an extra access facility to provide for over 128 access groups in each site by assigning individuals their own access privileges. Transaction Reporting The system shall have the capability of extensive transaction searching and reporting. Reports must be able to be generated by, but not limited to the following: Area Doors Department Access group Transaction type Token holder Start of period date and time End of period date and time. There shall be the facility to report on tokens that have not been used over a specified period of time. There shall be the facility to produce a "Presence" report. This report shall provide information on which cardholders are currently on site. F14

319 OPTIONAL MODULES The system shall have an attendance report facility. This report shall be flexible and provide the total time a selected cardholder or cardholders have been on a site over a selected period. DDE Transaction Routing The system shall have Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) output that conforms to Microsoft Windows standards for DDE linking. It shall be possible to route system transactions and events to the DDE output. The system shall be able to change which types of transactions are sent to the DDE according to time of day and week. Elevator Control The system shall allow different combinations of relay outputs on Alarm Event Managers to be activated, dependant on the access privileges of individual token holders, when token holders use their tokens at a designated reader. An example would be a reader fitted inside a lift car (elevator). When the relay outputs of the Alarm Event Managers are connected to the floor select buttons of the lift controller, token holders may be restricted to which floors they can select dependent on their access group privileges. Photo ID The system shall have an optional facility that allows a token holder s photograph to be captured, stored and displayed with each personnel record. Identification cards shall also be designed and printed from the same menu. When a token has been presented to a specified reader the recorded image of the token holder shall appear on the screen. The system shall provide the operator with the ability to either allow or deny access if the token is not valid. Audit Trail A facility shall be available that enables specified operators to conduct searches of previous operator changes to the system. This facility shall allow searches between specified dates for changes made by specified operators or all operators. The system shall also be able to search for specified types or all types of change. Pager Interface An optional facility should be available that enables messages detailing the nature and location of alarm events to be sent from the PC administration system via a paging system to designated handheld pager units. Guard Tour A facility should be available to monitor security guards as they travel around a building. Alarm Graphic Interface (AGI) The facility should be available that enables alarm points to be deposited as icons onto a bit map of a building. Icons must change state as alarms are received onto the system. Alarm Prioritisation The facility should be available that enables alarms to be prioritised. F15

320 CABLING All cables connecting slave door controllers, including to the master door controller must utilise multi-stranded unscreened six or eight core cable. The use of screened cable on door controller clusters and specialist cables is not acceptable. For door controller network cable runs of up to 500 metres, 0.22 mm 2 multi-stranded six core cable (standard intruder alarm cable) is to be used. Master door controllers shall have the ability to use existing CAT 5 structured cabling so that TCP/IP communications may be used. For the connection of readers to door controllers then the following sized cables shall be used: For distances up to 250 metres mm 2 up to 500 metres mm 2 up to 1000 metres mm 2 WARRANTIES The access control equipment, including door controllers, readers, central network controllers shall be warranted by the manufacturer against electronic failure for at least five years. The access control tokens shall carry a lifetime warranted against electronic failure. ("Lifetime" means that if the token electronics should fail at any time it will always be replaced). It is accepted that the security system will require preventative maintenance. COMMISSIONING AND TRAINING The system shall be programmed with the information supplied. The system must be fully working with all system parameters and token holder's information. It is the tenderer's responsibility to ensure that all the necessary information is obtained before commissioning the system. At least two and up to four members of staff will be nominated as operators of the system. These operators must receive sufficient training on the operation and configuration of the system to enable these operators to train others. The training shall be conducted by the manufacturer's own training staff or by other certified training staff. A copy of the final database of the PC administration system, held on 3.5" floppy disks, shall be included at the final hand over of the system. The tenderer shall supply detailed "as installed" drawings of the entire system. F16

321 PART G: BILLS OF QUANTITIES FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS G/1

322 BILLS OF QUANTITIES 1. General Note to Tenderers The total of the prices in the summary of prices shall include for the whole of the Contract works in accordance with the specifications as defined before and shall be carried forward to Form of Tender. Any prices omitted from any item, section or part of the price schedule shall be deemed to have included in another item, section or part. The prices shall include for all obligations under the Contract including and not limited to: a) Supply of any materials, equipment, apparatus, fittings, spares and tools b) Insurance c) Clearing and forwarding d) Delivery, handling and storage at site e) Packing for storage f) Replacing any defective or damaged item g) Installation h) Testing i) Painting j) Commissioning k) Maintenance during the defects liability period The unit rates shall include import duty and VAT where applicable, and shall be expressed in Kenya Shillings. Any tenderer whose firm uses the title Engineer or Engineering must provide evidence of registration of at least one of the directors by the Engineers Registration Board of Kenya to avoid disqualification. Any tenderer who fails to price the General items will be deemed to have allowed 5% of his tender price to cover these items, i.e. 5% of the total tender price will be deducted as preliminaries, if the tenderer does not enter specific prices against items of preliminary. The Sub-contractor is instructed to read all the pages, and all the items of the Bills of Quantities very carefully. Should there be an apparent omission of words or figures, or should the sub-contractor be in doubt about the precise meaning of any word or figures, or for any reason whatsoever feel more clarification is necessary, either in the drawings or Bills of Quantities, to facilitate reasonable pricing of the tender document, he should inform the engineer at once so that the correct interpretation or clarification may be given before tendering. No liability will be accepted on mistakes and/or omissions which should have been corrected in the format above. The specification should be priced in Kenya Currency i.e Shillings and cents. G/2

323 The following meanings/interpretations shall be attached:- G/3

324 . Lighting Point: "Install a lighting point complete with concealed diameter 20mm H.G PVC conduit, conduit couplers, box, wiring in 3x1.5mm 2 SC- PVC-CU cables and all accessories, but excluding the light switch".. Socket Outlet: "Install 13A power outlet comprising concealed diameter 20mm H.G PVC conduit, conduit couplers, box, ring main wiring in 6x2.5mm 2 SC-PVC-CU cables and all accessories including 13A switched socket". All socket outlets must have safety shutters on both live and neutral.. Telephone Point: "Install telephone cord outlet point complete with telephone jackplug, concealed diameter 25mm H.G PVC conduit box, and draw wire." All Telephone outlets must have continuous diameter 25mm links throughout respective buildings.. 20A DP Outlet: "Install outlet for 20A DP switch comprising concealed diameter 25mm H.G PVC conduit, wiring in 3x4.0mm 2 SC-PVC-CU cables, box, 20A DP switch with neon light and all accessories".. Electric Door Lock: "Install an outlet for electric door lock comprising concealed diameter 20mm H.G PVC conduit box, wiring in 3x2.5mm 2 SC- PVC-CU cables, and all accessories including flush mounted electric door lock as YALE, or approved equivalent, (supplied with a key for use when power fails) complete with an integral transformer, and wired to, and complete with, a spring-loaded 5A switch marked press. The two electric door locks in the Airlock shall be wired so that both CAN NOT be opened at the same time.. Fire Alarm Point: "Install outlet for fire alarm sensor/sounder comprising concealed 20mm H.G PVC conduit, box, wiring in 3x2.5mm 2 "Firetuff" cables and all accessories". All fire alarm points must be interlinked with diameter 20mm conduits.. Consumer Unit: "Supply and install SP/N power consumers unit, complete with SP/N integral isolator".. Distribution Board: "Supply and install TP/N power distribution board, complete with TP/N integral isolator.". Main Switchboard: Supply and install main switchboard free standing complete with all switchgear, as per schematics shown.. Meterboards: Supply and install metal clad meterboards C/W all switchgear.. Earthing: "Protective multiple earthing to Kenya Power and Lighting Co. standards, comprising 1200mm deep-driven pure electrolytic copper earth electrode, electrode clamps, 16mm 2 yellow/green earth lead, earth pit complete with cover and all accessories".. Labelling: "Comprehensive, concise and instructive permanent labelling of all the sub-circuits, complete with identification of the sizes of all the sub-circuit cables, permanent traffolyte identification of the board such as "DB. A" and identification of the sizes of the sub-mains and their origin e.g "Board A: Supply: 4x16mm 2 SOURCE: DB.1". Blanking Plates: "Supply and install blanking plates in all the spare ways.". Switched Spur Outlet: Install 13A fused switched spur outlet with neon light and 5A integral fuse, complete with concealed diameter 20mm H.G PVC G/4

325 conduit, box, wiring in 6x2.5mm 2 ring main wiring for computer power supply and all accessories.". Cooker outlet: Install 45A DP cooker control unit, complete with twin metal box, concealed 25mm H.G PVC conduit, box, wiring in 3x6.0mm 2 SC- PVC-CU cables and all accessories including 45A DP cooker control unit, with an integral socket, neon lights, and cooker connector unit. Unless specifically stated otherwise, all light fittings will be as Disano manufacture. All power accessories, sockets, telephone outlets, TV outlets, distribution boards/consumer units, switches, spur outlets etc must either be Crabtree, MK or Merlin Gerin. Approved equivalent makes may be accepted subject to the engineer s prior approval. The Sub-contract is for supplying, delivering, fixing/installing, testing, commissioning and setting to work to the full satisfaction of the Engineer/Architect and the Sub-contractor's price must include all cost for the entire process. All conduits/ducts must be heavy gauge. Where steel pipes are specified, they must be minimum of class B in strength. The installation shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the provision of the 17 th Edition of Wiring Regulation as published by the Institution of Electrical Engineers, Great Britain, the most current relevant standards issued by the Kenya Bureau of Standards, and with strict adherence to the safety requirements and by-laws of the Kenya Power and Lighting Co. Ltd. The Sub-contractor shall ensure that the highest standards of workmanship and highest quality materials are used at all times. Inferior workmanship and low quality materials shall be rejected and replaced at the Sub-contractors own cost. The sub-contractors shall be solely responsible for the correct and accurate ordering of materials in accordance with the drawings and Bills of Quantities. No claims on advance payment and/or materials off-site will be allowed unless the sub-contractor advances valid reasons acceptable to the employer. Should a claim on advance payment be allowed, the sub-contractor will be required to submit an Advance Payment Bond for the full value claimed. The sub-contractor shall strictly follow the Main Contractor's programme of works and (the subcontractor) must ensure that at no time does his activities cause delays to the Main Contractor. This is a fixed price sub-contract, and the sub-contractor is expected to allow (in his unit rates) for generous fore-casts on fluctuations. The Bills of Quantities shall be read in conjunction with Notes to All Tenderers, Preliminaries, General Specifications, Particular Specifications and all the relevant drawings. A rate or price shall be entered against each item in the priced Bills of Quantities whether quantities are stated or not. The cost of items against which the sub-contractor has failed to enter a rate or price shall be deemed to be covered by other rates and prices entered in the Bills of Quantities. The whole cost of complying with provisions of the sub-contract shall be included in the items provided in the Bills of Quantities, and where no items are provided, the cost shall be deemed to be distributed among the rates and prices entered for the related items of work. General directions and descriptions of work and materials are not necessarily repeated nor summarized in the Bills of Quantities. Reference to the relevant sections of the sub-contract document shall be made before entering prices against each item in the priced Bills of Quantities. Provisional sums and contingencies included and so designated in the Bills of Quantities shall be expended in whole or in part at the direction and discretion of the Engineer. G/5

326 Errors in pricing will be corrected by the Employer for any arithmetic errors in computation or summarization as follows:- a) Where there is a descrepancy between amounts in figures and amounts in words, the amount in words will govern. b) Where there is discrepancy between the unit rate and the total amount derived from the multiplication of the unit price and the quantity, the unit rate quoted will govern unless in the opinion of the employer, there is an obviously gross misplacement of the decimal point in the unit prices, in which event the total amount as quoted will govern and the unit rate will be corrected. Other than ceiling mounted fixtures, accessories, light fittings etc, all the other mounting heights will be re-confirmed with the Engineer/Architect on site. All light fittings must be complete with appropriate lamps, bulbs, tubes, starters, control gear etc as applicable. Where a light fitting has multiple lamps, tubes, bulbs, each lamp/tube/bulb must have its own separate choke/starter/p.f. correction capacitor/control gear etc. G/6

327 2 Statement of Compliance a) I confirm compliance of all clauses of the General Conditions, General Specifications, Particular Specifications, Technical Specifications in this tender. b) I confirm I have not made and will not make any payment to any person, which can be perceived as an inducement to win this tender. Signed:.for and on behalf of the Tenderer Date:.. Official Rubber Stamp: G/7

328 PROPOSED LAB AND ISOLATION UNIT FOR NPHLS (MTRH AND MARSABIT) ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES- BILLS OF QUANTITIES ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS BILL NO. 1 MAINS POWER DISTRIBUTION -MTRH ELDORET ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT KShs. Cts. Supply, install, test, commission and set to work the following:- 1.10a) 70KVars automatic power factor correction capacitor 1 No. bank switched in 2 steps of 20KVArs, 2 steps of 10 KVArs and 2 steps of 5KVArs. The bank to be made from low-loss bio-degradable capacitive units, complete with earthed enclosure. All the contactors controls and indicator lamps, including a digital read-out screen to be included. b) 100A TPN Motorized MCCB with adjustable time-delay, 1 No for Capacitor bank and to be adjustable from 60A-100A c) 4Core 25mm sq. PVC/SWA/PVC copper cable 5 m. d) Cable lugs for the above cable complete with hydraulic 8 No crimping 1.11 Free-standing purpose made front access main LV switchboard inside the Power House manufactured in 14SWG galvanised mild steel sheet and finished in cream (or appropriate colour) powder coating as shown on the schematic (the other details as per Particular Specification), complete with the following : (a) Digital multimeter capable of measuring voltage in the range V, 3-phase, current in the range 0-400A, 3- phase, and all power system parameters (KW, KVA, KWHr, KVArs, Frequency, P.F., harmonics and all the parameters). The multimeter to have an accessible terminal for connecting an external printer, and should be complete with selector switches for viewing/displaying the various parameters (b) Set of neon phase presence indicator lamps - - ( c) 3 No. 300A TPN MCCB (adjustable in A range) main incomer. The MCCB to be motorized and have both electrical and mechanical inter-lock. (d) 5 No. 400A TPN insulated copper bus bars of 100 x 20mm cross section. - (e) 5 No. 80A TPN motorized MCCBs as shown, but adjustable in the range 48 80A (f) 1 No. 63A TPN motorized MCCBs as shown (g) 1 No. 32A TPN motorized MCCBs as shown (h) 4 No. spare capacity for future development all fitted with 50A TPN MCBs as shown. (i) Sealable studs for all cover plate screws and all necessary accessories (h) 6mm perspex viewing window (i) Heavy duty rubber lining for all the windows (j) 415V three-phase surge diverter as Furse ESP 415, wired as shown, complete with enclosure with viewing window. - Total C/F to Page G/8 -

329 PROPOSED LAB AND ISOLATION UNIT FOR NPHLS (MTRH AND MARSABIT) ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES- BILLS OF QUANTITIES ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS BILLS OF QUANTITIES - ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS BILL NO. 1 POWER SUPPLY AND DISTRIBUTION ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT NO. KShs. Cts. Total B/F from Page G/7 (k) Carry out comprehensive labelling of all the busbars. CT chambers, circuit breakers etc. of the above board, indicating the areas served, outgoing cable sizes etc. - (l) Comprehensive protective multiple earthing of the above board in 1500mm long 12mm diameter pure electrolytic copper earth rod deep driven to permanent moisture level, copper clamp. 35mm² green earth lead complete with all accessories. (Note: Use parallel rods if effective earthing cannot be achieved with 1 No. rod). Please note: The Main LV Board to be priced as an 1 item including all its accessories as itemized above. The bidder to submit shop drawings for approval before fabrication process begins. (Note: The entire switchboard assembly to be Form 4B, Type 2 i.e. totally safe with all live parts completely inaccessible on opening the outside cover) 1.12a) 4Core 95mm Sq. PVC/SWA/PVC copper cable to LV 70 Board and AVR. -Provisional b) Cable lugs for the above cable complete with hydraulic 16 crimping c) Cable glands for the above cable 4 Item m. No No 1.13a) 100mm diameter HG PVC ducts buried in ground for 60 external power reticulation b) As above but for communication ducts 60 m c) As above but with concrete surround 10 m 1.14 Trenching, removal of earth, sifting of the soil, laying 120 m duct for the external cables, covering with HATARI tiles, backfilling, and compacting to natural ground level Allow for comprehensive, phase sequency of the above installation with the generators 1 Item Allow for carrying out comprehensive testing of the 1 Item - - installation as per IEE Wiring Regulation, 17 th Edition. m. - Total C/F to Page G/9 -

330 PROPOSED LAB AND ISOLATION UNIT FOR NPHLS (MTRH AND MARSABIT) ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES- BILLS OF QUANTITIES ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS BILLS OF QUANTITIES - ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS BILL NO. 1 POWER SUPPLY AND DISTRIBUTION ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT NO. KShs. Cts. Total B/F from Page G/ Carry out very concise and comprehensive load balancing 1 Item - - to achieve a maximum imbalance not greater than + 10% between any two phases, measured at the respective main switchboards Allow for full load testing of the AVR with variable load 1 Item 1.19a) Build 600 x 600 x 700mm deep power manhole complete with internal plaster and heavy duty EAFW steel cover. 4 No. b) As above, but earthing manhole, with cover marked 1 No. EARTH c) As 1.38a) above but communication manholes 4 No Sub mains circuit comprising 4Core 4.0mm 2 2 No. PVC/SWA/PVC copper cable from the MCCB in Main LV Board to the local isolator for water booster/hose reel pumps including the 32A SPN local isolator as Crabtree, MK or Schneider 1.21 Allow for temporary works during execution of the 1 Lot project 1.22 Sub mains circuit comprising 4Core 16.0mm2 1 No. PVC/SWA/PVC copper cable from the MCCB in Main LV Board to the local isolator for AC Outdoor Unit including the 63A TPN local isolator as Crabtree, MK or Schneider Note: The following to be included with the bid:- 1. Detailed shop drawings of the Main switchboard and all the sub-boards. Total for Bill No. 1: Main Power Supply and Distribution, C/F to Collection Page for Electrical Installations -

331 PROPOSED LAB AND ISOLATION UNIT FOR NPHLS (MTRH AND MARSABIT) ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES- BILLS OF QUANTITIES ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS BILLS OF QUANTITIES - ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS BILL NO. 2 GROUND FLOOR MTRH ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT NO. KShs. Cts. Supply, install, test, commission and set to work the following. All lighting fittings to be complete with lamp, control gear etc as applicable. PLEASE NOTE ALL LED LIGHT FITTINGS TO BE RATED V AC 2 Lighting 2.01a) Lighting point 1-way switched. b) Lighting point 2-way switched A white moulded switch plates as MK or Crabtree or any other approved equivalent: - (a) 1-gang 1-way (b) 2-gang 1-way (c) 1-gang 2 way (d) 2-gang 2 way (e) 3-gang 2 way 2.03 Install permanent DANGER 415V labels where groups of switches have been fed by more than one phase Lighting fittings, complete with lamps of specified wattage and appropriate colour rendering: - (Note: All fittings to be fitted with High Frequency control gear. All LED fittings to be rated VAC) a) Recessed horizontal 390mm Diameter Downlighter c/w TC 22W T5 lamp,an opal polycarbonate diffuser as Fosnova cat no or approved equivalent. (Type N) 115 No. 50 No. 18 No. 5 No. 19 No. 1 No. 2 No. 2 No. 20 No. - - b) Extruded aluminium frame housing with polycarbonate diffuser omplete with 61W LED lamp as cat no. JCC Skylinee 5000 cat no. JC or approved equivalent (type 5) 4 No c) 1.8W Direction Light Signs Complete With Vandal 4 No. Resistant, Anti Yellowing Grey Polycarbonate As Disano 618 Safety S.E Version Cat No with an autonomy of 3hrs. - d) 1.8W Exit Emergency Light Complete With Vandal Resistant, Anti Yellowing Grey Polycarbonate As Disano 618 Safety S.E Version Cat No with an autonomy of 3hrs. 4 No. - Total C/F to Page G/11 -

332 PROPOSED LAB AND ISOLATION UNIT FOR NPHLS (MTRH AND MARSABIT) ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES- BILLS OF QUANTITIES ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS BILL NO. 2 GROUND FLOOR ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT KShs. Cts. Total B/F from Page G/10 e) High Performance 600x600mm LED flat Panel c/w 44W 40 No LED lamp, extruded aluminium frame with opal polycarbonate diffuser cat no. JC71277 or approved equivalent f) Surface mounted batten in extruded aluminum with ABS 7 end caps housing and opal polycarbonate diffuser c/w 8W LED lamp as DISANO 420-Rigo LED cat no or approved equivalent (type 7) g) Surface mounted Bulkhead with die cast aluminum 17 housing and opal polycarbonate diffuser c/w 10W LED lamp as JCC NITE LED wall sphere cat no. JC or approved equivalent (type M) h) 6A (fused) photocell unit as Thorn QPK for the above 1 lights or any other approved equivalent. i) 30A SP/N contactor (as Telemecanique) for the above or 1 any approved equivalent j) Surface mounted 180mm Diameter press steel housing 23 and frosted opal glass diffuser as JCC RIGA CEILING cat no. JC 52016CH or approved equivalent. (Type 2) k) Surface mounted 180mm Diameter press steel housing 10 and frosted opal glass diffuser as JCC RIGA CEILING cat no. JC 52016CH or approved equivalent. (Type D) No No No No No No - l) Lighting points for external lights 3 m) Type R - External Floodlight, as per details shown on 3 Drawing No , on a 6m high steel pole, complete with 150W LED lamp. The 6metres high circular section hollow steel poles, diameter 60mm, 1000mm deep, concrete base and 6mm thick metal base plate and as per details shown. No. No. n) 6A Photoelectric cell unit for automatic control of the 3 No. lights, as Thorn, complete with protective fuse. 2.05a) Establish an outlet for MTRH LAB sign illumination 1 comprising box, concealed H.G. PVC conduit, wiring in 3x1.5mm 2 SC-PVC-CU cables and all accessories as a lighting point through photocell. b) 5A (fused) photocell unit as Thorn QPK for the above 1 signs, or any other approved equivalent. c) 30A SP/N contactor (as Telemecanique) for the above or 1 any approved equivalent 2.1 Power Supply 2.10a) 10-way TP/N Power Distribution Board complete with 2 No. 100A TP/N integral isolator and all accessories including lockable cover. The Distribution Board to be as Schneider Electric or Merlin Gerlin or any other approved equivalent for Raw Power. b) SP MCB s for the above boards. 36 No c) Blanking plates for unused spare ways for the above 24 No boards. d) Carry out complete permanent labeling for all the sub- 1 Item circuits in the board above No No No Total C/F to Page G/12 -

333 PROPOSED LAB AND ISOLATION UNIT FOR NPHLS (MTRH AND MARSABIT) ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES- BILLS OF QUANTITIES ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS BILL NO. 2 GROUND FLOOR ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT KShs. Cts. Total B/F from Page G/11 - e) Earth the above distribution boards. 1 Item f) 4 core 25mm² PVC/SWA/PVC copper cables to the DBs 100 m above g) Cable glands for the above cable. 4 No. h) Cable lugs for the cable above, complete with crimping 16 No x50mm white stove enameled trunking, single- 50 m compartment, complete with cover, screws etc for the sub mains cables above -Provisional 2.12 Outlet for CCTV/ security alarm/ fire alarm points 90 No. comprising box, concealed in PVC conduit, draw wire and square blanking cover. 2.13a) Outlet for electric door locks comprising wiring in 3x2.5mm 2 SC-PVC-CU cables, box, concealed conduit links and all accessories including card reader. 10 No b) Heavy-duty micro switches for the above 10 No Twin 13A socket outlets complete with wiring in 20 No. 6x2.5mm 2 PVC-SC-CU cables inside concealed conduits for raw power. The socket outlets to be MK, Crabtree or any other approved equivalent 2.15 Dia. 32mm H.G PVC conduits buried in floor slab 100 m 2.16a) 300x50mm cream heavy duty plastic angular clip-on 3- compartment trunking as per details shown complete with cover, screws etc 300 m b) 300x50mm plastic factory made corner bends for the 80 No. trunking above. - c) Carry out bonding throughout the entire length of the 1 Item above trunking in 6mm2 green PVC insulated copper cables d) Dia. 32mm H.G PVC conduits buried in floor slab 100 m (Provisional) 2.17a) Punched outlet plates on the trunking for twin socket 40 No outlets. b) Punched outlet plates on the trunking for twin Data/voice 40 No outlets. 2.18a) Twin 13A standard white socket outlet as MK or 40 No. Crabtree or any other approved equivalent, complete with ring wiring in 6x2.5mm 2 PVC-SC-CU cables inside trunking for raw power Total C/F to Page G/13 -

334 PROPOSED LAB AND ISOLATION UNIT FOR NPHLS (MTRH AND MARSABIT) ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES- BILLS OF QUANTITIES ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS BILL NO. 2 GROUND FLOOR ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT KShs. Cts. Total B/F from Page G/12 - b) Twin data/telephone faceplates in trunking complete with 40 box draw-wire and square blanking cover for RJ45 terminations No - c) Power Floorbox complete with 4 No. twin normal socket 2 No. outlets wiring in 6x2.5mm 2 PVC-SC-PVC cables, 4 No. twin nonstandard socket outlets for computer points with neon lights wiring in ring 6x2.5mm2 PVC-SC-PVC cables and 4 No. telephone/data outlet plates x 450 x 200 mm 14 gauge galvanized compartment 3 telephone draw box complete with 3- cover, screws etc. 2.2 Outlet point for water heater/ hand drier/ extract fans/ 9 staircase Pressurization comprising 20mm diameter conduit, wiring in 3 x 4.0 mm² SC-PVC-CU cables and all accessories including 20A DP switch with neon light as MK or Crabtree or any other approved equivalent. No No 2.21a) Outlet for cooker control unit comprising wiring in 1 3x6.0mm2 SC-PVC CU cables, twin steel box Dia. 25mm HG PVC conduit link, and all accessories including 45A DP cooker control unit with neon lamp, and 13A integral socket with neon lamp as MK or approved equivalent. No. b) 45A DP cooker connector unit with wiring in 3 x mm2 SC-PVC-CU cables, and Dia. 25mm HG conduit link to the above Outlet point for kitchen hood comprising 20mm diameter 1 conduit, wiring in 3 x 4.0 mm² SC-PVC-CU cables and all accessories including 20A DP switch with neon light as MK or Crabtree or any other approved equivalent. No. No Outlet for twin 15A industrial sockets comprising 20mm 5 diameter conduit, wiring in 3 x 4.0 mm² SC-PVC-CU cables and all accessories including top plug 2.24a) Outlet for television co-axial cable comprising concealed 3 HG PVC conduit square PVC box draw wire and TV outlet plate as MK range or any approved equivalent No. No Outlet for queue/cashier indicator board comprising box, 2 concealed 20mm H.G PVC conduit, wiring in 3x2.5mm 2 SC-PVC-CU cables and all accessories including 20A DP switch with neon light, as MK or Crabtree or approved approved equivalent No Total C/F to Page G/14 -

335 PROPOSED LAB AND ISOLATION UNIT FOR NPHLS (MTRH AND MARSABIT) ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES- BILLS OF QUANTITIES ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS BILL NO. 2 GROUND FLOOR ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT KShs. Cts. Total B/F from Page G/ Outlet for Indoor air conditioning unit comprising box 5 No concealed, HG PVC conduit, wiring in 3x4mm 2 SC-PVC- CU cables and all accessories including 20A DP switch with neon light A voltage switch for air-conditioning unit as Sollateck 5 No type AVS 30, wired to the A/C unit above 2.28 Outlet for outdoor Split Unit air conditioning, comprising 5 No box concealed, HG PVC conduit, wiring in 5x6mm 2 SC- PVC-CU cables and all accessories including 32A TPN Isolator, as MK or Crabtree or approved approved equivalent 2.29 Outlet for 63A SPN Local Isolator, comprising box 2 No concealed, HG PVC conduit, wiring in 5x10mm 2 SC- PVC-CU cables and all accessories including 63A SPN Isolator, as MK or Crabtree or approved approved equivalent Total for Bill No. 2: Ground Floor for MTRH Lab C/F to Collection Page -

336 PROPOSED LAB AND ISOLATION UNIT FOR NPHLS (MTRH AND MARSABIT) ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES- BILLS OF QUANTITIES ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS BILLS OF QUANTITIES - ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS BILL NO. 3 FIRST FLOOR MTRH ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT NO. KShs. Cts. Supply, install, test, commission and set to work the following. All lighting fittings to be complete with lamp, control gear etc as applicable. PLEASE NOTE ALL LED LIGHT FITTINGS TO BE RATED V AC 3 Lighting 3.01a) Lighting point 1-way switched. 66 No. b) Lighting point 2-way switched. 50 No A white moulded switch plates as MK or Crabtree or any other approved equivalent: - (a) 1-gang 1-way 13 No. (b) 2-gang 1-way 1 No. (c) 1-gang 2 way 12 No. (d) 2-gang 2 way 0 No. (e) 3-gang 2 way 2 No Install permanent DANGER 415V labels where groups 2 No. of switches have been fed by more than one phase Lighting fittings, complete with lamps of specified - wattage and appropriate colour rendering: - (Note: All fittings to be fitted with High Frequency - control gear. All LED fittings to be rated VAC) a) Recessed horizontal 390mm Diameter Downlighter c/w 20 No. TC 22W T5 lamp,an opal polycarbonate diffuser as Fosnova cat no or approved equivalent. (Type N) b) 1.8W Direction Light Signs Complete With Vandal 4 No. Resistant, Anti Yellowing Grey Polycarbonate As Disano 618 Safety S.E Version Cat No with an autonomy of 3hrs. c) 1.8W Exit Emergency Light Complete With Vandal Resistant, Anti Yellowing Grey Polycarbonate As Disano 618 Safety S.E Version Cat No with an autonomy of 3hrs. 3 No. d) High Performance 600x600mm LED flat Panel c/w 44W LED lamp, extruded aluminium frame with opal polycarbonate diffuser cat no. JC71277 or approved equivalent e) Surface mounted batten in extruded aluminum with ABS end caps housing and opal polycarbonate diffuser c/w 8W LED lamp as DISANO 420-Rigo LED cat no or approved equivalent (type 7) 70 No 3 No Total C/F to Page G/16 -

337 PROPOSED LAB AND ISOLATION UNIT FOR NPHLS (MTRH AND MARSABIT) ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES- BILLS OF QUANTITIES ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS BILL NO. 3 FIRST FLOOR ITEM NO QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT KShs. Cts. Total B/F from Page G/ f) Surface mounted 180mm Diameter press steel housing 13 No and frosted opal glass diffuser as JCC RIGA CEILING cat no. JC 52016CH or approved equivalent. (Type 2) 3.1 Power Supply 3.10a) 10-way TP/N Power Distribution Board complete with 3 No. 100A TP/N integral isolator and all accessories including lockable cover. The Distribution Board to be as Schneider Electric or Merlin Gerlin or any other approved equivalent for Raw Power. b) SP MCB s for the above boards. 79 No c) Blanking plates for unused spare ways for the above 11 No boards. d) Carry out complete permanent labeling for all the sub- 1 Item circuits in the board above e) Earth the above distribution boards. 1 Item f) 4 core 25mm² PVC/SWA/PVC copper cables to the DBs 150 m above g) Cable glands for the above cable. 6 No. h) Cable lugs for the cable above, complete with crimping 24 No x50mm white stove enameled trunking, single- 100 m compartment, complete with cover, screws etc for the sub mains cables above -Provisional 3.21 Outlet for CCTV/ security alarm/ fire alarm points 50 No. comprising box, concealed in PVC conduit, draw wire and square blanking cover. 3.22a) Outlet for electric door locks comprising wiring in 3x2.5mm 2 SC-PVC-CU cables, box, concealed conduit links and all accessories including card reader. 16 No b) Heavy-duty micro switches for the above 16 No 3.23 Twin 13A socket outlets complete with wiring in 3 No. 6x2.5mm 2 PVC-SC-CU cables inside concealed conduits for raw power. The socket outlets to be MK, Crabtree or any other approved equivalent 3.24 Dia. 32mm H.G PVC conduits buried in floor slab 30 m 3.25a) 300x50mm cream heavy duty plastic angular clip-on 3- compartment trunking as per details shown complete with cover, screws etc 400 m b) 300x50mm plastic factory made corner bends for the 95 No. trunking above. Total C/F to Page G/17 - -

338 PROPOSED LAB AND ISOLATION UNIT FOR NPHLS (MTRH AND MARSABIT) ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES- BILLS OF QUANTITIES ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS BILL NO. 3 FIRST FLOOR ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT KShs. Cts. Total B/F from Page G/16 c) Carry out bonding throughout the entire length of the 1 above trunking in 6mm2 green PVC insulated copper cables d) Dia. 32mm H.G PVC conduits buried in floor slab 150 (Provisional) 3.26a) Punched outlet plates on the trunking for twin socket 44 outlets. b) Punched outlet plates on the trunking for twin Data/voice 44 outlets. Item m No No a) Twin 13A standard white socket outlet as MK or 44 Crabtree or any other approved equivalent, complete with ring wiring in 6x2.5mm 2 PVC-SC-CU cables inside trunking for raw power b) Twin data/telephone faceplates in trunking complete with 44 box draw-wire and square blanking cover for RJ45 terminations No. No x 450 x 200 mm 14 gauge galvanized compartment 3 telephone draw box complete with 3- cover, screws etc Outlet point for water heater/ hand drier/ extract fans/ 7 staircase Pressurization comprising 20mm diameter conduit, wiring in 3 x 4.0 mm² SC-PVC-CU cables and all accessories including 20A DP switch with neon light as MK or Crabtree or any other approved equivalent. No No 3.3 Outlet for twin 15A industrial sockets comprising 20mm 20 diameter conduit, wiring in 3 x 4.0 mm² SC-PVC-CU cables and all accessories including top plug No Outlet for Indoor air conditioning unit comprising box 12 concealed, HG PVC conduit, wiring in 3x4mm 2 SC-PVC- CU cables and all accessories including 20A DP switch with neon light. No A voltage switch for air-conditioning unit as Sollateck type AVS 30, wired to the A/C unit above 12 No 3.33 Outlet for outdoor Split Unit air conditioning, comprising box concealed, HG PVC conduit, wiring in 5x6mm 2 SC- PVC-CU cables and all accessories including 32A TPN Isolator, as MK or Crabtree or approved approved equivalent 3.34 Outlet for 63A SPN Local Isolator, comprising box concealed, HG PVC conduit, wiring in 5x10mm 2 SC- PVC-CU cables and all accessories including 63A SPN Isolator, as MK or Crabtree or approved approved equivalent No No Total for Bill No. 3: First Floor for MTRH Lab C/F to Collection Page -

339 PROPOSED LAB AND ISOLATION UNIT FOR NPHLS (MTRH AND MARSABIT) ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES- BILLS OF QUANTITIES ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS BILL NO. 4: LIGHTNING PROTECTION ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT KShs. Cts. Note: All lightning protection products to be FURSE Alternative makes will NOT be accepted. 4 Air Termination mm diameter multiple point copper air terminal as 11 No. Furse Cat. No. RA Copper air terminal base as Furse Cat. No. SD No Copper junction clamps for tape. 20 No x 3mm turned copper tape as Furse Cat. No. TC m Copper ridge saddle as Furse Cat. No. CD No 4.06 D.C. tape clip as Furse Cat. No.CP No 4.07 Copper rod-to-tape coupling. 20 No. 4.1 Down Conductors x 3mm turned copper tape as Furse Cat. No. TC m D.C. tape clip as Furse Cat. No. CP No Oblong test/junction clamp as Furse Cat. No. CN No Diameter 38mm HG PVC conduits for the down 25 m. conductors above. 4.2 Earth Termination mm diameter, 1200mm long solid copper earth rod as 2 No. Furse Cat. No. RC 020, complete with driving stud and spike Earth rod-to-tape clamp type A. 2 No Concrete inspection earth pit Cat. No. PT 005 with 5 hole 2 No. earth bar as Furse Cat. No. PT mm x 1500mm copper earth mat made from 25mm x 2 No. 3mm copper tape at 300mm spacing, buried at permanent moisture level and complete with all clamps, welding joints and 6m long 25mm x 3mm insulated copper tape clamped to the down conductors Bonding Bonding and clamping to all metal work including water 1 Item pipes, gas pipes, hand-rails, air-conditioning units, window frames, cladding, metal roof etc. and the main earth for the building. Total for Bill No.4 Lightning Protection, for MTRH C/F to Collection Page -

340 PROPOSED LAB AND ISOLATION UNIT FOR NPHLS (MTRH AND MARSABIT) ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES BILLS OF QUANTITIES - SECURITY INSTALLATIONS BILL NO. 5 ACCESS CONTROL INSTALLATIONS AT MTRH ELDORET ITEM No. DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE (KShs Cts) Supply, install, test, commission and set to work (To the full satisfaction of all parties to the contract) the following: - AMOUNT (KShs Cts) A1 A2 PREAMBLE a) Total No. of double leaf doors. b) Total No. of single leaf doors. c) Details of doors, door handles, frames etc. to be confirmed with the Project Architects, Sk Archplans, of P.O. Box ,NAIROBI. d) Strike : Electric BILLS OF QUANTITIES Supply, install, test, commission and set to work the following: No. No Proximity card and finger print reader, complete with its controls and all accessories for IN/OUT operation including software. 50 No A dedicated computer, Intel i7 Processor 8 GB RAM/2TB HDD/17 SVGA non-radiation emitting screen/key board/mouse/ DVD- RW. The computer to be supplied with all the associated software to run the entire Security network. And to be as HP or Dell or approved equivalent 1 No. 5.03a) 5.03b) 5.03c) 5.03d) Door handle. Please check with Architects first. Electric door opener Door MAGNET (250 kg) Res. Force. Automatic door-closures as Union or approved equivalent No. No. No. No Supply proximity cards, each bearing photograph of individual staff member. Conduct tailor-made programming of each card as per Client s requirements. The cards to be complete with printing. 150 No Allow for associated cabling, installation, testing, commissioning, all accessories, customized programming, training and handing over. Item 5.06 Any other items necessary to complete the access control system satisfactorily. Please list the items 1. Item Allow for 1-week dedicated training of the client nominees (Assume 10 No.) on the operations of the door access control system Item Total for Bill No 5: Access Control Installations C/F to Summary Page -

341 NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORY SERVICES PROPOSED LAB AND ISOLATION UNIT FOR NPHLS (MTRH AND MARSABIT) ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES BILLS OF QUANTITIES - COMMUNICATION SERVICES BILL NO. 6 STRUCTURED CABLING INSTALLATIONS - MTRH ITEM No. DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE (KShs Cts) Supply, install, test, commission and set to work (To the full satisfaction of all parties to the contract) the following: - AMOUNT (KShs Cts) 6.01a) 48-port Cisco switch as catalyst WS-C PS-L superstack 2 10/100/1000 mbps stackable PoE LAN Base with cabinet Jumper Power Cord 250 VAC 13A C14-C15 connectors and CAT3850 Universal k9 Image S3850UK9-33SE. To also have SMARTNET 8X5XNBD Cisco Catalyst port POE Lan Base CON-SNT-WSC388PL support for a period of one year. No. b) GBIC transceiver modules (LC to LC) multimode CISCO make for the switches above 4 No c) Cisco Catalyst X 1GE Network Module C3850-NM-4-1G 2 No. d) 50CM Type 1 Stacking Cable STACK-T1-50CM e) 715W AC Config 1 Power Supply PWR-C1-715WAC 2 2 No. No. Included in Switch Included in Switch 6.02 Dual Data cable outlets, type RJ45 as siemon, cat 6E complete 81 with face plates Wireless access point as CISCO Port patch panel as siemon, type RJ45 Cat. 6E port Fiber optic patch panel, as Siemons or approved 1 equivalent. 6.06a) 8 core armoured multi-mode fibre for Back bone cabling for the 100 switches, in redundant wiring b) LC-LC Multimode patch cords with connectors 2 c) LC-RJ45 patch cords with connectors 1 d) Splicing, termination, testing and commissioning of the above Fibre connections 6.07a) Purpose-made Free Standing Server cabinet 800x1000mm 1 (Type 42U or equivalent) for the hub/patch-panel complete with 4No. extract fan and 4 No. 3 pin power points on UPS. To have a PDU with neon indicators. AS APC or TOTEN type or Siemon 6.08 UTP Cat 6E structured cables as siemon or approved equivalent 30 in 305M box 6.09a) UTP Cat. 6E patch cord, 3M as siemon or approved equivalent 166 b) UTP Cat. 6E patch cord, 1M as siemon or approved equivalent 247 c) Allow for structured cable termination at all computer terminals, attendance in power connection, testing and commissioning of the network to TSD-ISN Standards Data cable termination, both ends RJ11 Patch Cord as Siemens or approved equivalent Cable organizers. 50 No. No. No. No. m No No Item No. Rolls No. No. Item No. No. No. Total C/F to Page G/21

342 NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORY SERVICES PROPOSED LAB AND ISOLATION UNIT FOR NPHLS (MTRH AND MARSABIT) ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES BILLS OF QUANTITIES - COMMUNICATION SERVICES BILL NO. 6 STRUCTURED CABLING INSTALLATIONS - LABS ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE (KShs Cts) Total B/F from Page G/20 AMOUNT (KShs Cts) 6.13 Allow for integration to the PABX and all other network Item equipments for receiving, handling, testing and full configuration. NB: All to CISCO Solutions pair UTP Cat. 5E, structured cables, as siemon or approved 1 Rolls equivalent in 305M box between PABX and patch-panel Allow for fixing permanent labels on all the equipment and Item cables Power outlet for the 2 No. switches, comprising 2 No. twin 1 No. sockets, wiring in 2.5mm² ring-main wiring, conduit, box and all accessories. (Outlets to be on UPS) 6.17 Any other items necessary to complete the data cabling satisfactorily. Please list the items. i) ii) KW UPS for the System complete with accessories 1 Item Total for Bill No. 6 Structured Cabling Installations - MTRH C/F to Summary Page

343 PROPOSED LAB AND ISOLATION UNIT FOR NPHLS (MTRH AND MARSABIT) ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES- BILLS OF QUANTITIES FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION BILLS OF QUANTITIES - FIRE ALARM INSTALLATIONS BILL NO. 7: FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM INSTALLATIONS Item No. Description Qty Unit Rate Amount KSh. Cts. Supply, install, test, commission and set to work the following:- All fire alarm equipment to be as per relevant KS and BS standards. This fire alarm specification is for a fully addressable analogue system. Supplying a conventional system will lead to automatic disqualification. And due to the sensitivity of this contract, only the specified items to be supplied. Alternatives, will NOT be accepted Outlet for fire alarm points wired in 3 x 1.5mm² screened fire-proof 80 No. cable as FIREPIX or approved equivalent, and all accessories 7.01 Outlet for fire alarm panels/repeater panels comprising 2A fused 2 No. unswitched spur outlet, concealed PVC conduit, wiring in 3 x 2.5mm² SC-PVC-CU cables Analogue photoelectric smoke detector complete with lockable base 55 No. and alarm indicator LED. (State make and type) Analogue addresseable heat detector complete with lockable base and 15 No. alarm indicator LED. (State make and type) 7.04a) Addressable manual call points complete with monitoring resistor, protective plastic coating on the glass, test key and polycarbonate flap. (State make and type) 7.04b) Addressable weatherproof manual call points complete with monitoring resistor, protective plastic coating on the glass, test key and polycarbonate flap. (State make and type) 7.05a) Addressable electronic loop sounder wired direct onto the detection loop and powered from the loop, suitable for both external and internal application complete with volume control, a choice of 12 different sounds and rated at dba at 1 m. (State make and type). (State make and type). 7.05b) High efficiency xenon beacons with enhanced optical design for maximum light dissipation and 2W xenon discharge lamp rated IP65. (State make and type). 6 No. 2 No 6 No. 3 No Addressable standard interface units (using relays) for connecting 5 No. detectors in voids, and to serve as remote indicators when detector triggers in the void. (State make and type). Total C/F to Page G/23 -

344 PROPOSED LAB AND ISOLATION UNIT FOR NPHLS (MTRH AND MARSABIT) ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES- BILLS OF QUANTITIES FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION BILLS OF QUANTITIES - FIRE ALARM INSTALLATIONS BILL NO. 7: FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM INSTALLATIONS Item No. Description Qty Unit Rate Amount KSh. Cts. Total B/F from Page G/ Short circuit isolator for protecting a fire detection loop by making 5 No. sure a short-circuit or an open circuit fault in any zone does not affect other zones. (State make and type) loop Analogue addressable fire detection and alarm control panel complete with printer, 8 lines 80 character LCD. The control panel to be designed to meet fully the requirements of EN54 Pt. 2 and 4: 1998 and BS 5839 Part 1. The panel to be complete with battery pack and automatic charger for minimum 72-hour operation under conditions of sustained power failure. (State make and type). The main panel to be located in the Main Security office 1 No Analogue addressable repeater panel, wired to the main panel above, 1 No. and complete with a 72-hour battery pack and automatic charger, to work in conjunction with the main panel. (State make and type). The repeater panel to be located in Guard Hose at the gate. 7.10a) Fire Alarm Graphics software complete with a desk top computer and capable of full control of fire alarm system as designed by FIREPIX, or other approved software vendors. 7.10b) Communications Drive Unit 7.10c) Serial Communications Interface Unit 1 No. 1 No. 1 No Allow for linking the above main fire alarm panel as dedicated zone 1 Item on the security alarm panel Carry out wiring in 3 x 1.5mm 2 in FIRE-RESISTANT, SCREENED 2,400 m. cable, all drawn inside the above ducts/conduits. [Note: The cable must be FIRE-RESISTANT and not merely heat resistant. This has to be demonstrated at presentation of sample] Total for Bill No. 7: Fire Detection and Alarm Installations C/F to Summary page -

345 PROPOSED LAB AND ISOLATION UNIT FOR NPHLS (MTRH AND MARSABIT) ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES- BILLS OF QUANTITIES FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION BILLS OF QUANTITIES - FIRE ALARM INSTALLATIONS BILL NO. 8 GENERAL ITEMS Item No. 8.00a) Description Qty Unit Rate Amount KSh. Cts. Supply, install, test, commission and set to work (To the full satisfaction of all parties to the contract) the following: - Carry out comprehensive Fire Detection and Alarm System, Access control, structured cabling and nurse call installations testing and analysing, after installations. Prior to testing and commissioning conduct comprehensive programming of the system by approved manufacturer s representative to perform as instructed by the Engineer, including ringing patterns The testing and commissioning will be done as detailed below. i) Prior to commencement of the work the contractor shall submit a procedure for the inspection, testing and commissioning of the system. This procedure shall include for the visual and functional check/test of all components of the system - the visual check will cover the standard of workmanship, the functional quality of the equipment and general compliance with the system specification and the functional tests shall check the operation of the system ii) Commissioning will be undertaken by a qualified person using the approved inspection, testing and commissioning procedure. iii) On successful commissioning of the system, in terms of the specified requirements, a Taking Over Certificate shall be completed. This is the written notification to the Service Provider/installer that the client has taken over the system in terms of the Agreement. Payment cannot be effected without this certificate iv) The Final Completion date for the system is determined from the Hand over Certificate. The taking over date is also that date on which the warranty period is deemed to have commenced. v) Each equipment in the installations shall be supplied with a complete installation manual and comprehensive operating instructions. In addition, cabling and wiring information, a list of all equipment with associated serial numbers, etc (as specified) and any other information that may be required by the client from time to time and a copy of the taking Over Certificate shall be provided in a A4 hard cover arch lever type file Total C/F to Page G/25 -

346 PROPOSED LAB AND ISOLATION UNIT FOR NPHLS (MTRH AND MARSABIT) ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES- BILLS OF QUANTITIES FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION BILLS OF QUANTITIES - FIRE ALARM INSTALLATIONS BILL NO. 8 GENERAL ITEMS Item No. Description Qty Unit Rate Amount KSh. Cts. Total B/F from Page G/24 - vi) The contractor shall provide basic operating training on the system, using the operating instructions, for client staff prior to the Taking over Certificate being issued. This training shall be sufficient to ensure correct operation of the system. The contractor shall issue certificates to certify that the operators are proficient in the operation of the system on successful completion of the system training. This training MUST be in the manufacturer s representative s presence. vii) The above documentation shall be handed to a selected client representative at the time of commissioning. The documentation to be as detailed below:- viii) System Documentation - all documentation relating to the installation shall be concise, complete and unambiguous. Information shall be provided sufficient to install, test and commission, operate and maintain the system. Operating instructions shall be designed to minimize the possibility of incorrect operation of the system. ix) Component documentation - documentation relating to the components of the installation system shall also be concise, complete and unambiguous. Sufficient information shall be provided to ensure the integration of the component with any other of the system s components. Component documentation shall include the following:- a) Name of manufacturer and / or supplier, including MANUFACTURER s certification of the installation and components, with a written 36- month performance warranty. b) Description of equipment. c) Standard to which component claims compliance. d) Name or mark of the certification body. Item Total C/F to Page G/26 -

347 PROPOSED LAB AND ISOLATION UNIT FOR NPHLS (MTRH AND MARSABIT) ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES- BILLS OF QUANTITIES FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION BILL NO. 8 GENERAL ITEMS Item No. Description Qty Unit Rate Amount KSh. Cts. 8.00b) Supply, install, test, commission and set to work the following: TOTAL b/f from page G/25 Carry out comprehensive 24-hour power analysis, after installing main switchboard, but before switching on load, upgrading of switchgear, with a digital power meter (with printer) to: S) Record and print all the power system parameters. ii) Submit 3 copies of the print-outs. Item (Note: Parameters must be satisfactory before building is switched on) Allow for sub-contractors charges for liaison with Kenya Power and Lighting comprising the following:- i) Extracting load details from the drawings ii) Calculating total load, together with necessary diversity iii) Verifying the details with the engineer. iv) Getting the required documentation and letters from client v) Filling all the required forms, and generating correspondences for power application. vi) Presenting application and getting reference number. vii) Making regular follow-ups with KPLC viii) Facilitating inspection, approvals and certification by KPLC ix) Providing attendance and materials required for power connection. x) Filling out and submitting Commencement and Completion certificates xi) Handing over all approved drawings and certificates to the client. xii) Performing all other services required for power supply to site. xiii) Building/modifying all power manholes to KPLC standards. Item xiv) All other incidental KPLC requirements/charges Carry out comprehensive 24-hour power analysis, after switching main switchboard on full load but AVR off, with a digital power meter (with printer) to: S) Record and print all the power system parameters. ii) Submit 3 copies of the print-outs. Item 8.03 With the AVR on repeat the above process but before the AVR (i.e. on the supply side of the AVR) Item Total for C/F to Page G/27

348 PROPOSED LAB AND ISOLATION UNIT FOR NPHLS (MTRH AND MARSABIT) ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES- BILLS OF QUANTITIES FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION BILLS OF QUANTITIES - ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS BILL NO. 8 GENERAL ITEMS ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT NO. KShs. Cts. Total B/F from Page G/ With the AVR on repeat the above process but after the AVR (i.e. on the load side of the AVR) Allow for presentation of all the required samples as per specifications, Bills of Quantities and Drawings. Prepare and submit Working Drawings as follows:- Item Item i) Draft soft copy in Archicad and Autocad 2000 in CD- RW. ii) Amended soft copy in Archicad and Autocad 2000 in CD- RW. iii) 5 Final soft copies in Archicad and Autocad 2000 in CD- RW to Architect, Client, Quantity Surveyor, and Engineer (2 copies) iv) 3 Draft hard-copies of Working Drawings in Ao (Scales 1:50, 1:25) to Engineer, Architect and Main Contractor. v) 2 Amended hard copies of Working Drawings in Ao (Scales 1:50 and 1:25) to Engineer, Architect and Main Contractor. vi) 11 No. Final hard copies of working drawings in Ao (Scales 1:50, 1:25) to Engineer (3 copies), Architect (1 copy), Quantity Surveyor (1 copy), Client (3 copies), Contractor (3 copies). (Note: Full set of drawings to be presented as per drawing list). Item 8.07 As item no. 8.06, but for Record (As-Installed) Drawings comprising: i) Fully dimensioned drawings of all plants and apparatus. ii) iii) General arrangement drawings of equipment, plant etc. Routes types and sizes and arrangement of all pipework. iv) System schematics and trunking diagrams showing all salient information relating to control and instrumentation. v) Grading charts vi) Wiring and piping diagrams of plant and apparatus. vii) Schematic diagram of individual plants and switch and control viii) All the required operating instructions for all panels, boards, control panels etc. Item Total for C/F to Page G/28

349 PROPOSED LAB AND ISOLATION UNIT FOR NPHLS (MTRH AND MARSABIT) ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES- BILLS OF QUANTITIES FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION BILLS OF QUANTITIES - ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS BILL NO. 8 GENERAL ITEMS ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT NO. KShs. Cts. Total B/F from Page G/ Prepare and submit Maintenance Manuals for all items installed. Item 8.09 Provide a year s (12 months ) initial maintenance upon expiry of the Defects Liability Period. The maintenance to be carried out every quarter (3 months) for a period of 12 months. Item 8.10 Allow for removal of any existing power services on site, comprising:- i) Applying to the Kenya Power and Lighting Co. to disconnect and remove such services, including any power meters that may be on site. ii) Making all the required liaison with KPLC to ensure speedy disconnection, removal, and/or re-routing of all services that may be existing on site. (Note: The tenderer MUST visit site to assess and establish the nature of all existing services on site). Item 8.11 Allow for removal of any existing communications services on site, comprising:- i) Applying to the Telkom Kenya Ltd. to disconnect and remove such services that may be on site. ii) Making all the required liaison with Telkom Kenya Ltd. to ensure speedy disconnection, removal, and/or re-routing of all services that may be existing on site. (Note: The tenderer MUST visit site to assess and establish the nature of all existing services on site). Item Total for Bill No. 8 - General Items C/F to Collection Page for Electrical Installations -

350 PROPOSED LAB AND ISOLATION UNIT FOR NPHLS (MTRH AND MARSABIT) ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES- BILLS OF QUANTITIES FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION COLLECTION PAGE FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT KSHS. CTS. 1 Bill No. 1: Mains Power Supply and Distribution B/F - 2 Bill No. 2: Ground Floor B/F - 3 Bill No. 3: First Floor B/F - 4 Bill No. 4: Lightning Protection B/F - 5 Bill No. 5:Access Control B/F - 6 Bill No. 6: Structured Cabling B/F - 7 Bill No. 7: Fire Alarm and Detection B/F - 8 Bill No. 8: General Items B/F - 9 Sub-Contract Preliminaries, B/F 10 Allow for sub-contractors charges for liaison with Kenya Power and Lighting during the works comprising the following: - i) Getting the required documentation and letters from client ii) Filling all the required forms, and generating correspondences iii)presenting application and getting reference number iv) Making regular follow-ups with KPLC v) Facilitating inspection, approvals and certification by KPLC vi) Providing attendance and materials required for power connection. vii) Filling out and submitting Commencement and Completion certificates viii) Handing over all approved drawings and certificates to the ix) Performing all other services required for power re connection to the building. x) Building/modifying all power manholes to KPLC standards xi) All other incidental KPLC requirements/charges. 11 Allow for careful removal of existing electrical services on site and - handing over to the client/landlord 12 Sub-Total - 13 Allow for 5% contingency and variation of price (VOP) - 14 Provision for Kenya Power and Lighting Company charges 1,500, Total for Electrical Installations Carried Forward to Price Summary Page

351 PROPOSED LAB AND ISOLATION UNIT FOR NPHLS (MTRH AND MARSABIT) ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES- BILLS OF QUANTITIES FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION contnd Total Amount in words Tenderer s Name and Stamp Signature.. Date PIN No. VAT No. Witnes Address Signature.. Date

352 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS

353 REPUBLIC OF KENYA MINISTRY OF HEALTH (NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORY SERVICES) TENDER DOCUMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF LABORATORY AT MOI TEACHING REFERRAL HOSPITAL (MTRH) ELDORET SUB-CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS AND BILLS OF QUANTITIES VOLUME III OF III MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS REF: MOH/RFP/WB/EAPHLNP/001/03 ARCHITECT: SK ARCHPLANS LTD P.O. Box: Nairobi. STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: ARMITECH CONSULTANTS P.O Box Nairobi PROJECT MANAGER AND QUANTITY SURVEYOR AEGIS DEVELOPMENT SOLUTIONS LIMITED Blue Violet Plaza, Suite 603 P.O. Box Nairobi ELECTRICAL/ MECHANICAL ENGINEERS FERADON ASSOCIATES P.O.BOX Nairobi. OCTOBER, 2017

354 NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORIES SERVICES PROPOSED LABORATORY AT MOI TEACHING REFERRAL HOSPITAL SUB-CONTRACT FOR MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS 1. CONTENTS i 2. SPECIAL NOTES FOR ALL TENDERERS ii 3. PART A: GENERAL MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS A1-A5 4. PART B: GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLUMBING & DRAINAGE WORKS 5. PART C: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLUMBING & DRAINAGE INSTALLATIONS 6. PART D: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 7. PART E: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR FIRE HOSEREEL SYSTEM 8. PART F: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR AIR-CONDITIONING & MECHANICAL VENTILATION INSTALLATIONS 9. PART G1: BILLS OF QUANTITIES FOR PLUMBING, DRAINAGE AND FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATIONS 10. PART G2: BILLS OF QUANTITIES FOR AIR-CONDITIONING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION INSTALLATIONS B1-B31 C1-C4 D1-D4 E1-E3 F1-F19 G1/1-G1/9 G2/1-G2/9 11. PART I: MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS MAIN SUMMARY PAGE H1 Feradon Associates Ltd., Consulting Engineers, Kasuku Drive, Off Bogani Road, Karen P O Box Ronald Ngala, NAIROBI. OCTOBER, 2017 i

355 NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORIES SERVICES PROPOSED LABORATORY AT MOI TEACHING REFERRAL HOSPITAL SUB-CONTRACT FOR MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS SPECIAL NOTES FOR ALL TENDERERS: Important: The site for the proposed works has a number of existing installations. The Sub-contractor will be required to ensure there s no interference with supply of services to neighbouring organizations. The sub-contractor will be required to take all precaution and care so that no damage will occur to the existing installations on site. The subcontractor is also advised to secure all the necessary insurance policies as he will be solely held responsible for any damages to the existing system, injuries to persons resulting from his activities and/or interference with normal operations of the building that may result from his negligence, actions or otherwise. 1. These notes shall form part of these specifications and conditions. 2. The tenderer is required to check the number of pages in this document and should any be found to be missing or the figures indistinct, he must inform the Engineers at once and have the same rectified. Should the tenderer be in doubt about the precise meaning of any item, word or figures, or for any reason whatsoever observe any apparent omission of words or figures, he must inform the Engineer in order that the correct meaning may be decided upon before the date for the submission of the tenders. 3. No liability whatsoever will be admitted nor claim allowed in respect of errors in the completed tender due to mistakes in this document which should have been rectified in the manner described above. 4. The tenderer shall not alter or otherwise qualify the text of this specification. Any alteration or qualification made without authority will be ignored and the text of the specification as printed will be adhered to. 5. The tenderer shall be deemed to have made allowances in his unit prices generally to cover items of preliminaries or additions to Prime cost Sums or other items, if those have not been priced against the respective items. 6. In no case will any expenses incurred by the tenderer in preparation of this tender be reimbursed. 7. The copyright of this specification is vested in the Engineers and no part thereof may be reproduced without their express permission, given in writing. 8. The specifications must be priced in Kenya Currency i.e. Shillings and Cents. 9. The prices Quoted must be inclusive of Added Tax. 10. All the tenderers must make a declaration that they have not and will not make any payment to any person which can be perceived as an inducement to enable them to win this tender. 11. The works shall be carried out in accordance with provisions of the Latest Edition of IEE wiring Regulations, the most current Kenya Standards governing such works, and relevant provisions of the current KPLC by-laws. 12. Preliminaries for this sub-contract to be included in the Main-contract Signed (As in Tender)... Date/Stamp... ii

356 PART A: GENERAL MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

357 PART A: GENERAL MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS CLAUSE DESCRIPTION PAGE 1. General A/2 2. Quality of Materials A/2 3. Regulations and Standards A/2 4. Electrical Requirements A/3 5. Transport and Storage A/3 6. Site Supervision A/3 7. Installation A/4 8. Testing A/4 9. Colour Coding A/5 10. Welding A/5 -A/1-

358 PART A: GENERAL MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1 General This section specifies the general requirement for plant, equipment and materials forming part of the Subcontract Works and shall apply except where specifically stated elsewhere in the Specification or on the Contract Drawings. 2 Quality of Materials All plant, equipment and materials supplied as part of the Sub-contract Works shall be new and of first class commercial quality, shall be free from defects and imperfections and where indicated shall be of grades and classifications designated herein. All products or materials not manufactured by the Sub-contractor shall be products of reputable manufacturers and so far as the provisions of the Specification is concerned shall be as if they had been manufactured by the Sub-contractor. Materials and apparatus required for the complete installation as called for by the Specification and Contract Drawings shall be supplied by the Sub-contractor unless mention is made otherwise. Materials and apparatus supplied by others for installation and connection by the Sub-contractor shall be carefully examined on receipt. Should any defects be noted, the Sub-contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer. Defective equipment or that damaged in the course of installation or tests shall be replaced as required to the approval of the Engineer. 3 Regulations and Standards The Sub-contract Works shall comply with the current editions of the following: a) The Kenya Government Regulations. b) The United Kingdom Institution of Electrical Engineers (IEE) Regulations for the Electrical Equipment of Buildings. c) The United Kingdom Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) Guides. d) British Standard and Codes of Practice as published by the British Standards Institution (BSI) e) The Local Council By-laws. f) The Electricity Supply Authority By-laws. g) Local Authority By-laws. h) The Kenya Building Code Regulations. i) The Kenya Bureau of Standards -A/2-

359 4 Electrical Requirements Plant and equipment supplied under this Sub-contract shall be complete with all necessary motor starters, control boards, and other control apparatus. Where control panels incorporating several starters are supplied they shall be complete with a main isolator. The supply power up to and including local isolators shall be provided and installed by the Electrical Subcontractor. All other wiring and connections to equipment shall form part of this Sub-contract and be the responsibility of the Sub-contractor. The Sub-contractor shall supply three copies of all schematic, cabling and wiring diagrams for the Engineer s approval. The starting current of all electric motors and equipment shall not exceed the maximum permissible starting currents described in the Kenya Power and Lighting Company (KPLC) By-laws. All electrical plant and equipment supplied by the Sub-contractor shall be rated for the supply voltage and frequency obtained in Kenya, that is 415 Volts, 50Hz, 3-Phase or 240Volts, 50Hz, 1-phase. Any equipment that is not rated for the above voltages and frequencies shall be rejected by the Engineer. 5 Transport and Storage All plant and equipment shall, during transportation be suitably packed, crated and protected to minimize the possibility of damage and to prevent corrosion or other deterioration. On arrival at site all plant and equipment shall be examined and any damage to parts and protective priming coats made good before storage or installation. Adequate measures shall be taken by the Sub-contractor to ensure that plant and equipment do not suffer any deterioration during storage. Prior to installation all piping and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned. If, in the opinion of the Engineer any equipment has deteriorated or been damaged to such an extent that it is not suitable for installation, the Sub-contractor shall replace this equipment at his own cost. 6 Site Supervision The Sub-contractor shall ensure that there is an English-speaking supervisor on the site at all times during normal working hours. 7 Installation Installation of all special plant and equipment shall be carried out by the Sub-contractor under adequate supervision from skilled staff provided by the plant and equipment manufacturer or his appointed agent in accordance with the best standards of modern practice and to the relevant regulations and standards described under Clause 3 of this Section. -A/3-

360 8 Testing General The Sub-contractor s attention is drawn to part A Clause 38 of the Preliminaries and General Conditions. Material Tests All material for plant and equipment to be installed under this Sub-contract shall be tested, unless otherwise directed, in accordance with the relevant BS Specification concerned. For materials where no BS Specification exists, tests are to be made in accordance with the best modern commercial methods to the approval of the Engineer, having regard to the particular type of the materials concerned. The Sub-contractor shall prepare specimens and performance tests and analyses to demonstrate conformance of the various materials with the applicable standards. If stock material, which has not been specially manufactured for the plant and equipment specified is used, then the Sub-contractor shall submit satisfactory evidence to the Engineer that such materials conform to the requirements stated herein in which case tests of material may be partially or completely waived. Certified mill test reports of plates, piping and other materials shall be deemed acceptable. Manufactured Plant and Equipment Work Tests Pressure Testing The rights of the Engineer relating to the inspection, examination and testing of plant and equipment during manufacture shall be applicable to the Insurance Companies or Inspection Authorities so nominated by the Engineer. The Sub-contractor shall give two week s notice to the Engineer of the manufacturer s intention to carry out such tests and inspections. The Engineer or his representative shall be entitled to witness such tests and inspections. The cost of such tests and inspections shall be borne by the Sub-contractor. Six copies of all test and inspection certificates and performance graphs shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval as soon as possible after the completion of such tests and inspections. All pipework installations shall be pressure tested in accordance with the requirements of the various sections of this Specification. The installations may be tested in sections to suit the progress of the works but all tests must be carried out before the work is buried or concealed behind building finishes. All tests must be witnessed by the Engineer or his representative and the Sub-contractor shall give 48 hours notice to the Engineer of his intention to carry out such tests. Any pipework that is buried or concealed before witnessed pressure tests have been carried out shall be exposed at the expense of the Sub-contractor and the specified tests shall then be applied. The Sub-contractor shall prepare test certificates for signature by the Engineer and shall keep a progressive and up-to-date record of the section of the work that has been tested. -A/4-

361 9 Colour Coding Welding Method Unless stated otherwise in the Particular Specification all pipework shall be colour coded in accordance with the latest edition of BS 1710 and to the approval of the Engineer or Architect. Preparation Joints to be made by welding shall be accurately cut to size with edges sheared, flame cut or machined to suit the required type of joint. The prepared surface shall be free from all visible defects such as lamination, surface imperfection due to shearing or flame cutting operation, etc., and shall be free from rust scale, grease and other foreign matter. All welding shall be carried out by the electric arc processing using covered electrodes in accordance with BS 639. Gas welding may be employed in certain circumstances provided that prior approval is obtained from the Engineer. Welding Code and Construction All welded joints shall be carried out in accordance with the following Specifications: a) Pipe Welding Welder s Qualifications All pipe welds shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of BS 806. b) General Welding All welding of mild steel components other than pipework shall comply with the general requirements of BS Any welder employed on this Sub-contract shall have passed the trade tests as laid down by the Government of Kenya. The Engineer may require to see the appropriate certificate obtained by any welder and should it be proved that the welder does not have the necessary qualifications the Engineer may instruct the Subcontractor to replace him by a qualified welder. -A/5-

362 PART B: GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE WORKS

363 PART B: GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE WORKS CLAUSE DESCRIPTION PAGE 1. Materials and Standards B/2 2. General B/2 3. Pipework and Fittings B/2 4. Valves B/9 5. Waste Fitment Traps B/10 6. Pipe Supports B/11 7. Sanitary Appliances B/12 8. Pipe Sleeves B/12 9. Installation F/ Testing and Inspection B/ Sterilization of Hot and Cold Water System B/ Water Mains B/ Cold Water Storage Tanks B/ Water Heaters B/ Electrical services B/28 -B/1-

364 PART B GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE WORKS 1.0 MATERIALS AND STANDARDS 2.0 General This section specifies the general requirements for plumbing and drainage forming part of the Sub-Contract Works and shall apply except where specifically stated elsewhere in the specification or on the contract Drawings. 3 Pipework and Fittings Cold Water Mains Black Steel Pipework Copper Tubing Pipework materials to be used are as follows: - Unplasticised PVC or galvanized steel medium or heavy grade, as specified on the drawings. All black steel pipework up to 65mm nominal bore shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 1387 Medium Grade, with tempered place threads in accordance with BS 21. All fittings shall be malleable iron and manufactured in accordance with BS 143. Pipe joints shall be screwed and socketed and sufficient coupling unions shall be allowed so that fittings can be disconnected without cutting the pipe. Running nipples and long screws shall not be permitted unless exceptionally approved by the Engineer All black steel pipeworks, 80mm nominal bore up to 150mm nominal bore, shall be manufactured to comply in all respects with the specification for 65mm pipe, except that screwed and bolted flanges shall replace union and coupling for the joint of pipes to valves other items of plant. All flanges shall comply with the requirements of BS 10 to the relevant classification contained hereinafter under section C of the Specification. Galvanized Steel Pipework Galvanized Steel pipework shall be manufactured to comply in all respects with the standards described for black Steel pipework in paragraph 3.2 above. Galvanizing shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of BS 1387 and BS 143 respectively. All copper tubing shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 2871 from C.160 Phosphorous De-oxidized Non-Arsenical Copper in accordance with BS Pipe joints shall be made with soldered capillary fittings and connections to equipment shall be with compression fittings manufactured in accordance with BS 864. Short copper connection tubes between galvanized pipework and sanitary fitments shall not be used because of the risk of galvanic action. -B/2-

365 Cast Iron Pipework Pitch fibre Pipework If, as may occur in certain circumstances, it is not possible to make the connection in any way than the use of copper tubing, then a brass straight connector shall be positioned between the galvanized pipe and the copper tube in order to prevent direct contact. a) Internal Services Cast Iron pipework and fittings for use above ground in connection with internal building services, shall be manufactured with spigot and socket joints of the weight required by the local authority and shall fully comply with the requirements of BS 416. All joints on Cast Iron spigot and socket pipes shall be made with an approved cold caulking compound and so installed as to allow for any expansion or contraction, which may take place. All Cast Iron pipe work, branches, tees bends and other fittings shall be supplied complete with inspection covers for cleaning purposes. These inspection covers shall be included as parts of the fittings and shall comply with requirements of BS 416. b) External Services Cast iron pipe work, which is used in connection with buried external services, shall be manufactured, coated and tested in accordance with the requirements of BS 1211 All buried cast iron bends, elbows swept tees and other fittings, shall comply with the requirements of BS Joining on external cast iron pipes shall be carried out in accordance with one of the methods described in BS Code of Practice 301, Clause 505C (v), to the approval of the Engineer. Pitch Fibre Pipework and fittings for use in connection with external drainage services shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of BS Pipes shall be connected by means of purpose tapered joints manufactured in accordance with the requirements of the notes contained under Appendix C of BS Until such a time as the use of pitch impregnated fibre is covered by a code of practice, the jointing, laying and cutting of these pipes shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the notes contained under appendix C of BS Concrete Pipe Where concrete pipe and fittings are used in connection with the conveyance surface water of sewage under Atmospheric pressure, they shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of BS 556,Class 1, except where otherwise stated. The joints of concrete pipe and fittings may be one of the following depending application and conditions: - 1) Flexible rebated type (storm water drainage only) 2) Ordinary spigot and socket type 3) Flexible spigot and socket type. 4) Ordinary related type (Storm water drainage only) Joints (1) and (2) shall be sealed with suitable rubber gaskets manufactured in accordance with BS 2494 except where they are likely to be contained by oil products, in which case the gasket be manufactured in accordance with BS Joints (3) and (4) shall be made with approved cement mortar mix. -B/3-

366 Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipe Where asbestos cement pressure pipes and fittings are used in connection with external, above ground or buried water services, they shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirement of BS 486. The classification of these pipes fall into classes: A, B, C and D, respectively, and the class to be used shall depend upon the pressure conditions pertaining to site. Where Cast iron detachable joints are used for connecting pipes, the material shall comply with the BS specification, then the materials used shall be of quality not less than that required by this standard. Rubber jointing rings shall be used for sealing purposes and shall comply with requirements of BS 2494, except where they are likely to be contaminated by oil products, in which case the gasket shall be manufactured in accordance with BS PVC (Hard) Pressure Pipes and Fittings All PVC pipes and fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 3505: 1968 or the relevant Kenya Standard. Jointing The method of jointing to be employed shall be that of solvent welding, using the pipe and manufacturer s approved cement. Seal ring joint shall be introduced where it is necessary to accommodate thermal expansion. Anchoring The bends, valves and hydrant tees etc., in the line of the water main shall be adequately anchored to resist thrust due to internal water pressure. A concrete block shall be cast under and around the pipe and between it and sides of the trench. Well-rammed material shall be used to support the pipe and either side of the concrete. Pipe Bed Pipes shall be uniformly laid on a 75mm thick bed, (sand or red soil) and must not be allowed to rest on the joint or on stones etc. Backfilling For the protection of the pipe, initial backfilling shall be carried out as soon as possible after laying. The initial backfill shall be fine grained material thoroughly compacted around the pipe and consolidated to a depth of 6 above the crown of the pipe and at no time shall heavy rocks, stones or other objects be included in the balance of the backfill that might protrude the initial backfill layer and come into contact with the pipe. Testing Pipelines shall be tested in sections under an internal water pressure normally one and a half times the maximum allowable working pressure of the class of pipe used. Testing shall be carried out as soon as practical after laying and when the pipeline is adequately anchored. Precautions shall be taken to eliminate all air from the test section and to fill the pipe slowly to avoid risk of damage due to surge. MuPVC Waste Systems All pipes and fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 5255: 1968 or the relevant Kenya Standard. Pipe shall be supplied in plain-ended lengths. -B/4-

367 Thickness The Minimum acceptable wall thickness of pipe and fittings shall be as follows: size(in) Size (mm) Pipe and Fittings Wall Thickness (mm) Jointing The method of joining to be employed shall be that of solvent welding, using the pipe and manufacturer s approved cement. Seal rings joints shall be introduced where it is necessary to accommodate thermal expansion. Anchoring All bends, valves and hydrant tees etc, in the line of water main shall be adequately anchored to resist thrust due to internal water pressure. A concrete block shall be cast under and around the pipe and between it and sides of the trench. Well-rammed material shall be used to support the pipe and either side of the concrete. Workmanship The installation method of jointing shall be solvent welding; and both jointing and fixing shall comply in all respect to the manufacturer s site-work instructions. The maximum intervals between pipe supports at 200c shall be as follows: - Nominal size (in) Nominal size (mm) Horizontal (mm) Vertical (mm) Pipes shall be fixed in straight runs and horizontal runs and shall be laid to gradients in conformity with BS 5572 of Practice for Sanitary and in any event not less than 18mm/m unless otherwise specified. Pipes passing through wall or floor shall be sleeved to allow unrestricted movements. The works shall be inspected and tested during installation at any stage in accordance with BS All work, which will be concealed, shall be tested before it is finally enclosed and verified by the Clerk of Works. -B/5-

368 Pipe Bed Pipes shall uniformly be laid on a 75mm thick bed, (Sand or red soil) and not be allowed to rest on the joint or on stones etc. Supports to Fittings In underground installation care shall be taken to ensure that heavy components such as valves are fully supported so that the pipeline carries no weight. Backfilling For the protection of the pipe initial Backfilling shall be carried out as soon as possible after laying. The initial backfill shall be fine-grained material thoroughly compacted around the pipe and consolidated to depth of 6 above the crown of the pipe. At no time shall heavy rocks, stones or other object be included in the balance of the backfill that might protrude the initial backfill and come into contact with the pipe. Testing Pipelines shall be tested in section under an internal water pressure normally one and a half times the maximum allowable working pressure of the class pipe used. Testing shall be carried out as soon as practicable after laying and when the pipeline is anchored precautions shall be taken to eliminate all air from the test section and the pipe slowly to avoid risk of damage due to surge. A.B.S. Waste System PVC Soil System Where indicated on the Drawings and Schedules, the Sub-contractor shall supply and fix A.B.S. waste pipes and fittings. The pipes, traps and fittings shall be in accordance with the relevant British Standards, including BS 3943, and fixed generally in accordance with manufacturer s instructions and BS 5572: Jointing of pipes shall be carried out by means of solvent welding, the manufacturer s instructions and BS 5572: Jointing of pipes shall be carried out by means of solvent welding. The manufacturer s recommended method of joint preparation and fixing shall be followed. Standard brackets, as supplied for use with this system, shall be used wherever possible. Where the building structure renders this impracticable the Sub-contractor shall provide purpose made supports, centres of which shall not exceed one metre. Expansion joints shall be provided as indicated. Supporting brackets and pipe clips shall be fixed on each side of these joints. The Sub-contractor shall supply and fix PVC soil pipes and fittings as indicated on the Drawings and Schedules. Pipes and fittings shall be in accordance with relevant British Standards, including BS 4514 and fixed to the manufacturer s instructions and BS B/6-

369 The soil system shall incorporate synthetic rubber gaskets as provided by the manufacturer whose fixing instructions shall be strictly adhered to. Connections to WC pans shall be effected by the use of a WC connector, gasket and cover, fixed to suit pan outlet. Suitable supporting brackets and pipe clips shall be at maximum of meter centers The Sub- contractor shall be responsible for the joint into the Gully Trap on Drain Trap as indicated on the drawings. UPVC Square Rainwater System pipe and Gutter Gutter shall be a rectilinear section 116mm or 137mm wide. Gutters shall be supplied in plain-ended lengths The minimum acceptable wall thickness of gutter shall be 2.20mm Rainwater pipes shall be supplied in plain-ended lengths. The minimum acceptable wall thickness of rainwater pipes shall be 1.80mm Pipe support brackets must be adequate to screen expansion gaps. The grade of UPVC used for gutter and pipe shall have a minimum softening point of 75 0 C when tested by the vicat method as described in BS The pipe and gutter shall be colour Grey, to BS 5252, 10.A. 07, black white or rustic up.v.c. Rainwater Fittings All fittings shall be injection mounted and shall be compatible with pipe and gutters and shall conform to BS 456 or the appropriate Kenya Standard. All gutters pipe and fittings shall be Colour Grey to British Standard 5252, 12.A. 07 0r black, white or rustic. Gutter connecting fittings shall have integrally moulded seal retaining cavities housing a rubber seal of hollow section. The fitting shall incorporate a gutter-retaining clip. Gutter shall be supplied in plain-ended lengths. The minimum acceptable wall thickness of gutter shall be 2.20mm Rain water pipes shall be circular in section, 65mm nominal diameter complying in al respects to British Standard 4576 or the relevant Kenya Standard. Rainwater pipes shall be supplied in plain-ended lengths. The minimum acceptable wall thickness of rainwater pipes shall be 1.80mm Pipe support brackets must be adequate to screen expansion gaps. The grade of UPVC used for gutter and pipe shall have a minimum softening point of 75 0 C when tested by the Vicat method as described in BS The pipe and gutter shall be Colour Grey, to BS 5252, 10.A.07. black, white or rustic. -B/7-

370 UPVC Underground Drainage System (a) Pipes and fitting The pipes and fittings shall comply in all respects to British Standard & 581 or the relevant Kenya Standards. Pipes shall be supplied in plain-ended lengths. The minimum acceptable wall thickness of pipe and fittings will be as follows: 110mm pipe 160mm pipe 3.0mm 3.9mm 110mm junction only 3.50mm socket 3.80mm body All other fittings 3.20mm socket 3.40mm body 160mm all fittings 4.30mm socket 4.70mm body The method of jointing to be employed shall be by lip seal socketted fittings. Jointing to other materials shall be made in the manner specified by the manufacturer. The grade of UPVC used for the pipes shall have a minimum softening point of 82 0 C when tested by the Vicat method 102D as described in British Standard 2494: Holderbats shall be made of Mild Steel protected from corrosion by galvanizing or such coating for optimum fit. To fit pipe supports a special purpose made PVC packing piece may be used. The base of soil and vent stack connection to the below ground drain shall be made with a bend of minimum centre lines radius of 250mm. Minor changes of direction where permitted shall be made with a variable bend that has a constant effective length. (b) Excavation of Trenches The installation, method of joining shall confirm in all respects to the manufacturer s site work instruction. Trenches shall be excavated to a sufficient depth to allow a 50mm minimum bed below the underside of the pipe. Trenches width shall be not less than the outlet diameter of the plus 300mm and not wider than necessary. (c) Trench Invert The base of the trench shall be such that even support is given to the pipe for it s full length. Soft spots shall be removed and replaced with compacted granular material as described below. High spots and rock shall be removed to allow full 50mm-bed depth. (d) Pipe bed The bed shall be composed of granular material to the specification called for below and shall cover the full trench width and length and boned to gradient. -B/8-

371 (e) Laying and jointing Pipes and fitting shall be laid true to gradient in straight lines and joined in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. All pegs used for alignment and other purposes must be removed after use and before side filling. All joints shall be watertight complying with CP 301, Clauses 5:3 Pipe barrels shall be in continuos contact with the trench bed when laid. (f) Side Filling The side filling of pipes shall be composed of hard granular material, which shall be to the requirements below. Side fillings must be placed equally on both sides of the pipe and compacted, so as to buttress the pipes against the trench walls. Side filling shall continue up to pipe crown level as a minimum and above this level if required by the Engineer. (g) Back Filling The first 300mm of backfill above crown level shall be taken from selected trench spoil all passing 25mm sieve. It shall be placed in two 150mm layers each firmly tramped. Above the 300mm level mechanical fillings and compaction may be used. Where cover is less than 450mm the pipe shall be covered with 75mm of selected material laid to support a concrete tile or slab indicating the presence of a service. (h) Granular Material for Bed and Side Fill 4 Valves The material may be composed of crushed stone, clinker, quarry scalping, ballast, gravel, shingle or all-in aggregate to British Standard 882. All material for bed and site fill shall be hard and granular passing 20mm sieve and shall contain not more than 5 per cent fines passing 3mm sieve. The material shall have a compaction factor of 0.3 or less. a) Draw-off Taps and Stop Valves (Up to 50mm Nominal Bore) Draw-off taps and valves up to 50mm nominal bore, unless otherwise stated or specified for attachment or connection to sanitary fitment shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of BS b) Gate Valves All gate valves 80mm nominal bore and above, other than those required for fitting to buried water mains shall be of Cast Iron construction, in accordance with the requirements of BS All gate valves required for fitting to buried water mains shall be of Cast Iron construction in accordance with the requirements of BS All gate valves up to and including 65mm nominal bore shall be of Bronze construction in accordance with the requirements of BS B/9-

372 The pressure classification of all valves shall depend upon the pressure conditions pertaining to the site of works. c) Globe Valves All globe valves up to and including 65mm nominal bore shall be of Bronze construction in accordance with the requirements of BS The pressure classification of all globe valves shall depend upon the pressure conditions pertaining to the site of works. d) Check or Non-Return Valves e) Ball Valves All check or non-return valves 80mm nominal bore and above shall be of the swing check type of Cast Iron construction in accordance with the requirement of B.S The pressure classification of all globe valves shall depend upon the pressure conditions pertaining to the Site of works. All ball valves for use in connection with hot and cold water services shall be of the Portsmouth type in accordance with the requirements of B.S.1212, constructed from Bronze or other corrosion resistant materials. These valves fall into three pressure classifications as follows: - (i) Low pressure b maximum (ii) Medium pressure b maximum (iii) High pressure b maximum The pressure classification required for each ball valve will be designated in the description of its associated equipment contained in section C of the Specification. (f) Manually Operated Mixing Valves 5 Waste Fitment Traps Mixing valves for shower fittings and other appliances being provided under the sub-contractor Works shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of BS 1415 from Bronze or other corrosion resistant materials. a) Standard and Deep Seal P & S Traps Where standard or deep seal traps are specified they shall be manufactured in suitable non-ferrous materials in accordance with the full requirements of BS In certain circumstances, Cast Iron traps may be required for cast iron baths and in these instances bath traps shall be provided which are manufactured in accordance with the full requirements of BS b) Anti-Syphon Traps Where anti-syphon traps are specified, these shall be similar or equal to the range of traps manufactured by Greenwood and Hughes Limited, Deacon Works Littleshampton, Sussex, England. The trade name for traps manufactured by this company is Grevak. -B/10-

373 6 Pipe Supports a) General This sub-clause deals with pipe supports securing pipes to the structure of buildings for above ground application. The variety and type of support shall be kept to a minimum and their design shall be such as to facilitate quick and secure fixings to metal, concrete, masonry or wood. Consideration shall be given, when designing supports, to the maintenance of desired pipe falls and the restraining of pipe movements to a longitudinal axial direction only. The Sub-contractor shall supply and install all steelwork forming part of the pipe support assemblies and shall be responsible for making good damage to builders work associated with the pipe support installation. The Sub-contractor shall submit all his proposals for pipe supports to the Engineer for approval before any erection works commence. b) Steel and Copper Pipes and Tubes Pipe runs shall be secured by clips connected to pipe hangers, wall brackets, or trapeze type supports. U bolts shall not be used as a substitute for pipe clips without the prior approval of the Engineer. An approximate guide to the maximum permissible supports spacing in metres for Steel and Copper pipe and tube is given in the following table for horizontal runs. Size Copper Tube Steel Tube Nominal s To BS 659 To BS 1387 Bore 15mm 1.25m 2.0m 20mm 2.0m 2.5m 25mm 2.0m 2.5m 32mm 2.5m 3.0m 40mm 2.5m 3.0m 50mm 2.5m 3.0m 65mm 3.0m 3.5m 80mm 3.0m 3.5m 100mm 3.0m 4.0m 125mm 3.0m 4.5m -B/11-

374 150mm 3.5m 4.5m The support spacing for vertical runs shall not exceed one and a half times the distances given for horizontal runs. c) Cast Iron and Asbestos Cement Spigot and Socket Jointed Pipes Cast Iron and asbestos cement socketed pipes shall generally be supported at every socket joint by means of either Holderbats secured rigidly to the structure, or purpose made scrapes for attachments to rigid steel support brackets. When Holderbats are used, they shall conform to the requirements of BS 416. Suitable anchors shall be provided at all changes of pipe directions, junctions and tees to counteract the effect of end thrust loads. (d) Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipe Asbestos Cements pressure pipe with either cast iron detached joints or asbestos cement screw joints shall be supported and anchored on either side of the joints. The joints shall remain free. Pipe hangers and trapeze type supports shall not be suitable for the suspension of asbestos pressure pipes unless they are designated with suitable restrictions to prevent swinging at the same time providing the necessary support requirements. Within building, asbestos pressure pipes shall be carried either on concrete support on rigidly fixed steel wall brackets. Suitable anchors shall be provided at all changes of pipe directions junctions and tees to counteract the effect of end thrust loads. (e) Concrete and Pitch Pipes These pipes shall not be used for above ground application. f) Expansion Joints and Anchors Where practicable, cold pipework systems shall be arranged with sufficient bends and changes of direction to absorb pipe expansion providing that the pipe stresses are contained within the working limits prescribed in the relevant BS specification. Where piping anchors are supplied, they shall be fixed to the main structure only. Details of all anchor design proposals shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before erection commences. The Sub-contractor when arranging his piping shall ensure that no expansion movements are transmitted directly to connections and flanges on pumps or other items of plant. The Sub-contractor shall supply flexible joints to prevent vibrations and other movements being transmitted from pumps to piping systems or vice versa. 7 Sanitary Appliances All sanitary appliances supplied and installed as part of the Sub-contract works shall comply with the general requirements of BS Code of Practice 305 and the particular requirements of the latest BS Specifications. 8 Pipe Sleeves -B/12-

375 Main runs of pipework are to be fitted with sleeves where they pass through walls and floors. Generally the sleeves shall be of PVC except where they pass through the structure, where they shall be of mild steel. The sleeves shall have 6mm 12mm clearances all around the pipe or for insulated pipework all around the installation. The sleeve will then be packed with slag wool or similar material. 9 Installation General Installation of all pipework, valves, fittings and equipment shall be carried out under adequate supervision from skilled staff to the relevant codes and standards as specified herein. The Sub-contractor shall be responsible to the Main Contractor for ensuring that all builders work associated with his piping installation is carried out in a satisfactory manner to the approval of the Engineer. Above Ground Installation a) Water Services Before any joint is made, the pipes shall be hung in their supports and adjusted to ensure that the joining faces are parallel and any falls which shall be required are achieved without springing the pipe. Where falls are not shown on the Contract Drawings or stated elsewhere in the Specification, pipework shall be installed parallel to the lines of the buildings and as close to the walls, ceilings, columns, etc., as is practicable. All water systems shall be provided with sufficient drain points and automatic air vents to enable them to function correctly. Valves and other user equipment shall be installed with adequate access for operation and maintenance. Where valves and other operational equipment are unavoidably installed beyond normal reach or in such position as to be difficult to reach from a small stepladder, extension spindles with floor or wall pedestals shall be provided. Screwed piping shall be installed with sufficient number of unions to facilitate easy removal of valves and fittings, and to enable alterations of pipework to be carried out without the need to cut the pipe. Full allowances shall be made for the expansion and contraction of pipework, precautions being taken to ensure that any force produced by the pipe movements are not transmitted to valves, equipment or plant. All screwed joints to piping and fittings shall be made with P.T.F.E. tape. The test pressure shall be maintained by the pump for about one hour and if there is any leakage, it shall be measured by the quantity of water pumped into the main in that time. A general leakage of 4.5 litres per 25mm of diameter, per 1.6 kilometre per 24 hours per 30 metres head, may be considered reasonable but any visible individual leak shall be repaired. b) Sanitary Services Soil, waste and vent pipe system shall be installed in accordance with the best standard of modern practice as described in BS 5572 to the approval of the Engineer. The Sub-contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all ground waste fittings are discharged to a gully trap before passing to the sewer via a manhole. The Sub-contractor shall provide all necessary rodding and inspection facilities within the draining system in positions where easy accessibility is available. -B/13-

376 Where a branch requires rodding facilities in a position to which normal access is unobtainable, then that branch shall be extended so as to provide a suitable purpose made rodding eye in the nearest adjacent wall or floor to which easy access is available. The vent stacks shall terminate above roof level and where stack passes through roof, a weather skirt shall be provided. The Sub-contractor shall be responsible for sealing the roof after installation of the stacks. The open end of each stack shall be fitted with a plastic coated or galvanized steel wire guard. Access for rodding and testing shall be provided at the foot of each stack. c) Sanitary Appliances All sanitary appliances associated with the Sub-contract works shall be installed in accordance with the best standard of modern practice as described in C.P. 305 to the approval of the Engineer. Underground Installation a) General All underground water and drainage service installations shall be carried out in accordance with the best standard of modern practice as described in C.P. 301 and C.P. 310 respectively and the following clause. b) Sequence of Operation for Underground Service Installation (i) Setting Out As described in BS code of practice 301 Clause 502 (ii) Breaking Up Surface (If in Roads) As described in BS code of practice 301 Clause 503 (iii) Excavation and Timbering As described in BS code of practice 301 and 503 and the following:- Excavation shall be made to such depths and dimensions as may be required by the Engineer to obtain prior falls and firm foundations. No permanent constructions shall be commenced on any bottom until the excavation has been examined and approved by the Engineer. Should the Sub-Contractor in error or without the instructions of the Engineer make any excavation below the required level of the pipe or bed, as the case may be, then he shall be required to refill such excavation to the correct levels with concrete 1: 4 : 8 to 38mm maximum aggregate size. The Sub-Contractor s prices shall have included for excavating in all materials met with, for trimming bottoms to the necessary falls and for any extra excavation required for planking, strutting and working space. The Sub-Contractor shall keep the whole of the trenches or other excavations free from water and shall execute such works and install such pumps as may be necessary to keep the excavation dry at all times. No sub-soil water shall discharge into the sewage system without written permission of the Engineer. (iv) Laying of Concrete Beds or other Supports for Pipes As described in BS code of practise 301 Clause 504 and the following:- -B/14-

377 All drains below buildings and roads shall be encased in concrete 150mm thick. Concrete beds and supports shall be concrete 1:3:6 to 25mm maximum aggregate size. (v) Pipe Laying and Jointing Drain pipes shall be laid and jointed as described under BS code of practise 301 clause 505. Water pipes shall be laid and jointed as described under BS code of practice 310, Clause 401, 402, 403 and 404 (vi) Manholes (a) General All manholes provided under the Sub-Contract works shall be constructed of approved materials and in an approved manner, by the Main Contractor. All manholes shall be watertight and if constructed of brickwork, solid block work or stone work, they shall be rendered internally with a cement mortar of at least 12mm thickness and finished with a smooth surface. The sides of all channels in every manhole shall be ought up vertically to a height of not less than the diameter of the drain and shall be benched in good concrete from the top of the channels at an surface with a coat of 1:1 cement mortar. In all other respects, manhole shall be constructed in accordance with BS code of practice 301 (b) Rectangular and Square Manholes Rectangular and square straight through manholes shall be constructed from brickwork, solid blockwork, stone and concrete to comply with the following minimum internal dimensions (millimetres) Depth below internal Ground of Access Outgoing shaft Invert Dimension SLXW Size of Main Shaft Diameter Internal Chamber Dimension SLXW Height of Chamber above Benching wall Thickness Up to to x Up to to x Up to to x to to x to to x to to x to x to x to x to x & Over 760x to x &Over 760x to x When branches are connected into the manhole, the length and width dimension of the chamber shall be increased as follows:- -B/15-

378 c) Length Branch Diameter 100mm 300mm/branch on the side with most branches 150mm 380mm/branch on the side with most branches 230and 300mm 460mm/branch on the side with most branches 460mm 610mm/branch on the side with most branches Width Branch Diameter 100mm to 300mm for each side with branches plug 160mm 460mm or the diameter of the main drain which ever is the greater (a) Precast Concrete Circular Manholes Where specified straight through precast concrete manholes shall be manufactured and constructed to comply with BS 556 and the following dimensional requirements, (Dimension: Millimetres) Depth Ground of Outgoing Invert Internal Access Shaft Diameter Size Main Channel Diameter Chamber Diameter Height Chamber Above Benching Up to to to to to to & over to When branches are connected into manhole the internal diameter of the chamber shall be increased as necessary up to maximum chamber diameter (b) Steps Iron and Covers Access shaft to manhole of depth greater than 760mm shall be provided with approved steps iron at suitable intervals. Every manhole or manhole access shaft shall be fitted with a removable airtight cast iron cover to adequate size and strength, fixed in a manner that prevents surface water gaining into the system. Cast manhole covers and frames shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of BS 497 and shall generally be classified into the following categories: Heavy Duty : For Carriageway Medium Duty : For Footpaths Light Duty : For domestic premises or other places where they do not have to carry wheeled Traffic. -B/16-

379 (c) Back Drop Connections Where the level of the branch drain entering the manhole is higher than can be suitably accommodated by the normal type benching, then the branch drain shall be connected to the manhole by means of a back drop Connection. (d) Channels Where the branch channel connects to the main channel in the manhole, the invert of the branch channel shall be a minimum of 38mm higher than the main channel. (e) Testing of Pipelines After pipelines are connected up and joints have been sealed, the pipeline shall be tested before pipes are, if required haunched or surrounded in concrete Methods of testing and inspection shall be in accordance with Clause 4 of the Specification. (f) Concrete Bedding Hunching and Surround Concrete 3 bedding, hunching and surrounding shall be provided as necessary o where called for by the Engineer in accordance with the requirements laid down in BS code of practice 301, Clause 310 (i) Backfilling Backfilling of trenches, headings and around manholes shall be carried out in accordance with the methods described in BS code of practice 301, clause 508. (j) Reinstatement of Surface Following the final Backfilling of all trenches, headings and manhole surrounds, the surface of the excavated areas shall be fully reinstated to the approval of the Engineer. Where excavation have been carried out in public highways or other areas are not forming part of the site, the sub-contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in his price for all charges associated with the temporary and final reinstatement requirements of the local of highway Authority concerned. No Claims for extra in this respect will be accepted. (k) Sewer Connection Sewer Sub-contractor shall pay all charges associated with the connection by the local Authority of the drainage to the main sewer, including necessary reinstatements 10 Testing and Inspection Site Tests Pipework Systems a) Above Ground Internal Water Services Installation All water service pipe system installed above ground shall be tested hydraulically for a period of one hour to not less than one and half times to design working pressure. -B/17-

380 If preferred, the Sub-contractor may test the pipelines in sections. Any such section found to be satisfactory need not be the subject of a further test when system has been completed, unless specifically requested by the Engineer. During the test, each branch and joint shall be examined carefully for leaks and any defects revealed shall be made good by the Sub-contractor and the section re-tested. The Sub-contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent damage occurring to special valves and fittings during the tests. Any item damaged shall be repaired or replaced at the Sub-contractor s expenses. b) Underground Water Mains After laying, jointing and anchoring, the main shall be slowly and carefully charged with water, so that all air is expelled and allowed to stand full for three days before testing under pressure. A long main shall be tested in sections as the work of laying proceeds and all joints shall be exposed for inspection during the testing. The open end of the main may be temporarily used for testing under moderate pressure by fitting a water pipe expanding plug, of which several types are available. The end of the main and the plug should be secured by struts or otherwise, to resist the end thrust of the water pressure in the main. If the section of main terminates with a sluice valve, the wedge of the valve shall not be used to retain the water, instead the valve shall be fitted temporarily with a blank flange, or if a socket valve with a plug and the wedge shall be placed in the open position while testing. The Sub-Contractor shall provide suitable end supports to withstand the end thrust of the water pressure in the main. c) Above Ground Soil Waste and Ventilation System All soil, waste and ventilating pipe system forming part of the above ground installation, shall be given appropriate test procedures as described in BS 5572, Smoke tests on above ground soil, waste and ventilating pipe system shall not be permitted. Pressure tests shall be carried out before any work which is to be concealed is finally enclosed. In all respects, tests shall comply with the requirements of BS d) Underground Drainage System A site test shall be carried out on all drainage pipes before concrete hunching or surrounds are applied. These tests shall be carried out preferably from manhole to manhole. Short branch drains connected to a main drain between manholes shall be tested as one system with the main drain. In long branches a testing junction shall be inserted next to the junction with the main drain and the branch tested separately. After the test has been passed, the testing junction shall be effectively sealed. Water tests shall be carried out in accordance with the methods described under BS code of practice 301, Clause 601 (b) and (c) and the test pressure shall not be less than 1,520mm head at the highest point in the pipe section and not more than 10,360 head at any point it the section. -B/18-

381 The test pressure shall be maintained for a period of one hour during which time the pipe and joints shall be inspected for sweating and leakage. Any leak discovered during the tests shall be made good by the Sub-Contractor and the section re-tested. In addition to pressure tests, drain pipe runs shall also be tested for straightness where applicable. This test shall be carried out in accordance with one of the two methods described in BS code of practice 301, clause 601 (e). Testing of manholes shall be carried out in accordance with the methods described under BS code of Practice 301, clause 602 (f) (e) Above Ground Soil Waste and Ventilation System All soil waste and ventilating pipe system forming part of the above ground installation, shall be given appropriate test procedures as described in BS Smoke tests on above ground soil, waste and ventilation pipe system shall not be permitted. Pressure tests shall be carried out before any work, which is to be concealed, is finally enclosed. In all other respects, testes shall comply with the requirements of BS Site Test Performance Following satisfactory pressure test on the pipework system, operational tests shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant BS Code of practice on the systems as a whole to establish that special valves, gauges, control, fittings, equipment and plant are functioning correctly to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All hot water pipework shall be installed with pre-formed fibre glass lagging to a thickness of 25mm where the pipe runs above a false ceiling or in areas where the ambient temperature is higher than normal with the result that pipe sweating, due to condensation will cause nuisance. All lagged pipes which run in a visible position after erection shall be given a canvas cover and prepared for painting as follows: i) Apply a coating of suitable filler until the canvas weave disappears and allow to dry. ii) Apply two coats of an approved paint and finish in suitable gloss enamel to colours approved by the Engineer. All lagging for cold and hot water pipes erected in crawl ways, ducts and above false ceiling which, after erection are not visible from the corridors of rooms, shall be covered with a reinforced aluminium foil finish banded in colours to be approved by the Engineer. In all respects, unless otherwise stated, the hot and cold water installation shall be carried out in accordance with the best standard of modern practice as described in C.P.342 and C.P.310 respectively to the approval of the Engineer. The test pressure shall be applied by means of a manually operated test pump or, in the case of long main or mains of large diameter, by a power driven test pump which shall not be left unattended. In either case precautions shall be taken to ensure that the required pressure is not exceeded. -B/19-

382 Pressure gauges should be recalibrated before the tests. The Sub-contractor shall be deemed to have included in his price for all test pumps, and other equipment required under this specification. The test pressure shall be one and a half times the maximum working pressure except where a pipe is manufactured from a material for which the relevant BS specification designates a maximum test pressure. 11 Sterilization of Hot and Cold Water Systems All underground and above ground water distribution systems cisterns, tanks, pumps etc shall be thoroughly sterilized and flushed out after the completion of all tests and before being fully commissioned for handover. The sterilization procedures shall be carried out by the Sub-contractor in accordance with the requirements of BS Code of Practice 301, Clause 409 and to the approval of the Engineer. 12 Water Mains Piping All piping shall be plain ended and suitable for use with flexible mechanical couplings (e.g. Viking Johnson, Dresser or Gibault). Steel pipes shall comply with BS 534-Galvanised steel pipes for distribution system shall comply with BS Galvanized steel pipes for distribution system shall comply with BS medium tubes and be supplied with flanges on pipes 75mm diameter and over. All pipes less than 75mm diameter shall be screwed and socketed, unless otherwise stated. U.P.V.C Pipes UPVC piping shall be in accordance with BS 3505: The maximum sustained working pressure to which the pipes and fittings will be subjected is based on water at a temperature of 20 0 c. The Contractor shall submit full details of the colour of the pipe he intends to supply. The Colour of the pipe shall be such as to meet the requirements of Clause 2 material and Clause 8.5 opacity of BS The pipes up to and including 50mm diameter shall be of solvent weld type. The pipe shall be supplied with interchangeable sockets pre-formed at the factory and of such internal diameter that it takes the plain and of the pipe with same nominal diameter. The joints shall sustain the end thrust to which the pipe shall be submitted. The contractor shall supply sufficient quality of the cleaner and adhesive which shall be required to make the joints with the pipes. The pipes of 75mm diameter and over shall consist of a grooved socket at one end of the pipe. The socket shall be designed to give a clearance fit on the outside diameter of the parent pipe. The sealing medium that shall seat in the groove shall be a rubber ring. If the formation of the socket and groove results in the thinning of the original wall thickness of the pipe, it shall be compensated for by shrinking the outside of the socket area as by reinforcing sleeve of the same material as the pipe. The socket and groove shall incorporate no sharp angles where the stress points are created. -B/20-

383 The socket and groove shall incorporate no sharp angles where the stress points are created. The joint shall take 10% deformation of the spigot at the point where the stress points where it enters the socket without leakage from the pipe when subjected to the test pressure specified for the pipe. Thermal expansion of the pipe shall be accommodated in the joint. The joint shall be capable of lined deflection up to 30 o. The sealing ring shall supply be of the first grade natural rubber and the physical properties of the mix shall meet the requirement of BS The contractor shall supply sufficient quantity of any lubricant or other material that shall be needed to make the joint, which shall be assembled by hand. The fittings shall have the same type of joint and or the pipes to be used. The contractor shall submit full lists of the materials, dimensions and test pressures of the fittings offered. Precautions shall be taken to avoid damage of the pipes and fittings. In handling and storing the pipes and fittings, every care shall be taken to avoid distortion, flattening, scoring or other damage. The pipes and fittings shall not be allowed to drop or strike objects. Pipe lifting and lowering shall be carried out by approved equipment only. Special care shall be taken in transit, handling and storage to avoid any damage to the ends. All jointing of pipes and fittings shall be carried strictly in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions. Manufacturer s Instructions The contractor shall be responsible for obtaining copies of any manufacturer s instructions for pipe joining and shall familiarize himself and his employees with these instructions. All necessary tools and equipment required for laying, jointing and testing of pipes and joints shall be provided by the contractor at no extra cost. Fittings and Specials for Galvanized Steel Pipes All specials shall be of such dimensions as will meet with piping supplied. Screw down stop valves shall comply with BS Specials shall comply with BS Flanged Adaptors and Flanges Flanged adaptors shall be piece suitable for connecting a flanged sluice valve to the type of piping supplied. All flanged or special shall conform to BS 10 part 1 and shall be drill to Table C and machined across the faces. The flanged adaptors shall comply with BS 78 and BS All PVC flanged shall be supplied with metal backing rings jointing of flanges shall be carried out using the joint rings, bolts and washers as necessary. Tees The spigot ends of all tees shall be suitable for connection to the pipework supplied using the aforementioned flexible mechanical joints and branches shall be flanges drilled to BS 10 table C. Hydrants Hydrants shall comprise a 75mm sluice valve and a 75mm Duckfoot bend with gunmetal screw connection to detailed drawings. These specials shall comply with the requirements of BS 750: B/21-

384 Gate Valves All gate valves 80mm nominal bore and above, other than those required for fitting to buried water mains shall be of cast iron construction, in accordance with the requirements of BS All gate valves required for fitting to buried water mains shall be of cast iron construction in accordance with the requirements of BS1218. All gate valves up to and including 65mm nominal bore shall be of bronze construction in accordance with the requirements of BS The pressure classification of all valves shall depend upon the pressure conditions pertaining to the site of works. Air Valves Air valves shall be of cast iron conforming to BS Grade 14. They shall not be suitable for working pressure nor less than that specified for the class of pipe to which they are connected. Ball Float Valves Ball float valves shall be to BS 1212 parts 1 and 2 shall be suitable for working pressure not less than the working pressure for the class of pipe specified for connection to the ball float valve. Non-Return Valves Non-return valves shall be of cast iron with flanges and shall conform to BS 4090: Stop Cocks Stopcock up to 50mm diameter shall be brass and shall conform to BS 1010 part 1: 1959 part 2;1973. Rubber and Insertion Jointing Rubber and insertion jointing for flange jointed shall comply with BS 2494 part 1 and no jointing rings shall be used in the contract, which have not been supplied by manufacturers approved by the Engineer. Bituminous paints All bituminous or tar paints for protection of buried steel bolts, pipes specials etc. shall be the best of their respective kinds manufactured by approved makers. Steel Pipe and Fittings for Rising Main All piping shall be plain ended and suitable for use with flexible mechanical couplings (e.g. Viking Johnson, dresser) The grade of steel used shall comply with the requirements of BS 3601: Pipes shall be welded or seamless and shall conform to BS 534: 1966 or an equivalent acceptable standard. All pipes shall be externally and internally protected with bitumen in accordance with clauses 5.4 and 5.5 of BS 534: The external protection shall be reinforced with oven glass, cloth glass, tissue wrapping or by other approved material. The ends of all bitumen lined pipes, fittings and specials shall be closed by means of discs or other suitable covers firmly held in place. -B/22-

385 Drain-Off Taps, Stops Valves for Water Services Fittings for mains of size 50mm or under shall comply with BS Samples must be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to installation of fittings. Storage of Plants and Material The contractor shall, at his own expenses, make arrangements for dumps along the route of the pipe line for a storage of pipes, his plant and materials to suit his own convenience, but such arrangements shall be subjected to the Engineer s approval. Loading, Handling and Conveying of Pipes The contractor shall before commencing to lay the pipes, valves or other materials examine them and ascertain that they are in perfectly sound condition and he shall be responsible for any laying. The stocking of pipes and specials on site, loading and unloading etc. shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Interferences with Fences, Drains, Pipes, Property etc. The contractor shall ensure the proper reinstatement of fences, drains, telephone lines, KP&LC. Cables etc where affected by his work. All service shall be adequately protected and propped to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The contractor shall be liable for any damage caused to the service due to his failure to provide adequate protection. Method of Excavation a) The Contractor shall excavate the pipe trenches in the line and to the depths indicated by the Engineer. Except where otherwise indicated on the Drawings or indicated by the Engineer, it is intended that the trench shall be excavated to such a depth as will allow of a minimum cover of 5000mm over top of the barrel of the pipe when laid plus or minus a tolerance of 75mm either way. All trenches shall be excavated in open cuttings. b) Where the trenches passes through grassland, arable land or garden, whether enclosed or otherwise, the turf, if any shall be pared off and stalked, and the productive soil shall be carefully removed for a width of 600mm greater than the nominated trench width or equal to the overall width of track of the excavating machine, whichever is greater, and laid aside to be subsequently used in reinstating the surface of the ground after the trench has been refilled. c) The bottom of the trench shall be property trimmed off, and all low places or irregularities shall be where rock or large stones are encountered, they shall be cut down to a depth of at least 75mm below the level at which the bottoms of the barrel of the pipes are to be laid, and covered to a like depth with materials, so as to form a fine and even bed for the pipe. d) Joints holes shall be excavated to suit minimum dimension as to allow the joints to be well and properly jointed. e) The pipe trench shall be kept clear of water at all times. f) The contractor shall whenever necessary by means of timbering, or otherwise support the sides of the trench so as to make them thoroughly secure, and afford adequate support to adjoining roads, lands, buildings and property during the whole time the trench remains open and shall remove such timbering or other work shall be deemed to be included in the rate for excavation. Incase the -B/23-

386 Contractor is instructed by the Engineer to leave any portion of such timber in position, he will be paid for it accordingly. g) The cleared width inside the timbering in the case of single pipes shall be at least 320mm in excess of the external diameter of the pipe be laid, in order to allow it to be freely lowered into position, in the trench without damage to the external protection. h) Where more than one pipe is to be laid parallel, then the clear width inside the timbering shall be at least 520mm in excesses of the combined external diameters of the pipes. i) Should the excavations be taken out to a greater depth than is specified the bottom shall be made good to the correct level with mix 1:3:6 concrete or other materials approved by the Engineer. No payment shall be made for any other excavation carried out by the contractor and the coat of filling up to required levels. j) If a mechanical excavator is used by the contractor, he shall indemnify the employer against all claims for damages that in the opinion of the Engineer, may be caused by the use of this plant. When a mechanical excavator is used the bottom 230mm of excavation shall be got out by hand to ensure an even bed for the pipes. Main Laying Mains shall be laid in straight lines and/or smooth curves as indicated on the drawings. The vertical profile of the pipes shall be to even gradients. Any pipes not so laid shall be removed if so directed by the Engineer, and re-laid in proper manner at the contractor s expense. In laying the pipes and specials, care shall be taken not to damage the protective linings and the pipes shall be handled with tackle as directed by the Engineer. The pipes and specials shall be slug and sounded with hammer for flaws before they are lowered into trench. After the pipes or specials have been checked they shall be cleaned internally and carefully lowered into trench and set to proper gradient and line so that is a continuos rise from each washout to air valve. Temporary Bench Marks and Sight Rails. The contractor shall fix rails for use with boning rods at intervals of not more than 65 meters and temporary Bench mark related to the survey of Kenya Datum shall be provided at intervals as directed by the Engineer. Curves and Bends Large diameter curves of main shall wherever possible be formed by giving a set not exceeding 30 to each joint, bends being used only where large diameter curves are not possible. Cutting of Pipes The contractor shall, subject to approval of the Engineer, cut pipes to such lengths as directed. Pipes should be cut off clean and square while the axis cuts should be made with an approved cutter from rotary cutting machine, engineer may approve cutting by oxyacetylene cutters. Flanged Joints In laying pipes and specials with flanged joints, flanges shall be brought together and bolted with the faces absolutely parallel. A rubber jointing ring 3mm thick shall be used in each flange joint and one washer with each bolt. The ring shall be a strip ring lying within the bolt circle and full flange width ring. The bolts shall be tightened up gradually and equally in customary manner in order to distribute the stress -B/24-

387 evenly over the flange. Surface Boxes Sluice valves, air valves and fire hydrants shall be covered with surface boxes in accordance with details as shown on the Drawings. In roads and footpaths the boxes shall be laid flush with the surface. Fixing of Valves, Air Valves and Washouts Pipes The contractor shall fix the sluice valves, air valves, washout pipes pipes complete with iron casing for spindles and surface boxes in accordance with and in position shown on the drawings. As far as possible the cutting of pipes for this should be avoided. Support and Anchor Blocks Concrete mix 1:3:6 shall be placed around and against bends and other specials in trenches. Colour Coding All underground pipes are to be wrapped with adhesive plastic tape at each meter in colours blue for drinking water and green for untreated water. All pipework above ground and valves in valve chambers and pits are to be painted in similar colours. Lettering The lettering for sluice valves, fire hydrants, air valve and washout abbreviated SV FH and WO respectively shall be in accordance with the detail shown on the Drawings colour as detailed hereafter: - Untreated water: Drinking water: Fire Hydrant: White lettering on green background White on blue background White lettering on yellow background Testing a) The test pressure shall be one and a half the maximum working pressure except where a pipe is manufactured from a material for which the relevant BS specification designates a maximum test pressure should not exceed 120,180 and 240 meters/head for clause B, C, or D pipes, respectively. The pump shall maintain the test pressure for about one hour and if there is any leakage it shall be measured by the quantity of water pumped into the main that time. b) When a section of the mains has been jointed, the ends shall be closed with caps, plugs or flanges, which must be strongly strutted against a solid backfilled rammed as hereinafter and as shown on the Drawing, for it s whole length so as to cover the mains to a depth of not less than 500mm, except at the joint holes which shall be kept clear of all backfiring, if necessary by the use of timbering, so that each joint is left fully exposed for inspection. No backfililng will be permitted before testing of each section. As long a section of main as possible shall be tested at one time subject to the maximum length of open trench approved by Engineer or permitted by the Highway Authority, and the test shall be carried out within 12 working days of the completion of such sections of mains. Where a main is laid across a road or in such a position as to interfere seriously with the normal use of the -B/25-

388 road, the contractor may, with the consent of the Engineer and at his own risk, fill in such joint holes as may be necessary. He shall at his own expense, re-excavate any or all joint holes necessary to locate a leak and carry out repair work should the results of his hydraulic test prove unsatisfactory. The section shall then be filled with mains water, great care being taken to drive out all air through air valves, ferrules or otherwise to the approval of the Engineer. c) After the section to be tested has been charged and all air liberated it shall standing underrate moderate pressure for several days final airing. The leakage from the mains and connections from each section tested shall not exceed 4 litres per 25mm diameter of main, per 2Km. Length each 24 hours, every 30 meters head of pressure, and any visible individual shall be repaired. To determine the rate of leakage, the contractor shall furnish a suitable hydraulic test pump, pressure gauge, connection and water meter or other appliance, for measuring the amount of water pumped. If the leakage were at a greater rate than that specified, the contractor should re-excavate the trench where necessary and shall remake the joints and replace defective work until the leakage shall be reduced to the allowable amount. d) The employer shall charge the contractor the cost of any coupling required to join up tested lengths of main if, in the Engineer s opinion, greater lengths could reasonably have been tested or if failure under test requires the pipe to be cut, or other methods of laying should have been adopted. The contractor shall supply water used by the contractor in testing the main. The contractor shall carry out all work, which may be necessary for making temporary connections to the existing mains to obtain water for testing at his own expense. e) In carrying out the test for waiter tightness only the Engineer shall authorize the operation of all valves, but the contractor shall provide all the necessary labour to assists in the opening and closing of the valves to the Engineer s instructions and he shall allow in his price for all his expenses in connection with testing on completion. The Engineer shall be the sole judge of water tightness. Cleansing and Sterilizing the Main When a pipeline is complete and where applicable, has successfully passed the test it shall be thoroughly washed out using, if possible, an open end. Thereafter it shall be sterilized by being filled with a suitable solution containing not less than 20p.p.m. of free available chorine or such other Sterilizing agent as the Engineer shall approve. After standing for 24 hours the main shall again be washed out and refilled with mains water prior to the taking of Bacteriological samples. The contractor shall provide all necessary stop-ends fittings and chemicals for this work. Emptying and washing out of the pipes shall be done in such a manner as not to damage the trench or cause due flooding of vicinity, and the contractor shall supply and use such piping, specials and/or hose as may be necessary to facilitate the flow of water to the nearest drain or watercourse. Water used for washing out and sterilizing will be supplied by the employer. Before any section of the mains is put into use, bacteriological samples will be taken by the Engineer s representatives and only on the receipt of a satisfactory certificate from the medical Research Laboratory of the Employer will the main or section of main be permitted to be put into supply and be considered as having been substantially completed. Any expenditure involved in Providing facilities or materials for taking of samples shall be included in the -B/26-

389 contractor s tendered rates and Engineer will specify and shall be sole judge as to the number of sample required and points at which they are to be taken. The cost of the Bacteriological Examination will be borne by the employer but if the sample and samples are not satisfactory the cost of any subsequent analyses will be borne by the contractor. Clearance of Site The contractor shall remove all surplus pipes, special and other fittings from the site as directed by the Engineer. The site of works shall be leveled and all surplus excavation, debris, cut trees or bushes shall be carted to the approved tip sites. Existing Installations a) Cold Water Where pipes for cold water are to be connected up to existing installations, the condition of the existing installation is to be reported to the Engineer in order to establish if part of the existing installation is to be replaced. b) Sanitary Fittings Where existing sanitary fittings are to be removed or replaced, the fittings are to be removed with utmost care and fittings and taps to be handed over to the client. c) Sealing Off Existing Drains and Manholes Existing foul, surface water and subsoil drains exposed during progress of work are to be recorded and reported for investigation by the Architects. Where not required to be removed, seal off with concrete or grout solid as directed. Seal o connection to manholes, demolish wall to 50mm below surrounding ground level and fill remainder of manhole with consolidated approved rubber and cover to level of surrounding ground as directed. 13 Cold Water Storage Tanks Cold-water storage tanks shall include the ball valves and connectors for inlet, supply, washout, and overflow and may also include in his pricing the price of the overflow and amount pipes to a place to be indicated by the Engineer. He shall also include the washout valve. Where paint is required the sub-contractor shall use the paints, which will not be toxic. The tanks shall be manufactured to the following British Standards: - (a) Galvanized Mild Steel tanks to BS 417 (b) Sectional Steel tanks to BS 1564 Where non-standard sizes shall be used, they shall be manufactured to the relevant standard but with the approval of the Engineer. 14 Water Heaters Electricity Heated Non-pressure and low-pressure types domestic electric water heaters shall comply with BS 843:1964. Highpressure types shall be of a standard not less than the appropriate BS -B/27-

390 Domestic heaters shall, if nothing else is pacified with 25mm thick fibreglass lagging and enclosed in the corrosion-proofed steel, finished in white stove enamel and be similar to manufactured HEATRAE Electric thermostatically controlled immersion heaters shall comply with BS 3456 section A8:1963 and C.P :1948. Purpose made storage water heaters of the specified size shall comply with BS 853 and shall be to the specified working and test pressure. The heaters shall be provided with all necessary bosses, coils etc, and shall be hot dip galvanized after manufacture. Installation shall, if nothing else is specified, be fiberglass to the specified thickness with finish suitable for painting. Domestic heaters for floors mounting shall, if not provided with legs, be mounted on a minimum 100mm high concrete plinth. Floor mounted purpose made heaters shall be provided with minimum 225mm high legs of sufficient strength welded to the heaters and to suitable floor plates. Before galvanizing, wall mounted heaters shall be supplied with all necessary brackets. Electrical Services Motor Control Panels Suitably rated control panels shall be supplied and installed as part of this section of the Contract to meet the starting and operating characteristics of the fan, and motors. The panels shall be either wall or floor mounted to suit the specific area and requirements. Power supplies to these panels shall be extended from adjacent isolating switches to be provided under the electrical services section of this Contract. Complete co-ordination shall be maintained with the electrical services to ensure supply and termination details are satisfactorily carried out to suit the plant and installation requirements. All starters, control equipment and the like shall be enclosed in purpose made sheet panels. The panels shall be installed within the plant rooms to suit the dimensions of the actual panels. All details of the panels and layouts within the plant shall be to the approval of the Engineer and shall include: - Triple pole isolating switch removable neutral link and HRC fuses. - Control circuit fuses of the HR cartridge type - Under voltage release, adjustable and complete tower to allow for voltage associated with the electrical supply and motor starting. - Over voltage protection, details to be agreed. - Ammeter of the moving iron mounted on panel with selector switch. - Pilot lamp, green. - Rotary switch for HAND/OFF/AUTO operation, where required. Removable neutral link of heavy section copper. - Motor winding over-temperature release. The Contractor shall provide this feature in conjunction with the specified thermistor protection - Duty selection switches. - Manual stop-start button units to operate in conjunction with rotary switch. - Hours run meter/counter. The Contractor shall allow at present for the contractors to re-close automatically on the restoration of the mains voltage. This requirement shall be subject to further discussions with the Employer to suit the Diesel plant and the mode of operation of electrical supplies. All starter panels shall include sufficient miniature circuit breakers, with neutral bar, to supply auxiliary or associated equipment. One 30TP and one spare 15TP MCBs shall be included as spares. -B/28-

391 All starter panels, motor starters and controllers shall comply with BS 587. Enclosures shall be rigid, at least 1.6mm thick, with rolled corners stiffened as necessary, dust-proof, vermin-proof, damp and corrosion protected with a grey colour stone enamel or other approved finish, fully tropicalised, with washable air filters. Instruments, gauges, ammeters, indicator lamps, etc shall be flush mounted. Panel doors shall include isolating switches to prevent them being opened unless the switches are in the off position. Each door shall be provided with a lock, and three sets of keys for all panel door locks shall be handed over to the Engineer. Terminals for all outgoing main and control cables shall be marked and positioned so that the cables may be carried to the outlet from the panel without crossing or being carried round the panel. Terminal numbers and markings shall correspond to those used on connected equipment and wiring diagrams. All internal interconnecting wiring between individual units and the terminal chamber shall be carried out by the panel manufacturer. Each panel shall be provided with a main isolator so that the whole panel may be completely isolated. The Contractor shall determine all motor starter requirements and associated auxiliaries and controls prior to manufacture and shall submit the design and circuit diagrams to the Engineer for approval. Contractors shall determine all motor starter requirements and associated auxiliaries and controls prior to manufacture and shall submit the design and circuit diagrams to the Engineer for approval. Contractors shall be of air-break type BS 5424 Part 1 and/or BS 587, and shall be provided as follows: - Magnetic blow-outs and air chutes on each pole. - Renewable hard drawn copper contacts. - Auxiliary contacts for remote control. - Continuously rated operating coils, (Max 240V) - Thermal overload protection device incorporating single phasing protection. Starters shall be rated as follows: Ordinary duty - For motors which will run continuously for periods in excess of two hours. Intermediate duty - For motors under automatic control other than time controls. When the intervals of operation are greater than two hours. Starters shall be of the following type: - Up to and including 4KW motor: Single phase on/off with overload protection (D.O.L.). - Over 4 kw and up to 15 kw: Star Delta starter. - For starters incorporating reduced voltage starting the changeover of voltage shall be automatic. Terminals shall be accessible and shall be provided with adequate clearance between phases and between phases and earth. Where starters are not enclosed in a composite panel, an integral isolating switch as specified for control panels shall be provided. Where electric motors are either not visible from the control panel or are located more than 10m distance they shall be provided with a local lock-off stop control circuit switch, or a main circuit isolator where there is no control circuit. A weatherproof lock-off stop control circuit switch shall be provided for motors located externally or otherwise exposed to the weather. -B/29-

392 Motors Motors shall comply with BS 816 Part 1 and shall be arranged for conduit entry. Motors shall be fitted with locating type bearings and/or heavy thrust bearings at the non-driven and collar type at the drive end. Motors shall be of the totally enclosed fan cooled type, tropicalised to BS 5000 Part 99 suitably finished to resist corrosion by fluids or fumes. The rating of all motors shall be chosen to provide continuously the maximum power requirements of the plant. The motors shall be of the standard induction type. They may be of the squirrel cage, horizontal or vertical spindle type of all to the approval of the Engineer. Vertical spindle type motors shall be provided with substantial canopies of approved design. The locked rotor current shall be stated on the name plate of each motor and shall be not more than six times the full load current. Thermistors shall be fitted to all motors above 5 kw. They shall be fitted during manufacture and their ends shall be brought out to additional terminals on the connector block of the motor. All motors shall be rated 3 phases. 415 volt or single phase, 240 volt. high power factor continuous maximum rating complying with BS 5000 Part 99 and Class F insulation complying with BS 2757 unless otherwise specified. All motors larger than 4 kw shall be three phase. All three phase motors shall be supplied with six stud terminals with each end of the stator phase windings connected, terminals shall be of suitable size to accept the cable lugs of the feeding cables. Terminal blocks shall be mounted on the side of the motor case in an approved box complete with lid, gasket and tapped ET entry hole. Rubber installation shall not be used on coil connections. Each motor shall be fitted with cable terminals and glands to accept the specified types of cable. No motor shall run at a speed higher than 1500 rpm unless otherwise specified. Motors driving through Vee-belts shall be fitted with slide rails. The power factor shall not be less than 0.9 lagging. All motors shall be from the same manufacturer as far as possible. Cabling and Wiring The Contractor shall carry out all power and control wiring including LV and ELV or any other voltage for the control equipment and alarm systems and interconnecting wiring between starter panels, remote control items, and motor units as required. Cabling shall be carried out in PVC insulated, PVC sheathed, single wire armoured and PVC sheathed overall cable, using compression type glands provided with means of securing armoured wires within the body of the gland, under armour moisture seal and outer sheath seal. Each core termination shall be fitted with a plastic ferrule engraved with an identification corresponding to the wiring diagrams. Multicore control cables to the remote stop, start allow water cut-out/ alarms shall be 0.62mm 2 PVCSWAPVC where external to the pump station and PVC/PVC or similar, where internal. All cables, whether internal or external being suitably protected. All conductors shall be copper and the installations, both internal and external being carried out in accordance with the regulations and by-laws previously stated. Trenching and the fixing of cables shall be in accordance with locally specified standards details of which have been specified within the subcontract documents for the electrical services. -B/30-

393 These details can be made available upon request should the Contractor not be familiar with these requirements. Details of the ratings, types and methods for all cables and wiring to be supplied under this sub-contract shall be submitted with the tenders, wiring, PVC single core shall be run in either galvanised conduit or galvanised trunking of suitable sizes where surface in plant rooms and heavy gauge PVC were cast into walls, slabs etc. -B/31-

394 PART C: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTALLATIONS

395 PART C : PATICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTALLATIONS CLAUSE DESCRIPTION PAGE 1. Introduction C/2 2. Included in the Sub-Contract C/2 3. Excluded From the Sub-Contract C/3 4. Extent of the Sub-Contractor s Duties C/3 5. Finishing Painting C/4 -C/1-

396 PART C PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTALLATIONS 1 Introduction The specifications cover the execution of Plumbing and Drainage installations and should be read in conjunction with other relevant specifications, drawings and contract documents issued to the contractor in conjunction with the sub-contract. 2 Included in the Sub-Contract The works include, unless otherwise specified, supply delivery, installation, testing and commissioning, cleaning-up and setting to work all the installations described in the specifications and as shown on the contract drawings. The provisions of all labour, materials, tools instruments testing apparatus and scaffolding necessary to execute the work in a first class manner, even such labour materials instruments or apparatus which are not specifically mentioned in the contract but are necessary for the satisfactory completion of the work, including such elements as:- - Cold water supply pipework and fittings to the water storage tanks from the existing water mains. - Water storage tanks complete with all necessary covers, fittings, washout and overflow pipes and supports. The subcontractor is expected to take the overflow and washout pipes to a reasonable discharge point. - The water supply pipework to the functional and sanitary as shown on the drawing plus the necessary fixing support and jointing materials from the water storage tanks. - The sanitary and operational fittings together with the fixing supports and jointing of the supply and discharge pipes. - The waste and soil pipework from the sanitary and operational fittings to the first manhole including all fixing, supports and jointing materials. - All cutting away and all making good will if nothing else is specified, be carried out by the main contractor but it will be the responsibility of the sub-contractor to ensure that this work is kept to a minimum, be responsible for the correct marking out of all chasers and holes; and will provide also necessary details to the main contractor. - The sub-contractor shall also be responsible for ensuring that runs for floor or wall chases, holes ton be cut or left will be marked out at the appropriate stage of structural work. - The sub-contractor shall undertake all notifications demanded by the Authorities in order to comply with current regulations and produce all certificates, if any, the authorities without extra charge. - The sub-contractor shall as part of his tender supply all necessary information such as manufacture, catalogue or type numbers, bronchures or copies of catalogue pages, weight and all other relevant information which are necessary to classify the equipment tendered for. - All other material labour, tools instruments, scaffolding, etc, which are necessary for completion in a first class manner of the plants to the Engineer satisfaction. Excluded are only materials and workmanship especially mentioned herein as Excluded from this Sub-contractor - The sub-contractor shall include for cables, pipes etc from central facilities to working area. - Provide the Engineer for his approval complete working and manufacturing drawing as specified. -C/2-

397 - Commissioning and testing of the plants as specified. - Supply of complete operation and maintenance manuals as specified as well as adequate instruction of the client s maintenance personnel as specified. - The sub-contractor shall include for full maintenance during initial maintenance period as specified. 3 Excluded from the Sub-Contract - All concrete works, inclusive of necessary holes, plinths etc - All block work inclusive of necessary holes (to be marked by the Sub-contractor) etc - All electrical wiring up to and inclusive of isolators and switchboards. - The main contractor will provide central located facilities for supply of water and power during the construction period. 4 Extent of the Sub-Contractor s Duties At the commencement of the work, the sub-contractor shall investigate and report to the Engineer if all materials and equipment to be used in the work, and not specified as supplied by others, are available locally. If not available, the subcontractor shall at this stage place orders for the materials in question and copy the orders to Architects and/or the Engineer. Failure to do so shall in no way relieve the sub-contractor from supplying the specified materials and equipment in time. Any item or material found to be defective shall be replaced by the sub-contractor within seven days of his being notified and any result of defective workmanship shall be repaired including supply of new parts if necessary, immediately upon being notified. The sub-contractor shall furnish at his own cost any samples of material or workmanship required for the subcontract works, that may be called for by the Engineer for his approval, and the Engineer may reject materials or workmanship not in his opinion up to the approved standard. The sub-contractor shall allow in his prices such samples. The sub-contractor shall when authorized in writing by the Architect or the Engineer, make variations from the specifications and drawing. No profit will be allowed on omitted items or works. The sub-contractor shall submit to the Architect or to the Engineer claims for any work for which he considers demanding extra payments before the beginning of such work. The sub-contractor shall be responsible for verifying all dimensions relative to his work by actual measurements taken in the site. The sub-contractor shall request any alteration to the building structures within 30days of the awarding of the sub-contractor. Only such alteration as deemed unavoidable by the Engineer will be considered. The sub-contractor shall collaborate with the Engineer and the main contractor in planning the installation before work is commenced. Particular care shall be taken to ensure that there is close collaboration with the other sub-contractors when installing services. The Engineer and Architects shall have full rights to inspect the work in progress and all materials equipment for use in the installation prior to it s erection whether these are on site or the sub-contractor s workshop. -C/3-

398 The sub-contractor shall allow for all reasonable access to the works for this purpose. Where large items of equipment are to be installed, the sub-contractor shall advise the main contractor in good time so that access is provided for installation before work is commenced on site. The sub-contractor or his responsible representative shall be in all site meetings as and when required in order to discuss the works, make necessary decisions, receiving relevant instructions and to confirm fulfillment of time schedules. 5 Finish Painting When all the installations have been set to work, tested and commissioned, the sub-contractor shall prime the pipework with an undercoat and paint 2 No. coats of paints in accordance to BS 1710 Colour coding and to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the Architect. -C/4-

399 PART D: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

400 PART D: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS CLAUSE DESCRIPTION PAGE 1. General D/2 2. Scope of Works D/2 3. Water/Co 2 Fire Extinguishers D/2 4. Portable Carbon Dioxide Fire Extinguisher D/2 5. Dry Powder Portable Fire Extinguisher D/3 6. Foam Spray Portable Fire Extinguisher D/4 7. Fire Blanket D/4 -D/1-

401 PART D PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 1. General The particular specifications details the requirements for the supply, installation and commissioning of the portable fire extinguishers which shall conform to BS 5423: The sub-contractor drawings but which are necessary for the completion and satisfactory function of the equipment. 2. Scope of works The sub-contractor shall supply, deliver, erect, test and commission all the portable fire extinguishers which are called for in this specification and shown on the contract Drawings and listed in the Bills of Quantities. 3. Water/CO 2 Fire Extinguishers The portable 9-litre water filled CO 2 cartridge operated portable fire extinguishers shall comply with BS 1382: 1977.Unless manufactured with stainless Steel, bodies shall all have internal surfaces completely coated with either a less tin, lead alloy, or zinc applied by hot dipping. There shall be no visibly unallocated areas. The extinguishers shall be clearly marked with the following: - a) Method of operation b) The words WATER TYPE (GAS PRESSURE) in prominent letters c) Name and address of the manufacturer or responsible vendor. d) The nominal charge of the liquid in imperial gallons and litres e) The liquid level to which the extinguisher is to be charged f) The year of manufacture g) A declaration to the effect that the extinguisher has been tested to a pressure of 350 lb/sq in (24.1 bar). h) A declaration to the effect that the extinguisher has been tested to a pressure of 350 lb/sq in 24.1 Bar) i) The number of the British Standard BS 1382 or BS Portable Carbon Dioxide Fire Extinguishers The portable carbon dioxide fire extinguishers shall comply with BS 3326: 1960 and BS 5423: 1977 The body of the extinguishers shall be a seamless steel cylinder manufactured to one of the following British Standards, BS 1287 or BS The filling ratio shall comply with BS 5355 with Valves fittings for compressed gas cylinder to BS 341. Where a hose is fitted it shall be flexible and have a minimum working pressure of 300 lb/sq in ( bar), the hose is not to be under internal pressure until the extinguisher is operated. -D/2-

402 The nozzle shall be manufactured of brass gunmetal, Aluminium or Stainless Steel and may be fitted with a suitable valve for temporarily stopping the discharge if such means are not incorporated in the operation head. The discharging horn shall be designed and constructed so as to direct the discharge and limit the entertainment for air. It shall be constructed of electrically non-conductive material. The extinguishers shall be clearly marked with the following: a) The words; 5kg carbon dioxide fire extinguishers and to include the appropriate nominal gas content. b) Method of operation c) The word Re-charge immediately after use d) Instruction for periodical checking e) The number of the British Standard BS 3326: 1960 f) The manufacturer s name or identification markings. 5. Dry Powder Portable Fire Extinguishers The portable dry powder fire extinguishers shall comply with BS 3465: 1962 and BS 1449 or aluminium to BS 1470: 1972 and shall be suitably protected against corrosion. The dry powder charge shall be non-toxic and retain it s free flowing properties under normal storage conditions. Any pressuring agent used as an expelling shall be in dry state; in particular compressed air. The discharge tube and gas tube if either is fitted shall be made of steel, brass, copper or other not less suitable materials. Where a hose is provided it shall not exceed 1.060m and shall be acid and alkali resistant. Provision shall be made for securing the nozzle when not in use. The extinguisher shall be clearly marked with the following information: - a) The words Foam Spray Fire Extinguisher b) Method of operation in prominent letters c) The working pressure and the capacity of the foam charge in litres d) Manufacturer s name or identification mark e) The words RECHARGE AFTER USE if rechargeable type f) Instructions to regularly check the weight of the pressure container or inspect the pressure indicator on stored pressure type when fitted, and remedy any loss indicated by either. g) The year of manufacture h) The pressure to which the extinguisher was tested. i) The number of this British Standard BS 3465 or BS 5423: j) When appropriate complete instructions for recharging the extinguisher shall be clearly marked on the -D/3-

403 extinguisher or otherwise be supplied with the refill. 6 Foam Spray Portable Fire Extinguishers The portable foam spray fire extinguishers shall comply with BS 3465: 1962 and BS The body shall be constructed of Steel not less than the requirements of BS 1449 or Aluminium to BS 1470: 1972 and shall be suitably protected against corrosion. The foam spray charge shall be non-toxic and retain its free flowing properties under normal storage conditions. Any pressurizing agent used as an expelling shall be in dry state; in particular compressed air. The discharge nozzle and gas tube if either is fitted shall be made of Steel, Brass, Copper or other not less suitable material. Provision shall be made for securing the nozzle when not in use. The extinguisher shall be clearly marked with the following information:- - The words Foam Spray Fire Extinguisher - Method of operation in prominent letters - The working pressure and the capacity of the foam charge in letters - Manufacturer s name or identification mark - The words RECHARGE AFTER USE if rechargeable type - Instructions to regularly check the weight of the pressure container or inspect the pressure indicator on stored pressure types when fitted, and remedy any loss indicated by either. - The year of manufacture - The pressure to which the extinguisher was tested - The number of this British Standard BS 3465 or BS 5423: Appropriate complete instructions for recharging the extinguisher shall be clearly marked on the extinguisher or otherwise be supplied with the refill. 7 Fire Blanket The fire blanket shall be made from cloth woven with pre-asbestos yarn or any other fire proof material and to measure 1210 x 1800mm and shall be fitted with specialties folded so as to offer instantaneous single action release blanket from storing jacket. -D/4-

404 PART E: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR HOSE REEL SYSTEM

405 PART E: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR HOSEREEL SYSTEM CLAUSE DESCRIPTION PAGE 1. General E/2 2. Scope of Works E/2 3. Pipe work E/2 4. Pipe Fittings E/2 5. Finish Painting E/3 6. Testing and Commissioning E/3 E/1

406 PART E: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR HOSEREEL SYSTEM General The following details the particular requirements for the supply, installation and commissioning of the hosereel installation. The hosereel installation shall comply in all respects to the requirements set out in B.S Part I, B.S and B.S The Sub-contractor shall include for all appurtenances and appliances not necessarily called for in this specification or shown on the Contract Drawings but which are necessary for the completion and satisfactory functioning of the Works. No claims for extra payment shall be accepted from the Sub-contractor because of his non-compliance with the above requirements. If in the opinion of the Sub-contractor there is a difference between the requirements of the specification and the Contract Drawings, he shall clarify these differences with the Engineer before tendering. Scope of Work The Sub-contractor shall supply, deliver, erect, test and commission all the automatic fire fighting hosereel installation which is called for in this specification and shown on the Contract Drawings listed in the drawing schedule. Hose reels pumpsets consisting of control panel and 2 No. vertical multistage pumps are to be installed in the underground pumproom and arranged as shown on the drawings. A double pole pressure switch shall activate the pumps in case of pressure drop in the mains. All the hosereels are to be supplied from the dedicated hose reel main serving the building as shown on the drawings. Pipework The pipework for the hosereel installation shall be galvanized wrought steel tubing "Heavy Grade Class `C' to B.S. 1387: 1967 with pipe threads to B.S. 21. Pipe Fittings The pipe fittings shall be galvanized wrought steel fittings conforming to B.S Part 1, or galvanized malleable iron fittings to B.S The hosereels to the installation shall consist of manually operated swinging wall hosereel as Thorn Norsen (Type B). The hosereels shall be supplied and installed complete with first-aid non-kinking 20mm diameter hose 30 metre long, with nylon spray/jet/shut-off nozzle fitted. A screw down chrome plated globe valve to B.S to the inlet to the reel is to be supplied. The orifice to the nozzle is to be not less than 6.35mm to maintain a minimum flow of 0.5L/S to the jet. The hosereels shall be installed at 1.5m centre above the finished floor level in locations shown on Contract Drawings. E/2

407 Finish Painting Upon completion of testing and commissioning of the hosereel installation the pipework shall be primed and finish painted with 2 No. coats of paint to the Engineers requirements. Testing and Commissioning The installation is to be tested to one and a half times the working pressure of the installation all to the approval of the Engineer. The Sub-contractor shall arrange at his own expense for acceptance and approval. E/3

408 PART F: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR AIR-CONDITIONING & MECHANICAL VENTILATION INSTALLATIONS

409 PART F: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR AIR-CONDITIONING & MECHANICAL VENTILATION INSTALLATIONS General This section covers the supply and installation of ventilation and air-conditioning equipment and fittings. The following specification is the General Specification for the Mechanical Ventilation subcontract, and shall be read in conjunction with the Bills of Quantities, and the Drawings. Where proprietary materials are specified, the sub-contractor may propose alternatives for the consideration of the Engineer, but the written approval of the Engineer must be obtained prior to the use of such an alternative. Supply Centrifugal Fan Unit The centrifugal fan type shall have blades of die-cast aluminum. The Contractor shall supply, install, test and commission In-line centrifugal supply fan unit as set out in the equipment schedules shown in the end of this Specification. The unit shall be selected to suit the type of roof structure on which it will be mounted all to the approval of the Engineer. The unit shall be fully tropicalised for temperatures up to 50 o C and relative humidity up to 100%. A flat square wire guard shall be supplied to close off the opening in the gable where this is required. Birds guards shall be provided to prevent entry of birds via air discharge openings. Motor and fan, and housing shall all be suitably isolated with respect to vibration. The motor shall be the totally enclosed type, single phase. It shall be metric, ball bearing, squirrel cage indication type, for direct on-line starting. All motors shall have Class F insulation, the motor ratings shall comply generally with B.S. 5000:1973 and IEC 34.1, with protection to IEC 34.5 Group IP54. The motors shall be provided with overheat protection. The motor bearings shall be prefabricated for hours running or five years' intermittent use. Where lubricators are fitted, the motors shall be re-lubricated after two years. Filtration The extract fan shall be fitted, on its upstream side, suitable filter complete with housing. Panel or unit filters shall only be used up to air flow of 6m3/sec. Dry replaceable media types shall be used, and shall be sized according to the manufacturers' instructions. Advancement of the media shall be controlled by a pressure differential switch. Sizing of the unit shall be such that the media requires replacement approximately every six months. F/1

410 DUCTWORK General Requirements The general Contractor shall prepare and submit detailed ductwork drawings to the Engineer for approval in accordance with Clause 1B.6 of this Specification. All duct sizes indicated on the Drawings refer to inside dimensions. Ductwork joints shall be square with all sharp edges removed. Sheet metal shall be rigidly supported and braced to prevent vibration. Ducts and hangers shall be installed straight, plumb and level. Ductwork shall be routed directly with a minimum of directional changes and abrupt transition. Adequate space shall be provided around ducts to ensure proper support and to allow the installation of the specified insulation. Diverting vanes shall be installed at branches connected into the main duct without a neck. Fairings shall be provided where pipes or structures penetrate ducts. When the fairing is longer than 500mm the original velocity shall be maintained. When the fairing is shorter than 500mm the velocity may be increased by not more than 10 percent. Turning vanes shall be provided in elbows whose center lines radius is less than 150 percent of the duct width, or where indicated on the Drawings. Duct bracing and supports indicated are the minimum acceptable. Additional bracing or supports shall be installed to eliminate any distortion or vibration when the systems are either in operational or under test. All connections between ductwork, including flexible connections, fittings and equipment, shall be made with gradually tapered transition fittings. Ductwork In general all HVAC ductwork, stack heads, register boots, supply air transitions, plenums etc., shall be galvanized steel metal of the gauges and construction hereinafter specified. All ductwork shall be installed in compliance with the most recent editions of NFPA 90 and 90A and all relevant codes and ordinances. Transitions shall be fabricated with a combined angle not greater than degrees. Branch take-off fittings (top, bottom and side) shall be fabricated with a throat area equal to 1.5 times the cross sectional area of the branch duct. All angular turns shall be made with a duct centre lines radius equal to 1.5 times the cross sectional area of the branch duct. All angular turns shall be made with a duct centre line radius equal to 1.5 times the width of the duct. Were, due to space limitations, it becomes necessary to make turns with a shorter radius, air foil type turning vanes shall be used. F/2

411 Galvanized Sheet Metal Ductwork Specification Where construction methods, sheet metal gauges, duct fabrication and installation techniques etc., are not specifically detailed herein or indicated on the drawings, such work shall be fabricated in strict accordance with the latest recommendation methods, gauges, procedures, etc., described in the most recent editions of the ASHRAE Guide and Handbook, the SMACNA Standards of Low/High pressure Ductwork and the DW/142.1 standard of HVACA Duct shall be installed in accordance with the Drawings and the following HVAC, ASHRAE and SMACNA Specification. REFERENCE TITLE SCOPE HVAC Ref. No. DW/142.1 DW/161 DW/143 Specification for sheet metal and black medium and high pressure/velocity air systems. Code of practice for Recommendations for identification of air distribution systems Practical guide to ductwork leakage testing Galvanized steel Methods of identification of source and destination of air, direction of flows classification by means of standard symbols. Leakage testing procedure. SMACNA Low/and high pressure duct Construction Specification ASHRAE 2.5 Materials: 1983 Equipment Volume Duct Chapter 1-Duct Contraction. construction Galvanized ductwork shall comprise strip mill cold-reduced sheet, continuously hot-dipped galvanized to BS : Grade Z2.1 or Z3. Protection: Galvanized ductwork shall be protected by one coat of mordant solution or calcium plumbate primer followed by two coats of bituminous paint. Galvanized ductwork in contact with aluminum sections(grilles etc), shall, before fastening to ducts, be protected with one coat of primer and two coats of zinc chromate paint. All aluminum sections shall be anodized to BS Mild steel shall be protected by one coat of red oxide paint followed by two coats of bituminous paint. Ductwork: Thickness, stiffening and spacing of supports. The stiffening of ducts shall be provided by the types of cross joints indicated in the tables plus intermediate stiffeners where necessary to comply with the spacing requirements. F/3

412 An approved type of sealant shall be used on all cross joints. Sheet thickness requirements are given in the following tables. In all cases the larger dimension determines the sheet thickness and stiffening. For plant connections, apparatus, casing and special applications (fire dampers etc), the next thickness of sheet up shall be used and additional stiffening shall be provided. Rectangular - Low Velocity - Steel Duct Work Maximum spacing between joints/stiffeners. Minimum angle section for Length Nominal Intermediate Stiffeners (mm) (mm) Without With (mm) Beading or beading or cross-breaking cross-breaking (mm) (mm) Up to Unlimited Unlimited None Unlimited 2.15 x 2.15 x Unlimited 2.15 x 2.15 x x 2.15 x x 40 x x 40 x x 50 x 5 For ducts galvanized after manufacture Upto As equivalent sizes above 301 and over 1.6 As equivalent sizes above Air Leakage: The air leakage rate shall not exceed 1.53 litters per second per square metro of surface area for Class A positive, and leaks shall not be audible. The air leakage from a chosen test section shall be the proportion of the length of section under test to the total length of all ducts in the distribution system. Air Leakage Test Procedure: The HVAC Specification DW/143 sets out a method for testing which shall be employed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be familiar with the testing method employed. Protection and Cleaning During construction all open ends of ductwork shall be covered with one layer of canvas. All foreign materials shall be removed from the ducts and ductwork shall be cleaned inside and outside. Ducts shall be cleaned before operating fans and filters. Fans shall not be operated unless filters are installed. After testing all cleanable filters shall be washed and renewable media shall be replaced. F/4

413 Testing After completion of the duct systems and before insulation is installed, the entire system shall be tested under operating conditions for performance and leakage. Testing shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer. Volume Dampers Volume control dampers shall be supplied and installed with locking levers and quadrants, indicating their position in main ducts and in all branch ducts supplying three or more air outlets and all fresh air intakes, and where shown on the Drawings. Volume Control dampers shall be of the splitter, butterfly, or lourve type. Damper blades shall be not less than eighteen gauge thick, reinforced with 2.15mm angles 3.2.1mm thick along unsupported sides longer than 300mm. Angles shall not interfere with the operation of the damper nor cause additional turbulence. Stops shall be angles of equal dimensions to the reinforcing angles. The maximum dimension of any damper blade shall be 800mm. Duct shall be stiffened at damper locations as necessary. Door shall be supplied for access to all damper guadrants installed in ducts located in suspended ceilings etc. Location and detailed installation drawings shall be supplied for all access doors. Doors shall be attached to frames with concealed hinges. Locks shall be of the flush type, screw driver operated with bronze cams. Upon completion of the ductwork, dampers shall be adjusted and set to deliver the amounts of air indicated on the Drawings. Fire Dampers Fire dampers shall be provided and fixed within the thickness of all fire barrier walls with a fire rating equivalent to the barrier. Each fire damper shall be operated by a fusible link set at 72.1 degrees C and fitted with an access door for inspection and replacement. Details of the construction and operation of all fire dampers shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before manufacture commences. Operation of all fire dampers shall be tested on Site after installation. All fire dampers arranged to close by gravity shall be suitable weighted, arranged in the direction of the air flow and provided with an effective stop. Fire dampers of the fire/shield curtain type, spring operated, shall also be permitted. The damper casing shall be completely airtight and of not less than mm thick galvanized sheet steel. The continuous series of ribbed interlocking blades shall be formed from not less than 0.8mm stainless steel and the spring shall be of not less than mm stainless steel. The fire dampers shall comply with the Standards for safety UL555:1970, issued by the Underwrite's Laboratories inc., of the U.S.A. Fusible Link Attachment This shall consist of an adjustable, accessible, fusible link designed to melt at 72.1 degrees C, and attached to an opposed blade damper assembly, spring-controlled to close fully when the link melts. The link shall not interfere with normal damper operation. F/5

414 Turning Vanes Dissimilar Metals Flexible Ducts Plenum Boxes Air Outlets Turning vanes shall be fabricated of the same material as the ducts in which they are installed. Turning vanes for low and medium pressure systems shall comprise 1mm (2.10 gauge) galvanized steel. Turning vanes shall be either double vanes or shop fabricated turning vanes constructed to the same standard. Samples of shop fabricated units shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Connections between dissimilar metals shall be avoided by dielectric insulation. Joints between dissimilar metal duct sections shall be formed with companion flanges separated by a compressed asbestos gasket. All units, bolts, screws and other hardware used in the sheet metal construction shall be fabricated of materials identical or similar to the duct construction, to prevent galvanic corrosion. Flexible ducts connecting the low pressure duct system to the linear slot diffusers, shall consist of a continuous vinyl-coated, spring steel wire helix fused to, and supporting, a continuous layer of vinyl-coated fibreglass mesh. A 13mm thick insulating and sound attenuating blanket of fibreglass wool shall encase the duct, and be sheathed with a moisture barrier consisting of vinyl impregnated and coated fibreglass fabric. The materials shall be incombustible. Flexible duct connections shall be effected in one continuous length, with a double ply cuff at each end secured to ductwork spigots by a worm drive screw clamp, as supplied by the manufacture to the flexible ducts. Plenum boxes shall be constructed from rigid 50mm by 5mm steel angle and 1.2.1mm thick galvanized sheet steel. A hinged access door, at least 450mm, with quick-release fasteners, shall be provided in the side of each plenum box. The sides, top and bottom of the plenum box shall be lined with 2.15mm thick rock wool or fibreglass insulation, neoprene coated and suitable for velocities up to 12.1m/sec. The lining shall be secured with an approved adhesive and pinned into place by means of nylon hangers, or similar, at 2.100mm centres. a) General Requirements. All outlets shall be sealed around the edges to prevent air leakages. Supply air with a velocity in excess of m or less above finished floor level. Room air shall be mixed with the primary air by induction to effect subsequent equalisation of the room temperature without stratification. F/6

415 Where supply or return outlets are installed in a continuous line, intermediate frames and margins shall be omitted. Guides shall be provided for each element to ensure that adjoining lengths shall be mitred for full alignment. With outlets used with fan coil units, the Contractor shall co-ordinate the outlet dimensions, arranged and pressure drop with the fan coil unit, to ensure that they will be compatible. Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings air outlets in ceiling shall be provided with a finish to match the colour of the adjacent false ceiling; other air outlets shall be provided with a natural anodized aluminum finish, all to the approval of the Engineer. b) Ceiling Mounted Supply/Return Linear Diffusers The Contractor shall supply and install, in the location shown on the drawings, multi-slot supply and return linear diffusers. These shall be similar to those manufactured by Martingale Technical Systems Limited, 2.10, St. John's Road, Penn, Bucks, HP10 8HW, England. Tel /9, Tlx MARGAL, Fax The slot diffusers shall be suitable for horizontal discharge by the adjustment of the blades. The diffusers shall be constructed of extruded aluminum with the from necessary fixings such as splice plates, hugging clips and suspension brackets and care shall be taken to ensure the cross joins between the supply and return air diffusers. The supply diffusers shall be supplied with galvanized mild steel plenum boxes for connection to the ductwork system by way of side entry spigots. Diffusers shall be of streamlined design, with a complete absence of abstraction in the air stream resulting in a low sound level rating. Diffusers shall be designed such that they may be balanced without the use of dampers, deflectors or return vanes. The diffusers deflectors shall be fabricated from thermosetting plastic which is nonflammable. directionally stable and has a high resistance to cracking and blemishing. A metal back plate shall be provided for each diffuser. The inlet spigot sizes shall be as shown on the drawings. The diffusers shall be provided with a hit and miss volume control, grid pattern air straightener and air deflection blades. The diffusers shall be connected to the ductwork system by flexible ducting sized to suit the diameter of the entry spigots. The selection shown on the drawings is for quotation purposes only and the Contractor shall check the air performance of the diffusers prior to placing any orders. The selection shall be based on the ceiling heights shown on the drawings and an air temperature differential (room minus air supply) of 11 o c. The noise rating in NC for a horizontal projection supply linear. Diffusers of one slot and 1800mm long shall not exceed NC when supplying 33 litters per second active metro. The pressure drop with the damper in the 100 percent open position shall not exceed 15 Pa for the supply air. F/7

416 c) Supply and Extract Air Registers Each supply air register shall have two sets of separately adjustable louvres, (one set horizontal, the other vertical) and shall be complete with an opposed blade multi-leaf damper. The louvres and the volume dampers shall be constructed from extruded aluminum sections with a metallic aluminum finish to the approval of the Engineer. Extract air registers shall be supplied and fitted as shown on the drawings and shall be similar to the supply air registers except that the rear set of blades shall be omitted. Registers shall be as manufactured by WOODS OF ENGLAND d) Transfer Grilles Transfer grilles shall be supplied and fitted as shown on the drawings. Grilles shall be fabricated from aluminum alloy inverted "V" louvre extrusions. They shall be of the non-vision type and of appearance to match the surrounding finishes, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The grilles shall be supplied with a telescopic frame permitting installation from 2.18 to 60mm thick. Transfer grilles installed on walls shall be double faced. These shall be manufactured by Trax. e) Discharge Louvres f) Intakes Exhaust louvres shall be white anodized aluminum unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. Louvres shall be weatherproof, with fixed blades set at 30 degrees, and shall have a free area of 85 percent. These shall also be manufactures by Trax. Sand trap louvres shall be provided on all air intakes. The sand shall have an efficiency of 80 percent on the 2.10 to micron test (AC coarse) dust distribution and 50 percent on the 1 to 70 micron test (AC fine) dust distribution. Louvres shall be of mill finish aluminum with 1.5mm thick lades and 2.1.0mm thick casing. Self emptying sand drain holes shall be provided. The air pressure drop through the louvres shall not exceed 30 Pa. Galvanized wire bird screens shall be provided on all intakes. g) Accessories - Regulation and Distribution At each supply diffuser, register and grille, the Contractor shall provide accessories to ensure a positive regulation of the air volume and a uniform distribution of the air flow over the entire outlet. The following shall be supplied as a minimum: - Supply diffusers - For distribution : an adjustable frame and blades. - For regulation : an adjustable splitter or louvre blades - Supply Grilles and Registers The Contractor shall provide either lever-operated radium blades attached to a pivoting frame and mounting bracket, or individually adjustable blades in a gasketed frame mounted at the outlet, for each outlet, all to the approval of the Engineer. F/8

417 h) Supply/Extract Square Ceiling Diffusers The square supply diffusers shall be aluminum louvre-faced surface mounted, suitable for 4-way blow with integral opposed blade volume damper. The Contractor shall check and make sure that the diffusers will fit in with the ceiling construction, particularly as to the edge flanged detail and overall size. They shall be as manufactured by Koolair. Thermometers and Pressure Gauge. Thermometers Pressure gauge General Pressure gauges shall be mounted at the sensing point unless otherwise indicated. The instrument shall be selected such that the normal range of operating temperatures and pressures falls within the middle-third of the instrument range. Compound gauges shall be employed when operating pressure in near or below atmospheric. Temperature sensing devices shall be located in a portion of the fluid stream where it is possible to measure the average fluid temperature without obstructing the flow. Pipes of 42.1mm diameter and less shall be increased by at least one pipe size at the point of insertion. Extension necks shall be provided where thermometers and pressure gauges are located in insulated piping, vessels, ductwork, casing and equipment. Mercury-in-steel type thermometers, with a 100mm dial and a length of copper covered steel capillary tubing to connect the dial with the bulb, shall be supplied and installed as specified. Each thermometer shall be provided with a back flange or arranged for flush mounting. Mercury-in-glass type thermometers with metal guard shall be supplied and installed as specified and as approved by the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified, thermometer bulbs shall be of steel type, screwed 2.10mm NB British Standard pipe and supplied with stainless steel separable sockets suitable for screwing, brazing or welding into the pipe carrying the medium to the measured. A red mark on each thermometer scale shall indicate the working temperature at the point of measurement. Gauges shall be of the Bourdon tube type with a 115mm diameter cast iron, cast aluminum or steel case with moisture-proof and dustproof blowout discs. Panel mounted gauges shall have steel or aluminum hinged rings; direct mounted gauges shall have black numerals on a white background. Bourdon Tube : Phosphor bronze, beryllium copper or stainless steel. Socket : Stainless Steel. Accuracy : Not less than 1% of scale range. F/9

418 Gauges for combined pressure and vacuum services shall have a compound seal.. Sound Attenuation and Vibration Isolation Materials Equipment Isolation Piping Isolation Sound Attenuation Where required by the Specification the supply and return air sheet metal ductwork each air handling unit and all plenum supply and return ducts, shall be lined internally on all four sides with 2.15mm thick glass fibre of density not less than 48kg/cu.m up to the walls of sound attenuation to reduce the noise emitted by the fans. The interlay clear dimensions of the duct complete with linear shall not less than the sizes indicated on the Drawings. The glass fibre lining shall be fixed to the sides of the duct using an approved adhesive and shall be secured by means of a galvanized perforated plate liner. The ductwork shall also be thermally insulated on the outside. The inside surface of the lined sections of ductwork shall be as smooth as possible so that the resistance to air flow is not appreciably greater than the unlined duct. All lined sections of ductwork shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer before erection on Site. Where attenuation are fitted on the return supply sides of the units acoustic insulation may be omitted, provided that the noise transmitted by the plant does not exceed the space noise levels specified. The attenuators indicated in the schedules are for quotation purpose only and the Contractor shall check and provide a detailed acoustic design for approval by the Engineer prior to the or ordering of any attenuator. The Contractor shall submit an acoustic analysis of the air-conditioning systems based on the proposed equipment and shall make any adjustments to the specified parameters. i.e. systems external resistance etc as may be required. All mechanical equipment, piping, duct, etc shall be mounted on or suspended from approved foundations or supports. All floor mounted equipment shall be erected on either a 100mm high reinforced concrete plinth or on steel beams. Where vibration isolation equipment is used the plinths or beams shall be extended to support the isolation system. Vibration isolation systems shall limit the static deflections as required and indicated on the Drawings with a minimum isolation efficiency of The vibration isolation system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacture's instructions. All vibration isolation systems exposed in the following manner; All steel parts shall be hot dipped galvanized; all bolt shall be cadmium plated and springs shall be cadmium plated and neoprene coated. All of the above equipment, including mounting, hangers, structural steel bases, concrete formwork and flexible pipe connectors, shall be furnished by a single manufacturers of vibration isolation equipment. All ceiling-suspended and floor-supported piping that is connected to mechanical equipment shall be isolated from the building structure for a distance of 15 metros from the equipment, in the following manner. Ceiling-suspended piping shall be isolated by a combination of spring and neoprene-in-shear hangers. The first four hangers located adjacent to mechanical equipment, shall be capable of supporting the piping at a fixed elevation during installation irrespective of load changes. Floor-supported piping shall be located on concrete plinths and shall be isolated by a heavy duty neoprene pad as indicated on the Drawings. Base elbows used to support piping risers shall be F/10

419 isolated by means of heavy duty neoprene pads. Duct Isolation Flexible Connectors All duct runs shall be isolated from the building structure for a distance of 16 metros from the mechanical equipment in the following manner. Ceiling-suspended duct work shall be isolated by double deflection neoprene-in-shear hangers. Floor-supported ductwork shall be isolated by double deflection neoprene-in-shear mountings. Thrust restraints which are similar to spring shall be installed to resist thrust caused by air pressure. The spring shall be selected for the same deflection as the equipment. All air handling equipment with a total static pressure of 750 Pa and above shall be isolated with flexible canvas or rubber duct connections together with thrust restraints. Flexible connectors shall be installed at the suction and discharge ends of all rotating mechanical equipment, including pumps, water chillers, and air handling units. The connectors shall be installed horizontally unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer. The pipe connectors shall be of the rubber hose or metal hose type with flanges suitable for the working pressure and temperatures of the respective systems. Piping and Duct Penetrations Attenuators All piping and ducts which penetrate floor, walls and shafts shall have the gap between sleeves or timber frames sealed with fibrous materials and caulking to the approval of the Engineer, to prevent the transmission of airborne noise. Each attenuator shall provide an insertion loss, under operating conditions, of not less than that indicated in the final acoustic design analysis, which is to be produced by the Contractor. Manufacturers shall specify the insertion losses expected from the attenuators offered. Under the operating conditions, and this information shall be derived from tests carried out in accordance with BS 4718: Each attenuator shall have a pressure loss at the design flow and temperature of not less greater than that shown in the Schedules. The manufacture's quoted pressure losses shall be derived from tests carried out in accordance with BS 4718:1971. Each attenuator shall have a pressure loss at the design flow and temperature of not greater than that shown in the Schedules. The manufacturer's quoted pressure losses shall be derived from tests carried out in accordance with BS 4718:1971. Where the attenuator is known the supplier shall indicate the expected effect of turbulence due to adjacent duct elements on the quoted pressure losses. Suppliers of attenuators shall provide, with the certified insertion loss data, information relating to the attenuator generated octave band sound power levels (12.15 khz) at the operating conditions. The outer casing of all duct attenuators shall be constructed in accordance with the current HVCA ductwork specification. Unless otherwise indicated in the Schedule. the casing shall conform to the Medium & Low" pressure code in terms of its thickness, seams and materials. All attenuators shall be fitted with drilled angle flange connections, unless alternative connections are specified in the Schedules or instructed by the Engineer. Flanges shall conform to the relevant F/11

420 HVCA code or its equivalent. Acoustic Weather Louvre Account elements in rectangular attenuators of height greater than or equal to 900mm shall incorporate fair leading and trailing edges (not square ends), and the inert, rot-proof and noncombustible mineral wool or glass fibre acoustic medium shall be packed to a density of not less than 48kg/m 3 and retained by a perforated steel sheet facing. The manufacturer shall note any particular requirements, e.g. painting, special materials, etc., that are indicated on the schedules of Drawings. Splitter shall be constructed such that no ingress of acoustic medium shall occur into the gas stream under the operating conditions. Where acoustic elements from splitters within the attenuator, the usual arrangements shall be with the splitters vertical and half-width splitter fixed to each side wall of the casing. However, it is the responsibility of the supplier to ensure that the parallel splitter elements in the attenuator are located near bends, bifurcations, etc. Horizontal splitters shall be suitable stuffed to prevent flexing and restriction of the airways. For circular attenuators, all internal acoustic elements shall comprise mineral or glass fibre as the acoustic medium, as specified above for rectangular attenuators, retained by a perforated metal facing. When attenuators are manufactured in modules, each unit shall be shop assembled and this Specification together with the manufacturer's own guarantee and performance rating, shall apply to the unit as a whole. Attenuator units shall be delivered to site with blocked ends to prevent ingress of rubble, etc. prior to installation, and to reduce the risk of damage the direction of airflow through the attenuator shall be clearly marked on the casing. Attenuators for high temperature application (e.g. diesel or turbine exhausts, boiler flues, etc) shall have their casing manufactured from an approved gauge of sheet steel, and adequate precautions taken to cater for expansion and thermal shock. The internal elements and non-combustible mineral or glass fibre cloth behind the perforated metal facing. For every high temperatures, steel wool or equivalent materials shall be used as the acoustic medium. Acoustic and aerodynamic requirements of the Specification re met. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that the Engineer is advised of the actual sizes being offered where these differ from the Schedule. All acoustic weather louvres shall provide an insertion loss, under the operating conditions, of not less than that indicated in the relevant acoustic hardware schedules. In addition, the static pressure loss, under maximum operating duty, shall not exceed that shown in the Schedules. The louvres shall be constructed from an appropriate gauge of galvanized mild steel, or aluminum, supporting louvre blades of like materials. The acoustic material in the blades shall have a density of kg/m3 and be inert, rot and vermin proof, non-hydroscope and incombustible mineral fibre, faced with mineral fibre tissue and retained on the lower blade face by perforated galvanized mild steel or aluminum. When the louvres are manufactured in sections, each unit shall be shop assembled as a whole unit and this specification, together with the manufacture's own guarantee and performance ratings, shall apply to the unit as a whole. F/12

421 Acoustic weather louvres shall be supplied with an integral bird screen of galvanized mild steel or aluminum mesh, fixed to its internal face. The mesh pitch shall be a maximum of 25mm. The louvres between the outside of the louvre frame and the wall or duct shall be made good and sealed with a heavy duct ground and/or a non-hardening, dense mastic. Electrical Services Motor Control Panels Suitably rated control panels shall be supplied and installed as part of this sub-contract to meet the starting and operating characteristics of the fan units. The panels shall be either wall or floor mounted to suit the specific area and requirements. Power supplies to these panels shall be extended from adjacent isolating switches to be provided under the electrical services sub-contract. Complete co-ordination shall be maintained with the electrical services sub-contractor to ensure supply and termination details are satisfactorily carried out to suit the plant and installation requirements. All starters, control equipment and the like shall be enclosed in purpose made sheet panels. The panels shall be installed within the plant rooms to suit the dimensions of the actual panels. All details of the panels and layouts within the plant shall be to the approval of the Engineer and shall include: - Triple pole isolating switch removable neutral link and HRC fuses. - Control circuits fuses of the HR cartridge type. - Under voltage release, adjustable and complete tower to allow for voltage associated with the KP & LC supply and motor starting. - Over voltage protection, details to be agreed. - Ammeter of the moving iron mounted on panel with selector switch. - Pilot lamp, green. - Rotary switch for HAND/OFF/AUTO operation, where required. Removable neutral link of heavy section copper. - Motor winding over-temperature release. The Contractor shall provide this feature in conjunction with the specified thermistor protection. - Duty selection switches. - Manual stop-start button units to operate in conjunction with rotary switch. - Hours run meter/counter. The sub-contractor shall allow me to present for the contractor to reclose automatically on the restoration of the mains voltage. This requirement shall be subject to further discussion with the Employer to suit the standby Diesel plant and the mode of operation of essential and non-essential supplies. All starter panels shall include sufficient miniature circuit breaker, with neutral bar, to supply auxiliary or associated equipment. One 30TP and one spare 155P MCBs shall be included as spares. All starter panels, motor starters and controllers shall comply with BS 587. Enclosures shall be rigid, at least 1.6mm thick, with rolled corners stiffened as necessary, dust-proof, vermin-proof, damp and corrosion protected with a grey colour stone enamel or other approved finish, fully tropicalised, with washable air filters. Instruments, gauge, ammeters, indicator lamps, etc shall be flush mounted. Panel doors shall include isolating switches to prevent them being opened unless the switches are in the off position. Each door shall be provided with a lock, and three sets of keys for all panel door locks shall be handed over to F/13

422 the Engineer. Terminal for all outgoing main and control cables shall be marked and positioned so that the cables may be carried to the outlet from the panel without crossing or being carried round the panel. Terminal numbers and markings shall correspond to those used on connected equipment and wiring diagrams. All internal interconnecting wiring between individual units and the terminal chamber shall be carried out by the panel manufacturer. Each panel shall be provided with a main isolator so that the whole panel may be completely isolated. The sub-contractor shall determine all motor starter requirements and associated auxiliaries and controls prior to manufacture and shall submit the design and circuit diagrams to the Engineer for approval. Contractor shall determine all motor starter requirements and associated and controls prior to manufacture and shall submit the design and circuit diagrams to the Engineer for approval. Contractors shall be of air-break type BS 5424 part 1 and/or BS 587, and shall be provided as follows: - Magnetic blow-outs and air chutes on each pole. - Renewable hard drawn copper contacts. - Auxiliary contacts for remote control - Continuously rated operating coils (Max 240V) - Thermal overload protection device incorporating single phasing protection. Starters shall be rated as follows. Ordinary duty - For motors which will run continuously for periods in excess of two hours. Intermediate duty - For motors under automatic control other than time control. When the intervals of operation are greater than two hours. Starters shall be of the following types:- - Up to and including 400W motor: Single phase on/off with overload protection. - Over 3.75 kw and upto 15kW: Star Delta starter. - For starters incorporating reduced voltages starting the changeover of voltage shall be automatic. Terminals shall be accessible and shall be provided with adequate clearance between phases and between phases and earth. Where starters are not enclosed in a composite panel, an integral isolating switch as specified for control panels shall be provided. Where electric motors are either not visible from the control panel or are located more than 10m distance they shall be provided with a local lock-off stop control circuit switch, or a main circuit isolator where there is no control circuit. A weatherproof lock-off stop control circuit switch shall be provided for motors located externally or otherwise exposed to the weather. Motors Motors shall comply with BS 816 Part 1 and shall be arranged for conduit entry. Motors shall be fitted with locating type bearings and/or heavy thrust bearings at the non-drive end and collar type at the drive end. Motors shall be of the totally enclosed fan cooled type, tropicalised to BS 5000 F/14

423 Part 99 suitably finished to resist corrosion by fluid or fumes. The rating of all motors shall be chosen to provide continuously the maximum power requirements of the plant. The motors shall be of the standard induction type. They may be of the squirrel cage, horizontal or vertical spindle type of all to the approval of the Engineer. Vertical spindle type motors shall be provided with substantial canopies of approved design. The locked motor currents shall be stated on the name plate of each motor and shall be not more than six times the full load current. Thermistors shall be fitted to all motors above 5kw. They shall be fitted during manufacture and their ends shall be brought out at additional terminals on the connector block of the motor. All motors shall be rated 3 phases. 415 volt or single phase, 240 volt, high power factor continuous maximum rating complying with BS 5000 Part 99 and Class F insulating complying with BS 2757 unless otherwise specified. All motors larger than 400kw shall be three phase. All three phase motors shall be supplied with six stud terminals with each end of the stator phase windings connected, terminals shall be of suitable size to accept the cable lugs of the feeding cables. Terminal blocks shall be mounted on the side of the motor case in an approved box complete with lid, gasket and tapped ET entry hole. Rubber installation shall not be used on coil connections. Each motor shall be fitted with cable terminals and glands to accept the specified types of cable. No motor shall run at a speed higher than 1500 rmp unless otherwise specified. Motors driving through Vee-belts shall be fitted with slide rails. The power factor shall be less than 0.9 lagging. All motors shall be from the same manufacturer as far as possible. Cabling and Wiring The Contractor shall carry out all power and control wiring including LV and ELV or any other voltage for the control equipment and alarm systems and interconnecting wiring between starter panels, remote control items, and motor units are required. Cabling shall be carried out in PVC insulated, PVC sheathed, single wire armoured and PVC sheathed overall cable, using compression type glands provided with means of securing armoured wires within the body of the gland, under armour moisture seal and outer sheath seal. Each core termination shall be fitted with a plastic ferrule engraved with an identification corresponding to the wiring diagrams. Multicore control cables to the remote stop, start allow water cut-out/alarms shall be 0.62mm2 PVCSWAPVC where external to the pump station and PVC/PVC or similar, where internal. All cables, whether internal or external being suitably protected. All conductors shall be copper and the installations, both internal and external being carried out in accordance with the regulations and by-laws previously stated. Trenching and the fixing of cables shall be in accordance with locally specified standards details of which have been specified within the sub-contract documents for the electrical services. These details can be made available upon request should the subcontractor not be familiar with these requirements. Details of the rating, types and methods for all cables and wiring to be supplied under this sub-contract shall be submitted with the tenders, wiring, PVC single core shall be run in either galvanized conduit or F/15

424 galvanized trunking of suitable sizes where surface in plant rooms and heavy gauge PVC were cast into walls, slabs etc. Testing and Commissioning The sub-contractor shall be responsible for testing and commissioning the air conditioning mechanical ventilation systems to ensure they are in proper working order to the satisfaction of the Engineer, all in accordance with the requirements set out below. A full test shall be carried out, and the following taken. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Volumes is all major ducts and for all extract diffusers and diffusers and supply grilles. Noise rating in the above rooms, and from all mechanical ventilation fans. Total flow rates for every mechanical ventilation system installed under this sub-contract. Running current for each electric motor in amperes (recorded against the manufacturer's full load current). Air static pressure differential across each fan, filter, coil etc. The operation of all controls, safety devices, alarms and standby equipment shall be demonstrated in liaison with the electrical services sub-contractor. F/16

425 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR AIR CONDITIONING UNITS General This part of the sub-contract comprises the supply, delivery and complete installation of single split direct expansion units and a modular multi-system as outlined in the Bills of quantities. The design data for the lift motor room is as follows:- Mean ambient temperature : : 28 o c Altitude : 1750m above sea level Room Temperature : o C Indoor Units The indoor units shall incorporate a quiet centrifugal fan, liquid crystal display wired remote controller, air purifying filter employing static electricity to remove particles and Airflow direction lourves. All the controls shall be by use of microprocessor, The unit shall have the following parameters:- Cooling capacity:- as specified in the bills of quantities Air Flow rate (High Speed): - as specified in the bills of quantities Fan speed:- 3 speeds and Auto Limiting Noise level 41 db(a) at high speed. The units shall be mounted as shown as per tender drawings. Condensate removed from the air shall drain into the drip pan and then drain by an integrated pump through condensate drainpipe to the ground. All units shall be as specified in the bills of quantities Outdoor Unit The unit shall comprise of several modules(compressors and inverters) interconnected together and shall be running sequentially depending on the cooling load demands from the conditioned space. The modules and their arrangement shall be as specified in the bills of quantities and shall be sized to match the indoor units. The outdoor units shall have the following parameters: - Sound level (limit) - 49 db(a) at 1 meter The modules shall be complete with integral isolator, compressors, condenser fans, LP/HP cut-outs, auto restart after power failure and weather proof. F/17-

426 5.7 Components a) Compressors These shall be rotary with three-phase motors having internal current/thermal overload device and pressure relief valve. b) Condenser c) Fans These shall be forced-draught type with acrylic-dipped copper tubes mechanically expanded into aluminum fins spaced at approximately. 10 per 25mm. These shall be of the forward curved centrifugal type and shall be made of aluminum, reinforced fibre or rigid plastic material.. The fan shall have variable speeds to enable the user to reduce both air volume and noise levels. d) Operating Controls These shall comprise an ON/Off switch, combined with fan speed controller and a compressor selector to give a range of options such as: off; fan only; fan & low cool, fan 7 high cool. There shall be a bimetallic, single-pole single-throw (SPST) thermostat with sensing phial clipped in the return air stream behind the air filter. This shall cycle the compressor but the evaporator fan shall be unaffected as long as the unit is switched "ON". e) Safety Controls These shall comprise either externally or internally mounted compressor motor overloads, to safeguard against thermal or electrical overloads. f) Central Remote Controller. The controller shall be connected to the outdoor unit. The remote shall control the entire indoor units installed and shall be connected to the outdoor unit. g) Noise Level Fan and motor assemblies shall be complete with anti-vibration mountings and shall operate quietly, with the noise level at 1 metre not exceeding noise curve NR 49dB(A). h) Refrigerant piping The refrigerant piping shall be neatly installed and clipped on the wall. The pipes shall also be neatly boxed or put in a trunking to the approval of the engineer. i) Installation Requirements Suitable aperture and supporting frame to be fitted in a wall shall be made. The unit shall be properly balanced and supported in a manner that prevents noise or "drumming" regardless of the type of structure in which it is supported. F/18-

427 j) Mounting Brackets The air-conditioners shall be held in position by two mounting brackets, fixed to the wall. The subcontractor shall ensure that any damage to the wall is made good-inside and out around the frame, and repaint as necessary. The sub-contractor shall ensure that the unit is perfectly level from side to side and that from to back it is sloping slightly to the rear of the baseplate. k) Power Supply The power point serving the system shall be as close as possible to the modules and slightly lower to the side on which the power cable enters the front of the chassis and of the fused switch type. With the indoor air filters in place, the power supply shall be switched on to start the unit working steadily through the full operating sequence permitted by the controls. The sub-contractor shall ensure that the control switch operates in every position which can be selected. l) Testing and Commissioning The sub-contractor shall test and commission the unit to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer and the Employer. In particular he shall check the full load amperage drawn using a clip-on ammeter to confirm that this does not exceed values shown on the nameplate. The sub-contractor shall adjust the supply air grille to produce effective distribution throughout the room, free from draughts and pockets of stagnant air. Control knobs shall be checked and confirmed to be tight. The differential between the temperatures of the air entering the return grille and that leaving the discharge grille shall be ascertained to be what the manufacturer recommends. The sub-contractor shall produce operation and maintenance manuals to be given to the Engineer for onward transmission to the Employer. m) Maintenance Contract The contractor shall provide all necessary technical brochures and operation manuals to the Client upon completion of works. He shall also quote for maintenance of these units after the 6 months liability period is over. The scope of maintenance works shall include but not be restricted to all normal servicing of he unit which shall be carried out as stipulated in the maintenance contract agreement to be entered between the Client and the Sub-contractor. F/19-

428 PART G 1: BILLS OF QUANTITIES FOR PLUMBING, DRAINAGE AND FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATIONS

429 G1/ 1 NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORIES SERVICES PROPOSED LABORATORIES FOR NPHLS IN MTRH, ELDORET BILLS OF QUANTITIES FOR PLUMBING & DRAINAGE INSTALLATIONS BILL NO. 1 SANITARYWARE ITEM No. DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE (KShs Cts) Supply, deliver and install the following sanitary fittings including all the necessary fittings and jointings. All Sanitary fittings are to be as IDEAL STANDARDS or equal & approved. AMOUNT (KShs Cts) WC Suite 1.01 Ideal Standards close coupled WC suite in Vitreous China complete with 7.5 Litre cistern with lever and valveless fittings having plastic syphon complete with inlet and overflow supporting bracket, seat and cover as Cat. No. AD7810WH. 14 NO 1.02 WC "S" or "P" connector to drain pipe for horizontal outlet WC Pan 14 No. Toilet Roll Holder 1.03 Recessed into wall toilet roll holder in approved colour in vitreous china. 14 NO Wash Hand Basin 1.04 Ideal Standards Wall pedestal wash hand basin in Vitreous china with1 No. tap holes AD4532WH size 500 x 425mm complete with Chrome plated waste fitting, 1 ¼ waste fitting, 1 ¼ chrome plated bottle trap and pedestals 30 NO Whb tap 1.05a Cobra Press action type Basin Tap or an approved equivalent 20 No. 1.05b Ditto but elbow action type Basin Tap or an approved equivalent 10 No. Laboratory Sink 1.06 Hychem Polypropylene Sinks Model No. MS 505 Complete size 457 x 305 x 33 No. 210 mm. complete with matching anti-siphon bottle trap & sink waste 1.07 Hychem screwed taps 1 way swivel swanneck tap with removable serrated 33 No. nozzle Mirrors 1.08 Plain size bevelled glass plate mirror size 750 x 600mm complete with dome headed chrome plated fixing screws. 30 NO Showers 1.09 Instant Electric shower, complete with chrome plated handles and wall mounted low level foot-bath as above but with 1600 mm long chrome plated shower rail 3 NO complete with hinges to Engineers approval. Soap Tray 1.10 Wall mounted Eurobath Soap Dish as LEV-182 or equal and approved. 3 NO Angle valves 1.11 Cobra angle valves No or equal and approved. 45 NO 1.12 Sensor Activated Electronic Soap Dispenser Touch-free operation. The dispenser is to be complete with wall mounting brackets, key and initial discharge. 26 No Fast hot air hand & face drier with automatic operation by touch-free infra-red control with sensor range of 150mm vertically under air inlet as mediclinics. 9 No. Total C/F to G1/2

430 G1/ 2 NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORIES SERVICES PROPOSED LABORATORIES FOR NPHLS IN MTRH, ELDORET BILLS OF QUANTITIES FOR PLUMBING & DRAINAGE INSTALLATIONS BILL NO. 1 SANITARYWARE ITEM No. Total B/F from G1/1 DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE (KShs Cts) AMOUNT (KShs Cts) 1.14 Combination Shower and Eye/Face wash unit complete withtwo aerated spraysand round bowl combined on a galvanised steel stannchion with a stainlessstainless steel shower head that is activated by a stainless steel pull rod. The unit must be compliant with ANSI Z Barrel Centre pull hand drying Tissue Dispenser. Eye wash compound hooks 1.16 Eurobath Hook as LEV-186 or equal and approved No. No. NO Flexible Connector 1.17 Copper connector to Engineers approval. Coat Hook 1.18 Eurobath Double Robe/Coat Hook as LEV-186 or equal and approved. Towel Rail 1.19 Eurobath Double Towel Rail as LEV-184A or equal and approved. Water Tanks NO NO NO ,000 Litres Cylindrical PVC water storage tank as Roto complete with 32mm (1/2 ) high pressure pegler ball valve,inlet with 25mm pegler gate valve, outlets with 40mm pegler gate valves and an overflow with 32mm pegler gate valve. 2 NO 1.21 Ditto but 10,000 Litres Plastic cylindrical water storage tank as Roto but for ground tank. 3 No. Booster Pump for External ground water storage tank 1.22 Supply and install 2 no. water booster pumps operating with a capacity of 5m3/hr at 18 meters pressure head as Grundfos working on duty and standby modes and the pump to have Base frame with anti vibration mountings and level switch to the approva of Engineer complete with all other necessary fittings for good working of the pump. the pumps to be supplied with a control panel. 1 Set Facility for the Disabled 1.23 Full set of disabled facility in Ideal Standard For WC suite Wall hung WC Pan in white Consisting of Wall hung Barrier Free WC Pan, H/Duty soft close WC Seat & Cover with S/Steel Hinges in white, lever type flush system, WHB, 4 No. 600 mm long support rails, hinged support rails and toilet roll holder, or an approved equivalent Tankless water heater with output of 75 L/M at 30 degree celcius from incoming water temperature above 14 degree celcius. The heat exchangers to be made of stainless steel. The unit to ha output temperature capability to be adjusted in 1 degree celcius temperature increament. The unit must be compliant with ANSI Z Set No. Total C/F to Summary Page

431 G1/ 3 NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORIES SERVICES PROPOSED LABORATORIES FOR NPHLS IN MTRH, ELDORET BILLS OF QUANTITIES FOR PLUMBING & DRAINAGE INSTALLATIONS BILL NO. 2 - COLD WATER SUPPLY PIPEWORK ITEM No. DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE (KShs Cts) Supply and Instal Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) as manufactured by Astral FlowGuard under lincense from Lubrizol or an approved equivalent. The CPVC compund shall meet cell class B by ASTM D1784 and have design stress of 2000 PSI and maximum service temperature of upto 93 degrees celsius. Jointing & installation methods shall be as per manufacturers recommendations only. All pipe diameters are internal diameters. AMOUNT (KShs Cts) Astral FlowGuard CPVC has been used as a guide. Equal and approved brands shall be accepted only with the Engineers approval. Tenderers must allow in their prices for all couplings, connectors, holding brackets expansion joints as required in the running lengths of pipes Pipes (Class I - Pipe SDR-11) a) 25mm diameter PP-R pipe b) 32mm ditto c) 40mm ditto 144 LM 120 LM 96 LM 2.02 Elbow and Bends a) 25mm diameter PP-R elbow/bend b) 32mm ditto c) 40mm ditto 28 No 16 No 5 No Reducers a) 40x32mm ditto b) 32x25mm ditto 10 No. 11 No Tees a) 25mm diameter PP-R equal tee b) 32mm ditto c) 40mm ditto 16 No 14 No 10 No Female threaded joints a) 25mm diameter PP-R Female threaded join b) 32mm ditto c) 40mm ditto 28 No. 24 No. 20 No Male threaded joints a) 25mm diameter PP-R Male threaded joints b) 32mm ditto c) 40mm ditto 28 No. 24 No. 20 No Isolation Valves a) 25mm diameter isolation valves b) 32mm ditto c) 40mm ditto 12 No. 10 No. 4 No. Total for Clean cold/hotwater C/F to Summary Page

432 G1/ 4 NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORIES SERVICES PROPOSED LABORATORIES FOR NPHLS IN MTRH, ELDORET BILLS OF QUANTITIES FOR PLUMBING & DRAINAGE INSTALLATIONS BILL NO. 3 - INTERNAL DRAINAGE PIPEWORK ITEM No. All pipes to be as Key Terrain or Metro and prices to include connectors, adaptors, socket reducers, etc. DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE (KShs Cts) AMOUNT (KShs Cts) 3.01 Pipes a) 100mm diameter UPVC grey pipe b) 40mm ditto c) 32mm ditto 108 LM 136 LM 144 LM 3.02 Bends a) 100mm diameter UPVC access bend b) 100mm diameter UPVC sweep bend c) 40mm ditto d) 32mm ditto 12 No. 15 No. 12 No. 14 No Tees a) 100mm diameter single branch b) 40mm diameter tee c) 32mm diameter tee 12 No. 11 No. 12 No Boss Connectors a) 100mm diameter boss connector b) 40mm ditto c) 32mm ditto 14 No. 12 No. 14 No Inspection Plugs (Rodding eyes) a) 100mm diameter inspection plugs b) 40mm ditto c) 32mm ditto 15 No. 12 No. 10 No mm diameter vent cowl 10 No mm diameter weathering slate 10 No Four-way 100 x 50mm floor trap complete with approved stainless steel grating to Engineers approval. 50 No mm diameter gulley trap complete with chamber and cover. 15 No mm diameter WC connectors 17 No. Total C/F to Summary Page

433 G1/ 5 NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORIES SERVICES PROPOSED LABORATORIES FOR NPHLS IN MTRH, ELDORET BILLS OF QUANTITIES FOR PLUMBING & DRAINAGE INSTALLATIONS BILL NO.4: LABORATORY DRAINAGE ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT KSh. Cts. All pipes to be as CPV-Zurn or Method Enfusion only system and prices to include connectors, adapters, socket reducers, etc Pipes a) 102mm diameter black propylene pipe b) 51mm ditto c) 38mm ditto 120 LM 108 LM 120 LM 4.02 Couplers a) 102mm diameter black propylene coupler b) 51mm ditto c) 38mm ditto 20 No. 22 No. 16 No Bends a) 102mm diameter black propylene bend b) 51mm ditto c) 38mm ditto 18 No. 20 No. 18 No Reducing Sweep Tee a) 51x38mm diameter black propylene R.S.T b) 102x51mm ditto Rodding Sweep Tee a) 51mm diameter black propylene Adaptor Male Thread a) 38mm diameter black propylene AMT b) 51mm ditto Adaptor Female Thread c) 38mm diameter black propylene AMT d) 51mm ditto Dilution Pots 51mm inlet, 5 litre capacity polypropylene dilution pot 20 No. 21 No. 17 No. 12 No. 11 No. 15 No. 9 No. 9 No mm diameter air-admittance valves 102 mm diameter access points Standard 600x400mm Inspection Chamber complete with heavy duty cover Litre Lab wastes neutrolization tank to Engineers approval. Reates to allow for supply and installation and all othr builders works in relationto this installation No. No. No. No. Total C/F to Summary Page

434 G1/ 6 NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORIES SERVICES PROPOSED LABORATORIES FOR NPHLS IN MTRH, ELDORET BILLS OF QUANTITIES FOR PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTALLATIONS BILL NO.5: FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT ITEM DESCRIPTION No. Supply, fix, test and commission the following equipment and fitting as described:- QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT Ksh. Cts. Tenderers must allow in pipework prices for all couplings, unions, nipples, sockets connectors, joints e.t.c in running lengths of pipes and also where necessary for fixing clips, holderbats plugged and screwed Hosereel System Pipework a) 25mm diameter pipe GMS Class B to BS 1387 b) 32mm ditto Elbows a) 25mm elbows malleable iron galvanized. b) 32mm ditto. Reducers Valves a) 32 x 25mm malleable galvanized iron reducing bush a) 32mm bronze gate valve to BS 5154 c) 25mm air relief valve screwed as CRANE. Hose reels Swinging type hose reel complete with 30m long hose of 20mm diameter, 25mm internal diameter rubber fire hose with nylon spray/jet and shut off nozzle, and mounting brackets conforming to BS 5274 Hosereel Pipework Painting 84 LM. 60 LM. 4 No. 2 No. 4 No. 2 No. 2 No. 4 No Wire brush, clean and paint complete installation with one coat of red oxide Item primer, under coat and gloss coat to Architects colour including banding and colour coding to British standards Fire Booster set (2 No. Pumps) as Grundfos CH 2-30, duty and standby complete with :- 2 No. Automatic electrical motor driven fire water pumps with a capacity of 4 m 3 /hr at 4 bar as Grundfos, pressure switch, air pessure vessel, gate valve, pressure switch and all other accessories. 1 No Litre water/carbon dioxide gas fire extinguishers complete with pressure gauge, 4 No. initial charge and mounting brackets Kg carbon dioxide gas fire extinguisher complete with pressure gauge, initial charge and mounting brackets. 4.5 kg dry powder fire extinguisher complete with initial charge and mounting brackets. 4 4 No. No. Total C/F to Summary Page

435 G1/ 7 NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORIES SERVICES PROPOSED LABORATORIES FOR NPHLS IN MTRH, ELDORET BILLS OF QUANTITIES FOR PLUMBING & DRAINAGE INSTALLATIONS BILL NO. 6: WATER RETICULATION ITEM No. DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT Supply and fix polypropylene PP-R pipes and fittings to relevant B.S DIN and local standards. Tenderers must allow in their pipework prices for all the coupling, unions, connector joints, reducers etc as required in the running lengths of pipe, fixing clip, holder bats, flanges for tees, plugged and screwed. In their rates, tenderers must also allow for all excavations and backfilling for running lengths of pipes and application of 4mm thick Bituminous paint on all external pipework PPR pipework a) 40mm pipework b) 25mm ditto 600 LM 400 LM 6.02 Bends/Elbows a) 32 mm elbow/bend b) 25mm ditto 8 No. 6 No mm diameter high pressure non-return valve 2 No. Excavations 6.04 Excavate trench approx. 300mm wide and with an average depth of 750mm for water distribution as described elsewhere in this document. Back fill, ram, and cart away the remainder 900 LM mm diameter lockable lever type heavy duty threaded tap for stand pipe with hose union connection as Bricon or equal and approved. 2 No. Total C/F to Summary page

436 G1/ 8 NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORIES SERVICES PROPOSED LABORATORIES FOR NPHLS IN MTRH, ELDORET BILLS OF QUANTITIES FOR PLUMBING & DRAINAGE INSTALLATIONS BILL NO. 7: GENERAL ITEMS ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE (KSh Cts.) AMOUNT ( Ksh Cts.) 7.01 Allow for presentation of all the required samples as per specifications, Bills of Quantities and Drawings. Item 7.02 Prepare and submit Working Drawings in both hard and soft copy as per drawing Item list to the satisfaction of the Engineer Ditto but for record (As installed drawings). Item 7.04 Prepare and submit Maintenance Manuals for all items installed. Item 7.05 Provide a six months initial maintenance for all plumbing and drainage Item installations upon expiry of the Defects Liability Period. Total C/F to Summary Page

437 G1/ 9 NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORIES SERVICES PROPOSED LABORATORIES FOR NPHLS IN MTRH, ELDORET BILLS OF QUANTITIES FOR PLUMBING & DRAINAGE INSTALLATIONS MAIN SUMMARY PAGE ITEM No. DESCRIPTION AMOUNT (KShs Cts) 1 Total for Sanitaryware, Bill No.1 2 Total for Cold water pipework, Bill No.2 3 Total for Drainage Pipework, Bill No.3 4 Total for Laboratory Drainage, Bill No.4 5 Total for Fire fighting installations, Bill No.5 6 Total for Water Reticulation, Bill No.6 7 Total for General Items, Bill No Sub-total Allow for 10% of Sub-Total (Item 8 x 0.1) as Contingency Total for Plumbing and Drainage C/F to Main Works Summary Page

438 PART G 2: BILLS OF QUANTITIES FOR AIR-CONDITIONING INSTALLATIONS

439 G2/ 1 NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORIES SERVICES PROPOSED LABORATORY FOR NPHLS IN MTRH, ELDORET BILLS OF QUANTITIES FOR AIR CONDITIONING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION BILL NO. 1: SPLIT TYPE AIR-CONDITIONING INSTALLATIONS ITEM No. DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT ( Ksh Cts.) 1.01 Indoor Unit Split type direct expansion High wall air conditioning unit with: -. Cooling capacity : - 12,000 Btu/hr. Fan speed: - 3 steps. Condensate drain pipe (25mm diameter MUPVC) from indoor unit (Approximately 18m). LCD wireless remote controller. Fan motor. Limiting noise level 50 db (A) at high speed.. Cooling coil. Refrigerant charge (R410A). Condensate drip pan. Refrigerant piping (Vapour and liquid lines) both insulated with 25mm thick Armaflex Insulation (Approx. 25 m).. Support brackets etc. Unit to be as CARRIER or an approved equivalent 4 No Outdoor Unit Wall mounted air cooled unit complete with:. Local electrical isolator. Hermatically sealed rotary type compressor. Condensate fan. Support bracket. Burglar proofing grille with pad lock. The unit must have an automatic restart system after power interruption. 4 No Allow for electrical and control wiring including cabling to and from the indoor units to 4 No. outdoor units (for item 1.01&1.02) in 3x4.0mm 2 SC-PVC-CU cables wired in diameter 25mm HG conduit (Approximately 40 meters long) Single Phase 30VA voltage switch as sollatek AVS 30 complete with wiring 4 No. Total C/F to G2/2

440 G2/ 2 NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORIES SERVICES PROPOSED LABORATORY FOR NPHLS IN MTRH, ELDORET BILLS OF QUANTITIES FOR AIR CONDITIONING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION BILL NO. 1: SPLIT TYPE AIR-CONDITIONING INSTALLATIONS ITEM No. DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT ( Ksh Cts.) Total B/F to G2/ Indoor Unit Split type direct expansion High wall air conditioning unit with: -. Cooling capacity : - 18,000 Btu/hr. Fan speed: - 3 steps. Condensate drain pipe (25mm diameter MUPVC) from indoor unit (Approximately 18m). LCD wireless remote controller. Fan motor. Limiting noise level 50 db (A) at high speed.. Cooling coil. Refrigerant charge (R410A). Condensate drip pan. Refrigerant piping (Vapour and liquid lines) both insulated with 25mm thick Armaflex Insulation (Approx. 25 m).. Support brackets etc. Unit to be as CARRIER or an approved equivalent 7 No Outdoor Unit Wall mounted air cooled unit complete with:. Local electrical isolator. Hermatically sealed rotary type compressor. Condensate fan. Support bracket. Burglar proofing grille with pad lock. The unit must have an automatic restart system after power interruption. 7 No Allow for electrical and control wiring including cabling to and from the indoor units to 7 No. outdoor units (for item 1.05&1.06) in 3x4.0mm 2 SC-PVC-CU cables wired in diameter 25mm HG conduit (Approximately 40 meters long) Single Phase 30VA voltage switch as sollatek AVS 30 complete with wiring 7 No. Total C/F to G2/3

441 G2/ 3 NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORIES SERVICES PROPOSED LABORATORY FOR NPHLS IN MTRH, ELDORET BILLS OF QUANTITIES FOR AIR CONDITIONING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION BILL NO. 1: SPLIT TYPE AIR-CONDITIONING INSTALLATIONS ITEM No. DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT ( Ksh Cts.) Total B/F to G2/ Indoor Unit Split type direct expansion High wall air conditioning unit with: -. Cooling capacity : - 24,000 Btu/hr. Fan speed: - 3 steps. Condensate drain pipe (25mm diameter MUPVC) from indoor unit (Approximately 18m). LCD wireless remote controller. Fan motor. Limiting noise level 50 db (A) at high speed.. Cooling coil. Refrigerant charge (R410A). Condensate drip pan. Refrigerant piping (Vapour and liquid lines) both insulated with 25mm thick Armaflex Insulation (Approx. 25 m).. Support brackets etc. Unit to be as CARRIER or an approved equivalent 2 No Outdoor Unit Wall mounted air cooled unit complete with:. Local electrical isolator. Hermatically sealed rotary type compressor. Condensate fan. Support bracket. Burglar proofing grille with pad lock. The unit must have an automatic restart system after power interruption. 2 No Allow for electrical and control wiring including cabling to and from the indoor units to 2 No. outdoor units (for item 1.09&1.10) in 3x4.0mm 2 SC-PVC-CU cables wired in diameter 25mm HG conduit (Approximately 40 meters long) Single Phase 30VA voltage switch as sollatek AVS 30 complete with wiring 2 No. Total C/F to G2/4

442 G2/ 4 NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORIES SERVICES PROPOSED LABORATORY FOR NPHLS IN MTRH, ELDORET BILLS OF QUANTITIES FOR AIR CONDITIONING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION BILL NO. 1: SPLIT TYPE AIR-CONDITIONING INSTALLATIONS ITEM No. DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT ( Ksh Cts.) Total B/F to G2/ Indoor Unit Split type direct expansion Ceiling cassete air conditioning unit with: -. Cooling capacity : - 24,000 Btu/hr. Fan speed: - 3 steps. Condensate drain pipe (25mm diameter MUPVC) from indoor unit (Approximately 18m). LCD wireless remote controller. Fan motor. Limiting noise level 50 db (A) at high speed.. Cooling coil. Refrigerant charge (R410A). Condensate drip pan. Refrigerant piping (Vapour and liquid lines) both insulated with 25mm thick Armaflex Insulation (Approx. 25 m).. Support brackets etc. Unit to be as CARRIER or an approved equivalent 2 No Outdoor Unit Wall mounted air cooled unit complete with:. Local electrical isolator. Hermatically sealed rotary type compressor. Condensate fan. Support bracket. Burglar proofing grille with pad lock. The unit must have an automatic restart system after power interruption. 2 No Allow for electrical and control wiring including cabling to and from the indoor units to 2 No. outdoor units (for item 1.13&1.14) in 3x4.0mm 2 SC-PVC-CU cables wired in diameter 25mm HG conduit (Approximately 40 meters long) Single Phase 30VA voltage switch as sollatek AVS 30 complete with wiring 2 No. Total C/F to Summary Page

443 G2/ 5 NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORIES SERVICES PROPOSED LABORATORY FOR NPHLS IN MTRH, ELDORET BILLS OF QUANTITIES FOR AIR CONDITIONING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION BILL NO. 2: MULTI-SPLIT TYPE AIR-CONDITIONING INSTALLATIONS ITEM No DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT ( Ksh Cts.) Indoor Unit Split type direct expansion High Wall air conditioning unit with: -. Cooling capacity : - 18,000 Btu/hr. Fan speed: - 3 steps. Condensate drain pipe (25mm diameter MUPVC) from indoor unit (Approximately 18m). LCD wireless remote controller. Fan motor. Limiting noise level 50 db (A) at high speed.. Cooling coil. Refrigerant charge (R410A). Condensate drip pan. Refrigerant piping (Vapour and liquid lines) both insulated with 25mm thick Armaflex Insulation (Approx. 25 m).. Support brackets etc. Unit to be as CARRIER or an approved equivalent 1 No Indoor Unit Split type direct expansion High Wall air conditioning unit with: -. Cooling capacity : - 12,000 Btu/hr. Fan speed: - 3 steps. Condensate drain pipe (25mm diameter MUPVC) from indoor unit (Approximately 18m). LCD wireless remote controller. Fan motor. Limiting noise level 50 db (A) at high speed.. Cooling coil. Refrigerant charge (R410A). Condensate drip pan. Refrigerant piping (Vapour and liquid lines) both insulated with 25mm thick Armaflex Insulation (Approx. 25 m).. Support brackets etc. 2 No Outdoor Unit Wall mounted air cooled unit to match above indoor units in (item 2.01 and 2.02) complete with:. Local electrical isolator. Hermatically sealed rotary type compressor. Condensate fan. Support bracket. Burglar proofing grille with pad lock. The unit must have an automatic restart system after power interruption. 1 No Allow for electrical and control wiring including cabling to and from the indoor units to 3 No. outdoor units (for item 2.01&2.02) in 3x4.0mm 2 SC-PVC-CU cables wired in diameter 25mm HG conduit (Approximately 40 meters long) Single Phase 30VA voltage switch as sollatek AVS 30 complete with wiring 1 No. Total C/F to Summary Page

444 G2/ 6 NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORIES SERVICES PROPOSED LABORATORY FOR NPHLS IN MTRH, ELDORET BILLS OF QUANTITIES FOR AIR CONDITIONING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION BILL NO. 3: MECHANICAL VENTILATION INSTALLATIONS ITEM No. DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT ( Ksh Cts.) Toilet Ventillation 3.01 Mixed flow extract Fan' as Systemair ECO series or an approved equivalent. The 3 No. fan to have a capacity of 0.16 m 3 /s and maximum static pressure of 245Pa. The fan speed to be controllable between 10 to 100%. The fan is as Systemair TD- 500/150ECO or an approoved equivalent Fan silencer for above fan 3 No Allow for the installation of presence detector and intergrating it with the above fan in 3 No. order to increase the speed of the fan from low to high once presence of an occupant is sensed DUCTWORK Supply and install the following FACTORY PRE-INSULATED ductwork in material to be approve by the Engineer with. Rates to allow for duct support hanger jointings and all other necessary accessories(provisional) 3.04 STRAIGHT LENGTHS a) 200x200mm straight lengths 36 LM 3.05 BENDS a) 200x200mm 90 0 bend 12 No x200 mm Ceiling mounted extract grille as egg crate or equal and approved 7 No. Total C/F to Summary Page

445 G2/ 7 NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORIES SERVICES PROPOSED LABORATORY FOR NPHLS IN MTRH, ELDORET BILLS OF QUANTITIES FOR AIR CONDITIONING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION BILL NO. 4: GENERAL ITEMS ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT KSH CTS. GENERAL ITEMS Allow for liaising and obtaining necessary licenses/permission and/or certificates from local authorities to complete works Acquire and submit a Bank Guarantee for 10% of the sub-contract sum, as a Performance Guarantee. Item Item 4.03 Acquire and submit Insurance for the sub-contract work. Item Allow for presentation of all the required samples as per specifications, Bills of Quantities and Drawings. Prepare and submit Working Drawings comprising the following to the satisfaction of the Engineer both in hard and soft copy. All drawings to be in Autocad 2000 format or an approved higher version: - Item i) Fully dimensioned drawings of all plants and apparatus. ii) General arrangement drawings of equipment, plant etc. iii) Routes types and sizes and arrangement of all pipework. iv) Wiring and piping diagrams of plant and apparatus. v) Schematic diagram of individual plants and switch and control boards. vi) All the required operating instructions for all panels, boards, control panels etc. (Note: Full set of drawings to be presented as per drawing list). Item Total C/F to Page 8

446 G2/ 8 NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORIES SERVICES PROPOSED LABORATORY FOR NPHLS IN MTRH, ELDORET BILLS OF QUANTITIES FOR AIR CONDITIONING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION BILL NO. 4: GENERAL ITEMS ITEM NO DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT KSH. CTS. Total B/F from Page 7 As item no. 4.05, but for Record (As-Installed) Drawings comprising: i) Fully dimensioned drawings of all plants and apparatus. ii) General arrangement drawings of equipment, plant etc. iii) Routes types and sizes and arrangement of all pipework. iv) Wiring and piping diagrams of plant and apparatus. v) Schematic diagram of individual plants and switch and control boards. vi) All the required operating instructions for all panels, boards, control panels etc Prepare and submit Maintenance Manuals for all items installed. Provide a year s (12 months ) initial maintenance upon expiry of the Defects Liability Period. The maintenance to be carried out every quarter (3 months) for a period of 12 months. Item Quarte r 4.09 All other items of general preliminary to cover, but not limited to:- i. Attendance on all other sub-contractors, such as for Electrical Installations Plumbing & drainage Installations and Generator Installations etc. ii. Hiring and keeping a Supervisor/Foreman on site iii. Constant supervision of the works. iv. Provision of all the required spares. v. Testing and Inspection of materials/works. vi. Provision of labour camps. vii. Storage of materials. viii. Initial maintenance (During Defects Liability) ix. Providing water/electricity for the works. x. Protection of the works/materials xi. Clearing away on completion. xii. Preparing Final Account. xiii. Providing all Test Certificates, etc. Item Total C/F to Summary Page

447 G2/ 9 NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORIES SERVICES PROPOSED LABORATORY FOR NPHLS IN MTRH, ELDORET SUMMARY PAGE FOR AIR-CONDITIONING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION INSTALLATIONS ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION AMOUNT KSHS. CTS 1 Bill No. 1, Split Air Conditioning Installation B/F from G2/4 2 Bill No. 2, Multi - Split Type Air Conditioning B/F from G2/5 3 Bill No. 3, Mechanical Ventilation B/F from G2/6 4 Bill No. 4, General items B/F from G2/8 5 Sub - Total 6 Allow for 10% of Sub Total (Item 5 0.1) as Contigency Total for Air-conditioning & Mechanical Ventilation C/F to Main Mechanical Installations Summary Page Total Amount in words Tenderer s Name and Stamp (as in form of tender) Signature Date

448 H1 NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORIES SERVICES PROPOSED LABORATORY FOR NPHLS IN MTRH BILLS OF QUANTITIES FOR PLUMBING & DRAINAGE INSTALLATIONS MAIN MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS SUMMARY PAGE ITEM No. DESCRIPTION AMOUNT (KShs Cts) 1 TOTAL FOR PLUMBING, DRAINAGE AND FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATIONS 2 TOTAL FOR AIR-CONDITIONING INSTALLATIONS TOTAL FOR MECHANICAL WORKS (VOLIII) C/F TO MAIN WORKS SUMMARY PAGE

449 MAIN SUMMARY

450 PROPOSED LABORATORY AT MOI TEACHING AND REFERRAL HOSPITAL MAIN SUMMARY KSHS. AMOUNT CTS 1 VOL I MAIN WORKS 2 VOL II ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 3 VOL III MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS 4 TOTALS IN KSHS. CARRIED TO FORM OF TENDER (VAT INC.) AMOUNTS IN WORDS : Signed : (Signature of Employer) Signed : (Signature of Contractor) Address: Address: Date : Date : MAIN SUMMARY M/S

451 REPUBLIC OF KENYA MINISTRY OF HEALTH (NATIONAL PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORY SERVICES) TECHNICAL QUALIFICATION OF CONTRACTORS CONSTRUCTION OF BIOSAFETY LEVEL II LABORATORY (BSL II) (PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORY) AT MOI TEACHING REFERRAL HOSPITAL (MTRH) ELDORET REF: MOH/RFP/WB/EAPHLNP/002/01/

452 ARCHITECT: SK ARCHPLANS LTD P.O. Box: Nairobi. STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: ARMITECH CONSULTANTS P.O Box Nairobi PROJECT MANAGER AND QUANTITY SURVEYOR AEGIS DEVELOPMENT SOLUTIONS LIMITED Blue Violet Plaza, Suite 603 P.O. Box Nairobi ELECTRICAL/ MECHANICAL ENGINEER FERADON ASSOCIATES P.O.BOX Nairobi. APPLICATION FORMS FOR PREQUALIFICATION OF CONTRACTORS 1. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Dear Applicant, Thank you for showing interest to offer construction services by procuring this application form for Pre-qualification as a Contractor. Before filling form you are advised to read carefully the General Conditions and Procedures for prequalification of Contractors, which are issued with this form. A duly filled application shall be returned together with the tender the format given. 2. LOCATION The works are expected to commence in the next two weeks. The building is located in Moi Teaching and Referral Hospital (MTRH), Eldoret County 3. DESCRIPTION OF WORKS The scope of the works will consist of but not limited to the following:- MAIN BUILDING a) Excavations b) Foundation works in reinforced concrete and stone walling c) Concrete frame in reinforced concrete class 25 to beams columns and roof slab. d) Walling in machine cut stones plastered and painted to approval. Partitions internally includes masonry as described, glass partition in aluminium framing e) Roof structure in light gauge steel trusses covered with IT5 Roofing sheets f) Windows in aluminium sliding and fixed with glazing. 44

453 g) Doors to be in aluminum and flush doors. h) Finishes internally to be in approved ceramic and granito tiles to floor and walls in wet area, terrazzo finish in labs and common areas, walls to be plastered and painted. Ceiling to be in lat acoustic tiles, gypsum and pvc panels. i) Joinery to be in MDF to details and approval. EXTERNAL WORKS To involve; a) Storm drainage in inverted block drains with side slabs, kerbs and channels. b) Foul drainage system including a septic tank and soak pit 4. TENDER DOCUMENTS 4.1 Tender Documents consist of: I. VOLUME I: SECTION A- INVITATION TO TENDER, DESCRIPTION OF WORKS, INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS, TENDER FORMS, AND CONTRACT AGREEMENT SECTION B-CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BILLS OF QUANTITIES FOR CIVIL WORKS 4.2 Issue of Tender Documents a) Tenderers will be issued with one copy each of Volume 1 and Volume 2 b) Tender documents will be available online. c) The tenderer should check at delivery that all the Documents provided for Tendering are complete and in accordance with the list of Contract Documents listed in Clause 4.1 above. 5. INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS 5.1 All information contained in the Tender Documents is to be treated as confidential by all recipients, whether they submit a Tender or not 5.2 Tenderers must constitute an offer for the whole of the works. Tenders submitted for separate only or Tenders that are incomplete will not be considered. 5.3 No alterations or additions shall be made to the tender Documents, and all Documents shall remain intact. If any alteration or addition is made, except by official amendment, the tender may be rejected 5.4 Tender which includes reservations of any description and which is not in accordance with 45

454 the tender documents shall be disqualified. 5.7 No expenses or losses incurred by a Tenderer in the preparation of his Tender or in visiting the Site in connection therewith shall be reimbursed. 5.8 In case the Tenderer is in doubt regarding the precise meaning of any part of the Conditions of contract, Specifications, Bills of Quantities or the Drawings related thereto for any reason whatsoever, he should inform the Engineer to enable the Engineer to make clear or correct any source of misunderstanding prior to the time of Tender. Should any misunderstanding arise afterwards, the decision of the Engineer as to the true intent and meaning of any clause, dimension or work shall be conclusive and binding on the Tenderer. 5.9 No subsequent claim in respect of alleged errors or omissions or insufficiency of descriptions or for any other reason will be admitted or recognized All Tenderer shall remain valid for 90 days from the final date for submission of Tenders and no Tenderer can withdraw his Tender within that period, without forfeiture of the of the above tender security The Employer is not bound to accept the lowest or any Tender. 6. COMPLETION OF TENDER DOCUMENTS 6.1 The Tenderer must complete in INK all blank spaces in the Form of Tender and the Appendix thereto, the form of Tender bond, the Performance Surety Undertaking, the Form of Contractor s references, the Schedule of Staff, Labour and Plant and the (Form of performance Guarantee and Contract Agreement not to be filled in). 6.2 The Bill of Quantities shall be fully priced and totaled in INK to show the amount of the Tender and Summary therewith shall be signed. 6.3 The Tenderer must submit the following information with the Tender: (a) Name and address of the proposed surety for the Performance Bond 10% of the Total Tender Sum (b) Detail of any works proposed to undertaken by Sub-contractors, and the names and relevant experience of proposed Sub-contractors. 7. SUBMISSION OF TENDERS 7.1 Tenders and all Documents in connection therewith shall be deposited as advised in the letter of invitation. 7.2 The Forms for Tender (Volume I Qualification Information) duly completed shall be delivered in plain sealed envelope or package clearly marked with: CONSTRUCTION OF BIOSAFETY LEVEL II LABORATORY (BSL II) (PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORY) AT MOI TEACHING REFERRAL HOSPITAL (MTRH) ELDORET REF: MOH/RFP/WB/EAPHLNP/002/01/

455 TECHNICAL PROPOSAL. DO NOT OPEN WITH THE FINANCIAL PROPOSAL. The envelope or package shall bear no indication of the identification of the tender. Volume 2 of the Tender Documents comprising Building, Civil Works, Electrical Works and Mechanical works Bills of Quantities and form of tender shall be returned in a separate envelope or package at time of tendering, and marked with: CONSTRUCTION OF BIOSAFETY LEVEL II LABORATORY (BSL II) (PUBLIC HEALTH LABORATORY) AT MOI TEACHING REFERRAL HOSPITAL (MTRH) ELDORET REF: MOH/RFP/WB/EAPHLNP/002/01/ FINANCIAL PROPOSAL. 7.3 Submission of Bids All bids must be received on or before Wednesday, 8 th November, 2017 at 10:00 a.m East African Time. The bids addressed to National Public Health Laboratory Services, Hospital Road, P.O. Box , Nairobi, Kenya should be placed in the Tender box located in the Ground Floor, NPHLS Building, Hospital Road, Nairobi, so as to be received on or before Wednesday, 8 th November, 2017 at 10:00 a.m East African Time. LATE SUBMISSIONS WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED. 7.4 Any Tender, which is not completed or delivered in accordance with the Instructions to Tenderers, may not be considered. 7.5 Tenders shall be delivered to the address indicated in the letter of Invitation not later than the time specified on the same letter to Tenderers. Any Tender Delivered after stipulated time from whatever cause arising will not be considered. 7.6 The opening of the Tenders received in respect of this contract will take place at a time and place as specified in the covering letter. Tenderers or their representatives are invited to attend the opening of the Tenders. 1.1 The complete set of tender documents comprises the documents listed below and any addenda (a) These Instructions to Tenderers (b) Form of Tender and Qualification Information (c) Conditions of Contract (d) Appendix to Conditions of Contract (e) Specifications (f) Drawings (g) Bills of Quantities (h) Forms of Securities 1.2 The tenderer shall examine all Instructions, Forms to be filled and Specifications in the tender documents. Failure to furnish all information required by the tender documents, or submission of a tender not substantially responsive to the tendering documents in every respect will be at the tenderer s risk and may result in rejection of his tender. 1.3 A prospective tenderer making an inquiry relating to the tender documents may notify the Employer in writing or by cable, telex or facsimile at the address indicated in the letter of invitation to tender. The Employer will only respond to requests for clarification received earlier than seven days prior to the deadline for submission of tenders. Copies of the Employer s response will be forwarded to all persons issued 47

456 with tendering documents, including a description of the inquiry, but without identifying its source. 1.4 Before the deadline for submission of tenders, the Employer may modify the tendering documents by issuing addenda. Any addendum thus issued shall be part of the tendering documents and shall be communicated in writing or by cable, telex or facsimile to all tenderers. Prospective tenderers shall acknowledge receipt of each addendum in writing to the Employer. To give prospective tenderers reasonable time in which to take an addendum into account in preparing their tenders, the Employer shall extend, as necessary, the deadline for submission of tenders 1.5 All documents relating to the tender and any correspondence shall be in English language. 1.6 The tender submitted by the tenderer shall comprise Volume 1: Technical proposal ( qualification proposal) and Volume II Financial Proposal ( Bills of quantities) as follows: (a) Qualification Information Form and Documents ;( Vol. I) (b) Tender Security; ( Part of Volume I) (c) (d) Instructions to Tenderers, Form of Tender, Conditions of Contract, Appendix to Conditions of Contract and Specifications; ( Part of Vol. II) Priced Bill of Quantities ; ( part of Vol.II) 1.7 Tenders shall remain valid for a period Ninety (90) days from the date of submission. However in exceptional circumstances, the Employer may request that the tenderers extend the period of validity for a specified additional period. The request and the tenderers responses shall be made in writing. A tenderer may refuse the request without forfeiting the Tender Security. A tenderer agreeing to the request will not be required or permitted to otherwise modify the tender, but will be required to extend the validity of Tender Security for the period of the extension. 1.8 The tenderer shall furnish, as part of the tender, a Tender Security in the amount and form specified in the appendix to invitation to tenderers. This shall be in the amount of Kshs. 150,000/=. 1.9 The format of the Tender Security should be in accordance with the form of Tender Security included in Section G - Standard forms or any other form acceptable to the Employer. Tender Security shall be valid for 30 days beyond the validity of the tender Any tender not accompanied by an acceptable Tender Security shall be rejected. The Tender Security of a joint venture must define as Tenderer all joint venture partners and list them in the following manner: a joint venture consisting of,,and. 48

457 1.11 The Tender Securities of unsuccessful tenderers will be returned within 28 days of the end of the tender validity period specified The Tender Security of the successful tenderer will be discharged when the tenderer has signed the Contract Agreement and furnished the required Performance Security The Tender Security may be forfeited (a) (b) (c) if the tenderer withdraws the tender after tender opening during the period of tender validity; if the tenderer does not accept the correction of the tender price; in the case of a successful tenderer, if the tenderer fails within the specified time limit to (i) (ii) sign the Agreement, or Furnish the required Performance Security Tenderers shall submit offers that comply with the requirements of the tendering documents, including the basic technical design as indicated in the Drawings and Specifications. Alternatives will not be considered, unless specifically allowed in the invitation to tender. If so allowed, tenderers wishing to offer technical alternatives to the requirements of the tendering documents must also submit a tender that complies with the requirements of the tendering documents, including the basic technical design as indicated in the Drawings and Specifications. In addition to submitting the basic tender, the tenderer shall provide all information necessary for a complete evaluation of the alternative, including design calculations, technical specifications, breakdown of prices, proposed construction methods and other relevant details. Only the technical alternatives, if any, of the lowest evaluated tender conforming to the basic technical requirements shall be considered The tenderer shall prepare one original of the documents comprising the tender documents as described of these Instructions to Tenderers, bound with the volume containing the Form of Tender, and clearly marked ORIGINAL. In addition, the tenderer shall submit copies of the tender, in the number specified in the invitation to tender, and clearly marked as COPIES. In the event of discrepancy between them, the original shall prevail The original and all copies of the tender shall be typed or written in indelible ink and shall be signed by a person or persons duly authorized to sign on behalf of the tenderer. All pages of the tender where alterations or additions have been made shall be initialed by the person or persons signing the tender Clarification of tenders shall be requested by the tenderer to be received by the procuring entity not later than 7 days prior to the deadline for submission of tenders 1.18 The procuring entity shall reply to any clarifications sought by the tenderer within 3 days of receiving the request to enable the tenderer to make timely submission of its tender. 2. Submission of Tenders 49

458 2.1 The technical (qualification information) and Volume II (Financial bid) shall be submitted in different independent envelopes. 2.2 The tenderer shall seal the original and all copies of the tender in two inner envelopes and one outer envelope, duly marking the inner envelopes as ORIGINAL and COPIES as appropriate. The inner and outer envelopes shall: (a) be addressed to the Employer at the address provided in the invitation to tender; (b) (c) (d) bear the name and identification number of the Contract as defined in the invitation to tender; and indicate whether its technical or financial bid provide a warning not to open before the specified time and date for tender opening. 2.3 Tenders shall be delivered to the Employer at the address specified above not later than the time and date specified in the invitation to tender. However, the Employer may extend the deadline for submission of tenders by issuing an amendment, in which case all rights and obligations of the Employer and the tenderers previously subject to the original deadline will then be subject to the new deadline. 2.4 Any tender received after the deadline prescribed will be returned to the tenderer unopened. 2.5 Tenderers may modify or withdraw their tenders by giving notice in writing before the deadline prescribed. Each tenderer s modification or withdrawal notice shall be prepared, sealed, marked, and delivered, with the outer and inner envelopes additionally marked MODIFICATION and WITHDRAWAL, as appropriate. No tender may be modified after the deadline for submission of tenders. 2.6 Withdrawal of a tender between the deadline for submission of tenders and the expiration of the period of tender validity specified in the invitation to tender shall result in the forfeiture of the Tender Security. 3. Tender Opening and Evaluation 3.1 The Technical Proposal (Prequalification Tenders) tenders will be opened by the Employer, in the presence of the tenderers representatives who choose to attend at the time and in the place specified in the invitation to tender. Envelopes marked WITHDRAWAL shall be opened and read out first. Tenderers and Employer s representatives who are present during the opening shall sign a register evidencing their attendance. After completion of Technical evaluation the Financial Proposals shall be opened at a date to be advised. 3.2 The tenderers names, tender modifications and withdrawals, the presence or absence of Tender Security, and such other details as may be considered appropriate, will be announced by the Employer at the opening. Minutes of the tender opening, including the information disclosed to those present will be prepared by the Employer. Information relating to the examination, clarification, evaluation, and comparison of tenders and recommendations for the award of Contract shall not be disclosed to tenderers or any other persons not officially concerned with such process until the award to the successful tenderer has been announced. Any effort by a tenderer to influence the Employer s officials, 50

459 processing of tenders or award decisions may result in the rejection of his tender. 1.1 Tenders will be evaluated as the qualification criteria given in a separate document. A minimum score of at least 80% of the technical specification given will be termed to be substantially responsive. To assist in the examination, evaluation, and comparison of tenders, the Employer at his discretion, may ask any tenderer for clarification of the tender, including breakdowns of unit rates. The request for clarification and the response shall be in writing or by cable, telex or facsimile but no change in the price or substance of the tender shall be sought, offered, or permitted except as required to confirm the correction of arithmetic errors discovered in the evaluation of the tenders 3.3 If a tender is not substantially responsive, it will be rejected, and may not subsequently be made responsive by correction or withdrawal of the nonconforming deviation or reservation. 3.4 Tenders determined to be substantially responsive will be checked for any arithmetic errors. Errors will be corrected as follows: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) where there is a discrepancy between the amount in figures and the amount in words, the amount in words will prevail; and Where there is a discrepancy between the unit rate and the line item total resulting from multiplying the unit rate by the quantity, the unit rate as quoted will prevail, unless in the opinion of the Employer, there is an obvious typographical error, in which case the adjustment will be made to the entry containing that error. In the event of a discrepancy between the tender amount as stated in the Form of Tender and the corrected tender figure in the main summary of the Bill of Quantities, the amount as stated in the Form of Tender shall prevail. The Error Correction Factor shall be computed by expressing the difference between the tender amount and the corrected tender sum as a percentage of the corrected Builder s Work (i.e. Corrected tender sum less P.C. and Provisional Sums) The Error Correction Factor shall be applied to all measured Work (as a rebate or addition as the case may be) for the purposes of valuations for Interim Certificates and valuation of variations. the amount stated in the tender will be adjusted in accordance with the above procedure for the correction of errors and, with Concurrence of the tenderer shall be considered as binding upon the tenderer. If the tenderer does not accept the corrected amount, the tender may be rejected and the Tender Security may be. 3.5 The Employer will evaluate and compare only the tenders determined to be substantially responsive. 3.6 In evaluating the tenders, the Employer will determine for each tender the evaluated tender price by adjusting the tender price as follows: 51

460 (a) making any correction for errors ; (b) (c) (d) Excluding provisional sums and the provision, if any, for contingencies in the Bill of Quantities, but including Day works where priced competitively. making an appropriate adjustment for any other acceptable variations, deviations, or alternative offers submitted ; and making appropriate adjustments to reflect discounts or other price modifications offered 3.7 The Employer reserves the right to accept or reject any variation, deviation, or alternative offer. Variations, deviations, and alternative offers and other factors which are in excess of the requirements of the tender documents or otherwise result in unsolicited benefits for the Employer will not be taken into account in tender evaluation. 3.8 The tenderer shall not influence the Employer on any matter relating to his tender from the time of the tender opening to the time the Contract is awarded. Any effort by the Tenderer to influence the Employer or his employees in his decision on tender evaluation, tender comparison or Contract award may result in the rejection of the tender. 4. Award of Contract 4.1 The award of the Contract will be made to the tenderer whose tender has been determined to be substantially responsive to the tendering documents and who has offered the lowest evaluated tender price, provided that such tenderer has been determined to be (a) eligible in accordance with the tender 4.2 The Employer reserves the right to accept or reject any tender, and to cancel the tendering process and reject all tenders, at any time prior to the award of Contract, without thereby incurring any liability to the affected tenderer or tenderers or any obligation to inform the affected tenderer or tenderers of the grounds for the action. 4.3 The tenderer whose tender has been accepted will be notified of the award prior to expiration of the tender validity period in writing or by cable, telex or facsimile. This notification (hereinafter and in all Contract documents called the Letter of Acceptance ) will state the sum (hereinafter and in all Contract documents called the Contract Price ) that the Employer will pay the Contractor in consideration of the execution, completion, and maintenance of the Works by the Contractor as prescribed by the Contract. At the same time the other tenderers shall be informed that their tenders have not been successful. The contract shall be formed on the parties signing the contract. 4.4 The Agreement will incorporate all agreements between the Employer and the successful tenderer. Within 14 days of receipt the successful tenderer will sign the Agreement and return it to the Employer. 4.5 Within 21 days after receipt of the Letter of Acceptance, the successful tenderer shall deliver to the Employer a Performance Security in the amount stipulated in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract and in the form stipulated in the Tender documents. The Performance Security shall be in the amount and specified form 52

461 4.6 Failure of the successful tenderer to comply with the requirements of clause 6.5 shall constitute sufficient grounds for cancellation of the award and forfeiture of the Tender Security. 4.7 Upon the furnishing by the successful tenderer of the Performance Security, the Employer will promptly notify the other tenderers that their tenders have been unsuccessful. 4.8 The tender evaluation committee shall evaluate the tender within 30 days of the validity period from the date of opening the tender. 4.9 The parties to the contract shall have it signed within 30 days from the date of notification of contract award unless there is an administrative review request Contract price variations shall not be allowed for contracts not exceeding one year (12 months) 4.11 Where contract price variation is allowed, the valuation shall not exceed 15% of the original contract price Price variation request shall be processed by the procuring entity within 30 days of receiving the request The procuring entity may at any time terminate procurement proceedings before contract award and shall not be liable to any person for the termination The procuring entity shall give prompt notice of the termination to the tenderers and on request give its reasons for termination within 14 days of receiving the request from any tenderer A tenderer who gives false information in the tender document about its qualification or who refuses to enter into a contract after notification of contract award shall be considered for debarment from participating in future public procurement. 5. Corrupt and Fraudulent practices 7.1 The procuring entity requires that tenderers observe the highest standards of ethics during procurement process and execution of contracts. A tenderer shall sign a declaration that he has not and will not be involved in corrupt and fraudulent practices. 53

462 TECHNICAL EVALUATION CRITERIA STAGE 1: MANDATORY LIST OF ATTACHMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED* 1. - Company Memorandum & Articles of Association 2. - Certificate of Incorporation 3. - Certificate copies of Share Certificates 4. - Current Business License 5. - CV s of Directors/Partners 6. - CV s of Key Personnel & their Certificates of Professional qualification 7. - Cards/Proof of ownership of equipment 8. - Report of Audited Accounts 9. - Bank Statements for the last one year Proof of Securities Proof of Asset Ownership Duly Signed Anti-Corruption Pledge Current Tax Compliance certificate from KRA Current Registration by National Construction Authority in category 1 or equal and approved Bid Guarantee in the prescribed format NCA Registration Certificate * Tick against those attachments you have submitted. Additional attachments may be listed separately on the covering letter. 54

463 A. DISCLOSURE OF ANY LITIGATION ISSUES IF IT EXISTS OR NOT 1. Statement of litigation history * Tick against those attachments you have submitted. Additional attachments may be listed separately on the covering letter. STAGE 2: ELIGIBILITY FOR QUALIFICATION AS CONTRACTOR (DETAILED TECHNICAL EVALUATION CRITERIA) 1.0 Qualifications Qualifications necessary for qualification are: - (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) At least NCA 3 Certification A contractor MUST have the minimum technical qualifications and skills prescribed. At least one of share holders or Partners must have the technical qualifications and skills set. Necessary experience as prescribed in the field of application of which, having satisfactorily completed a project of similar nature and magnitude within the last three years is a MUST Ref. (Section V). The applicant s professional and general conduct to be such that, in the opinion of the evaluation committee, he/she is a person fit and proper to be pre-qualified. The applicant must have necessary Plant and Equipment for execution of the intended works. The applicant must show proof of ownership such as vehicle logbooks, receipt etc. The Applicant MUST attach all documents indicated in section VII A minimum score of at least 80% of the technical specifications given 1.1 Exception The Committee may refuse to prequalify a person as a contractor if its opinion: - (a) Is a person whose employment shall result into conflict of interest with his employer. 1.2 Distinction of Local and Foreign Contractors There shall be no distinction of categories of contractors, namely Local and Foreign. Scores for Detailed Technical Evaluation 55 Mark Out Of

464 Part 1: General Instructions (10 Marks) Part 2: Financial Position. (20 )Marks) Part 3: Key Qualification..... (30 Marks) Part 4: Firms Experience. (30) Part 5. Plant and Equipment.. (10 Marks) Part 5: Litigation History... (10Marks) Part 6: Appendices.. (10 Marks) Total 100 Passmark: 80/100 Bidders who attain the passmark of 80 and above will proceed to the next stage of financial evaluation. The financial bids of Bidders who shall have attained the above passmark of 80 and above will be invited for public opening of the financial bids. 56

465 SECTION I: COMPANY PROFILE 1. Company s Name in full 2. Address of Head Office Telephone No. b. Fax No. c. . d. Internet Website. 4. Banker s Name(s) and Address (es) Place(s) of Business (i.e. Location of Main Branch Offices). (Write house/plot No. Block No. Street Name and Village/Town/City Name). 6. Current Class.. Registration No.... Year of Registration (Attach copy of Registration Certificate). 7. No. of Certificate of Incorporation of Business Names... (Copy of Certificate required) 8. (a) Registered Capital:.. (b) Paid up Capital. (Applicable to Companies, which are limited by, shares as shown in their memorandum and Articles of Association). 9. Names, qualifications/experience and nationality of directors or partners. Put a star (*) against the technically qualified directors/partners. S/No. Name Qualification Nationality % Shares (Attach certified copies of share certificates) 10. Current Business License (attach copy) Number: Date Issued:... Place Issued: CONFIDENTIAL BUSINESS QUESTIONNAIRE You are requested to give the particulars indicated in Part 1; either Part 2(a), 2(b), (c) and (d) 57

466 whichever applies to your type of business; You are advised that it is a serious offence to give false information on this form Part 1 General Business Name: Location of Business Premises; County/Town Plot No.Street /Road Postal Address: Tel No Fax: .. Nature of Business:.. Current Trade License No...Expiry Date Maximum Value of business which you can handle at any time Kshs Name of your bankers... Branch Part 2 (a) Sole Proprietor Full Name:...Age. Nationality..Country of Origin *Citizenship details.. Part 2 (b) Partnership Give details of partners as follows: Name in full Nationality Citizenship details Shares Part 2 (c) Registered Company Private or Public:. State the nominal and issued capital of the company: Nominal Kshs.. Issued Kshs... Give details of directors as 58

467 follows: Name in full Nationality Citizenship details* Shares Part 2 (d) Interest in the firm Is there any person / persons in (Name of employer) who has interest in this firm? Yes/No. (Delete as necessary). I certify that the information given above is correct.... (Title) (Signature) (Date) SECTION II: FINANCIAL STATUS OF THE FIRM Financial Data for Previous 3 Years [KSH. Equivalent] Year 1: Year 2: Year 3: Information from Balance Sheet Total Assets Total Liabilities Net Worth Current Assets Current Liabilities Information from Income Statement 59

468 Total Revenues Profits Before Taxes Profits After Taxes Attached are copies of financial statements (balance sheets including all related notes, and income statements) for the last three years, as indicated above, complying with the following conditions. All such documents reflect the financial situation of the firm, and not sister or parent companies. Historic financial statements must be audited by a certified accountant. Historic financial statements must be complete, including all notes to the financial statements. Historic financial statements must correspond to accounting periods already completed and audited (no statements for partial periods shall be requested or accepted). Form FIN-2: Average Annual Construction Turnover Each Bidder or member of a JV must fill in this form Annual Turnover Data for the Last 3 Years (Construction only) Amount Exchange Year Currency Rate KSH. Equivalent Average Annual Construction Turnover 60

469 The information supplied should be the Annual Turnover of the Bidder or each member of a JV in terms of the amounts billed to clients for each year for work in progress or completed. The Bidder MUST have a minimum turnover of Kshs 500,000, (Shillings Five Hundred Million) per annum for the last three years. Form FIN-3: Financial Resources Specify proposed sources of financing, such as liquid assets, unencumbered real assets, lines of credit, and other financial means, net of current commitments, available to meet the total construction cash flow demands of the subject contract or contracts as indicated. No. Source of financing Amount (KSH.. equivalent) Form FIN-4: Current Contract Commitments / Works in Progress Bidders and ach partner to a JVA should provide information on their current commitments on all contracts that have been awarded, or for which a letter of intent or an acceptance has been received, or for contracts approaching completion, but for which an unqualified, full completion certificate has yet to be issued. Name contract of Employer, contract address/tel/fax Value of outstanding work (current Kshs. equivalent) Estimated completion date Average monthly invoicing over last six months Kshs. month)

470 Etc. SECTION III: OFFICE AND SERVICE FACILITIES Established Size (m 2 ) No. of Rooms Staff Installed Facilities Position No. Type No. A. Office 22

471 B. Service Workshop C. Yard D. Testing Equipment PART 2: KEY QUALIFICATION Personnel The Bidder must demonstrate that it has the personnel for the key positions that meet the following requirements: No. Position Total Work Similar Experience (years) In Similar Works Experience (years) 1 Construction Manager Site Agent/Manager

472 3 Site Engineer Construction Supervisor Quantity Surveying assistant Foreman 8 4 The Bidder shall provide details of the proposed personnel and their local experience records. Particulars of Permanent Personnel (Including Directors/Partners, Technical and Administrative Staff). Name of personnel Academic Qualification* Status and Position in Company* Total Work Experience No. Years With the Company of Basic Terms of Employment (Permanent or Contract) 24

473 . Signature and Official Stamp Date * Attach Certificate or Testimonials and CVs ** Directors/Partners should be shown clearly The Bidder must demonstrate that it has the key equipment listed hereafter: No. Equipment Type and Characteristics Minimum required Number 1 Truck exceeding 7 Tons 2 2 Pick Up Trucks 4 Tons 1 3 Concrete Mixers 14/7 / Batching Plant 1 25

474 4 Generator (Minimum 100KVA) 1 5 Welding Set 1 6 Scaffolding Assorted 7 Steel Forms 1000 sm 8 Hoists 1 9 Tower Crane 2 ton Ton Roller 1 11 Pneumatic compressor with breakers 3 12 Excavator 1 13 Bulldozer 1 The Bidder shall provide further details of proposed items of equipment. SECTION IV: EQUIPMENT OWNED Particulars of Construction Equipment Owned by Company 26

475 Name Equipment of Type/Make/Mo del Date of Manufactur e Qualification No/Serial No/Other Identification mark Owned/Leas ed Remar ks. Signature and Official Stamp Date * Attach copies of license and/or any other documents as proof of ownership. If leased indicate source and submit certified lease agreement. 27

476 SECTION V: FIRMS EXPERIENCE Particulars of Contracts of similar nature in hand or executed by the firm for the last three years with particular reference to Kenya including works carried out as sub-contractor. Please give names of Main Contractors for works carried out as sub-contractor. (Evidence required for each project e.g. copies of first pages of contract agreements up to page containing signatures and seals and appendices to the contract (Jobs without copies of Contract agreement should not be included in this list): Project Type Location & Main Sub- Contractor or Client and his address Consultant and his address Original contract sum (KSH. M) Final contract Sum (KSH. M) Month Year started & Month year completed & Extension of time (if any) Remarks/ Explanation. Signature and Official Stamp Date * Attach Certificate of Completion ** (e.g. why project delayed or not completed) *** You may use similar table if space provided here is not sufficient.

477 SECTION VI: REFERENCES Names and qualifications of at least two Referees. Referees must be registered Engineers, Architects or Quantity Surveyors. The Referee must be a person who knows and can comment on the performance of the firm. (NB; A fellow contractor cannot be a referee, even if he is registered.). Name: Qualification No. ** Postal Address *Copies of attendance certificate(s) required ** Professionals Qualification number must be given I/We the undersigned hereby declare as follows (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) My/Our signing of this application form implies acceptance of responsibility for the veracity and accuracy of all submitted therein or therewith. The information given will be used by the evaluation Committee for the purpose of evaluating this application for Qualification. Such Qualification will be approved at the sole discretion of the Committee Any employer, consultant or banker, past or present, is hereby authorized and requested to provide information on the competence and general reputation of this firm if so requested by the committee. The committee is welcome to visit and physically inspect my/our establishment and works (contracts) executed, when it deems fit to do so, in order to verify the authenticity of the information given herein, or by our Referees, or obtained from any other source regarding our firm. Failure to complete any part of this application from may result in not being registered. My/Our firm shall not be engaged in any act of corruption in whatever forms. Dated this day of...20 (i) Signed by.. (Name in Block letters) in the capacity of. (Status in Firm). Signature (ii) Signed by.. (Name in Block letters) in the capacity of. (Status in Firm). Signature 29

478 ANTI-CORRUPTION PLEDGE (To be signed by all applicants for Qualification) M/S (Name of Applicant) Recognize that corruption has a devastating impact on the social economic development. We share in the growing global consensus that action is needed to strengthen transparency and accountability. I/We. therefore pledge to support the efforts of the Government and to participate, along with the Contractor Qualification Committee with other members of the business community and financing institutions, in forming a coalition against corruption. I/We. welcome the action taken by the Government to strengthen transparency and accountability. In this context we will: - a) Not offer or give any bribes or any other form of inducement to any public official in connection with a pending bid or at any stage of an application. b) Not permit anyone (whether our employee or an independent commission agent) to do so on our behalf. c) Make full disclosure in our bids (or applications) of the beneficiaries of payments relating to the bids (or applications) to any person other than our employees but including bonus payments which may be made to employees (such disclosures being made under terms of commercial confidentiality if the Qualification Committee so requires. d) Formally undertake to issue instructions to all employees and agents or other representatives in Kenya directing them at all times to comply with the laws of Kenya and in particular not to offer or to pay bribes or other forms of inducement to officials, whether directly or indirectly. be signed by Chief Executive Officer of the firm) (To Date Form LIT: Pending Litigation Each Bidder or member of a JV must fill in this form Pending Litigation 3

479 No pending litigation Pending litigation Year Matter in Dispute Value of Pending Claim in KSH. Equivalent Value of Pending Claim as a Percentage of Net Worth 40

480 FORM OF TENDER SECURITY WHEREAS.. (Hereinafter called the Tenderer ) has submitted his dated for the construction of tender (Name of Contract). KNOW ALL PEOPLE by these presents that WE having our registered office at (hereinafter called the Bank ), are bound unto (hereinafter called the Employer ) in the sum of 2% of Tender Sum, Kshs for which payment well and truly to be made to the said Employer, the Bank binds itself, its successors and assigns by these presents sealed with the Common Seal of the said Bank this. Day of 20.. THE CONDITIONS of this obligation are: If after tender opening the tenderer withdraws his tender during the period of tender validity specified in the instructions to tenderers Or If the tenderer, having been notified of the acceptance of his tender by the Employer during the period of tender validity: (a) fails or refuses to execute the form of Agreement in accordance with the Instructions to Tenderers, if required; or (b) fails or refuses to furnish the Performance Security, in accordance with the Instructions to Tenderers; We undertake to pay to the Employer up to the above amount upon receipt of his first written demand, without the Employer having to substantiate his demand, provided that in his demand the Employer will note that the amount claimed by him is due to him, owing to the occurrence of one or both of the two conditions, specifying the occurred condition or conditions. This guarantee will remain in force up to and including thirty (30) days after the period of tender validity, and any demand in respect thereof should reach the Bank not later than the said date. [Date [ [signature of the Bank] [Witness] [Seal] 40

481 DRAWINGS

482 NOTES 1 All dimensions to be checked on site before commencement of any works and any discrepancies to be reported to the Architect. 2 Figured dimensions to be taken in preference to scaled ones. 3 D.P.C to be provided under all walls on foundations. 4 P.V. to be provided above all openings except on toilet doors. All plumbing and drainage works to meet local authority requirements 5 LOO4 LOO4 I H 1 G ,341 G 6 Traps to basins to be deep anti-vac,type 7 All iron mongeries to Architects approval. 8 All walls less than 200mm thick to be reinforced with 16 gauge 25mm wide hoop iron at every alternating courses. 9 All drainage pipes passing under the building and drive ways to be encased in 150mm concrete surrounding. 10 Vent pipes to be covered with wire gauze at the head 11 All paints and colours to Architect's approval. 12 All samples of materials to Architects approval before fixing. 13 Cold water storage tanks to be covered with mosquito proof wire gauze. 14 All inspection chambers or manhole along driveways or common area to have heavy duty air-tight covers. K w 01 w 01 w 01 w 01 w 01 w 01 w 01 L w 01 F w 01 D1 w 03 w 03 w 03 D2 D3 w 03 D1 w 01 D2 w 01 D1 25,673 w 01 w 03 D1 w 01 D3 D2 PASSAGE D1 3 I 4 H w 02 E 10 Fire escape F O SHR QUALITY ASSURANCE MANAGER G , D1 whb D , LAB DIRECTOR Granito tiles PASSAGE 200 3,891 w ,373 w 01 w 01 SAMPLE ACCESSION w 02 2,705 1,497 w 01 D1 Granito tiles D3 RECORDS ROOM Granito tiles ROUTINE LAB D1 PHLEBOTOMY ROOM lab sink D3 Granito tiles w 01 w 01 D1 Client: WAITING AREA w 02 F 2, SECRETARIES C TRAINING ROOM/ BOARD ROOM PASSAGE D3 w 01 O 200 D1 w 01 counter top to detail CASHIER w 02 w whb F w w 01 PASSAGE 150 4,928 w 01 w 02 D1 lab sink PASSAGE D3 w 01 6,215 w 02 D1 LOO5 6 w 01 C w 01 EMERGENCY SHOW ER D1 5,000 staircase 20 x 150 = 3,000 N LOO6 PASSAGE E N L courtyard Granito tiles 200 Fire escape G F D LOO6 M F Landing EMERGENCY SHOW ER whb lockers K External Staff Sitting 20 x 150 = 3,000 w 03 M 1,480 Ramp D w 01 1,173 w 01 urinals G staircase LOO5 5,253 D2 D4 landscaping 3,945 D3 G landscaping E D1 w 03 21,568 w 01 E No: Date w 03 D4 whb w 01 PASSAGE D1 laundry REVISIONS D2 w 01 PASSAGE w 01 REPORTS RELEASE DESK counter top RECEPTION to detail Granito tiles w 01 w 01 Granito tiles PASSAGE w 01 w 01 DEPUTY LAB DIRECTOR B D1 Project title: D1 D1 D3 w 01 w 02 w 02 w 01 w 01 centre of arc Granito tiles D1 landscaping D1 w ,828 w 01 D4 w 01 AIRLOCK D4 lockers w 01 w 01 covered walkway GENTS Non-Slip Granito tiles LADIES Non-Slip Granito tiles w 03 D2 D2 Drawing title: whb lockers whb covered walkway MTRH LABORATORIES wc D2 D1 PATHOLOGIST OFFICE disabled D2 landscaping 200 B whb w 03 GROUND FLOOR PLAN urinals D2 Granito tiles D2 A w 01 wc ENTRANCE CANOPY Alandscaping w 02 wc wc wc landscaq ping Drawing type: Q w 03 w 03 w 03 w 03 WORKING DRAWINGS , , ,900 20,380 5,251 5, ,253 1,928 1,670 5, , ,997 37, LOO LOO2 BUILT AREA 630SQM Client signature: Scale: A.01.2 Ground Floor (6) 1:100 Checked by: Job No: S.K. Initial date AUG Current date SEP Drawn by: Sheet No:

483 NOTES 1 All dimensions to be checked on site before commencement of any works and any discrepancies to be reported to the Architect. 2 Figured dimensions to be taken in preference to scaled ones D.P.C to be provided under all walls on foundations. P.V. to be provided above all openings except on toilet doors. All plumbing and drainage works to meet local authority requirements Traps to basins to be deep anti-vac,type LOO4 H I G LOO4 7 8 All iron mongeries to Architects approval. All walls less than 200mm thick to be reinforced with 16 gauge 25mm wide hoop iron at every alternating courses G K 41, All drainage pipes passing under the building and drive ways to be encased in 150mm concrete surrounding. Vent pipes to be covered with wire gauze at the head All paints and colours to Architect's approval. All samples of materials to Architects approval before fixing. F BSC F D1 w 02 D1 PASSAGE Terrazo FF waste holding D1 3 H glass partition D1 w 02 w 02 PASSA2G5E,889 Terrazo FF 4 21,387 bay courtyard lockers E E M M 1,480 E Fire RC fire escape G RC fire escape LOO5 escape staircase 20 x 150 = 3,, No.risers -150 mm to S.E details with mild steel balustrade 10,350 I w 10 w 02 G D1 w 02 D1 PASSAGE Terrazo FF K w 02 whb w 02 D2 D4 G D2 w 03 D3 D2 F w 03 D4 D3 w 03 D2 whb 20 No. treads-300mm 20 No.risers -150 mm to S.E details with mild steel balustrade 20 x 150 = 3,,000 D D F N L N O w 02 C w 02 4, IMMUNOLOGY LAB Terrazo FF BB F PCR 1 Terrazo FF EMERGENCY LOO6 Ramp LOO6 w 09 EMERGENCY SHOWER 725 G w 08 D1 PASSAGE PASSAGE Terrazo FF Terrazo FF D1 FR whb w 02 w 02 w 02 w 02 lab sink whb D1 PASSAGE Granito tiles lab sink whb MEDIA D1 PREPARATION ROOM D1 MICROBIOLOGY LAB whb whb 5 D1 D1 whb D1 DECON AND GLASSWARE WASHING PARASTOLOGY ENTOMOLOGY Terrazo FF Terrazo FF Terrazo FF Terrazo FF FR 6 D1 SHOWER 1,511 w 03 D2 w 03 w 03 FR FR FR FREEZER FRIDGE ROOM Terrazo FF FR shelving w 03 urinals w 03 Fire escape staircase FR w 02 PASSAGE w 02 Terrazo FF L E O C Cold water storage tanks to be covered with mosquito proof wire gauze. All inspection chambers or manhole along driveways or common area to have heavy duty air-tight covers. No: Date Client: REVISIONS B w 02 D1 PCR 2 Terrazo FF 200 5, , D1 BSC BSC D1 BSC D1 provide a dark w 02 w 02 w 02 w 02 ce w ntr 0 e 2 of w 02 w 02 w 02 w 02 D1 arc , , , ,020 1,280 1, w 02 w 02 TB LAB Terrazo FF w 02 B Project title: Drawing title: MTRH LABORATORIES w 02 PCR 3 Terrazo FF whb w ,505 2,106 1,201 1,500 1,789 1,500 1,5 C 0 A 0 NOPY 1,8 T 0 O 3 BELO 1 W,500 1,500 1,251 1,570 62w702 1,000 lab sink w 02 Drawing type: FIRST FLOOR PLAN A w 02 w 02 A 1,000 1,379 1,500 2, ,500 1,953 1, Q w 02 w 02 Q WORKING DRAWINGS 6,903 5,249 5,254 5,253 5,253 1,697 6,300 35, LOO2 LOO2 Client signature: Story (6) 1:100 Scale: Initial date AUG Current date SEP Checked by: S.K. Drawn by: Job No: Sheet No:

484 750 1, ,500 1, , ,800 1,200 NAME: W-01 NAME: W-02 NAME: W-03 NAME: W-03B NAME: W-04 NAME: W-05 NAME: W-06 NAME: W-07 TYPE: Powder coated TYPE: Powder coated TYPE: Powder coated TYPE: Powder coated TYPE: Powder coated TYPE: Powder coated TYPE: Steel louvered window TYPE: Steel louvered window aluminium window aluminium window aluminium window aluminium window aluminium window aluminium window LOCATION: Roof tank area LOCATION: Roof tank area LOCATION: Labs and Offices LOCATION: Labs LOCATION: Washrooms LOCATION: Washrooms LOCATION: Washrooms LOCATION: Washrooms NUMBER: 16 No. NUMBER: 2 No. NUMBER:39 No. NUMBER:47 No. NUMBER: 210No. NUMBER: 2 No. NUMBER: 7 No. NUMBER: 2 No. SILL HEIGHT: 300mm SILL HEIGHT: 300mm SILL HEIGHT: 900mm SILL HEIGHT: 1200mm SILL HEIGHT: 1500mm SILL HEIGHT: 1500mm SILL HEIGHT: 900mm SILL HEIGHT: 1500mm G F E D C 4 G FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD 18,040 4,500 5,000 4,000 4,540 F NAME: W-08 TYPE: curtain window LOCATION: Passage on 1 st Floor NUMBER: 1 No. SILL HEIGHT: 600mm FXD FXD E FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD D FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD C NAME: W-09 TYPE: curtain window 4 LOCATION: Passage on 1 st Floor NUMBER: 1 No. SILL HEIGHT: 600mm NOTES 1 All dimensions to be checked on site before commencement of any works and any discrepancies to be reported to the Architect Figured dimensions to be taken in preference to scaled ones. D.P.C to be provided under all walls on foundations. P.V. to be provided above all openings except on toilet doors. All plumbing and drainage works to meet local authority requirements Traps to basins to be deep anti-vac,type All iron mongeries to Architects approval. All walls less than 200mm thick to be reinforced with 16 gauge 25mm wide hoop iron at every alternating courses. All drainage pipes passing under the building and drive ways to be encased in 150mm concrete surrounding. Vent pipes to be covered with wire gauze at the head All paints and colours to Architect's approval. All samples of materials to Architects approval before fixing. Cold water storage tanks to be covered with mosquito proof wire gauze. All inspection chambers or manhole along driveways or common area to have heavy duty air-tight covers. No: Date REVISIONS , FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD FXD 4,270 4,270 4,270 4,270 4, NAME: W-10 TYPE: curtain window LOCATION: Passage on 1 st Floor NUMBER: 1 No Client: Project title: NHPLS PROPOSED MTRH LABORATORIES 1, Drawing title: FIXED FIXED FIXED FIXED WINDOW.DOOR SCHEDULES Drawing type: WORKING DRAWINGS ,000 D-01 D-02 D-03 D-04 Type: Single leaf flush door with a sidelight Type: Single leaf flush door Type: Single leaf flush door Type: Single leaf flush door Description: hardwood solid core door Description: hardwood solid core door Description: hardwood solid core door Description: hardwood solidcore door Location: ENTRY TO VARIOUS ROOMS No:44 Location: Washrooms entrance No: 15 Location: Washrooms entrance No: 09 Location: Disabled washrooms No: 6 Ironmongery: *1 1/2 pairs 100mm Heavy duty steel/brass hinges * 3-lever casement mortice lock and lever handles * Overhead door closer * 900x200 aluminium kicking plate * 1 no halfmoon door stop/zinc or chrome 45mm Ironmongery: *1 1/2 pairs 100mm Heavy duty steel/brass hinges * 3-lever casement mortice lock and lever handles * Overhead door closer * 900x200 aluminium kicking plate * 1 no halfmoon door stop/zinc or chrome 45mm Ironmongery: *1 1/2 pairs 100mm Heavy duty steel/brass hinges * 3-lever casement mortice lock and lever handles * Overhead door closer * 900x200 aluminium kicking plate * 1 no halfmoon door stop/zinc or chrome 45mm Ironmongery: *1 1/2 pairs 100mm Heavy duty steel/brass hinges * 3-lever casement mortice lock and lever handles * Overhead door closer * 1000x200 alminium kicking plate * 1 no halfmoon door stop/zinc or chrome 45mm Client signature: Scale: Initial date AUG Current date SEP Checked by: S.K. Drawn by: WINDOW.DOOR SCHEDULES 1:1 Job No: Sheet No:

485 ±0 M E D N O C B A Q 2,784 1,610 1,585 5,546 4, NOTES All dimensions to be checked on site before commencement of any works and any discrepancies to be reported to the Architect. Figured dimensions to be taken in preference to scaled ones. D.P.C to be provided under all walls on foundations. P.V. to be provided above all openings except on toilet doors. All plumbing and drainage works to meet local authority requirements Traps to basins to be deep anti-vac,type All iron mongeries to Architects approval. All walls less than 200mm thick to be reinforced with 16 gauge 25mm wide hoop iron at every alternating courses. All drainage pipes passing under the building and drive ways to be encased in 150mm concrete surrounding. Vent pipes to be covered with wire gauze at the head All paints and colours to Architect's approval. All samples of materials to Architects approval before fixing. Cold water storage tanks to be covered with mosquito proof wire gauze. All inspection chambers or manhole along driveways or common area to have heavy duty air-tight covers. M E D N O C B A Q No : Date REVISIONS LOO3 Building Section 1: ,000 3 Story +9,000 Client: +6,000 Project title: MTRH LABORATORIES Drawing title: ELEVATIONS 0 Ground Floor 0 Ground Fl Drawing type: WORKING DRAWINGS 6,300 1,697 5,253 5,253 5,254 5,249 6, LOO4 Building Section 1:100 Client signature: Scale: Checked by: S.K. Initial date AUG Current dat SEP Drawn by: Job No: Sheet No

486 ±0 A Q B C O D N M E 4,734 5,546 1,585 1,610 2,784 A Q B C O D N M E NOTES All dimensions to be checked on site before commencement of any works and any discrepancies to be reported to the Architect. Figured dimensions to be taken in preference to scaled ones. D.P.C to be provided under all walls on foundations. P.V. to be provided above all openings except on toilet doors. All plumbing and drainage works to meet local authority requirements Traps to basins to be deep anti-vac,type All iron mongeries to Architects approval. All walls less than 200mm thick to be reinforced with 16 gauge 25mm wide hoop iron at every alternating courses. All drainage pipes passing under the building and drive ways to be encased in 150mm concrete surrounding. Vent pipes to be covered with wire gauze at the head All paints and colours to Architect's approval. All samples of materials to Architects approval before fixing. Cold water storage tanks to be covered with mosquito proof wire gauze. All inspection chambers or manhole along driveways or common area to have heavy duty air-tight covers. No : Date REVISIONS LOO1 Building Section 1: Client: Project title: MTRH LABORATORIES Drawing title: ELEVATIONS Drawing type: 6,903 5,249 5,254 5,253 5,253 1,697 6,300 WORKING DRAWINGS LOO2 Building Section 1:100 Client signature: Scale: Initial date AUG Current dat SEP Checked by: S.K. Drawn by: Job No: Sheet No

487 NOTES 1 2 All dimensions to be checked on site before commencement of any works and any discrepancies to be reported to the Architect. Figured dimensions to be taken in preference to scaled ones. LOO4 H I G LOO D.P.C to be provided under all walls on foundations. P.V. to be provided above all openings except on toilet doors. All plumbing and drainage works to meet local authority requirements Traps to basins to be deep anti-vac,type All iron mongeries to Architects approval. F G K 43,745 L All walls less than 200mm thick to be reinforced with 16 gauge 25mm wide hoop iron at every alternating courses. All drainage pipes passing under the building and drive ways to be encased in 150mm concrete surrounding. Vent pipes to be covered with wire gauze at the head All paints and colours to Architect's approval. All samples of materials to Architects approval before fixing Cold water storage tanks to be covered with mosquito proof wire gauze. All inspection chambers or manhole along driveways or common area to have heavy duty air-tight covers. No : Date REVISIONS Void Water tanks Water tanks Water tanks I Water tanks 3 H 4 G E E M M E Fire G K F Fire E escape 10 Void escape LO O5 staircase F roofing over the 20 x 150 = 3,000 Ramp G 20 x 150 = 3,000 st aircase LOO5 Water tanks Water tanks D D F N L N LOO6 LOO6 Water tanks 5 6 G Water tanks Water tanks Water tanks Water tanks O O C C Client: B B Project title: 21,308 MTRH LABORATORIES Drawing title: A A Q Q 8,304 7,700 Drawing type: ROOF PLAN WORKING DRAWINGS LOO2 LOO2 Client signature: 2. Story 1:100 Scale: Initial date AUG Current dat SEP Checked by: S.K. Drawn by: Job No: Sheet No